Quattro Pro 9 - City of Kinston

Transcription

Quattro Pro 9
Copyright ©1999 COREL CORPORATION and COREL CORPORATION LIMITED. All rights reserved.
For more complete copyright information please refer to the About section in the Help menu of the software.
Table of contents
Chapter 1
Welcome to Quattro Pro 9 .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
8
14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Displaying, arranging, resizing, and hiding windows
.
Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components .
Customizing menus . . . . . . . .
Customizing keyboards . . . . . . .
Customizing toolbars and dialog boxes . . . .
Saving your workspace . . . . . . .
Saving and closing notebooks . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19
23
24
31
34
39
45
48
49
51
59
60
65
69
71
74
76
77
Using Quattro Pro documentation
What’s new in Quattro Pro 9? .
Where did it go? . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 2
Getting started
Chapter 3
Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro
.
Opening and saving Microsoft Excel workbooks . . . .
Working with Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
83
84
86
Chapter 4
Working with project templates
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
89
90
92
95
. . . . .
Working with Quattro Pro Experts . .
Working with toolbars. . . . .
Working with the Application Bar . .
Navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks
Selecting cells, rows, and columns . .
Adding and deleting cells, rows, and columns
Adding, deleting, and moving spreadsheets
Naming spreadsheets . . . . .
Specifying Quattro Pro settings . . .
Changing your view of the notebook . .
.
Creating projects using templates . .
Working with project template categories .
Using the PerfectExpert panel . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Table of contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
i
Chapter 5
Creating a spreadsheet
.
Creating and opening a notebook
Working with data . . .
.
.
.
. .
. .
. .
Working with labels and special characters . .
Working with numbers . . . . .
Working with dates and times . . . .
Automatically entering data
. . . .
Deleting values and labels . . . . .
Restricting and annotating cell data . .
Creating simple equations . . . . .
Using math tools to calculate rows and columns
Using QuickSum and Calc-As-You-Go . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
97
97
99
99
103
104
107
114
114
116
118
121
Chapter 6
Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions
Working with formulas . . . . . .
Working with the Formula Composer . . .
Moving and copying formulas and referenced cells.
Working with spreadsheet functions. . . .
Working with arrays . . . . . . .
Tracing and editing errors in formulas and functions
Setting cell addresses. . . . . . .
Naming cells . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
123
124
131
136
139
144
147
150
153
Chapter 7
Editing and formatting a spreadsheet
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
159
159
166
169
174
183
187
191
193
195
207
211
ii
.
Editing spreadsheet data . . . . . .
Editing grouped data. . . . . . .
Copying and moving data . . . . . .
Formatting cells and applying styles . . .
Working with fills, patterns, and borders . .
Aligning data . . . . . . . .
Working with numeric formats . . . . .
Working with date, time, and currency formats .
Working with custom formats . . . . .
Sizing rows and columns . . . . . .
Working with page breaks. . . . . .
Table of contents
Creating headers, footers, and margins .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
213
Chapter 8
Organizing and manipulating data
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
217
217
221
224
227
Chapter 9
Analyzing data
. . . . . . . . .
Using statistical analysis tools . . . . . . .
Using frequency distribution tables . . . . . .
Using regression analysis . . . . . . . .
Using matrix operations . . . . . . . .
Using the Scenario tool . . . . . . . .
Using What-If tables . . . . . . . . .
Using goal seeking with the Solve For tool . . . .
Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
235
235
240
242
244
245
252
254
254
Sorting data . .
Filtering data . .
Consolidating data .
Working with outlines
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 10 Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
259
261
264
265
268
272
276
Chapter 11 Using databases .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
281
282
287
292
295
297
302
Chapter 12 Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
305
306
308
Creating Cross Tab Reports . . . . .
Creating Cross Tab Reports using OLAP data sources
Formatting Cross Tab Reports . . . . .
Formatting Cross Tab Report fields . . . .
Formatting OLAP Cross Tab Reports and report fields
Manipulating Cross Tab Reports . . . .
. . . .
Creating notebook databases . . .
Preparing notebook database search queries
Querying notebook databases . . .
Querying external databases . . .
Importing data from external databases .
Using Database Desktop . . . .
Choosing a charting tool .
Selecting chart data . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Table of contents
iii
Working with line and area charts . . .
Working with bar charts . . . . .
Working with pie, doughnut, and column charts
Working with specialty charts . . . .
Working with XY charts . . . . .
Working with High-Low charts . . . .
Working with radar charts . . . . .
Working with variance charts . . . .
Working with surface charts . . . .
Working with combination charts
. . .
Working with bullet charts . . . .
Working with analytical charts. . . .
Working with Aggregate charts . . . .
Working with Moving Average charts . . .
Working with Linear Fit charts . . . .
Working with Exponential Fit charts . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Viewing relationships and creating tables from analytical charts .
Working with 3-D charts . . . . . . . .
Changing the chart type . . . . . . . .
Editing charts . . . . . . . . . .
Editing x and y axes . . . . . . . . .
Changing x-axis properties . . . . . . . .
Changing y-axis properties . . . . . . . .
Customizing legends and titles . . . . . . .
Adding graphics to charts . . . . . . . .
Changing colors and fill of chart objects . . . . .
Managing charts . . . . . . . . .
Sharing Quattro Pro charts . . . . . . .
Chapter 13 Adding graphics to spreadsheets
Creating graphics . . . .
Managing and sharing graphics .
Working with Clipart. . . .
Designing borders, lines, and shapes
Making text into graphics. . .
iv
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Table of contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
312
317
322
327
328
330
334
336
338
340
341
345
345
348
349
351
353
356
359
362
365
366
371
375
379
382
384
386
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
393
393
399
403
404
409
. . .
Creating text box graphics . . .
Editing and customizing graphics .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
409
410
414
. . . .
Setting up map data . . . . . . . .
Creating, sizing, and moving maps . . . . .
Representing data using colors, patterns, and overlays .
Displaying map data by color or pattern . . . .
Displaying region and static overlays on maps . . .
Working with city and location overlays . . . .
Moving and resizing legends, titles, and objects . .
Editing maps . . . . . . . . .
Editing map legends . . . . . . . .
Saving and copying maps . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
421
422
424
427
428
429
431
435
437
442
446
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
449
449
453
454
458
461
467
469
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
471
471
472
473
482
487
.
.
Working with Quattro Pro macros
.
Working with PerfectScript . .
.
Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
489
490
492
501
504
Creating TextArt
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 14 Adding maps to spreadsheets
Chapter 15 Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro
.
Creating slide shows . . . . . . .
Previewing slide shows and changing the view .
Using master slides . . . . . . .
Using slide transitions . . . . . .
Editing and formatting slides . . . . .
Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps .
Playing slide shows . . . . . . .
Chapter 16 Printing
. . . .
Setting up a printer . .
Previewing a print job .
Customizing print settings.
Printing selected print areas
Printing to a file . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
Choosing a macro creation tool
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 17 Using macros
Table of contents
v
Working in Developer mode .
Creating macro applications .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Recording macros using absolute and relative cell addresses .
Attaching macros to other notebooks . . . . .
Attaching macros to buttons . . . . . .
Attaching macros to toolbars . . . . . .
Playing macros . . . . . . . . .
Playing Quattro Pro macros . . . . . .
Playing PerfectScript macros . . . . . .
Playing keystroke macros . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Playing macros attached to buttons, notebooks, and startup macros .
Debugging macros . . . . . . . . .
Debugging Quattro Pro macros . . . . . . .
Debugging PerfectScript macros . . . . . . .
Customizing application settings using macros . . .
Chapter 18 Using OLE automation with OLE objects
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
519
521
521
523
524
528
529
529
530
531
531
534
534
539
542
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
545
546
554
. .
Working with controls on the spreadsheet . . .
Customizing and managing controls on the spreadsheet
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
571
572
575
Chapter 20 Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
579
580
585
599
599
612
617
617
619
626
630
633
637
Using Quattro Pro with Lotus Notes
Using OLE automation . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 19 Creating controls on the spreadsheet
Developing a dialog box . .
Adding dialog controls . .
Assigning control properties .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
Assigning properties to individual controls . . . .
Assigning other properties . . . . . . .
Attaching actions to dialog controls. . . . .
Connecting controls . . . . . . . .
Linking controls
. . . . . . . .
Using macros to display the dialog box on a spreadsheet
Working with child controls . . . . . .
Creating Help and tips for controls . . . . .
Editing dialog boxes . . . . . . . .
vi
.
.
.
Table of contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Editing and moving dialog controls .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
637
641
. . .
File-handling options. . . . . .
Opening, saving, and customizing file formats
Importing, inserting, and combining files .
Importing text files . . . . . .
Inserting a file into a notebook . . . .
Combining files using Paste Special . . .
Linking and embedding objects . . .
Importing and exporting graphic formats .
Creating notebook links . . . . .
Using Version Control. . . . . .
Sending a notebook by email . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
651
652
653
661
661
668
669
672
680
682
691
695
Chapter 22 Using Workgroups and password protection
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
697
697
701
702
703
Chapter 23 Working with the Internet
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
709
709
715
718
724
Editing and managing dialog boxes
.
.
Chapter 21 Managing files and data .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Publishing spreadsheet data in HTML
Using XML with Quattro Pro . .
Working with Web queries . .
Working with Web links . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using Workgroups .
.
Comparing notebooks
.
Reviewing notebooks . .
Using password protection
.
.
.
.
Table of contents
vii
WELCOME TO QUATTRO PRO 9
1
Quattro Pro lets you create professional spreadsheet-based documents to
help you manage data. It provides all the tools you need to produce tables,
financial forms, lists, databases, charts, reports, or any other type of
data-oriented document. With Quattro Pro, you can create a notebook that
contains a single spreadsheet or an entire project, complete with
spreadsheets, reports, charts, and a slide show presentation. A notebook is
saved as a single file that you can publish to paper, electronic media, and the
World Wide Web.
Quattro Pro does not limit you to a spreadsheet presentation. You can
present your spreadsheet data in charts, or present only relevant information
in dynamic Cross Tab Reports, which continually reflect the current state of
the data they summarize. Once you enter data, you can edit the format and
structure of your notebooks at any time.
About Corel Corporation
Corel Corporation is recognized internationally as an award-winning
developer and marketer of productivity applications, graphics, and Internet
software. We pride ourselves in delivering high-quality products by actively
seeking your input. We use this feedback and respond quickly to you, the
users of Corel products worldwide.
Corel ships its products through a network of more than 160 distributors in
70 countries worldwide. Corel is traded on the Toronto Stock Exchange
(symbol: COS) and the NASDAQ National Market System (symbol: COSFF).
Welcome to Quattro Pro 9
1
For more information about Corel and its products, browse to our World Wide
Web site at www.corel.com.
Using Quattro Pro documentation
Quattro Pro includes online and paper documentation to help you learn and
use the application efficiently.
The Quattro Pro 9 documentation set
Online Help
Online Help lets you quickly retrieve all the information you need. Help
appears in a separate window on your screen. For quick access, you can
keep the Help window displayed on top of the application window.
Context-sensitive Help
Context-sensitive Help displays information relevant to the task you are
currently performing. Context-sensitive Help provides help for menu
commands, toolbar buttons, dialog boxes, and dialog box controls. You
access context-sensitive Help by clicking the What’s This? button, then
clicking the item you want information about.
QuickTips
The QuickTips feature provides information about menu items and
toolbar buttons. QuickTips are displayed in a balloon when you position
the cursor over a menu item or toolbar button.
User Guide
If you use Quattro Pro as part of WordPerfect Office 2000, you can refer
to the Quattro Pro section of the WordPerfect Office 2000 User Guide for
help.
Corel Reference Center
If you use Quattro Pro as part of WordPerfect Office 2000, you can find
additional help in the Quattro Pro book in the Corel Reference Center.
We want your feedback
If you have any comments or suggestions about Quattro Pro documentation,
you can email them to [email protected] or mail them to the
address listed below. Unfortunately, we won’t be able to respond to your
messages individually.
Quattro Pro Product Manager
Corel Corporation
1600 Carling Avenue
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
K1Z 8R7
Fax: (613) 728-9790
Documentation conventions
Before you start using Quattro Pro, it’s important to understand the
conventions used in the documentation.
2
Quattro Pro 9: Chapter 1
Mouse conventions
The following are conventions related to using the mouse:
When you see this...
Do this...
Click File, New
Click the File menu with the mouse, and click New in the menu
Click Insert, Graphics, Clipart
Click the Insert menu, click Graphics, and click Clipart in the submenu
that appears
Enable a check box
Click the check box to place a check mark or an “X” inside the box
Disable a check box
Click the check box to remove the check mark or “X”
Select text
Click and drag to highlight text
Click an object
Click anywhere on an object
Click a slide
Click anywhere on a slide
Right-click, and click Paste
Click the right mouse button, and click Paste in the submenu that
appears
Keyboard conventions
The following are conventions related to keyboard actions:
When you see this...
Do this...
Press ENTER
Press the Enter key
Press CTRL + SHIFT
Press the Control key and the Shift key at the same time
Using online Help
You can access online Help in four ways:
use the Contents page to select a topic.
use the Index page to search for a topic.
use the Find page to search for specific words and phrases in Help topics.
ask the PerfectExpert to search for topics based on a question you enter
in your own words.
use the Corel Knowledge Base to search for information on the Corel
home page.
The Showcase Quattro Pro page, located in Contents, illustrates many tasks
you can do. Click in the illustrations for specific help about a task.
3
To access Help topics
1 Click Help, Help Topics.
2 Click one of the following tabs:
Contents — to browse through topics by category
Index — to see a list of index entries. Type the first few letters of the
subject about which you want information
Find — to search for a specific word or phrase in the online Help. All
topics containing the word you type are listed. Type more than one
word to narrow the search
Ask The PerfectExpert — to search for help in your own words
Corel Knowledge Base—to search for information on the Corel home
page on the Internet
To keep the Help window on top of the application you’re working on,
open a Help topic, then click Options, Keep Help On Top, On Top.
Accessing context-sensitive Help
You can access context-sensitive Help from the menus, dialog boxes, and
toolbars in Quattro Pro.
The most common ways to access context-sensitive Help are as follows:
To get help on...
Do this...
Menus and toolbar buttons
Position your cursor over the menu item or toolbar button for QuickTip
information.
Dialog boxes
Click the Help button in the dialog box.
Press F1.
Dialog box controls
Click the What’s This? button in a dialog box, and click the dialog control
for which you want help.
Right-click the control, and click What’s This?
Right-click the control.
Printing Help topics
You can print specific online Help topics or entire sections of online Help.
4
To...
Do this...
Print an entire section
On the Contents page, choose the section to print, and click the Print
button in the Help dialog box.
Print a selected topic
Click the Print button at the top of the Help window.
Right-click the window and click Print Topic.
Using the Corel Reference Center
The Corel Reference Center contains online manuals for WordPerfect Office
2000 in Adobe Acrobat Portable Digital File (.PDF) format. You can search
the manuals to quickly find the information you need.
To access the Corel Reference Center from Quattro Pro
1 Click Help, Help Topics.
2 Click the Contents tab.
3 Double-click Reference Information.
4 Double-click View Manuals.
5 Double-click Go to the Reference Center.
To access the Corel Reference Center from Windows
1 Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2 Click Programs, WordPerfect Office 2000, Setup & Notes, Corel
Reference Center.
You can find the Corel Reference Center (refcntr.exe) in the folder
COREL\SHARED\REFCNTR on the WordPerfect Office 2000 CD-ROM.
If you did not install the Corel Reference Center when you installed
WordPerfect Office 2000, you can do so by performing a custom install.
Asking the PerfectExpert
Quattro Pro 9 comes with several built-in experts that are ready to help you
with any task. The PerfectExpert is a Help panel that appears on your
desktop and includes the best features of QuickTasks, templates, and
Coaches, combined with information from online Help and the power of a
natural language interface.
5
Ask the PerfectExpert is another expert Help tool. Using this tool, you can
type questions about tasks you want to perform and Ask the PerfectExpert
searches through all the Help files included in WordPerfect Office 2000,
listing topics that best match your question.
To use Ask the PerfectExpert
1 Click Help, Ask the PerfectExpert.
2 Type your question.
3 Click the topic that matches your task, then click Display.
Viewing program and system information
Quattro Pro provides easy access to information about the program, license
information, and your system.
Program information consists of the application name, version number, serial
number, and user name. This information doesn’t change. You’ll find it
particularly useful if you ever need help from Corel Technical Support
Services.
System information consists of details about any of the following categories:
system, display, printing, Corel .EXE and .DLL files, and system .DLL files.
For example, you can see how much memory you have on the drive to which
you want to save a file. You can save any system information in a text file
called SYSINFO.TXT.
To view product and license information
1 Click Help, About Quattro Pro.
2 Click one of the following buttons:
Copyright
License
To edit the serial number and PIN
2 Click the Edit Serial/PIN button.
3 Type the serial number in the Serial Number box.
4 Type the personal identification number in the PIN box.
To view program and system information
6
The About Quattro Pro dialog box displays the version number and
registration information for your software.
2 Click the System Info button to view system information.
3 Choose a category from the Choose A Category list box.
Click the Save button to store system information for printing. System
information is saved as SYSINFO.TXT. A message box tells you where the
file is saved.
Visiting the Corel Web Site
The Corel Web Site provides helpful information about Quattro Pro on the
World Wide Web. You can use the Corel Web site to get information about
projects and templates, Web queries, and macros. You can also get
information about technical support, helpful tips and tricks, learning and
certification, and service bureaus.
If you have a browser and a connection to the Internet through a service
provider or your network, you can go to the Quattro Pro product index,
which contains links to:
Frequently Asked Questions and their answers
Technical Information Documents, support newsgroups, and help by email
Information about Corel products
Downloadable upgrades and replacement software
To go to the Corel Web Site
Click Help, Corel Web Site.
To get more information about Quattro Pro from the Corel Web
site
Click...
To get information about...
File, New From Project
Projects and templates
Tools, Macros Online
Macros
Tools, Internet, Web Queries Online
Web queries
7
To get general information from the Corel Web site
Click Help, Corel On The Web...
To get information about...
Technical Support
Technical support
Tips And Tricks
Tips and Tricks
Learning And Certification
Learning and Certification
Approved Service Bureaus
Service bureaus
What’s new in Quattro Pro 9?
Quattro Pro 9 has new and enhanced features to help you create and present
your spreadsheet information, including increased compatibility with other
spreadsheet applications and increased summarization and report
capabilities. Enhancements and new features have been added to the
following list of features:
notebook features
file features
desktop customization and navigation features
formula and spreadsheet function features
formatting features
Internet capabilities
database, analysis and summarization features
macro features
More notebook features
Quattro Pro now offers larger notebooks and has added workgroup
functionality. For information about how to use workgroups, see “Using
Workgroups” on page 697.
Larger notebooks
The new file format for version 9 increases notebook capacity to
approximately 1,000,000 rows x 18,000 columns x 18,000 sheets. The new
format gives Quattro Pro greater capacity for converting Microsoft Excel
notebooks without truncating data.
8
Workgroups feature
Quattro Pro lets you distribute a notebook to users in a workgroup so that
they can read and edit a project. Multiple users can open and edit the same
notebook simultaneously. Changes by others are added to a cell change
history when the notebook is saved. Sharing a notebook lets you perform
tasks much more quickly. The notebook review process, similar to
WordPerfect’s document review feature, lets you review individual changes
and accept or reject them as required.
Notebook comparing allows you to compare different notebooks to examine
trends. For example, you could compare a notebook that records the sales of
a particular wine during 1988 with a notebook recording sales for 1998.
More file features
Quattro Pro 9 has increased file compatibility with Microsoft Excel, allowing
users to open and edit Microsoft Excel documents in Quattro Pro. Quattro
Pro has adopted a new file format, but remains compatible with previous
versions of Quattro Pro. For more information about opening files in other
file formats, see “Opening, saving, and customizing file formats” on page
653.
Smaller file sizes
A new process for saving files creates smaller files, reducing the amount of
disk space needed for storage. Improvements with the new file format allows
version 9 to decrease the saved file size. Large amounts of data can be saved
while using less disk space.
User defined size
You can specify the size of the spreadsheet to make the end of the scroll bars
more useful and ensure data is not written outside of the desired range. For
more information, see “Changing the size of your notebook” on page 660.
Native Microsoft Excel formats
The version 9 file format contains all of the object records found in Microsoft
Excel 97, increasing file compatibility with Microsoft Excel. Information that
cannot be used in Quattro Pro 9 can be stored in the file format and later
converted back to Microsoft Excel. For more information, see “Moving
between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro” on page 83.
9
More desktop customization and navigation features
Quattro Pro has increased its customization capabilities, allowing you to
customize your desktop to best suit the tasks you are performing. Quattro
Pro has also increased the navigation features to make creating and
navigating spreadsheet data easier. For more information about customizing
your desktop and navigating, see “Getting started” on page 19.
Customize toolbars, menus and shortcut keys
Underlying changes to the application give you the ability to customize the
menu structure and shortcut keys in addition to the toolbars.
Compatibility settings
The compatibility settings for version 9 have been expanded and reorganized
in their own settings panel. To ensure file compatibility with Microsoft Excel
97, Lotus 1-2-3, and previous versions of Quattro Pro, presets for notebook
size and other options have been added. In addition, you can customize the
settings for individual use. For more information, see “Using compatibility
settings” on page 55.
Page Breaks View
A new view lets you view data in a draft mode that shows the location of page
breaks. This feature is consistent with the page break preview option found
in Microsoft Excel 97. New view manual options let you view comments and
formulas in place. In addition, comment boxes can be moved by clicking and
dragging the comment to a new location. Comments and formulas can be
printed in place. For more information, see “Changing your view of the
notebook” on page 59.
Corel RealTime Preview
With Corel RealTime Preview, you can preview changes to your cell data’s
font type, size, color, and background color while you scroll through these
options. For information about Corel RealTime Preview, see “Zooming data
and hiding and displaying screen components” on page 65.
Enhanced Go To
To help you navigate through large amounts of data, the Go To dialog has
been revised to provide additional options for finding data. You can find a cell
or range of cells, comments, formulas, values, labels, comments, named cells,
and many additional options. For more information, see “Using Go To” on
page 37.
10
Browse By
You can quickly navigate to different parts of the document using a browsing
mechanism similar to WordPerfect. For more information, see “Using
Browse By” on page 38.
More formula and spreadsheet function features
Quattro Pro has added formula and function calculation features to make
calculating data easier. For more information about how to calculate formulas
and spreadsheet functions, see “Working with formulas and spreadsheet
functions” on page 123.
Natural language processing and Auto-Total
Inserting a total label above or next to tabular data will insert totals
automatically for the rows or columns. Natural language processing provides
an easier method to create formulas based on data labels and provides
additional compatibility with similar features found in Microsoft Excel 97.
QuickFunctions
Frequently used functions have been added to the toolbar for easy access.
This feature enhances the Quick Total toolbar button.
Formula markers
Cells containing formulas are marked with a small blue triangle in the
lower-left corner of the cell so you can see at a glance which cells contain
formulas. Placing the mouse over a formula cell displays a QuickTip showing
the formula.
Function Tip-As-You-Type feature
Functions used in creating formulas can be difficult to use when several
values need to be passed to the function. Seldom used or complex functions
often require you to look up the function in online Help to find the values to
provide to the function and the proper order in which to specify them. The
Function Tip-As-You-Type feature provides a QuickTip for each value
requested by the function. Using QuickTips reduces the amount of time
spent setting up formulas.
More formatting features
Quattro Pro offers more conditional formatting, more font and cell attributes,
as well as more options for changing borders, patterns, and color fills. For
11
more information about formatting your data, see “Editing and formatting a
spreadsheet” on page 159.
Enhanced Cut, Copy, and Paste, and additional borders and fills
Users can now use Paste Special to paste specific attributes of a selection,
such as the cell height, and apply numeric operations to the selection, such
as multiply the selection by four. Additional borders and fills provide file
compatibility with Microsoft Excel 97.
Custom numeric formatting
The Custom Numeric Formatting dialog has been modified to provide
additional options for custom numeric formats. These options include font
attributes, cell attributes, conditional formatting, and many others.
Persistent SpeedFormat
Persistent SpeedFormat, an enhanced SpeedFormat feature, lets you
automatically apply all of the formatting you applied to a spreadsheet to any
rows or columns that you add.
Auto row height
Double-clicking the row indicator resizes the row to its default height. This
feature is similar to auto column resizing.
Euro character and WordPerfect characters
Quattro Pro has added the Euro currency symbol to replace the European
currency formats. The WordPerfect characters dialog has been added to
version 9 to allow easier insertion of WordPerfect characters into a cell.
QuickColumns
QuickColumns has been enhanced to provide more intuitive parsing of
delimited files. Interface design gives a better notebook look and feel.
Additional options to provide data breaks and custom delimiter settings have
been added.
More Internet capabilities
Quattro Pro has expanded its Internet publishing capabilities to include both
HTML and XML. Quattro Pro has also included Web queries and QuickLinks
to make linking and importing Internet data easier. For more information
about electronic publishing, see “Working with the Internet” on page 709.
12
XML/HTML features
The new Publish to HTML/XML Expert lets you publish your notebook as
an HTML document for use on the Internet. This Expert lets you add
headers, titles, and frames to the files you want to publish. You can also
convert charts to graphics, preserve existing XML fields, and apply new
XML tags to the contents of your notebook. The HTML Import/Export
feature retains both Web and Quattro Pro formatting.
Web queries
With the Web Query tool, you can access the World Wide Web from your
spreadsheet. You can use this feature to run Web queries and import data
from an Internet or intranet location. Using the Web Query tool, you can link
your spreadsheet to a Web site and instruct Quattro Pro to update the link at
specific intervals.
QuickLinks
Quattro Pro recognizes common Internet link formats (www, mailto, ftp)
when you type them into a cell, and automatically converts them to links.
Drag and drop from Netscape browsers
Users can drag and drop Internet content from a Netscape browser into
Quattro Pro 9 as a link. You can specify the links be updated “on open” or at
specific intervals.
More database, analysis and summarization features
Quattro Pro has added Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) technology and
Cross Tab Reports to its feature set. These new features provide more
database access, analysis, and summarization capabilities. For more
information about using Cross Tab reports and OLAP technology, see
“Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports” on page 259.
OLAP-compliant databases
You can create simple databases in Quattro Pro or access external databases
located on your computer or elsewhere on the network. With OLAP
technology, you can view, sort, and analyze data created in OLAP-compliant
databases such as Paradox or Microsoft Access.
Cross Tab Reports feature
Using the Dynamic Cross Tab Reports feature, you can summarize large
amounts of data as a cross-tabulated table called a Cross Tab Report. This
13
feature lets you retabulate dynamic reports. This interactive report setup
lets you drill down or navigate through data details in successive layers,
giving you a multidimensional view of the summarized data.
OLAP technology
Quattro Pro now lets you use OLAP technology to create reports that
statically or dynamically display changes to data in your spreadsheets and
databases. A static report provides a snapshot of data at a specific point in
time. A dynamic report is linked to source data in the spreadsheets and
databases.
More macro features
Enhanced macro features increase the ease with which you can create
macros in your notebooks. For more information about creating macros, see
“Using macros” on page 489.
For more information about the macro creation tools available, see “Choosing
a macro creation tool” on page 490.
Forms
The forms feature lets you create custom forms by adding controls to the
notebook spreadsheet previously found only in the Dialog designer. For more
information about using forms, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form
controls” on page 579.
Form controls
This feature was in earlier versions of Quattro Pro and has been reintroduced
for version 9. The Forms dialog provides easy methods for adding, deleting,
viewing, and editing records in Quattro Pro.
Where did it go?
Quattro Pro has a new look. Menus are simplified and commands regrouped.
Some terms have been replaced with more understandable terms.
To simplify menus, some Quattro Pro commands have been moved to new
menus in this version.
Keep in mind that menus change depending on the active window. For
example, when you insert a chart, the menus change to reflect the commands
available when working in a chart. The following list identifies the menus
that changed from version 8. Choose a menu to view its changes.
File menu
14
Edit menu
View menu
Insert menu
Tools menu
Help menu
File menu changes
Substantial changes have been made to the File menu. For example, you can
now publish files to XML/HTML from the File menu. All the menu options
listed below are found in the File menu. The File, Send To options are
dependent on the software you have installed on your computer. For
information about sending files to other users, see “Sending a notebook by
email” on page 695. For more information about publishing files to HTML,
see “Working with the Internet” on page 709.
Quattro Pro 8
Quattro Pro 9
(new in 9)
File, New from Project
File, Version Control, Update Current
File, Version Control, Save Current
File, Send To, Envoy
(removed and replaced by HTML feature)
File, Send To, Corel Barista
(removed and replaced by XML/HTML feature)
(new in 9)
File, Publish to Internet
Edit menu changes
Many pasting and embedding options have been added to the Edit menu to
make importing data easier. All the menu options listed below are found in
the Edit menu. For more information about importing and pasting data, see
“Managing files and data” on page 651.
Quattro Pro 8
Quattro Pro 9
(new in 9)
Edit, Redo
Edit, Paste Special
Edit, Paste Special (more options available)
(new in 9)
Edit, Object
Edit, Go To
Edit, Go To (more options available)
(new in 9)
Edit, Find Page Break
15
View menu changes
Many options have been added to the View menu to increase the accessibility
of certain features. You can now display comments and formulas on the
spreadsheet. For more information about changing your view of the
notebook, see “Changing your view of the notebook” on page 59.
All the menu options listed below are found in the View menu list.
Quattro Pro 8
Quattro Pro 9
(new in 9)
View, Page Breaks
(new in 9)
View, Property Bar
(new in 9)
View, Application Bar
(new in 9)
View, Comments
(new in 9)
View, Formulas
Insert menu changes
The Insert menu has new options available for additional form controls. For
more information on using form controls, see “Creating custom dialog boxes
and form controls” on page 579.
16
Quattro Pro 8
Quattro Pro 9
(new in 9)
Insert, Symbol
Insert, Polyline
Insert, Polyline/Polygon
Insert, Polygon
Insert, Polyline/Polygon
Insert, Freehand Polyline
(removed)
Insert, Freehand Polygon
(removed)
Insert, QuickButton
Insert, Form Control, Button
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Button Check Box
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Radio Button
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Group Box
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, List Box
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Combo Box
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Label
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Scroll Bar
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Spin Control
(new in 9)
Insert, Form Control, Edit Box
(new in 9)
Insert, XML Tag
(new in 9)
Insert, Delete All
Insert, Hyperlink
(moved to Tools, HyperLink)
Tools menu changes
The Cross Tabs feature has been expanded on the Tools menu. The new
WorkGroup feature is also available from this menu. For information on
creating Cross Tab Reports, see “Summarizing data using Cross Tab
Reports” on page 259. For information about managing workgroups, see
“Using Workgroups” on page 697.
Quattro Pro 8
Quattro Pro 9
(new in 9)
Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor
(new in 9)
Tools, Macro, Edit
Tools, Data tools, Cross Tabs
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Report
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Options
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Field Options
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Hide
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Show
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Refresh
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Copy Static
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Expand
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Remove
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Drill Down
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Rollup
Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Remove Element
Tools, Data Tools, Combine Files
(Functionality incorporated into Edit, Paste Special)
Tools, Data Tools, Extract to File
(Functionality incorporated into Edit, Cut and Edit, Paste)
(new in 9)
Tools, WorkGroup, Review Notebook
(new in 9)
Tools, WorkGroup, Compare Notebook
(new in 9)
Tools, WorkGroup, Sharing
17
(new in 9)
Tools, WorkGroup, Users
(new in 9)
Tools, Internet, Run Web Query
(new in 9)
Tools, Internet, Create Web Query
(new in 9)
Tools, Internet, Edit Web Link
(new in 9)
Tools, Internet, Publish to HTML
(new in 9)
Tools, Customize
Help menu changes
The Help menu has one new addition, Microsoft Excel Help. This menu
option opens the Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro online
Help.
18
Quattro Pro 8
Quattro Pro 9
(new in 9)
Microsoft Excel Help
GETTING STARTED
2
Before beginning your project, you should become familiar with the Quattro
Pro concepts and desktop components that will help you create
spreadsheet-based documents.
The basics
Toolbars give you quick access to the tools you need to create a spreadsheet.
On the spreadsheet itself, you can move through cells, select cells, columns,
and rows, add and delete items, and more.
Once you have finished working with Quattro Pro, you can save and close the
application.
Choosing how your workspace looks
Throughout the creation of a notebook, you can apply settings to Quattro Pro
or to any object you’re working with. Application settings control how
Quattro Pro works; property settings control how Quattro Pro looks. You can
use compatibility settings to have Quattro Pro adopt particular characteristics
from another application. For example, Quattro Pro can display a Microsoft
Excel menu. International settings let you customize language, punctuation,
and date and time formats.
You can decide how your workspace looks. You can lock titles, split windows,
hide screen elements, and determine the size of both your spreadsheet and
notebook.
Getting started
19
Customizing command tools
Toolbars, menus, keyboards, and even dialog boxes can be customized to suit
your needs.
Working in a notebook
Notebooks, spreadsheets, and their associated elements are the core of the
Quattro Pro application.
Notebooks provide a way to organize many spreadsheets in the same file.
Each Quattro Pro spreadsheet consists of approximately 1,000,000 rows and
18,000 columns. There are 18,000 spreadsheets in a notebook. Because a
notebook is so large, you can convert files from applications like Microsoft
Excel without truncating data.
Each spreadsheet is a grid made up of columns and rows that form cells. You
can move through spreadsheets in a notebook by clicking the tab located at
the bottom of each spreadsheet. If the tab is not in view, use the tab scroll
buttons.
Individual
spreadsheets are
denoted by a tab at
the bottom of the
spreadsheet.
The last tab is the Objects sheet; it contains icons rather than grid lines. The
icons can be charts, slide shows, or dialog boxes you have created.
Using notebooks efficiently
To work more efficiently
gather logically related data in the same notebook and save it as one
file
format only the part of the notebook containing data
break up large spreadsheets into separate spreadsheets
place similarly formatted spreadsheets together in the same notebook
For example, say you have quarterly figures on four separate spreadsheets.
You could group these at the beginning of the notebook, then rename the tabs
at the bottom of the spreadsheet Qtr 1, Qtr 2, etc., You could then refer to
these sheets when you create other sheets, such as a cost analysis,
merchandise plan, or budget. Saving this information under one notebook
name ensures nothing gets lost. In addition, if the first four quarterly
spreadsheets are the same size, you could format them at the same time.
20
Getting around spreadsheets
Sometimes it is difficult to see the whole picture in a spreadsheet. Unlike a
word processor, which assumes the size of a printed page, a spreadsheet is
vast and can encompass many printed pages. To help you get around, Quattro
Pro offers controls and techniques that can help you see the whole picture
and keep you from getting lost.
Components of a notebook
This following information describes the concepts you need to become
familiar with to create Quattro Pro spreadsheets.
Spreadsheets
A spreadsheet is an electronic ledger. It contains columns and rows in which
you enter, arrange, calculate, and analyze data. In a spreadsheet, you can
arrange and categorize data, perform simple math operations, and apply
complex formulas. Once you enter your data in a spreadsheet, you can create
a chart, add maps and graphics, or produce a report. The spreadsheet you see
when you open Quattro Pro is one of thousands available in each notebook.
Objects sheet
The last sheet of every notebook is the Objects sheet. The Objects sheet
displays an icon for every chart and slide show in the notebook. This sheet
also displays icons for custom dialog boxes you build. You can copy, rename,
and print items in the Objects sheet. The Objects sheet Property Bar has
buttons for creating and playing slide shows and for building custom dialog
boxes.
Project templates
Project templates let you create a new notebook based on a predesigned
project. Many of the Quattro Pro project templates provide a basic format and
structure for common spreadsheets and data entry forms. You can also create
your own project templates.
Values
A value is a number, date, formula, or the result of a formula. Quattro Pro
automatically determines whether data is a value or a label. As you type your
data in a cell, the READY indicator on the Application Bar changes to LABEL
or VALUE, depending on the type of data you enter.
Getting started
21
Labels
Labels contain alphanumeric data, such as titles, phone numbers, or
addresses. Quattro Pro interprets and formats labels differently than it does
values. Values are calculable while labels are not.
Formulas
Formulas are mathematical equations. Formulas usually refer to numbers in
other cells in order to calculate a value, such as the difference between the
values in two cells or the total of values in a column. You can use
mathematical functions and numbers in formulas.
Spreadsheet functions
Spreadsheet functions are built-in formulas that automate many of the
calculations you perform in a spreadsheet. For example, @AMAINT is a
spreadsheet function that calculates the accumulated interest paid on a loan
after a specified number of payments. All spreadsheet functions are preceded
by an @ sign.
Macros
Macros are computer scripts that automate complex or repetitive command
sequences. A macro is a sequence of commands that Quattro Pro runs
automatically. Macros can perform keystrokes, mouse actions, and menu
commands.
You can use macros to automate tasks (such as printing a standard report),
enter frequently used labels with a keystroke, or build complete applications
to simplify Quattro Pro tasks for other users.
22
Working with Quattro Pro Experts
Quattro Pro Experts guide you step by step through many spreadsheet tasks.
Use the Experts to complete tasks quickly and simply.
Analysis Expert — helps you make many analysis calculations, such as
advanced regression, correlation, covariance, exponential smoothing,
F-test, moving average, sampling, T-test, and Z-test.
Budget Expert — guides you in creating five different budget templates
for both home and business use.
Chart Expert — builds a chart from the data you specify.
Consolidate Expert — lets you combine cells using statistical operators
(SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, VARS). Then you
can sort the combined data.
Database Expert — lets you easily import data from a database, such as a
Paradox or Quicken database. It also creates Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol (LDAP) queries on the fly, without having to use a
separate application.
Map Expert — builds a map from selected cells of data.
Scenario Expert — lets you create and display groups of scenarios (data
conditions and results) based on models in your notebook.
Slide Show Expert — lets you create slide shows that contain bullet
charts (slides with bulleted lists).
What-If Expert — lets you create tables that show the effect of changing
one or two variable cells referenced in a formula.
Using Experts
A PerfectExpert can help you quickly perform Quattro Pro tasks.
To use an Expert from the toolbar
1 Right-click the toolbar, then click Experts And Numeric Tools to display
all the Expert icons.
2 Point to an Expert icon to see what it will do, then click the Expert you
want.
3 Follow the instructions in each Expert panel, clicking Next to move to the
next step.
Getting started
23
You can move the mouse over a button to see a description of the Expert.
To use an Expert from a menu
1 For an Expert listed in the following table, follow the menu path to use the
Expert.
2 Follow the instructions in each Expert panel, clicking Next to move to the
next step.
To use
Click
Analysis
Tools, Numeric Tools, Analysis
Budget
Tools, Numeric Tools, Budget
Chart
Insert, Chart
Consolidate
Tools, Consolidate, New
Database
Insert, External Data, Expert
Map
Insert, Graphics, Map
Scenario
Tools, Scenario, New
Slide Show
Tools, Slide Show, New
What-If
Tools, Numeric Tools, What-If, Expert
Working with toolbars
Toolbars let you access features you use frequently. Quattro Pro comes with
nine predefined toolbars, Property Bars, and an Application Bar. You can
create your own toolbars, move or hide toolbars, edit toolbars and toolbar
buttons, and add buttons that launch macros.
Quattro Pro Property Bars give you access to tools when you need them. For
example, when you click in a chart, a chart Property Bar appears. When you
are editing in a cell, a different Property Bar appears. To see what each
Property Bar does, point to the buttons displayed on it and read the
QuickTips.
The following standard toolbars come with Quattro Pro:
Notebook — provides tools for entering and editing data
Selection Formatting — provides tools for manipulating data in cells or
changing the look of data
Data Manipulation — provides tools for working with notebook cells and
selections
24
Chart and Drawing Tools — provides tools for drawing or inserting
objects in a chart window, and for arranging objects on a layer on top of
the notebook
Outlining Tools — provides tools for grouping data in collapsible and
expandable sets of information
Auditing Tools — provides tools for tracing dependent cells, precedents,
and even errors in large, complex notebooks
Review — provides tools for reviewing shared notebooks
Experts and Numeric Tools — provides tools for quickly creating maps,
charts, and budgets, and for performing computations
Cross Tabs Report — provides tools for manipulating cross tab reports
Visual Basic — launches the Visual Basic Editor and Visual Basic Design
Mode
Creating toolbars
You can create your own toolbars from a wide assortment of toolbar buttons.
Quattro Pro creates a personal toolbar to which you can drag or copy toolbar
buttons. You can also create a separator to categorize buttons.
You can have as many toolbars on the screen as memory and screen area
allow.
Quattro Pro provides descriptions of each button in the form of QuickTips.
To create a toolbar
1 Click View, Toolbars.
2 Click the New button.
3 Type a name for the toolbar.
4 Click the Customize button.
5 In the Command list, double-click the folder that contains the command
control you want to add, then click the command.
The control icon assigned to the command by default is highlighted with a
gray border. If no control is highlighted, click any of the available icons.
6 Drag the control icon from the Buttons box to the toolbar.
Getting started
25
To quickly create a toolbar, right-click a toolbar, click Customize, then drag
an icon to any non-toolbar space. A toolbar is created with a default name.
To rename your toolbar, see “Editing a toolbar” on page 27.
To add a separator between buttons
1 Choose the button to the right of the location where you want to place the
separator.
2 Drag the mouse slowly over the button until the pointer changes to an
arrow.
3 Release the mouse.
To see a description of a button
Move the mouse pointer over the button.
If you exit Quattro Pro, your toolbar is displayed when you restart Quattro
Pro.
When you create or edit a toolbar, the information is stored in a toolbar file
in the main Quattro Pro folder. Toolbar files have the extension .CFG.
Other users can then copy these toolbar files and use them. However, if a
user copies a toolbar, they will lose any changes made to the original
toolbar.
Displaying, hiding and moving a toolbar
You can display toolbars horizontally or vertically around the Quattro Pro
window, or display a floating toolbar within the spreadsheet window. You can
hide any toolbar you don’t want displayed.
You can reposition a toolbar by dragging it to the top, bottom, left, or right
edge of the application window. If you drag the toolbar away from all edges of
the application window, it becomes a floating toolbar.
To display or hide a toolbar
2 Do one of the following:
Enable the check box for any toolbar you want to display.
Disable the check box for any toolbar you want to hide.
26
To move a toolbar
1 Point to any of the following locations:
an empty area of the toolbar
the title bar on a floating toolbar
the two vertical gray lines at the beginning of a toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to a new position.
To have a toolbar title display on a floating toolbar, click View, Toolbars,
then click the Options button. Enable the Show Titles on Floating
Toolbars check box.
Right-clicking on any toolbar displays a list of toolbars.
Editing a toolbar
You can rename or delete a toolbar you have created. Although you can edit
standard toolbars, you cannot rename or delete them. If you make changes
you no longer want, you can reset the toolbar to its default settings.
To rename a toolbar
2 Double-click the toolbar that you want to rename.
3 Type the new name.
To delete a toolbar
2 Choose the toolbar to delete, then click the Delete button.
To reset a standard toolbar to its default settings
2 Select the toolbar to reset.
3 Click the Reset button.
Any controls, property settings, and link commands that had been
changed are restored to their original state.
Getting started
27
To change the shape of a floating toolbar
Drag the edges of the toolbar.
You can right-click any toolbar and click Toolbars to display the Toolbars
menu.
Editing toolbar buttons
You can drag buttons from other toolbars, copy buttons, or delete buttons. If a
button is dimmed, the button does not function in that window. For example,
buttons for customizing charts will not work when a notebook window is
active.
To view the available toolbar buttons
2 Click the Customize button.
3 In the Categories box located on the left, click the category for the type of
button you want.
Available buttons appear on the right.
To...
Do the following...
Copy a toolbar button
Hold down CTRL + ALT and drag the button to another toolbar.
Move a toolbar button
Hold down ALT and drag a button to a new position or toolbar.
Delete a toolbar button
Hold down ALT and drag the button off the toolbar.
To resize toolbar buttons
2 Click the Options button.
3 Change the Button and Border settings.
If you can’t find the button that you’re looking for, the toolbars, Property
Bar, or Application Bar may not be displayed. Click View, Toolbars, then
select a toolbar. If the button still does not appear, it may be on a different
toolbar than the ones currently displayed. To display all toolbars, click
View Toolbars, then select all of the toolbars.
28
Editing the graphic or text of a toolbar button
You can change the graphic or text of a toolbar button, or have Quattro Pro
display text under all toolbar buttons.
To display either a graphic or text on a toolbar button
1 Click Tools, Customize.
2 Right-click a button on the toolbar, then click Properties.
3 In the Button Properties dialog box, do one of the following:
To show text instead of an icon, enable the Show Text button.
To display an icon on the button, enable the Show Image button.
While in Customize mode, you can also right-click a toolbar button and
toggle between text and graphic.
To change the text of a toolbar button
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in the previous procedure.
2 Enable the Show Text button.
3 In the Show Text text box, type the text you want displayed.
To change the graphic of a toolbar button
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 in the “To display either a graphic or text on a toolbar
button” procedure.
2 Enable the Show Image button.
3 Consider the following options:
To display colors, click colors from the color palette and apply it to the
button image.
To display a shadow effect, click the Shadow box and apply it to the
button image.
To display highlights, click the Highlight box and apply highlights to the
button image.
To revert to the default background color, click the Face button and
apply the color to the button image.
To use the text color, click the Text button and apply the color to the
button image.
Getting started
29
To restore the default button
Click the Restore Defaults button.
To display text under all toolbar buttons
3 Enable the Text Below Image button in the Default Button Appearance
box.
Adding specialized buttons to your toolbar
Quattro Pro lets you create a button that will launch a Windows application or
document. You can also create a button that executes either a Quattro Pro or
PerfectScript macro. For more information about Quattro Pro and
PerfectScript macros, see “Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490.
To add a button that launches a Windows application or
document
2 Click the Toolbars tab.
3 Click the Commands button, and choose New Program.
4 In the Target list box, choose the file or application for which you want to
create a button.
5 In the Parameters list box, specify any command line options.
6 In the Working Folder list box, specify the working directory.
Leave the Working Folder list box blank if you want to use the Quattro
Pro startup folder.
7 In the Command Name text box, type the name of the button.
8 In the QuickTip box, type the QuickTip that accompanies the button.
9 Choose an icon for the new button from the Icon list box, then drag the
button from the Button box to the toolbar.
To add a button that plays a macro
3 Click the Commands button, and choose New Macros.
30
Click Quattro Pro Macro and type the macro commands in Enter Macro
Click PerfectScript Macro and specify the macro file (.WCM).
5 Choose an icon for the macro from the Icon list box, then drag the button
from the Button box to the toolbar.
For more information about macros and toolbar buttons, see “Attaching
macros to toolbars” on page 528.
Working with the Application Bar
The Application Bar is usually located at the bottom of the Quattro Pro
desktop. However, you can move it so that it displays at the top of your
screen.
The Application Bar displays mode and status indicators. For example, if you
press CAPS LOCK, the Application Bar lets you know that the CAPS LOCK
key is on. If you are recording a macro, the Application Bar displays the
message that macro recording is in progress. The Application Bar also
displays specific features such as QuickCell.
QuickCell
With QuickCell, you can view a selected cell on the Application Bar to see its
updated value as you change other cells elsewhere in the spreadsheet.
Mode and status indicators
Different mode and status indicators appear on the Application Bar. These
provide information about the current state of Quattro Pro. The following are
some of the indicators that appear:
One or more formulas need to be recalculated. (Press F9 to recalculate
the notebook.)
A formula contains a circular reference. (It refers to itself or to another
formula that refers back to it.)
CAPS LOCK is on.
NUM LOCK is on.
Getting started
31
Macro recording is in progress.
You pressed INS and are in Typeover mode. Anything you type will
overwrite existing data. (To return to Insert mode, press INS again.)
BKGD
Calculations are done in the background.
COPY
You are using the Drag and Drop feature to copy cells. (Press CTRL while
dragging cells with the mouse.)
END
The END key is on. Any arrow keys you press move the insertion point to
the end of an area in the notebook instead of scrolling.
EDIT
You are in Edit mode. Press F2 to activate Edit mode.
EXT
You are extending a selection with SHIFT + F7. When you finish, choose
a option that operates on cells.
FIND
Quattro Pro is searching for entries that match the conditions you
specified with the Query option.
FRMT
You are editing a format line during a Parse operation.
INPUT
Input is confined to selected cells with the {RestrictInput.Option macro
command. (Press ESC or ENTER with no data in the input line to return
to Ready mode.)
LABEL
The entry you are making is text (a label).
MACRO
A macro is executing.
MOVE
You are using the Drag and Drop feature to move cells.
POINT
The notebook is in Point mode, letting you specify a cell or cells, or view
cell names with F3.
PREVIEW
You are previewing your printed notebook.
READY
Quattro Pro is ready for you to enter data or choose an option.
VALUE
The entry you are making is a number or formula.
Customizing the Application Bar
The Application Bar holds information pertaining to the current states and
modes of the program. You can choose which of these items display. Any
toolbar button or control can be placed on the Application Bar.
You can also format the Application Bar by specifying its position and height.
To change what the Application Bar displays
1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Customize.
32
2 In the Command list box, double-click View, then click Application Bar.
To add a field of status information, drag the field from the Buttons area
of the Customize Settings dialog box over the Application Bar.
To remove a field of status information, drag it from the Application Bar
onto the document window.
If the Application Bar is not displayed, click View, Toolbars, and enable the
Application Bar check box.
To add space between two fields, drag the rightmost field slightly farther
to the right. You can also move the fields without opening the Customize
dialog box by holding down ALT as you drag.
To change the height of the Application Bar
1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Size.
2 Click One Line or Two Lines, depending on how high you want the
Application Bar to be.
You can also change the height of the Application Bar by dragging the top
or bottom border.
To move the Application Bar to the top or bottom of the window
1 Right-click the Application Bar, then click Position.
2 Click Top or Bottom.
To reset the Application Bar to its original display
Right-click Application Bar, then click Reset Application Bar.
Hiding or displaying QuickCell on the Application Bar
With QuickCell, you can drag the contents of any cell from the spreadsheet to
the Application Bar where it displays even if that cell has scrolled out of view.
QuickCell is useful for watching a formula cell as it updates. This is
particularly helpful if you are working in another notebook or on another
sheet.
Getting started
33
To use QuickCell
1 Click a cell that you want to keep in view even when you scroll.
2 Click the QuickCell button on the Application Bar.
To hide QuickCell
2 Drag the QuickCell button from the Application Bar to the document
window.
To display QuickCell again
2 In the Command list box, double-click View, then click Application Bar.
Application bar buttons appear on the right.
3 Drag the QuickCell button to the Application Bar.
You cannot use QuickCell between files.
For more information on using QuickCell to view formulas as they update,
see “Viewing key cells from the Application Bar” on page 118.
Navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks
You move through a spreadsheet or notebook with the mouse, keyboard, or
by voice using Dragon NaturallySpeaking. For information about using voice
commands to navigate a spreadsheet, see Navigating a notebook using voice
commands in the Quattro Pro online Help.
The Control Menu lets you quickly perform tasks such as minimizing,
maximizing, and closing windows. Keyboard shortcuts let you move through
a spreadsheet by using keystroke combinations.
You can set more specific parameters for navigation by using the Go To or
Browse By commands.
Go To
To help you navigate through large amounts of data, the Go To dialog
provides options for finding a cell or range of cells, comments, formulas,
values, labels, named cells, and many additional options.
34
The Go To command is useful for quickly moving to named cells, moving to
distant parts of a notebook, or selecting noncontiguous selections in different
parts of a notebook. You can also use Go To to extend the selection or to find
the original source of an error in a formula (that is, cells containing NA or
ERR values).
Browse By
Another quick way to navigate your notebook is to use Browse By. When you
right-click the Browse By button in the lower-right corner of the spreadsheet,
the submenu lists the types of data — values or labels — you can locate.
Navigating spreadsheet rows and columns
You can navigate in columns and rows in your spreadsheet using arrow keys,
the ENTER key, and the TAB key.
To move down columns when entering data
Press ENTER or press the DOWN ARROW.
To move up columns when entering data
Press the UP ARROW.
To move across rows when entering data
Do one of the following:
Press the LEFT and RIGHT ARROW keys.
Press TAB to move right and SHIFT + TAB to move left.
Navigating through notebooks
You can quickly navigate to the Objects sheet, the last sheet in the notebook.
Although your notebook is too large to view all at once, the tabs representing
the different spreadsheets are visible at the bottom on the Quattro Pro
window. You can use these tabs to reach other spreadsheets in the notebook.
To go to the Objects sheet
1 Click the QuickTab button at the bottom left of the notebook window.
To return to the current spreadsheet from the Objects sheet, click the
QuickTab button.
Getting started
35
To go to a different spreadsheet
Click the appropriate spreadsheet tab.
Using the Control Menu
The Control Menu is common to all Windows applications. Use this menu to
perform such tasks as maximizing or closing a window.
The commands available from the Control Menu include the following:
Restore — returns a window to its previous size and position
Move — moves a window
Size — changes window size
Minimize — reduces a window to an icon
Maximize — expands a window to fill the screen
Close — closes a window
Next — switches to the next window in the series of open windows
To display the Control Menu
Click the icon in the upper-left corner of a window.
Using keyboard shortcuts
A quick way to navigate and edit a notebook is by using keyboard shortcuts.
To access menus using the keyboard
1 Hold down ALT and type the underlined letter for the menu you want to
open.
2 Use the arrow keys to move from menu to menu, and from option to
option, then press ENTER to choose a highlighted option.
To choose options in a dialog box using the keyboard
To...
Do the following...
Select options
Hold down ALT and type the underlined letter for the option you want.
Move from option to option
Press TAB.
Enable/disable buttons and check boxes Press the SPACEBAR.
Select text boxes
36
Press TAB, then type information into them.
Select pop-up lists
Press TAB, then press the SPACEBAR to open them.
Select buttons
Press TAB, then press ENTER to activate them.
For a list of keyboard shortcuts, see Keyboard Shortcuts in the Reference
information section of the Quattro Pro online help.
Using Go To
Use Go To to quickly find a cell address, a named cell or spreadsheet, a cell
type, or the most recent cell edits. You can also use Go To to extend the
selection.
To go to a cell or selection of cells
1 Click Edit, Go To.
To go to a specific cell address, type the address in the Reference box.
If the cell is on another spreadsheet, include the spreadsheet name.
For instance, to move to cell Z36 on spreadsheet D, type D:Z36. If the
cell is in another notebook, add the notebook prefix, for example,
[Budget]D:Z36.
To go to a named cell, choose the cell or group name from the Names
box.
To go to a named spreadsheet in the current notebook, choose the
spreadsheet in the Sheets box.
To go to the most recently edited cells, select a cell location from the
Last Edited box. Use CTRL or SHIFT to select multiple cells.
To go to a cell type in order to format it, choose a cell type from the
Other box. For example, say you have several data tables on the same
notebook spreadsheet, and you want all the headings and labels to look
the same. To format them all at the same time, select Cell Data-Label,
click OK, then choose format options. All labels are selected, so they
can be formatted at the same time.
To extend selections with Go To
1 Move to the upper-left corner of the cells.
Getting started
37
3 Specify the lower-right corner of the block of cells you want to include.
4 Hold down SHIFT, then click OK.
To find the original error in a formula using Go To
1 Select a cell containing NA or ERR.
The original source of the error appears in the Reference edit field.
3 Click OK to select that cell and display its contents in the input line.
Using Browse By
Browse By searches your spreadsheet and highlights all instances of the type
of data you are searching for.
Browse By can find the following items:
Values
Blanks
Labels
Formula — Time/Date
Formula — Numbers
Formula — Text
Formula — Logical
Formula — Error
Immediate Precedents
All Precedents
Immediate Dependents
All Dependents
Current Region
Locked Cells
Unlocked Cells
Current Array
38
To use Browse By to locate specific data
1 Right-click the Browse By button in the lower-right corner of the
spreadsheet.
2 Choose the type of data you want to locate.
Selecting cells, rows, and columns
You can select cells individually or in rows, columns, blocks, or 3-D blocks.
When you select a cell, a black-bordered rectangle appears to indicate the
active cell. This rectangle is called the selector.
A block of cells on consecutive spreadsheets is called a 3-D block. For
example, if cell G20 on the first 12 spreadsheets on a notebook represents
the total monthly sales for a particular wine, you can select cell G20 from all
12 spreadsheets at once to find total wine sales for the year.
Using the selector
You can set the selector to move across the row when you press ENTER.
To set the selector to move when you press ENTER
1 Click Tools, Settings, General.
2 Disable the Compatible Keys check box.
3 Enable the Move Cell Selector/Enter Key check box.
4 From the list box, choose Down, Up, Left, or Right depending on the
direction you want the selector to move when you press ENTER.
Selecting cells
To enter data, manipulate data, format cells, or make other changes to cells,
first select the cell or cells to be changed.
When you select cells, the active cell within the selection contains the
selector, while the rest of the selected cells are highlighted.
The cell address displays in the upper-left corner of the Quattro pro desktop
beside the input line. This box also displays a list of all named cells.
To select...
Do this...
A cell
Click the cell.
Noncontiguous cells
Hold down CTRL while you select cells.
Getting started
39
A block of cells
Drag across the cells (click a corner cell, keep holding down the mouse
button and move the pointer to the opposite corner). You can also click
one corner, hold down SHIFT, then click the opposite corner.
An entire row or column
Click the row number or column heading.
An entire spreadsheet
Click Edit, Select All.
A cell or cells on another spreadsheet Click the spreadsheet tab, then select the cell or cells.
To quickly select all the cells in the current spreadsheet, click the
rectangle in the upper-left corner of the spreadsheet between the row and
column headings.
Selecting noncontiguous cells
You can write formulas that refer to various selections in different locations
(noncontiguous cells), or you can act on these selections with commands.
To point to noncontiguous selections
1 Select the first group of cells.
2 Hold down CTRL, then select additional cells.
When every selection you want to refer to or act on is highlighted,
complete the formula or command.
To type references to noncontiguous selections in a formula, separate
each selection with a comma, as shown in this example:
A2..A5,B7,D5..E12.
Most commands can work on noncontiguous selections.
Selecting 3-D blocks
A 3-D selection is a group of cells selected on more than one spreadsheet.
For example, A2..B5 on sheets A through D is a 3-D selection.
You can also select 3-D blocks of data by typing a reference to the block. For
example, A..D:A2..B5 refers to cells A2 to B5 on sheets A, B, C, and D.
When the same sheets are grouped under the same name, for example,
Receipts, the same 3-D reference looks like this: Receipts:A2..B5.
40
Another way to type a reference to a 3-D selection is to treat it as a cube.
Type the spreadsheet and cell coordinates of the cube’s front upper-left
corner, followed by two periods, then the spreadsheet and cell’s coordinates
of the cube’s back, lower-right corner. For instance, to refer to the same cells
as in the previous example, type A:A2..D:B5.
The 3-D syntax shown in both examples above is correct, but, by default, all
references you point to or type are converted to the first method. If you
prefer the second method, you can make it the default method.
To select a 3-D block of cells
1 Select the cells on the first spreadsheet.
2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the tab for the last spreadsheet in the
series.
A black line appears under the tabs. The same cells are now selected on
all the sheets where the black line appears.
3 Complete the formula that refers to this selection or choose the command
to act on it.
The cells remain selected only until you click elsewhere in the notebook.
To type a reference to a 3-D block
Include the spreadsheet references first, followed by the cell coordinates.
To change the 3-D spreadsheet range syntax
1 Click Tools, Settings.
2 Click the Compatibility tab.
3 In the 3-D Syntax section, click one of the following two options:
A..B:A1..B2 — expresses spreadsheet references first, followed by a
colon and the cell coordinates. This syntax makes group references
more concise.
A:A1..B:B2 — refers to each corner of the 3-D selection with the
spreadsheet reference included.
When you click a new cell, all existing 3-D references in formulas in open
notebooks switch to the new syntax.
Getting started
41
Selecting cells from dialog boxes
When you need to enter cell references in dialog boxes, it is usually easier to
select the cells rather than type the entire cell address.
To select cells from a dialog box
1 Click the Pointer button.
2 Select the cells that you want to appear in the Edit field of the dialog box.
3 Click the Maximize button in the title of the dialog box.
You can also select cells from dialog boxes by double-clicking the contents
of the Edit field or by pressing UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, or F2.
You can also enter the selected cells in the Edit field by pressing F2.
To restore the previous entry in the Edit field, press ESC.
Selecting data with SpeedSelect
SpeedSelect lets you quickly select an entire block of cells. Use the
SpeedSelect buttons to quickly move to each corner of the block.
To select data with SpeedSelect
1 Select one cell within the block.
2 Right-click a toolbar, then click Data Manipulation.
3 Click the Select Table button.
The corners of the block of cells appear, and all the cells are selected.
To move to a corner of the block
1 Select one cell within the block.
2 Right-click a toolbar, then click Data Manipulation.
42
3 Click one of the navigation tools:
Top Left of Table button
Top Right of Table button
Bottom Left of Table button
Bottom Right of Table button
The selector moves in the direction of the arrow to a corner of the block.
Selecting rows, columns, and spreadsheets
You can select entire rows, columns, and spreadsheets. You can also select
multiple spreadsheets.
To select a row or column
Select the row or column heading.
To select a spreadsheet
Click the spreadsheet tab.
To select multiple spreadsheets
1 Click the first spreadsheet tab.
2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want
included in the selection.
A black line appears under the tabs.
Keeping key cells, rows, and columns in view
You can lock specific rows and columns of a spreadsheet so that their titles
remain on-screen as you scroll.
When you lock titles,
a blue line divides
the locked area and
the notebook data.
Getting started
43
Locking column or row titles provides a reference point for the data you are
scrolling through.
To lock titles
1 Scroll the spreadsheet so the column or row you want as a title appears in
the upper-left corner of the window.
To display row titles, select the cell in column A that is below the last
row you want displayed.
To display column titles, select the cell in row 1 that is to the right of
the last column you want displayed.
To display both row and column titles, select the top-left cell of the
portion you want to remain scrollable.
3 Click View, Locked Titles.
A blue line divides the locked area and the notebook data.
To repeat row or column titles on each spreadsheet of a printed
notebook
1 Click File, Page Setup.
2 Click the Options tab.
To lock a row title, type the location of the row title in the Left Heading
box.
To lock a column title, type the location of the column title in the Top
Heading box.
You can also point to a row or column title to select it. Click the Pointer
button located to the right of the Top Heading or Left Heading text box,
point to the title, then click the Maximize button in the title of the dialog
box.
To unlock titles
Click View, Locked Titles.
44
You cannot move titles after they are locked.
As with hidden and widened columns, locked titles affect the active pane
only. If the window is divided into two panes, locked titles are retained
after you close the second pane only if you have created them in the top
or left pane.
Adding and deleting cells, rows, and columns
You can insert cells, rows, or columns anywhere in a spreadsheet. You can
also insert partial rows and columns. When you insert an item, existing data
is pushed down, to the right, or to the back of the notebook to make room for
the new item.
You can also insert items from another file into a spreadsheet. If the insertion
pushes a named cell area or cell reference beyond the limit of a spreadsheet,
an error message appears.
You can also insert multiple spreadsheets by specifying a 3-D selection.
You can delete all or part of columns and rows. Deleting space is different
from erasing (or clearing) data using Edit, Clear or the DELETE key.
Deleting with Edit, Delete makes remaining rows or columns move to take
up the deleted space.
When you delete space that is within the boundaries of a named area or
cells referenced by a formula, all references adjust to exclude the deleted
space. However, if one of the deleted cells is a coordinate cell that defines
a named area, the area becomes invalid and any formulas or names
referencing the area display ERR. Any formulas that reference a cell
within a deleted column, row, or spreadsheet also display ERR.
Inserting cells, rows, and columns
Inserting rows and columns, partial rows and columns, and blocks of cells
allows you to add new data to a spreadsheet without affecting the current
data.
To insert cells
1 Select cells in the location where you want to insert the new cells.
Make sure the upper-left corner of the cells you select contains the first
cell entry you want shifted right, down, or back. The cells you select
should be the same size as the amount of space you want to insert.
Getting started
45
2 Click Insert, Cells.
3 Enable the Partial button in the Span section.
To have the selected entries shift down and out of the way, enable the
Rows button in the Dimension section.
To have the selected entries shift to the right, enable the Columns
button in the Dimension section.
To have the selected entries shift to the next spreadsheet, enable the
Sheets button in the Dimension section.
To insert rows
1 Select the row heading just below where you want the row inserted.
2 Click Insert, Row.
To insert multiple rows
1 Select as many row headings as the number of rows you want to insert.
To insert columns
1 Select the column heading just below where you want the column
inserted.
2 Click Insert, Column.
To insert multiple columns
Select as many column headings as the number of columns you want to
insert.
When you insert a row or column within the boundaries of a named area
or a cell referenced by a formula, the cell references expand to include the
new row or column.
Deleting cells, rows, and columns
When data is no longer useful, you can easily delete cells, rows, columns, or
multiple rows and columns.
46
To delete cells
1 Select the cells you want to delete.
2 Click Edit, Delete.
3 Click Partial from the Span list.
4 From the Dimension list, click one of the following:
Rows — shifts entries up into the selected cells
Columns — shifts entries left
Sheets — shifts entries from the next spreadsheet
To delete rows or columns of data
1 Select the row or column heading.
To delete multiple rows or columns or data
1 Select row or column headings for the row or column you want to delete.
Preventing rows and columns from being added to a spreadsheet
You can prevent other users from adding rows and columns to a spreadsheet
by entering data in the last cell of the spreadsheet. Since this cell can’t be
pushed down or to the right, no extra cells can be added to the spreadsheet.
To restrict the addition of rows and columns
1 Press END, then press DOWN ARROW.
2 Press END, then press the RIGHT ARROW.
The cursor is at the last cell in the spreadsheet (ZZZ1,000,000 if you are
using the default spreadsheet size).
3 In this cell, type any label or value.
4 Press HOME to get back to the first cell in the spreadsheet.
When you try to add a row or column, an Out of Boundary message
displays.
Getting started
47
Adding, deleting, and moving spreadsheets
You can add or delete single or multiple spreadsheets to or from your
notebook. Move sheets within a notebook or between notebooks to reorder
them. Similar to the Drag and Drop feature used with cells, you can use the
mouse to directly manipulate the spreadsheets. Just drag the spreadsheet tab
to another location.
When you move a spreadsheet into or out of grouped spreadsheets while
Group mode is on (the blue line appears under the tabs), only the
spreadsheet moves, and the group expands or shrinks accordingly. When you
move the first or last spreadsheet in a group, the group expands to include all
new sheets enclosed by the moved spreadsheet. For more information about
Group mode, see “Editing grouped data” on page 166.
When you drag a spreadsheet that is part of a selected 3-D selection (the
black line appears under the tabs), all sheets in the 3-D selection move
together.
Adding and deleting spreadsheets
You can add or delete entire spreadsheets to or from your notebook.
To insert a blank spreadsheet
1 Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to follow the new spreadsheet.
2 Click Insert, Sheet.
To insert multiple spreadsheets
1 Click Insert, Cells.
2 Enable the Sheets button in the Dimension section.
3 Enable the Entire button in the Span section.
4 Type a 3-D selection in the Cells field.
For example, to insert three sheets before spreadsheet B, enter
B:A3..D:A3 (it does not matter which cell you reference).
You can also insert multiple spreadsheets by selecting the first
spreadsheet tab you want to follow the new spreadsheet, then holding
down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want. A black
line appears under the tabs.
48
To delete a spreadsheet
1 Click a spreadsheet tab.
2 Click Edit, Select All.
3 Click Edit, Delete Sheet(s).
To delete multiple spreadsheets
1 Click the first spreadsheet tab.
2 Hold down SHIFT while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want.
A black line appears under the tabs.
Moving spreadsheets
You can move spreadsheets within a notebook.
To move spreadsheets
1 Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to move.
2 Drag the spreadsheet in any direction until the tab separates from the
spreadsheet and a sheet icon appears.
3 Drag right or left along the row of other tabs, moving the sheet icon.
4 Release the mouse button when the sheet icon is just before the tab
where you want to place the moved spreadsheet.
The moved spreadsheet drops into place.
You can also move sheets by clicking Edit, Move Sheets, then specifying
the sheets to move. For example, in the Move Sheets box, type A..C to
move sheets A through C.
To copy the spreadsheet, hold down CTRL when dragging the
spreadsheet.
Naming spreadsheets
Each spreadsheet in a notebook has a tab at the bottom. These tabs display
the name of the spreadsheet. Spreadsheets are initially named with letters of
the alphabet in sequence, from A to Z, continuing from AA to AZ, up to ZZZ.
Getting started
49
You can assign a descriptive name to a sheet. You can use up to 64
characters — letters and numbers — in the name, as well as these special
characters:
~‘!%_|\‘?
You can change the spreadsheet name to reflect the naming conventions used
by other applications such as Microsoft Excel, or you can name the
spreadsheets to describe the type of data that resides in it. However, there
are certain characters that may exist in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet name
that will not be recognized by Quattro Pro. For more information, see
“Opening and saving a Microsoft Excel workbook” on page 84.
Here are some guidelines:
You can use blank spaces within a name (not at the beginning), but you
cannot use a name previously assigned to a group in the same notebook.
When you rename a spreadsheet, formulas that refer to the renamed
spreadsheet adjust to use the new name.
The Objects sheet (the last sheet in the notebook) cannot be renamed.
Naming a spreadsheet
To name a spreadsheet
1 Double-click a notebook tab.
2 Type a name.
3 Press ENTER.
To rename a spreadsheet
1 Click Format, Sheet.
2 Click the Name tab.
3 Type a descriptive name, using letters, numbers, and any of these
characters:
~ ‘ ! % _ | \ ‘ ?.
To reassign the original name to a spreadsheet, click the Reset button.
To rename a spreadsheet with Microsoft Excel conventions
1 Click Settings, Tools.
50
3 Enable the Display as Numbers check box.
To change spreadsheet tabs back to letters, disable the Display as
Numbers check box.
Specifying Quattro Pro settings
Quattro Pro settings let you decide how Quattro Pro should look and work.
For example, you can determine what appears when Quattro Pro opens,
choose colors for particular cells, or set the menu bar to display as a
Microsoft Excel menu bar.
Application settings
Application settings affect the overall functioning of Quattro Pro. Changes
you make to these settings remain in effect until you change them again,
even after you exit and restart Quattro Pro.
Property settings
Property settings allow you to see at a glance all changes that can be made to
individual items in the notebook.
There are properties available for
cells (block)
spreadsheets
notebooks
charts in windows, and their elements, such as bars, axes, or text boxes
graphics
dialog boxes you create and their elements, such as radio buttons and edit
fields
the Quattro Pro application itself
You can change additional properties for the current item. The Property
tab name turns blue when you change its setting.
Getting started
51
File Property settings
You can view statistical information about a Quattro Pro notebook. This
includes the filename, directory path, date it was created, date it was last
saved and by whom, and the revision number.
The notebook summary feature lets you record information, such as a file’s
title, subject, author, and keywords. You can also record comments pertaining
to the file. Summary information is useful when searching for a file using
QuickFinder. If you publish a notebook to the Internet, the summary
information is transferred to the corresponding fields in your Web document.
The keywords you define as summary information automatically serve as
Internet links.
Compatibility settings
You can create or edit notebooks in a format compatible with other programs
by selecting Quattro Pro 9, Quattro Pro 8, Microsoft Excel 97, Lotus 1-2-3 or
custom settings. Depending on the program type you select, some or all of
the following options are affected: default file type (or file extension), menu
bar, 3-D syntax, notebook size, and spreadsheet tab display.
Any changes you make to the settings on the Compatibility tab become the
program’s default settings. When you change any of the options in this tab
that are incompatible with Microsoft Excel or Quattro Pro file types, the
program will automatically default to custom settings. For more information
about Microsoft Excel 97 and Quattro Pro, see “Moving between Microsoft
Excel and Quattro Pro” on page 83.
Select the settings that best suit your needs. If you are a Microsoft Excel 97
user, you can change the compatibility options to Microsoft Excel 97 or leave
them as Quattro Pro 9, since it is completely compatible with Microsoft
Excel. If you are a Quattro Pro 9 user who shares files with Microsoft Excel
97 users, change only the default file type. If you work with QP8, and you do
not need more than 8000 rows per notebook, select Quattro Pro 8 as your
default. If you need more than 64,000 rows, change the compatibility options
to Custom.
International settings
International settings determine the appearance of currency, punctuation,
dates, times, and the default language. These settings affect the appearance
of values and how you enter arguments in spreadsheet functions.
The initial defaults are standard for the United States. If you are using
Quattro Pro in another country, or are doing business with another country,
you can change these settings. The Windows default setting uses the
regional settings in the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows
documentation for details.
52
Lotus International Character Set (LICS) characters are identical to the
standard ANSI set except for the range 128 through 255, which is usually
used for international and graphics characters. For more information about
LICS characters, see your Lotus 1-2-3 documentation. When you save the
notebook, these characters are converted back to the LICS equivalents.
The date and time formats you choose under the International tab of the
Settings dialog box do not determine how dates and times are displayed in
Quattro Pro. Rather, they determine the long and short international format
options for date and time that are available as appearance settings. You can
set the actual appearance of dates in the Active Cells dialog box. For more
information, see “Working with date, time, and currency formats” on page
193.
The language option allows you to have your interface display in the language
you select from a list of languages. You must have another language version
installed to be able to change the interface language.
Using application settings
Use application settings to affect the overall functioning of Quattro Pro. You
can determine what screen elements are hidden, what appears on the
Application Bar, what appears on the screen when Quattro Pro opens, and
more.
Application settings control the following components of Quattro Pro:
Display Settings — show or hide portions of the Quattro Pro window.
International Settings — control the appearance of currency, punctuation,
dates, times, international characters, and negative values. These options
affect the appearance of values, how the date and time on the Application
Bar appear, how you enter arguments in spreadsheet functions, and how
certain international characters appear.
Macro and Menu Settings — control what is displayed on the screen when
macros are running. You can also specify a macro to run when a notebook
is opened.
File Options Settings — include information that is used every time you
start Quattro Pro
General Settings — enable Undo, determine key behavior, and set Drag
and Drop delay time
Compatibility Settings — let you change your workspace to the
conventions used by another application such as Microsoft Excel. You can
also determine the size of your notebook or switch between 3-D syntax
schemes.
Getting started
53
To access the Application Settings dialog box
2 Click the appropriate tab, then set properties as required.
You can also change application settings by right-clicking the title bar and
clicking Application Properties.
Using property settings
You access property settings from the Menu Bar. In Developer mode, you can
turn off access to property settings.
To change the properties of an item
You can change the properties of an item by clicking the following menu
items:
Menu item
Properties
Format, Selection
Active cells properties
Format, Sheet
Active sheet properties
Format, Notebook
Active notebook properties
To quickly set properties for most spreadsheet items
1 Right-click an item, such as a chart or cell.
2 Choose the Properties option from the submenu.
3 Set the properties for the item.
You can turn off the access to property settings. For more information, see
“Limiting access to property settings from Developer mode” on page 520.
To enable these items after you disable them, click CTRL + M from the
main screen.
Setting file properties
You can see statistical information about a notebook, including the filename,
directory path, date it was created, date it was last saved and by whom, and
the revision number.
54
The summary tool lets you record summary information about a notebook,
such as the title, subject, author, and keywords. You can even record
comments. Summary information is useful for file searches.
To see statistics about the notebook
1 Click File, Properties.
2 Click the Statistics tab.
To record summary information about a notebook
1 Click File, Properties.
2 Click the Summary tab.
3 Record the appropriate information in any of the following text boxes:
Title
Subject
Author
Keywords
Comments
You can also access the Statistics and Summary tabs by clicking Format,
Notebook.
Using compatibility settings
You can choose settings to make Quattro Pro compatible with other
applications and with your particular spreadsheet requirements. For
information about making Quattro Pro compatible with Microsoft Excel 97,
see “Using Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro” on page 86.
To change compatibility options
3 Choose a format from the Compatibility Options list.
To change the default file type
Getting started
55
3 Choose the file extension from the Default File Type list.
Enable the Require CTRL + SHIFT + ENTER To Generate The
@ARRAY Function check box to adopt the keystroke method Microsoft
Excel 97 uses when calculating arrays.
To change the default Menu Bar
3 Choose the menu you want from the Menu Bar list.
Any changes you make in the Compatibility tab will become the default
settings for Quattro Pro.
You can also right-click the menu bar to select a different menu.
To increase or decrease the notebook size
3 Type the number of sheets you want in the Sheet text box. (Do not exceed
18,278.)
4 Type the number of columns you want in the Columns text box. (Do not
exceed 18,278.)
5 Type the number of row you want in the Rows text box. (Do not exceed
1,000,000.)
You can also set the syntax for 3-D blocks from the Compatibility tab. For
more information, see “Selecting 3-D blocks” on page 40.
56
Using international settings
You can change international settings for currency, punctuation, and language
from within Quattro Pro.
By default, commas are used as thousands separators and argument
separators. A period is used as a decimal separator. Regardless of the
punctuation setting, semicolons are always accepted as argument separators.
You can also change number, data, and time formats in individual cells. For
more information, see “Working with date, time, and currency formats” on
page 193.
To change the currency symbol
1 Click Tools, Settings, International.
2 Enable the Currency button.
3 Enable the Quattro Pro button, then click the country whose currency
symbol you want to use.
To precede negative values with a minus sign, enable the Signed
button.
To enclose negative values in parentheses, enable the Parens button.
When you change the currency symbol, it becomes the default currency.
To show multiple currencies in one notebook, change the currency of
individual cells with Format, Selection, Numeric Format, Currency. This
lets you use multiple currencies in one notebook. For more information,
see “Changing the numeric format of cells” on page 191.
Quattro Pro has added the Euro to the available currency formats. You can
view the Euro currency symbol if you are using Microsoft Windows 98 or
if your system has a Euro compliant font installed.
To change punctuation settings
2 Click the International tab.
3 Enable the Punctuation button, then click an option.
The options show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the
decimal place, followed by the punctuation mark used to separate
Getting started
57
arguments in spreadsheet functions and macros (a1,a2). The last four
options specify that a blank space separates thousands in numbers.
To change the available date formats
3 Enable the Date Format button, then click a format.
This date format does not determine how dates appear. Rather, it
determines the international date formats given as options for date
appearance. To set the actual appearance of dates, click Format, Selection,
then click the Numeric Format tab. When you enable the Date button, the
formats appear as two choices (Long Date Intl. and Short Date Intl.) . The
long format is also used as the international clock setting. The short
format is in parentheses. For more information, see “Formatting dates” on
page 194.
By default, dates display in long form as MM/DD/YY (for example,
06/18/92) and in short form as MM/DD (for example, 06/18).
To change available time formats
3 Enable the Time Format button, then click a format.
This time format does not determine how times appear. Rather, it
determines the international time formats given as options for time
display. To set the actual appearance of times, click Format, Selection,
then click the Numeric Format tab and enable the Time button. The
formats appear as two choices (Long Time Intl. and Short Time Intl.)The
long format is the international clock setting. The short format is in
parentheses. For more information, see “Formatting times” on page 194.
By default, times are displayed in long form as HH:MM:SS (for example,
09:32:30) and in short form as HH:MM (for example, 09:32).
58
To convert LICS characters
3 Enable the LICS check box.
To change the default language
1 Click Tools, Settings, International.
2 Enable the Language button, then do one of the following:
To specify the default language of all suite applications, click the Suite
Default button.
To specify a different language for only Quattro Pro, click Quattro Pro,
then specify a language from the list box.
Changing your view of the notebook
You can change how you view your notebook without changing the notebook
itself. For example, you can use Draft View when quickly entering data, or
you can use Page View when you want to change margins and see how
information will fit on a printed page. You can also use Zoom to make the
notebook display larger or smaller.
There are many different ways you can change the view of your notebook.
The view you choose depends on what you want to do with your spreadsheet.
For example, you may want to look at two different parts of the spreadsheet
in the same window, add page breaks, or edit headers and footers.
You can work with your notebook in several view modes. Changing the view
mode itself does not affect the actual formatting of the notebook.
Draft View
Draft View does not display some document elements such as footers, page
breaks, and margins, although they may exist in the notebook. Because not
all features display, working in Draft View is often faster than working in
Page View.
Page View
Page View displays your notebook pages the way they will look when
printed. Page View displays elements such as fonts and appearance features,
headers, footers, footnotes, page breaks, and margins. Page View offers more
WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) editing, such as dragging
Getting started
59
margins and page breaks. You can also get to the Page Setup dialog by
double-clicking or right-clicking in a margin.
Page Breaks View
Page Breaks View displays soft and hard page breaks. You can use this view
to edit these page breaks.
Objects View
Choosing Objects View displays the Objects sheet, the last sheet in the
notebook. You can view your charts, maps, and slide shows from this sheet.
Viewing formulas and comments
You can display all formulas in the cells rather than the results of those
formulas.
You can display cell comments and move or copy them to another location.
Displaying, arranging, resizing, and hiding windows
A Quattro Pro window displays a Quattro Pro file, or a file imported into
Quattro Pro. While working in Quattro Pro, you can have several windows
open. For example, suppose you are working with four different notebooks,
each dealing with a quarterly report. You can display all four at once.
You can change a window view in several ways. Changing views is useful
when you want to consider your spreadsheet data in a new light, or if you
want to perform formatting tasks such as adding headers, footers, and page
breaks. For more information about views, see “Changing your view of the
notebook” on page 59.
You can create new views of the same spreadsheet, or rearrange, resize or
hide windows.
Selecting windows and views
You can select which window(s) you want open, and how you want to view
the data in those windows.
To select a window
Click any part of the window.
On the Application Bar, click the button that displays the window’s
name.
60
Choose the file’s name from the list in the bottom section of the
Window menu on the Menu Bar. A check mark appears next to the
name of the active window.
Press CTRL + F6 to move to the next document window. If that
window is beneath other windows, it moves to the top.
The window with the highlighted title bar is active.
You can toggle back and forth between Quattro Pro and a non-document
window, such as the Spell Checker, by pressing ALT + F6.
To select a different view
1 Click View.
2 Click one of the following views:
Draft
Page
Page Breaks
Objects
The view that is currently selected when you exit Quattro Pro — Draft
View, Page View, or Page Breaks View — is the view that will appear
when you open Quattro Pro again.
You can drag graphics or charts while in Draft View or Page View.
To see multiple pages while in Page View, click View, Zoom, then choose
50 percent (%) or less.
To change margins while in Page View, drag a blue margin line to set the
current margin for a column or row of pages.
Displaying formulas and comments in spreadsheets
You can display actual formulas instead of formula results. You can also have
Quattro Pro automatically display spreadsheet comments. Once a comment is
displayed, you can move or copy it to a new cell.
Getting started
61
To display formulas instead of formula results
Click View, Formulas.
To display spreadsheet comments
Click View, Comments.
Displaying new views of a notebook
You can create any number of views. When you create a new view of a
notebook window, the duplicate window appears full size in front of other
open windows, with cell A1 selected on the first spreadsheet. The view title
is comprised of the name of the notebook followed by a colon (:) and the
number of the view; for example, Notebk1.QPW:2.
You can create any number of views.
To display a new view of a notebook window
Click Window, New View.
When you change border or gridline properties, the change does not
display in duplicate views.
When you lock titles, split panes, or zoom data, the change does not
display in duplicate views.
To view different areas of open windows, resize them to see a part of each.
Scroll windows or select different sheets as desired.
To remove an extra view, click the Close Window button at the top-right
corner of the window. If you click File, Close, all views are closed because
all views of the notebook are saved as the same file.
Splitting a notebook window into two panes
To view different parts of the same notebook, you can duplicate the window
or split the window into two panes. Panes can be split vertically or
horizontally. When you navigate split windows, both panes scroll together.
You can change the settings to make each pane scroll independently; this
allows you to view one part of the notebook in one pane while you scroll to
another part in the other pane. You can also resize the panes.
62
Splitting a notebook
window into panes
lets you view
different parts of the
same notebook at the
same time.
If window panes are synchronized, you can scroll both of them at once to
compare the data in rows or columns. Vertically split panes scroll together
vertically, and horizontally split panes scroll together horizontally.
The active pane is the one containing the selector. If you unsynchronize the
panes, you can scroll the panes independently to display different parts of the
notebook.
To split a window into two panes
1 Move the mouse pointer to the lower-right corner of the window over the
pane splitter.
The pointer changes to a black double-arrow. Depending on where you
position the mouse pointer, the double-arrow points horizontally or
vertically.
To create horizontal panes, drag the vertical double-arrow upward.
Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes.
To create vertical panes, drag the horizontal double-arrow to the left.
Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes.
You can also split a window into panes using View, Split Window. The
window is split at the position of the selector or, when there is not enough
room to split the window at the current position, the window is split in
half.
To close the second pane
1 Click View, Split Window.
2 Enable the Clear button.
Getting started
63
To close the second pane with the mouse
1 Point to the pane splitter between the first and second pane.
The pointer turns into a double-arrow.
2 Drag the double-arrow back to the top or bottom edge of the window (for
horizontal panes) or to the left or right edge (for vertical panes).
Any column width changes, locked titles, or columns that were hidden or
revealed in the top or left pane remain in effect.
To synchronize panes
1 Click View, Split Window.
2 Enable the Synchronized check box.
To unsynchronize panes
1 Click View, Split Window (before or after splitting the window).
2 Disable the Synchronized check box.
To resize panes
1 Move the mouse pointer over the pane splitter at the lower right of the
left or top pane until the double arrow appears.
2 Drag to the new position where you would like the first pane to end.
When you resize panes, the following property changes in one pane do not
affect the appearance of the other pane: border or gridline properties,
locked titles, row height, column width, default column width, or
Reveal/Hide properties.
Arranging and hiding windows
There are several methods of rearranging windows on your desktop. You can
also hide windows.
To arrange windows
64
To show all windows on-screen at the same time, click Window, Tile
Top to Bottom or click Window, Tile Side by Side, as appropriate. When
possible, the windows are all given equal room on the screen.
To rearrange all open windows in overlapping layers, click Window,
Cascade. The top line of each window is revealed to show the name of
the notebook, chart, or dialog box it contains.
To place icons for minimized windows in a neat row along the bottom of
the screen, click Window, Arrange Icons.
To hide a window
Click the window, then click Window, Hide.
To show a hidden window
1 Click Window, Show.
2 Choose the name of the window to show.
Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components
Zoom lets you see an entire printed page or focus in on the detail of a few
cells. You can set Zoom for an entire notebook or for individual sheets. The
default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and
rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer.
Zooming affects only the display, not the printed output.
You can hide scroll bars, tabs, and graphics. You may want to hide parts of the
screen in just one notebook, for example, when you are creating a special
presentation notebook or form. Displaying only the outlines of graphics (such
as charts, Clipart, and shapes) allows you to scroll and print faster.
You can also hide parts of the screen in all future notebooks by setting display
options. For information about hiding a toolbar, see “Displaying, hiding, and
moving a toolbar” on page 26.
You can also hide borders and grid lines on a spreadsheet. These options are
useful when creating a form.
Quattro Pro offers many special features that you can display or hide. For
example, if you want to be advised that a particular cell contains a formula or
comment, you can have Quattro Pro flag that cell. You can decide whether
you want QuickTips or shortcut keys to display. You can disable the scroll
indicator box that tells you your location as you scroll. You can also hide the
input line if you don’t want it to appear on a spreadsheet. At the bottom of the
File menu, Quattro Pro keeps a record of the most recently edited files. You
can choose whether you want to display or hide this list.
Getting started
65
Corel RealTime Preview lets you watch how the selected cell data changes
as you point to font types, sizes, colors, background colors, and borders. You
can display or hide Corel RealTime Preview.
Zooming in and out
To enlarge a particular section of your notebook, or decrease its size so you
can see how an entire printed page will look, you can zoom in or out. You can
also use the Zoom to Fit button to automatically fill the screen with the
current selection.
To zoom in and out
1 Click View, Zoom.
2 Enable the button that corresponds to the zoom percentage you want.
3 In the Apply To section, enable the Notebook button.
The Zoom setting does not affect printed output. Click File, Page Setup,
Print Scaling to scale printed documents.
If you select one cell and choose Selection, Quattro Pro finds the
boundaries of the data, then zooms only that cell.
To restore the screen to its normal display, choose 100%.
To zoom data to fit on screen
1 Select the cells (or just one cells).
2 Right-click a toolbar and click Data Manipulation.
3 Click the Zoom To Fit button.
If you selected just one cell, Quattro Pro uses SpeedSelect to find the
boundaries of the data, then zooms it. To restore the screen to its normal
display, click View, Zoom, and choose 100%.
You can customize your toolbar to display Zoom setting buttons. For more
information about copying toolbar buttons, see “Editing toolbar buttons”
on page 28.
66
Hiding scroll bars, spreadsheet tabs, and objects
You can hide elements of your desktop from view.
To hide notebook scroll bars, spreadsheet tabs, and objects
1 Click Format, Notebook, Display.
2 To hide scroll bars or tabs, disable any of the following check boxes:
Vertical Scroll Bar
Horizontal Scroll Bar
Sheet Tabs
3 To hide objects, disable one of the following buttons:
Show All
Show Outline
Hide
To hide parts of the screen
1 Click Tools, Settings, Display.
2 Disable the appropriate check box.
To hide borders on a spreadsheet
2 Click the Display tab.
3 Disable one or both of the following check boxes:
Row Borders (numbers)
Column Borders (letters)
To hide grid lines on a spreadsheet
3 In the Gridlines section, disable one or both of the following check boxes:
Horizontal
Vertical
Getting started
67
To reveal a hidden feature
1 Follow steps 1and 2 in the previous procedure.
2 In the Gridlines section, enable one or both of the following check boxes:
Horizontal
Vertical
The Gridlines setting affects only on-screen display. Gridlines do not
appear on the printout. Use the Line Drawing cell property to produce
printed grids.
You can also right-click the spreadsheet tab, then select Sheet Properties
to hide rows, columns, or grid lines.
Displaying special Quattro Pro features
You can choose to display or hide many Quattro Pro features.
To access the Display Settings dialog box
To show...
Enable the following check box
The input line
Show Input Line
Formula markers
Show Formula Markers
The file history
Show File History
The scroll indicator box
Show Scroll Indicators
Shortcut keys with menu items
Show Shortcut Keys
Comment markers
Show Comment Marker
QuickTips
Show QuickTips
To hide these features, simply disable the corresponding check boxes.
68
Customizing menus
You can customize both the Menu Bar and the submenus that appear when
you right-click on the screen. You can add menu items to existing menus, or
add new menus to the Menu Bar. You can change the order of the menus and
menu items to give you quick, easy access to the functions you use
frequently.
Customizing a menu
You can customize the current menu by adding, deleting, and rearranging
menu items. You can also create a new menu.
To customize a menu
2 Click the Menu tab.
3 Choose the command you want from the Commands list.
Each command appears under the appropriate menu name.
4 Select the Main Menu category or submenu to which you want to add the
command.
5 Select where you want the command to appear in the menu structure.
The new command appears after the one selected.
6 Click the Add button.
7 Continue customizing the menu by adding options and separators,
removing options and separators, and rearranging menu items.
To rearrange menu items, select the item you want to move, then click
the Move Up or Move Down button.
To delete an item from the menu, select the item, then click the
Remove button.
To begin a completely new menu, click the Add Menu button.
To return the selected menu to its original display, click the Reset
button.
To rename a menu or menu item, click the item, then click again and
type a new name.
Getting started
69
To create a separator between commands, see “Creating toolbars” on
page 25.
When you customize menus, keep in mind that the Help topics referring
to those menus do not change.
You can add a submenu to an existing menu by first double-clicking the
existing menu.
When you restore the original menu, you will lose any changes you have
made to the menu.
You can also rename a menu or item by right-clicking it and clicking
Rename.
You can add Microsoft Excel menu items to your customized menus.
Changing the access key on a menu
An access key is the underlined letter in a command that executes that
command. Pressing an access key is used in lieu of mouse-clicking.
To change the access key on a menu
2 Click the Menu tab.
3 In the Menu box, choose the menu or menu command for which you want
to redefine an access key.
4 Double-click to open a menu or submenu.
5 Click the command’s name tag, and insert an ampersand (&) before the
letter you want to use as an access key.
6 Remove all unnecessary ampersands.
Make sure the letter you choose as an access key is unique to the menu or
submenu in which you place it.
70
Customizing keyboards
You can change the built-in keyboard assignments for accessing menu items.
You can create several sets of keyboard assignments to use for different
types of projects, saving and opening sets as they are needed.
System keys
The following keys or key combinations are system keys and are not valid as
access keys:
F1
ALT + F6
ALT + TAB
ALT + ESC
CTRL + ESC
CTRL + / (‘/’ on the numeric keypad is valid)
Other people can customize their environment to match yours by copying
your .SCK files. However, when a .SCK file is copied, any changes to the
original environment are lost.
Assigning a shortcut key to a menu item
You can create shortcut keys to execute Quattro Pro commands.
Quattro Pro provides a list of current shortcut keys. You can print the list or
export it to a text file.
To assign a shortcut key to a menu item
2 Click the Keyboard tab.
3 From the Table list box, choose the type of Quattro Pro object for which
you want to customize the toolbar.
4 Select the command you want to access from the keyboard from the
Commands list.
5 Place the insertion point in the Press New Shortcut Key box, then press
your new shortcut key for the selected command.
Getting started
71
6 Click the Assign button.
The new shortcut key appears in the Current Shortcut Keys list box.
To save your changes as a new keyboard file, click Save As.
To select a different keyboard file (.SCK) to customize and use, click
the Load button.
To remove a shortcut key, select the command option, choose the
shortcut key from the Current Shortcut Keys list box, then click the
Delete button.
To return the keyboard layout to its original settings, click the Reset
button.
To see a list of all available shortcut keys, click the View All button.
To print a list of shortcut keys
3 Click the View All button.
4 Click the Print button.
To export a list of shortcut keys to a text file
1 Follow steps 1-3 in the above procedure.
2 Click the Export to CSV button.
3 Type a name in the File Name text box.
You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key
combination CTRL + ALT + 1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the
CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession.
To automatically resolve keystroke conflicts, enable the Navigate To
Conflict On Assign check box.
Working with customized keyboard assignments
When you customize your keyboard, you can save the configuration. This file
can be opened or restored.
72
To open a set of customized keyboard assignments
3 Click the Load button.
4 Choose the Shortcut Key file (.SCK) you want to load.
To save a set of customized keyboard assignments
3 Click the Save As button.
4 Choose the Shortcut Key file (.SCK) in which you want to save your
assignments.
To restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings
3 Click the Reset button.
The keyboard configuration you choose is saved to the file listed below
the Current Shortcut Keys list box.
Removing an access key from a menu item
You remove an access key from a command when, for example, you want to
use it elsewhere.
To remove an access key from a menu item
3 In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder
containing the command you want to customize.
4 Click the command.
Getting started
73
5 In the Current Shortcut Keys box, select the key combination you want to
remove.
6 Click the Delete button.
Customizing toolbars and dialog boxes
You can customize a toolbar or Property Bar to display the buttons you want,
and in the order you want them.
Because of the enhanced toolbar functionality in Quattro Pro 9, you cannot
use toolbars that you created in earlier versions of Quattro Pro. These
toolbars must be created. However, you can copy toolbars that other people
have created in Quattro Pro 9. Just copy their .CFG files to your programs
folder. Remember that when a .CFG file is copied, any changes to the original
configuration are lost.
You can determine how dialog boxes appear. Dialog boxes can be simple and
match Windows file management dialogs. On the other hand, you can choose
enhanced dialog boxes that let you view file contents, save or rename files, or
see what is on your computer and network. You can also change network
connections, change file or folder properties, and create file or folder
shortcuts.
The dialog box settings you choose affects dialog boxes in Open, Save, Insert
File, Play or Record Macro, and Save As dialog boxes.
Customizing toolbars
You can customize toolbars to make them more pertinent to your
spreadsheet needs.
To customize a toolbar
3 To change a Property Bar, select it from the Property Bars list.
The Property Bar in the application window updates to match your
selection.
4 Select the command you want to add from the Commands list.
5 Drag buttons from the dialog box to any toolbar or Property Bar on your
screen.
74
To customize a toolbar that is not currently displayed, click Toolbars,
then select the toolbar you want to customize.
To rearrange buttons, click and drag them to different locations.
To return a toolbar to its original display, click Toolbars, select the
toolbar, then click the Reset button.
To delete buttons, drag them off the toolbar or Property Bar until an X
appears.
To see descriptions of each button, move the mouse over the button
until a QuickTip appears.
Customizing a title bar
For a more descriptive title bar, you can display the full pathname. To display
a different title in the title bar, start Quattro Pro in Developer mode.
To show full folder paths in title bars
2 Click the File Options tab.
3 Click Enable Full Path Titles.
To display a different title in the title bar
1 Start Quattro Pro in Developer mode with /d parameter. (For example,
C:\PROGRAM FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE
2000\QPW.EXE /d).
2 Click Tools, Settings, Title.
3 Type the new title.
For more information about Developer mode, see “Working in Developer
mode” on page 519.
Customizing dialog boxes
You can customize dialog boxes. For example, you can have Quattro Pro
display a simple dialog box with basic commands, or one with extra
functionality, such as a menu bar. Enhanced file management capabilities are
available in file management dialog boxes such as File, Save and File, Open.
Getting started
75
To specify simple or enhanced file dialogs
To use simpler Windows dialog boxes that display only basic
commands, disable the Use Enhanced File Dialogs check box.
To add more functionality to file management dialogs, enable the Use
Enhanced File Dialogs.
You can also create your own dialog boxes. For more information, see
“Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579.
Saving your workspace
The arrangement of windows on-screen is called a workspace. It includes the
position and size of all notebook windows and the names of the files
contained in each window. The positions of chart and dialog windows are not
saved as part of a workspace.
After you have created a workspace that best suits your needs, you can save
this configuration. When you want to use this customized workspace again,
you can restore it.
Saving a workspace
When you customize your workspace by rearranging the desktop
components, you can then save the workspace and use it with future
projects.
To save a workspace
1 Click File, Workspace, Save.
2 Type a filename.
Do not include a filename extension; the .WBS extension is automatically
added for workspace files.
76
Saving a workspace does not save the contents of the files within it. Use
File, Save or Save As to save files. Also, if you use File, Save As, you must
click File, Workspace, Save afterward so that Quattro Pro can open the
correct file the next time you try to open the workspace.
To restore a workspace
1 Click File, Workspace, Restore.
2 Choose the .WBS file you want.
Quattro Pro overlays existing windows with the windows stored in the
workspace file, then opens the appropriate file for each.
Quattro Pro always opens the latest saved version of files when you open
a workspace. If you leave the workspace and save a file included in the
workspace, Quattro Pro opens the updated version of the file the next
time you click File, Workspace, Restore.
Saving and closing notebooks
Each notebook is saved as its own file. The default filename for the first
notebook is NOTEBK1.QPW. The first time you save a notebook, you can
accept this default filename or rename the file.
Saving part of notebook
You can extract part of a notebook and save it as a separate file, leaving the
original file intact. This is similar to copying the data, but allows you to also
copy values or formulas, and to save the notebook’s cell names and charts
along with specified cells.
Closing notebooks
Before you close a Quattro Pro notebook, you should close all open
spreadsheet windows. When you close a notebook, you are prompted to save
any unsaved changes.
Saving a notebook
When saving a notebook for the first time, you have the option of accepting
the default name or providing a new name for the file. You also have the
option of applying a password to the notebook. For information about setting
passwords, see “Using password protection” on page 703.
Getting started
77
When you first open Quattro Pro, the default folder appears when you open
or save a file. If you open or save a file in another folder, that folder becomes
the default folder until you restart Quattro Pro. For more information on the
default folder, see “File-handling options” on page 652.
To save a notebook
1 Click File, Save.
2 Type a filename.
To save a file with a new filename
1 Click File, Save As.
2 From the Save In list box, choose the drive where you want to save the
file.
3 Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.
4 Type the filename in the File Name box.
To save the file with a password
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in the above procedure.
2 Enable the Password Protect check box.
3 Type the password.
4 Type the password again for verification.
To save the file with a password after you have saved it previously, click
File, Save As, then select Password Protect.
To specify a default filename extension
3 Enter one to three letters in the File Extension box. The default filename
extension is .QPW.
78
It is useful to specify a different extension if you usually save or open files
in a format other than .QPW. For example, if you work mostly with
Microsoft Excel files, it would be helpful to specify .XLS as the default
extension.
To specify a new default folder
3 In the Default Folder list box, specify the new default folder, for example,
c:\myfiles.
Backing up files
If you exit Quattro Pro without saving your document, or if a power or
network failure occurs, you will lose your work unless you have selected the
Document Backup option. If you exit Quattro Pro unexpectedly with Timed
Backup activated, you are prompted to recover any open files the next time
you start Quattro Pro.
To back up your notebooks automatically
3 Enable the Timed Backup Every check box.
4 In the Minutes box, set a time interval from 1 to 59 minutes.
Saving part of a notebook
When you save part of a notebook, it is extracted and saved in a separate file,
leaving the original file intact. You can choose to copy values or formulas, and
the notebook’s cell names and charts are saved along with the specified cells.
You can choose to save formula cells just as they are, or you can choose to
save their resulting values.
When you open a file saved with the Formulas option, formulas adjust to
reflect their new positions, even if they are absolute. If a formula refers to
cells outside the selection being saved, its results may be inaccurate. In this
case, it is best to use the Values option.
You can also extract data to a different file format. When doing this, you
should set up the extracted cells in a way that makes sense to the program.
For example, when extracting data to a Paradox file format, the cells should
Getting started
79
list related data in columns (which are interpreted as fields), and should
contain column headings (which are interpreted as field names).
If you include the filename extension used by a different program, the file is
saved in the appropriate file format. For example, to create a tab-delimited
text file, use the extension .TXT and set the File Type to Text (.TXT).
To extract part of a notebook
1 Click Tools, Data Tools, Extract to File.
2 In the Cell(s) edit field, type the cell name or coordinates to be saved.
You can specify noncontiguous selections by separating the selections
with commas.
To save the cells exactly as they are, enable the Formulas button.
To save the resulting values instead of the original formulas, enable the
Values button.
4 Enter the filename you want.
5 To password protect the file, type a password.
The extracted data begins at cell A1, regardless of its position in the
original file.
If the selection includes hidden rows or columns, the hidden rows or
columns are saved in the new file, and remain hidden when you open the
file.
Some cell names and charts saved in the extracted file may not be
meaningful if they refer to cells that were not also extracted. You can
delete them, reassign them, or ignore them.
Closing a notebook
When you close a file, you remove the notebook and all its associated
information from the desktop. Always save your file before closing to keep
any changes you have made.
To close a notebook without saving
Click File, Close.
If the notebook has unsaved changes, a dialog box appears prompting you
to save your changes. Click No.
80
To exit Quattro Pro
Click File, Exit.
If you have not changed any open files since the last time you saved them,
the files close. If you have changed any files, you are prompted to save
your work.
You can also exit Quattro Pro and save all notebooks by right-clicking the
Quattro Pro button on the taskbar and clicking Close.
Getting started
81
MOVING BETWEEN
MICROSOFT EXCEL AND
QUATTRO PRO
3
You can convert Microsoft Excel workbooks to Quattro Pro notebooks with
truncating data. When you finish working on a file, you can save it in a
Microsoft Excel, Quattro Pro, or other file format.
In Quattro Pro, you can open files in the following Microsoft Excel file
formats:
Microsoft Excel 97
Microsoft Excel v7
Microsoft Excel v5
Microsoft Excel v3
You can save files in the following Microsoft Excel file formats:
Microsoft Excel 97
Microsoft Excel v7
Microsoft Excel v5
Quattro Pro translates most Microsoft Excel formats, navigational tools, print
options, formulas, and spreadsheet functions. Occasionally, some information
in a workbook cannot be imported or may not be displayed in the same way
after the conversion process. For a list of conversion considerations, see
83
Conversion notes for Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro in the Reference
information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
You can also use Microsoft Excel menus and tab names when working with a
notebook.
Quattro Pro can also open and save other file formats. For more
information, see “Opening, saving, and customizing file formats” on page
653.
Quattro Pro does not support Microsoft Excel macros.
Opening and saving Microsoft Excel workbooks
You can open Microsoft Excel workbooks in Quattro Pro. When you open a
Microsoft Excel workbook, Quattro Pro reads the Microsoft Excel file into
memory. If you change the data, you can save the changes as a
.QPW (v7, v8, v9) file so that you do not lose formulas or features not
supported by Microsoft Excel.
Microsoft Excel workbooks that contain custom spreadsheet names may not
open in Quattro Pro if characters used in the names are not recognized by
Quattro Pro. In this event, Quattro Pro displays a message warning you about
the invalid spreadsheet name. You can change the spreadsheet name to make
it compatible with Quattro Pro. For a list of valid Quattro Pro characters, see
“Naming a spreadsheet” on page 50.
Opening and saving a Microsoft Excel workbook
You can open a Microsoft Excel workbook in Quattro Pro. Quattro Pro reads
Microsoft Excel version 3, 5, 7, and 97 workbook files.
If you try to open a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains custom
spreadsheet names that use characters not recognized by Quattro Pro, you
are advised to change the spreadsheet names. For a list of valid Quattro Pro
characters, see “Naming a spreadsheet” on page 50.
To open a Microsoft Excel workbook in Quattro Pro
1 Click File, Open.
2 Choose the drive where the workbook file is stored from the Look In list
box.
3
Double-click the folder in which the workbook file is stored.
4 Double-click the filename.
84
To save a Microsoft Excel workbook as a Quattro Pro notebook
2 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list
box.
4 If you want to change the file’s name, type the filename in the File Name
box.
By default, the file is given a .QPW extension.
To address the problem of invalid Quattro Pro characters in
spreadsheet names
1 Observe the invalid spreadsheet name displayed in the Invalid Name text
box.
To have Quattro Pro change the spreadsheet name to include only valid
Quattro Pro characters, enable the Fix Invalid Spreadsheet Name
button. The new name appears in the New Name text box. You can
make further changes to the name if you use valid Quattro Pro
characters.
To keep the original spreadsheet name, enable the Do Not Fix Invalid
Spreadsheet Name button.
If you enable the Do Not Fix Invalid Spreadsheet Name button and try to
use the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet name, you cannot initiate formulas
and macros because Quattro Pro does not recognize the invalid characters
used in the spreadsheet name.
If you enable the Fix Invalid Spreadsheet Name button but have used the
original spreadsheet name in cell references, remember to search for
these references and replace them with the new name.
Saving a Quattro Pro notebook as a Microsoft Excel file
You can save a Quattro Pro notebook file as a Microsoft Excel file. However,
some file format features unique to Quattro Pro may be lost. For more
information, see Conversion notes for Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro in the
Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
85
To save a Quattro Pro notebook as a Microsoft Excel file
box.
5 Choose a Microsoft Excel file format (Microsoft Excel 97 or Microsoft
Excel v5/v7).
When you open a Microsoft Excel workbook in Quattro Pro, edit the
workbook, then click File, Save, the workbook file is saved as an .XLS file.
When you click File, Save As, the file defaults to a .QPW file.
Working with Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in
Quattro Pro
If you are switching to Quattro Pro from Microsoft Excel 97, you can use
Microsoft Excel 97 menus in Quattro Pro. This lets you work in a familiar
environment until you are accustomed to the Quattro Pro menu structure.
You can change spreadsheet tabs in a Quattro Pro notebook to the Microsoft
Excel 97 spreadsheet naming convention. This helps preserve the integrity
of formulas that have explicitly referenced spreadsheet names when you
open Microsoft Excel files.
Using Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro
You can use Microsoft Excel menus and tabs while working in Quattro Pro.
To use Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro
3 Click Microsoft Excel 97 in the Compatibility Options list box.
To switch to a Microsoft Excel 97 menu
1 Right-click anywhere on the Menu Bar.
2 Click Microsoft Excel Menu.
86
To switch to Microsoft Excel naming conventions for spreadsheet
tabs
3 Enable the Display as Numbers check box.
If you try to open a Microsoft Excel workbook that contains custom
spreadsheet names created with characters not recognized by Quattro
Pro, a warning message appears. For more information, see “Opening and
saving Microsoft Excel workbooks” on page 84.
87
WORKING WITH PROJECT
TEMPLATES
4
A template helps you start a notebook. A project template provides a basic
format and structure for spreadsheets and data entry forms commonly used
in business and at home. You can also create your own project templates.
PerfectExpert project templates
WordPerfect Office 2000 templates are divided into categories that are based
on WordPerfect Office 2000 applications. All of the available PerfectExpert
project templates appear in a dialog box.
PerfectExpert panel
When you open a project, a panel appears on the left side of the document
window. You can use the options on the PerfectExpert panel to complete the
document, spreadsheet, or slide show you are working on. For more
information about the PerfectExpert panel, see, “Using the PerfectExpert
panel” on page 95.
89
Creating projects using templates
A project is a notebook template you can use to create a new notebook. Many
of the Quattro Pro project templates provide a basic format and structure for
common spreadsheets and data entry forms.
A project template
provides a basic
format for
spreadsheet projects
and data entry
forms.
PerfectExpert and templates
If you created templates in a previous version of WordPerfect or Quattro Pro,
you can copy the templates into the CUSTOM QP TEMPLATES folder in
C:\PROGRAM FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE
2000\TEMPLATE. The templates appear when you click File, New From
Project.
Choosing a project template
Quattro Pro provides more than 130 project templates to help you create
home and business projects.
To create a notebook based on a project
1 Click File, New From Project.
2 Choose a category from the Categories list box.
3 Choose a project from the Projects list box.
A description of the project appears below the Projects list box.
4 Click the Create button.
The PerfectExpert will help you create your project.
90
To close the PerfectExpert panel, click the Close Window button in the
upper-right corner.
Displaying a list of previously used projects
You can view a list of all the projects you’ve worked on.
To display a list of previously used projects
2 Click the Work On tab.
3 Double-click the project.
You can open any of these projects from the Work On dialog box.
Displaying project templates when Quattro Pro opens
You can have Quattro Pro display project templates each time you open the
application.
To display project templates when Quattro Pro opens
2 Click the Options button, then click Show This Dialog At Startup.
Changing a project description
You can change the name and description of a project.
To change a project description
2 From the Categories list box, choose a category.
A description of the project appears below the Projects list box.
4 Click the Options button, then click Project Properties.
5 In the Modify A Project dialog box, do one or both of the following:
91
To change the name of the project, type a new name in the Display
Name box.
To change the description of the project, type a new description in the
Description box.
Creating a list of favorite project templates
If you plan to use a project template often, you can add it to the Favorites list.
To add a project to the Favorites list
2 From the Categories list box, choose a category.
3 Choose the project you want to add to the Favorites list.
4 Click the Copy To Favorites button.
You can display items in the Favorites folder by clicking File, New From
Project, then choosing the Favorites category from the list box.
Working with project template categories
Project template categories are typically based on WordPerfect Office 2000
applications. Quattro Pro also lists the available project templates for each
category. You can create new categories, and rename or delete existing
categories. You can also add, copy, or move project templates to categories.
Creating, renaming, and deleting template categories
You can create and rename new categories. You can also delete existing ones.
To create a category
2 Click the Options button, then click Create Category.
3 In the Create A Category box, type a name for the new category.
If you want the category to appear near the top of the list, begin the name
with a bracket ([) or asterisk (*).
92
To rename a category
1 Choose the category from the Categories list box.
2 Click the Options button, then click Rename Category.
3 Type a new name in the Rename Category box.
To delete a category
1 Choose the category from the Categories list box.
2 Click the Options button, then click Remove Category.
Deleting a category does not delete project templates from the hard drive.
If you delete a category that contains project templates not stored in
another category, Quattro Pro creates a new category, “[Deleted
Projects],” that contains these project templates.
Adding, moving, and copying project templates to categories
You can add new project templates to categories, or move or copy existing
project templates to different categories. For information about creating your
own template, see “Creating your own project template” on page 94.
Predefined project files, such as the memo, agenda, and budget project
templates included with WordPerfect Office 2000, have a .AST or .ASX
extension. They are stored in the C:\PROGRAM
FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE 2000\TEMPLATE folder. To
obtain additional predefined project templates, check the Corel Web page at
www.corel.com.
When you add a document, spreadsheet, or slide show to the project
template list, you can use that file as a template on which to base similar
documents, spreadsheets, or slide shows.
To add an existing project to a category
2 From the Categories list box, choose the category where you want the
new project to appear.
3 Click the Options button, then click Add Project.
4 Enable the I Want To Add An Existing Project button to add an existing
project.
5 Click the Next button.
93
6 Type the filename or browse for the file.
7 Click Finish.
To add a new document or executable file to a category
1 Follow steps 1-3 in the previous procedure.
2 Enable the I Want To Add Another Document button.
4 Specify the name and description of the document.
5 Type the filename or browse for the file.
The new project is added to the Quattro Pro Custom Templates category.
When you open a document you added to a project templates category, it
opens in its own application.
To move or copy a project to a different category
2 From the Categories list box, choose the category that contains the
project you want to copy or move.
3 From the Projects list box, choose a project.
4 Click the Options button, then click Copy Project or Move Project.
5 Choose the category where you want to place the project.
Creating your own project template
You can create your own custom Quattro Pro template. For information about
adding your project templates to a project category, see “Adding, moving, and
copying project templates to categories” on page 93.
To create a project template
1 From the Categories list box, choose Custom QP Templates.
2 From the Projects list box, choose Template.
A blank project template opens.
94
4 Click the Instructions tab.
Follow the guidelines for building a template.
Using the PerfectExpert panel
When you open a Quattro Pro project, a notebook opens. On the left side of
the notebook is the PerfectExpert panel. The buttons on this panel help you
manage your project. The PerfectExpert prompts you as you enter data. The
buttons are as follows:
Turn Highlight On/Off — enables or disables yellow highlighted areas on
the project that designate areas where the user can enter data
Insert Sample Data — places sample data in the project to guide you when
you enter data
Remove Sample Data — deletes all sample data
Save A Version — saves a version of the document so that you can
compare results with different versions
Open A Version — retrieves a version of the document so that you can
compare results with the current version
Print Preview — lets you view your document before you print it
Print — prints the document
Save — lets you name and save the file
95
CREATING A SPREADSHEET
5
You can create spreadsheet-based documents from templates or a blank
notebook. Once you have created a spreadsheet, you can enter data and add
comments to your cell content. You can also calculate total rows and columns
of numbers. You can perform simple calculations using automatic calculation
tools or perform complex calculations using formulas and spreadsheet
functions. For more information about using formulas and functions see,
“Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.
Creating and opening a notebook
Quattro Pro contains spreadsheets in a notebook file. When you start a new
spreadsheet in Quattro Pro, you must first create a notebook. You can create
a new notebook from a list of project templates or from the default template.
The default template is a notebook containing empty spreadsheets. You can
also open an existing notebook or customize how Quattro Pro opens.
Project templates prompt you for data, and then format and calculate it
automatically. When you create a blank notebook, you must format the data
yourself and perform your own calculations. For information about using
project templates, see “Working with project templates” on page 89.
Creating a new notebook
You can create a notebook from a project template or from the default
template. Project templates prompt you for input, determine the format, and
perform most calculations for you. The default template allows you to
perform all the calculations and formatting yourself.
97
To create a notebook using a project template
2 Select Quattro Pro 9 from the Categories list box.
5 Click the appropriate buttons on the PerfectExpert panel.
To create a notebook using the default template
Click File, New.
Opening an existing notebook
You can open any existing Quattro Pro notebook available on your computer.
You can also open other file formats within Quattro Pro. For information
about opening other file formats, see “Managing files and data” on page 651.
To open an existing notebook
1 Click File, Open.
2 Choose a file from the Filename list box.
3 Click Open.
Version 9 Quattro Pro files use the .QPW .extension. Earlier versions use
.WB3, .WB2, or .WB1 extensions.
Customizing Quattro Pro start options
You can customize Quattro Pro start options, for example, you can
automatically open a specific notebook every time you launch Quattro Pro.
By default, Quattro Pro opens with the Quattro Pro splash screen and then
proceeds to the first spreadsheet in a blank notebook. For a complete list of
custom start options, see Startup switches for Quattro Pro in the Quattro Pro
online Help.
To start Quattro Pro with custom options
1 Click Start, Run on the Windows Taskbar.
98
2 Type the QPW path followed by a space, then type the startup option.
For example, C:\COREL\SUITE9\PROGRAMS\QPW MYFILE.QPW
starts Quattro Pro and opens MYFILE.QPW.
Working with data
Quattro Pro recognizes two types of data in a cell: labels and values. A label
contains alphanumeric characters such as titles and phone numbers. All
values are calculable data.
You can enter labels and values in your spreadsheet by selecting the cell and
typing the data. Quattro Pro determines the type of data by the characters
you type. After you type data into the cell, Quattro Pro displays whether the
data is a label or a value in the Application Bar.
By default, labels are always left-aligned. The format of values depends on
the type of value, the number format you choose, and the default settings.
There are three types of values:
You can enter labels
and values into a
cell.
numbers
dates and times
formulas
Some characters act as both values and labels, depending on the context. For
example, a minus sign (-) before a number indicates a negative number while
a minus sign (-) between two numbers indicates subtraction.
You must follow the rules outlined in this section when entering your data to
ensure Quattro Pro classifies the data correctly. If you enter values or labels
incorrectly, it affects formatting and any calculations you may perform.
Working with labels and special characters
A label can be only text, text with numbers, or numbers seen as text. For
example, 145 Howard Street, an address, and 202-555-1212, a phone number,
are labels, so they are not calculated as formulas. A label can begin with any
letter, punctuation mark, or symbol, except the following characters:
99
Character
Description
/
forward slash
+
plus
-
minus
$
dollar sign
(
open parenthesis
@
at sign
#
number sign
.
period
=
equals
If you type one of the characters listed above, Quattro Pro treats the
information as a formula or value. (This includes the currency symbol from
your default language setting.) If you want the information to be a label, you
must first type a quotation mark. For example, to enter (Before Taxes), type:
“(Before Taxes).
Quattro Pro does not calculate labels. All labels are left-aligned within the
cell. Labels that exceed the width of cells overlap adjacent cells if the
adjacent cells are empty. If adjacent cells are not empty, overlapping
information appears truncated. You can view the entire cell contents in the
input line, wrap the text to the next line within the cell, or adjust the size of
the rows and columns to show the entire label.
Quattro Pro
interprets text as
labels.
You can also change the alignment of the cell content and force Quattro Pro
to read values as labels by entering any one of the following label characters
before the value: ‘ “ ^. For more information about formatting, see ”Editing
and formatting a spreadsheet" on page 159.
Entering labels
Although only the portion of the label that fits in the column is displayed,
Quattro Pro stores all the text. The characters you type in the cell appear in
100
the input line above the column letters. When you select a cell containing a
label that exceeds the width of the cell, the entire label appears.
To enter a label
1 Click a cell.
2 Type alphanumeric characters.
3 Press ENTER.
To enter several lines of a label in a cell
1 Click a cell.
2 Click Format, Selection.
3 Click the Alignment tab.
4 Enable the Wrap Text check box.
5 Click OK.
6 Type the first line of text.
7 Press ALT+SHIFT+ENTER to move to the next line.
To turn a value into a label... Do the following...
Left-aligned
Type ‘ before the value
Right-aligned
Type “ before the value
Centered
Type ^ before the value
If you make a mistake while entering data or want to undo an action, click
Edit, Undo.
Entering special characters and symbols
Use symbols to access characters that are not on your keyboard, such as
icons, phonetic characters, and characters in other languages. You can insert
these characters in any cell.
101
You can enter
symbols and special
characters into a cell.
To enter special characters and symbols
1 Double-click a cell, then click Insert, Symbol.
2 Select a character set, then select a character.
3 Click one of the following:
Insert — to insert the character and leave the dialog box open
Insert, Close — to insert the character and close the dialog box
You can also click the WP Characters button on the Property Bar to access
symbols.
To repeat characters in a cell
Type a backslash character (\) followed by the character you want to
repeat in the cell.
For example, to fill a cell with hyphens, type \-.
To repeat a series of characters in a pattern
1 Type a backslash character (\).
2 Type the first set of characters to be repeated after the backslash, such as
\abc.
If you want a label to begin with a backslash, but you do not want to repeat
the characters after it, precede the backslash with an alignment character.
You can align data by preceding the data with an alignment character.
102
Working with numbers
A value is a number, formula, date or time. Characters that do not fit into a
cell appear in exponential format.
Numbers can only consist of the following:
numerals (0 to 9)
minus sign (-) for negative numbers
plus sign (+) for positive numbers
currency symbols, for example $
one decimal point
a trailing %
an E for scientific notation
When entering numbers, remember the following rules:
Use a minus sign (-), not parentheses, to indicate a negative number.
However, if you change the numeric format to currency or comma,
negative numbers appear in parentheses.
Do not include spaces in the entry.
If a number does not fit into a cell, it is displayed in exponential format.
Use numeric characters, not letters, to represent 1 and 0. For example, do
not substitute a lowercase l (“el”) for 1 (one) or an uppercase O (“oh”) for
0 (zero).
Entering numbers
You can enter numbers in a spreadsheet in the same way that you enter
labels. The numbers you type appear in the input line as you type them.
When you press ENTER, the word Value appears in the Application Bar
identifying the data type of the cell.
103
To enter numbers
1 Click the cell.
2 Type the entry.
The characters you type appear in the cell and on the input line above the
column letters.
3 Press ENTER.
To enter fractions
1 Click a cell.
2 Type the number as a decimal.
4 Click the Numeric Format tab.
5 Enable the Fraction button.
6 Selection a type from the Fractions list.
Working with dates and times
You can enter a date or time in many formats, such as 04-04-98, 04/04/98, and
01:42:30 PM.
Quattro Pro stores all dates as serial integers so that it can calculate dates as
values. The minimum serial integer is
-109,571, which equals January 1, 1600; the maximum is 474,816, which
equals December 31, 3199. The serial number appears in the input line when
you select the cell.
Serial numbers let you use date or time values in formulas. For example,
subtracting 10/1/92 from 10/8/92 results in 7. Time is represented as decimal
fractions, between 0.000 (for 00:00:00) and 0.99999 (for 23:59:59). Mixed
numbers indicate the date and time: 2.5 represents January 1, 1900 at 12:00
noon.
You can enter dates
and times into a cell.
Quattro interprets
dates and times as
serial numbers
104
If your notebook includes many dates, you may want to force specific cells to
accept only dates and times. This is particularly useful when you create
notebooks that others will use. For information about restricting cell data,
see “Restricting and annotating cell data” on page 114.
Applying formats to dates and times
While Quattro Pro reads dates and times as values, it applies specific
formatting and calculation criteria to them depending on the date and time
criteria you set as your defaults. When you type a date, the cell formatting
automatically switches to the date format you typed. You can enter dates and
times in any default date and time format.
Format
Example
DD-MMM-YYYY
28-Apr-1999
DD-MMM-YY
11-Nov-99
DD-MMM
11-Nov
MMM-YY
Nov-99
M/DD/YY
5/15/99
MM/DD/YY
05/16/99
MM/DD
05/16
DD/M, assumes the current year
15/5
DD/MM, assumes the current year
15/05
DD-MMM, assumes the current year
04-Mar
MMM-YY, assumes the first day of the month
Mar-99
MMM-YYYY, assumes first day of the month
Apr-1999
HH:MM:SS AM/PM
04:10:45 AM
HH:MM AM/PM
10:45 AM
The long international time format is ordinarily HH:MM:SS (13:42:30).
The short international time format is ordinarily HH:MM (13:42).
International date and time formats are set using Tools, Settings,
International Settings. If you change the settings, you must conform to
the new settings when you enter dates or times in an international format.
105
Once you enter a date or time, you can change to another date or time
format.
For more information about setting numeric formats, see “Editing and
formatting spreadsheets.”
Entering years in two digits
If you enter a year using two digits, Quattro Pro assumes the century based
on the following year ranges:
Type the year
Quattro Pro assumes
30-99
1930-1999
00-29
2000-2029
For example, the date 4/26/99 is interpreted as 4/26/1999. The date 2/2/25 is
interpreted as 2/2/2025. To override the year assumption, enter all four digits
for the year, for example, 4/26/1927.
Entering dates prior to 1900
If you enter a negative serial date value (for example, for a date before
December 30, 1899) and reformat it as a date, you should set your system to
the four-digit Windows default setting, then select either the Short Date
International (11/15/1899) or Long Date International (Wednesday,
November 15, 1899) date format in Format, Selection to properly display
century information for the date.
Other standard and user-defined four-digit display options do not display the
century information properly for negative serial date numbers.
About the Year 2000
Quattro Pro has always stored dates entered into a cell (except when entered
as a label) as a unique date/time serial number, or integer date value.
Therefore, Quattro Pro has always provided for date storage which includes
the century information.
For the transition to the year 2000, it is best to enter all dates (in both
numeric and label formats) in a four-digit year, or “explicit century” year
format (such as mm/dd/yyyy).
Entering dates and times
Dates are right-aligned by default. You can enter a date value in any of the
formats listed in “Applying formats to dates and times” on page 105. You can
106
also use the @DATE function to return the date and time serial number for a
specified date, for example, @DATE(97,8,22) = 35664.
To enter a date or time
1 Click a cell.
2 Type the date or time according to one of the available date formats.
3 Press ENTER.
To enter the current date
1 Click a cell.
2 Click Insert, Date.
To enter a date using the spreadsheet Date function
1 Click a cell.
2 Click the Spreadsheet Function button on the toolbar.
3 Select Date from the Function Category
4 Select the DATE function from the Function list.
5 Enter the date (year, month, and day) between the parentheses.
6 Press ENTER.
Automatically entering data
You can fill cells with numbers, a combination of letters and numbers, or
specific types of labels, such as days of the week or months of the year.
Based on the entries in one or more cells, you can quickly fill cells with a
sequence of data by using one of the following data-filling tools:
QuickType
QuickFill
Fill Series
You can automate data entry by using either QuickType to continue a pattern
or QuickFill to enter a predefined series. QuickType lets you automatically
repeat labels and functions. The QuickFill button is used to fill cells according
to one or more seed values or series list. You can use QuickFill with a seed
value or on empty cells. You can also use QuickFill to name sheet tabs and
you can create custom series to use with QuickFill. The Fill Series option is
used to specify rules for filling the selected cells. You can use numbers,
dates, times, or formulas.
107
Data-filling labels using QuickType
The QuickType feature lets you automatically repeat labels and functions.
QuickType remembers the data you’ve inserted in a column and, once it
recognizes the initial letters or sequence you are typing, automatically
inserts the data. As you type a function, the likeliest function is displayed.
To have text filled in for you
2 Click the General tab.
3 Select QuickType, then click OK.
4 Type text in a cell.
Data-filling values using seed values
The QuickFill tool saves you time by automatically filling a selection of cells
that you start with a seed value. When filling a selection of cells, you can
have one seed value or many. The blank cells to be filled must be contiguous
with the seed value(s), extending down the column or across the row to the
right. You can fill a 3-D or noncontiguous selection, but each sheet or
selection must have its own seed value or values for its own filled sequence.
You can extend in two directions at once by selecting cells with seed values
next to the upper-left cell. The types of entries you can use as QuickFill seed
values, along with the resulting sequence, are as follows:
108
Seed value(s)
Continued sequence
1st
2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th. . .
Qtr 1
Qtr 2, Qtr 3, Qtr 4, Qtr 1. . .
1st Quarter
2nd Quarter, 3rd Quarter. . .
Jan
Feb, Mar. . .
January
February, March. . .
Mon
Tue, Wed, Thu. . .
Monday
Tuesday, Wednesday. . .
Week 1
Week 2, Week 3. . .
P1, P2, Total
P3, P4, Total, P5, P6, Total. . .
Jan 89, Feb 89
Mar 89, Apr 89. . .
100 Days
101 Days, 102 Days, 103 Days. . .
100 Days, 200 Days
300 Days, 400 Days, 500 Days. . .
1, 3, 5
7, 9, 11, 13. . .
1, 3, 6
8.333333, 10.83333, 13.33333. . .
04/05/92
04/06/92, 04/07/92. . .
The last example shows the seed value formatted as a date.
To use QuickFill with a seed value
1 Enter a seed value in a cell.
2 Select the seed value cell and the blank cells you want to fill.
3 Right-click the selection then click QuickFill.
To fill a selection of cells using QuickFill
1 Select a block or blocks of cells.
2 Type the first value or first few values of the series (for example, January
or 10, 20, or 1st Quarter).
3 Drag across the cells you want to fill, including the original cells.
4 Right-click the selection then click QuickFill.
Using QuickFill to enter data in cells and sheet tabs
You can data-fill cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically. All tabs are filled
until the series is complete. To use only part of the series, modify the series
and save it under another name, then use the new series to fill the tabs.
To use QuickFill on empty cells
1 Select the cells.
2 Click the QuickFill button.
3 Choose a series from the Series Name list.
A list of its elements appears in the Series Element box.
4 Enable one of the following fill options:
Columns — fills to the bottom of the first column of cells, then
continues at the top of the second column
Rows — fills the first row of cells, then the second. This procedure is
similar to using Edit Fill, Fill Series
109
To use QuickFill on sheet tabs
1 Select an empty cell.
3 Choose a list series from the Series Name list.
A list of its elements appears in the Series Element field.
4 Enable the Tabs option to fill the sheet tabs.
Creating QuickFill series
You can create your own sequences of values and labels to enter with
QuickFill.
To create a new QuickFill formula series
4 Type a descriptive name in the Series Name box.
5 Enable the Formula button in the Series Type group.
6 Type the first number in the series into the Seed Value box.
This value is used as a constant in the formula. A string seed value is
evaluated as zero.
7 Type the formula in the Formula box.
Use the Seed, Previous, and Iteration buttons to insert the seed value,
previous value, and iteration number into the formula.
For example, the following formula produces a series that starts with 5
and increases by 5 (5, 10, 15, 20, and so on): #SEED#+(5*#ITER#).
To create a new QuickFill list series
4 Type a descriptive name in the Series Name box.
5 Enable the List button in the Series Type group.
Enable the Repeating check box if you want the series to start again when
every element has been entered once.
110
6 Type the first element of the list in the Value box, then click the Add
button to add the element to the list.
7 Type the remaining elements as you entered the first.
To insert an element above an existing element, highlight the existing
element, type the new element in the Value field, then click the Insert
button.
Modifying, renaming and deleting a QuickFill series
You can modify, rename, or remove a QuickFill series from the series list.
To change a QuickFill series
2
Click the QuickFill button.
3 Select the series to change.
4 Click the Modify button.
5 Change the series options.
If you selected a list series, change the Series Elements Options.
If you selected a formula series, change the Formula Definition Options.
For help on the options, click in the title bar, then click the option.
To add elements from a list in the notebook
3 Click Extract and specify the cells that contain the new series elements.
4 Enable the Override Existing Values check box to replace any existing
elements with those in the notebook.
To rename a QuickFill series
1 Click Edit, Fill, Define QuickFill.
2 Select the series, then click Rename.
111
You can also perform any of the procedures listed above using Edit, Fill,
Define QuickFill.
To delete a QuickFill series
3 Select the series to delete.
4 Click Delete, then click Yes.
Setting up a fill series for numbers and formulas
You can use the Fill Series option to create your own custom number and
formula series.
To fill cells with a sequence of numbers or formulas
1 Select the cells to fill.
If you select a group of noncontiguous blocks of cells, Quattro Pro fills the
cells in the order selected.
2 Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series.
3 Type a number or a formula in the Start Value box for the first cell.
4 Type a step value.
This is the constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with
the Start value or the previous value. If you want the values to decrease,
enter a negative number and a stop value that is lower than the start
value. The step value can also be a formula.
5 Type a stop value (the default stop value is 8191).
6 Choose one of the following options:
Column — fills down the columns, starting with the left-most column
Row — fills across rows, starting with the top row
7 Choose one of the following number or formula series from the Series
section that you would like to govern the fill:
Linear (addition) — adds the step value to the previous value (defined
at first to be the start value)
112
Growth (multiplication) — multiplies the step value by the previous
value
Power (exponentiation) — uses the step value as the exponent of the
previous value
Setting up a fill series for dates and times
You can use the Fill Series option to create your own custom date series. To
fill dates and times, you must know the date serial number. For more
information about date serial numbers, see “Working with dates and times”
on page 104.
To fill cells with a sequence of dates or times
1 Select the cells to fill.
If you select noncontiguous blocks of cells, Quattro Pro fills cells in the
order selected.
2 Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series.
3 Type a date or time serial number in the start value box for the first cell.
To find the serial number of the date you want to start the series, enter a
date in a cell on the spreadsheet using one of the recognized date formats,
press ENTER, click on the cell, then view the serial number in the input
line.
4 Type a Step value.
This is the constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with
the start value or the previous value. If you want the values to decrease,
enter a negative number and a stop value that is lower than the start
value. The step value can also be a formula.
5 Type a stop value (the default stop value is 8191).
Column — fills down the columns, starting with the left-most column
Row — fills across rows, starting with the top row
7 Choose one of the following date or time series from the Series section
that you would like to govern the fill
Year — increments the series by year
Month — increments the series by month
Week — increments the series by a 7-day week
Weekday — increments the series by week days only
113
Day — increments the series by day
Hour — increments the series by hour
Minute — increments the series by minute
Second — increments the series by second
Deleting values and labels
When deleting values and labels, you can choose to delete only part of the
cell contents, the entire cell contents, or the contents and the formatting. You
can always restore the deleted data using the Undo feature. The Undo
feature only works on the last deletion you performed.
Deleting data
You can delete any data in a spreadsheet.
To cancel changes before you press ENTER
Press ESC.
To delete cell contents
Click the cell and type new data or press DEL.
To delete cell contents and formatting
Select the cells, right-click the cells, then click Clear.
To delete part of the cell contents
Double-click the cell, click in the cell to place the insertion point, then
press BACKSPACE or DEL.
To restore an accidental deletion
Click Edit, Undo.
Restricting and annotating cell data
You can set restrictions on a cell to make Quattro Pro read the cell data as a
specific data type, regardless of what the data is. You can also add comments
to cells. By default, comments do not print with the document, but you can
set up your page view to show and print comments on the spreadsheet.
114
You can annotate
your cell data with
cell comments.
For information about setting page view options, see “Changing your view of
the notebook” on page 59.
Restricting data
You can set restrictions if you want Quattro Pro to interpret numeric or
formula data as a label or date. For example, Quattro Pro reads a phone
number as a formula unless you specify that the phone number is to be read
as a label only, or you type a label character before the phone number. For
more information about label characters, see “Working with labels and
special characters” on page 99.
To restrict cells
1 Select the cells to restrict.
3 Click the Constraints tab.
4 Enable one of the following buttons
General — accepts both labels and dates
Labels Only — accepts only labels
Dates Only — accepts only dates
Adding and editing cell comments
Quattro Pro lets you add comments to cells. Cells with an attached comment
have a red triangle in the upper-right corner. The comments appear in a
bubble when you place the pointer over the cell. You can view cell comments
directly on the spreadsheet and print these comments by setting your page
view to view comments on the page.
To insert a cell comment
1 Click a cell.
115
2 Click Insert, Comment.
3 Type the comment, and click outside the comment bubble.
You can also add a non-bubble comment inside a cell by typing a semicolon
(;) after a formula or value, then typing the comment. You can see the text
after the semicolon on the input line when you click the cell.
To read a cell comment
Point to a cell that has a small red triangle in its upper-right corner.
To view cell comments on the spreadsheet
Click View, Comments.
To edit or delete a cell comment
1 Right-click a cell that contains a comment.
2 Click one of the following
Delete Comment — deletes a cell comment
Edit Comment — edits a cell comment
To restore a comment
Click Edit, Undo.
To change comment attributes
Right-click inside the comment bubble, then click Cell, Comment,
Properties.
To move a comment
Click the cell containing the comment you want to edit, then drag the
comment triangle icon to another cell.
Creating simple equations
You can perform mathematical operations such as 1+1 directly in a cell.
Quattro Pro interprets these equations as formulas and adds a blue triangle
to the bottom-left corner of the cell. Quattro Pro also totals values for you
using the Auto-Total feature, and understands the key word, total, as a
calculation command.
116
You can calculate cell
data.
Typing a simple equation into a cell
When you type a forward slash ( / ) symbol, Quattro Pro might assume you
are typing a date. For example, 4/4 might be interpreted as the date 4/4/97.
To divide a number that might be interpreted as a date, type +, then type the
formula (for example, +4/12).
To do simple math in cells
1 Type the numbers and math operators in the cell.
For example, type 4500+450. Do not include commas in numbers.
2 Press ENTER.
To see the formula, click the cell and look in the input line.
Using Auto-Total to create formulas
The natural language processing feature understands the word “total” as a
calculation command. You can total rows and columns using the label “total.”
The auto-total feature is not case sensitive and is language-dependent.
To create a formula using labels
1 Enter values in rows and columns
2 Do any of the following:
Type the word “total” (no quotation marks) in the first blank cell one
row after the column of cells and one column to the left of the cells to
be totaled.
Type the word “total” (no quotation marks) in the first blank cell
immediately above and to the right of the of the column to be totaled.
117
Selecting mathematical tasks from the toolbar
Frequently used functions are displayed on the toolbar. For more information
about a math task, point to the task and read the QuickTip.
To do math from the toolbar
1 Enter values across a row or down a column.
2 Click the blank cell to the right of or below the values.
3 Click a math task on the Toolbar.
The math task button, located to the right of the Composer button. The
button icon varies dependThe result displays in the cell.
Viewing key cells from the Application Bar
Use the QuickCell feature to keep a cell in view even when you scroll to
another part of the spreadsheet. This feature is particularly helpful when you
want to view a formula cell while you make changes to the spreadsheet. For
more information about turning QuickCell on and off, see “Hiding or
displaying QuickCell on the Application Bar” on page 33.
To use QuickCell
1 Click a cell that you want to keep in view even when you scroll.
2 Click the QuickCell button on the Application Bar.
You cannot use QuickCell between files.
Using math tools to calculate rows and columns
You can calculate data in rows and columns using the PerfectExpert Simple
Math toolbar. You can select the Quick Math option to perform calculations
on a single row or column of data, use the More Quick Math option to
calculate individual cells, or use the 2-column Quick Math option to perform
calculations on two rows or columns.
Using Quick Math to calculate a single row or column
Quick Math inserts a formula for you when you want to do math on a single
row or column of figures. For example, you can add a column, find the
average of a list of figures, or find the middle value.
118
The Quick Math
feature automatically
enters a formula into
a cell to calculate a
single row or column
of values.
To do math on a single row or column
1 Click Help, PerfectExpert, Do Simple Math, Quick Math.
2 Click the selection arrow, then drag to select the cells to select a row or
column for Quick Math.
3 Click the Maximize button on the Quick Math title bar to restore the
dialog.
4 Select a math operation from the Do Math drop-down list.
5 Click the selection arrow to select an answer cell, then click the cell
where you want to display the answer.
6 Click the Maximize button on the Quick Math title bar, then click OK to
enter the formula.
Using More Quick Math to calculate each item in a row or column
More Quick Math inserts formulas for you when you want to do math on
each item in a row or column. For example, you could find 60% of each item
in a retail price list to arrive at a wholesale price.
The More Quick Math
feature automatically
enters formulas into
cells.
To do math on each item in a row or column
1 Click Help, PerfectExpert, Do Simple Math, More Quick Math.
2 Click the selection arrow, then drag to select the cells to select a row or
column.
119
3 Click the Maximize button on the More Quick Math title bar to restore
the dialog.
4 Select a math operation from the Do Math list box, then specify an amount
if needed.
5 Click the selection arrow to select an answer location, then drag to select
a row or column.
The answer row or column must be the same size as the list of cells.
6 Click the Maximize button on the More Quick Math title bar, then click
OK to enter the formula.
Using 2-Column Quick Math to calculate two rows or columns
2-Column Quick Math inserts formulas when you want to do math between
rows or columns, such as multiply each item in one column with each item in
another column. For example, you could multiply a quantity column by the
unit price column to find the total cost (5 units x $5.00 each = $25.00).
The 2-Column Quick
Math feature
automatically inserts
formulas to calculate
rows and columns.
To do math between rows or columns
1 Click Help, PerfectExpert, Do Simple Math, 2-Column Quick Math.
2 Click the selection arrow, then drag to select the cells to select the first
row or column.
3 Click the Maximize button on the 2-Column Quick Math title bar to
restore the dialog.
4 Repeat steps one and two for the second row or column.
5 Select a math operation from the Do Math list box, then specify an
amount, if needed.
6 Click the selection arrow to select an answer location, then drag to select
a row or column.
The answer row or column must be the same size as the list of figures.
7 Click the Maximize button on the 2-Column Quick Math title bar, then
click OK to enter the formulas.
120
You can type cell references in the appropriate text boxes to specify rows,
columns, and answer cells.
To work faster, select the first row or column before clicking 2-Column
Quick Math.
Using QuickSum and Calc-As-You-Go
Quattro Pro includes QuickSum, a way to quickly total columns and rows of
numbers. The QuickSum button on the toolbar uses @SUM to add the
values of selected cells.
Calc-As-You-Go lets you quickly evaluate a selection of cells. Select the cells,
and Quattro Pro displays the sum, average, count, maximum value, and
minimum value for those cells at the bottom-right corner of the screen on
the Application Bar.
Performing calculations using QuickSum
QuickSum lets you total numbers in a row or column instantly. You can use
the QuickSum button to total a single row or column, multiple rows or
columns, or a 3-D selection. The row or column cannot contain blank cells;
QuickSum only adds values. Any labels in the selected cells are treated as
zero values. You can total several cells in a column by selecting the data plus
one blank cell below. For example, to total the values in the cells A1..A3,
select A1..A4. The total appears in cell A4.
The entries added depend on what you select before clicking QuickSum:
To total...
Select the following cells...
Several cells across a row
Select the cells plus one blank cell to the right
Many columns
Select the cells and a blank row below
Many rows
Select the cells and a blank column to the right
Rows and columns and create a grand total
Select the cells with a blank column to the right
and a blank row below
Cells on multiple sheets onto a blank sheet
Select cells on each sheet and the same cells on an extra blank
sheet
Rows and columns on multiple sheets
Select the cells with a blank row and column around the data
on each sheet
You can also use QuickSum without selecting the data you are totaling. This
is useful for totaling many cells of data. Select the blank cells where you want
the totals displayed (the blank cells must be adjacent to the data), then click
121
QuickSum. Quattro Pro guesses which cells you want totaled by the number
of cells above (if you selected cells in a row), to the left (if you selected cells
in a column), or on previous sheets (if you selected 3-D cells). After clicking
QuickSum, check each @SUM formula to make sure it actually refers to the
appropriate cells.
To total numbers using QuickSum
1 Select the data to total plus a blank cell at the bottom of a column of
numbers, or to the right of a row of numbers.
2 Click the QuickSum button.
To total all cells on multiple spreadsheets
1 Select the 3-D cells you want to calculate.
2 Select the same cells on a blank spreadsheet.
3 Click the QuickSum button.
You can only select a single row or column when totaling 3-D cells on a
separate spreadsheet. Totaling a 3-D selection of multiple rows and
columns requires you select blank cells to place the totals in.
Displaying running calculations using Calc-As-You-Go
The Calc-As-You-Go feature displays several different running totals for the
cells you select. The sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum
value for the cells you select appear on the Application Bar at the bottom of
the screen. You can disable this feature from Tools, Settings.
The Calc-As-You-Go
feature displays
To display running calculations using Calc-As-You-Go
Select the cells to perform calculations on.
The totals appear on the Application Bar at the bottom of the screen.
To disable the Calc-As-You-Go feature
3 Disable the Calc-As-You-Go check box.
122
WORKING WITH FORMULAS
AND SPREADSHEET
FUNCTIONS
6
Formulas are mathematical equations that calculate a final value, such as the
difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column.
Some formulas can also return string values; these formulas are called text
formulas. The resulting string value calculated from this type of formula is
called a label. Quattro Pro automatically right-aligns all formulas and left- or
right-aligns the results depending on the type of result.
Most formulas combine values and operators to calculate a single value. For
example, you could create the formula, 4 + 4 = 8. You can also use cell
addresses and names in formulas. After you enter a formula, its result
appears in the cell. When cell addresses and names are used in a formula, the
formula uses whatever value is currently in the cell. As the contents of cells
change, formulas automatically update the result. For example, the formula
A5 + 4 refers to a cell address and a number. The formula calculates the
value located in cell A5 and updates the formula result each time the cell’s
content changed.
Once you enter a formula, it disappears and is replaced by the resulting
value. You can view the formula in the input line. Formula cells are tagged
with a small blue triangle in the lower-left corner of the cell.
123
You can enter
formulas into cells to
calculate data.
When you need complex formulas, you can plug data into built-in spreadsheet
functions. Spreadsheet functions are a set of standard formulas used to
simplify complex calculations. There are more than 500 spreadsheet
functions, which are standard formulas. For example, @AVG(B1..B24) and
@STDS (B1..B24) calculate average and standard deviation.
Quattro Pro provides
spreadsheet functions
for more complex
calculations.
All spreadsheet functions are prefaced with the @ sign. When typing a
spreadsheet function, you can omit the @ if it is not the first item in the
formula. When entering values in a function, you can use the Function
Tip-As-You-Type feature, which displays a tip on what type of value you need
to type into the function next. You can set your page view to show the
formula rather than the end value. You can also use the Array function to
create an entire matrix of values with one formula.
Once you have created formulas, you can trace any errors that occur using
the Auditing tool. You can trace precedent cells to see all the cells that
influence a particular cell or trace dependent cells to see which cells are
influenced by a particular cell.
When performing calculations, you can set the formulas to calculate using
absolute cell addresses, relative cell addresses, or cell names. The cell
address determines what data the formula will calculate.
You can watch a formula cell as it updates by dragging the cell to the
QuickCell area of the Application Bar. For more information about QuickCell,
see “Viewing key cells from the Application Bar” on page 118.
Working with formulas
When you create a formula, you can choose from several values including,
cell addresses and cell names, as well as operators such as +, -, *, /, and ^.
124
For example, +A10 + 3980 is a valid formula. Often, formulas contain
several operators.
+C5 - D12 + F24 * 0.123
You can create a formula using any of the following arguments:
Argument
Example
Numbers
1948, -84, 43.23, 121/2
Cell coordinates
B12, G29..G31, B:A3..D6, or [NOTEBK2]A:A1
Cell names
EXPENSES which may reference D5..D10
Spreadsheet functions
@SUM(B1..B24)
Text set off by double quotation marks “PROFIT” or “Dear Mr.”
When typing cell coordinates in a formula, you can use one period instead of
two. For example, F4..F11 and F4.F11 indicate the same cells. However, you
must enter two periods in coordinates when a period is the argument
separator in Tools, Settings, International, Punctuation.
The result of a formula depends on the order in which the arithmetic
operations are performed. Each operator has precedence and the formula
performs the operations in order of precedence. Operations with equal
precedence are performed from left to right. For example, multiplication has
higher precedence than addition, therefore +5 + 1 * 3 equals 8, not 18.
The following table lists the operators and the precedence assigned to each.
Operators with the highest precedence (7) are performed first.
Operator
Precedence
Parentheses ( )
7
Exponents (^)
7
Negative, positive (-, +)
6
Multiplication, division (*, /)
5
Subtraction, addition (-, +)
4
Greater than or equal (>=)
3
Less than or equal (<=)
3
Less than, greater than (>, <)
3
Equal, not equal (=, <>)
3
Logical NOT (#NOT#)
1
Logical AND (#AND#)
1
125
Logical OR (#OR#)
1
Text operator (&)
1
You can override operator precedence using parentheses. Enclose in
parentheses the portion of a formula you want to calculate first. When
parentheses are nested inside other parentheses, the innermost part is
calculated first.
Example 1
Example 2
+4 * 2 + 3 = 11
+4 * (2 + 3) = 20
(4 * 2) + (3 + 5) * 4 = 40
((4 * 2) + (3 + 5)) * 4 = 64
Creating a formula
When you create a formula, it must start with one of the following characters:
Character
Result
.
establishes the following data as a value
+
establishes the following data as a positive value
-
establishes the following data as a negative value
()
establishes the following data as a formula and calculates anything
contained by the parentheses first
@
establishes the following data as a function
#
establishes the following data as a logical equation
$
establishes the following data as a currency value
=
establishes the following data as a value
The most common character used to create basic formulas is the + sign. The
following procedures apply when you to create a standard formula starting
with a positive operand.
To enter a math formula
1. Type + in a blank cell.
2. Type the formula.
3 Press ENTER to calculate the formula.
To insert a cell address in a formula
1. Type + in the cell where you want to insert a cell address in a formula.
126
2. Click the cell that contains the data you want to put in the formula.
3 Click in the formula cell to the right of the +.
To insert a cell name in a formula
1. Type + in the cell where you want to insert a cell address in a formula.
2. Type the cell name.
Make sure the insertion point is to the right of an operator or open
parenthesis in the formula.
To insert an absolute cell address in a formula
1. Type + in the cell where you want to enter a formula.
2 Type $ before the cell address(es) you want to make absolute.
You can use noncontiguous selections in a formula by selecting the first
cells, then holding down CTRL while selecting additional selections.
Do not include commas in numbers; for example, type 4500 instead of
4,500. After you enter the formula, you can format numbers with commas
by changing the Normal setting on the Property Bar to Comma or
Comma0.
You can include spaces between operators and values, but the spaces are
deleted when you press ENTER.
Creating text formulas and true or false formulas
Text formulas are any formulas that have a textual result. Text formulas can
also be created using string spreadsheet functions or an @IF function that
results in a text string. In text formulas, you can use
& (the concatenation operator), which appends text strings to each other
text enclosed in double quotation marks (for example, “PROFIT” or
“Dear Mr.”)
cell references that contain labels
Logical formulas are true or false statements that concern values. For
example, +C3<10 displays either 1 or 0.
To create a text formula
1. Type + in a blank cell.
127
2. Type the formula; use & to combine text strings.
For example, +C4&" Review" enters the text in cell C4, a space, then the
word Review.
3 Press ENTER.
If you want a space between strings, type it within the quotation marks.
To create a formula that evaluates to true or false
1. Click a blank cell, then type the formula using one of the logical operators.
For example, +C3<10. < > <= >= <> = #NOT# #AND# #OR#
2. Press ENTER.
If the statement is true, a 1 displays in the cell. If the statement is false, a
0 displays.
Viewing and converting formulas to values
When creating a formula, you can choose to see the results before you press
ENTER. This allows you to see whether the formula will produce the end
value you want. The end value appears in the cell and the input line,
replacing the formula. For more information about viewing formulas, see
“Displaying formulas and comments in spreadsheets” on page 61.
To view formulas on the spreadsheet
Click View, Formulas.
To view formula results as you enter data
Press F9.
To display error sources in cells
1 Click Format, Notebook.
2. Click the Recalc Settings tab.
3 In the Advanced section, enable the Audit Errors check box.
128
When you enable Audit Errors, each problem cell displays the sheet and
cell reference where the problem started. The notebook name is included
if the cell is in another notebook.
If necessary, click the QuickFit button to adjust the width of columns that
contain asterisks (******).
To convert formulas to values
1. Select the cells.
2. Click Edit, Convert to Values.
3. Specify the destination cells in the To box:
To replace the formulas in the cells with their values, specify the same
selection of cells for the destination cells.
To copy the values of the formulas to another part of the notebook,
specify the top left cell to which you want to copy the values.
Recalculating formulas
You can set Quattro Pro to update calculations at specified intervals. By
default, formulas are calculated when you enter them, and recalculated each
time you change the data. If a notebook contains many complex formulas, you
may want to delay recalculation to save time. The recommended mode is
either Background or Automatic. Both ensure that your data is accurate.
To set when formulas recalculate
1. Click Format, Notebook.
3. Enable one of the following buttons:
Automatic — recalculates formulas automatically, but pauses until
recalculation is finished. Use Automatic if you have complex formulas
that Background mode does not handle fast enough.
129
Manual — recalculates the formulas you enter or edit, but does not
recalculate the entire notebook until you press F9. This setting is
useful for large notebooks with many calculations.
Background — recalculates formulas between keystrokes; this is the
default setting. It does not interrupt your work and recalculates
automatically. Quattro Pro always finishes recalculating before saving,
extracting, or printing the notebook.
To recalculate formulas in Manual mode
Press F9 or click the calculator located in the Application Bar to
recalculate all formulas.
To recalculate a single cell in Manual mode
1. Select the cell.
2 Press F2, then press ENTER.
Floating charts do not adjust automatically.
When in Manual mode, a calculator appears on the Application Bar only
when a formula needs to be recalculated.
If you need to adjust crucial cells in large notebooks that take a long time
to recalculate, you can temporarily work in Manual mode.
Setting recalculation order and iterations
You can set the order in which formulas recalculate and the number of
iterations they can recalculate. The Column-wise and Row-wise recalculation
orders are provided for special purposes, such as for a series of formulas that
create circular references to solve a problem or attain a goal. If you are not
solving this type of problem, select the Natural recalculation order. Before
constructing elaborate formulas requiring limited iterations, check whether
the Optimizer or Solve For analysis tools can provide alternative solutions.
For information about using the Optimizer and Solve For analysis tools, see
“Analyzing data” on page 235.
To change the recalculation order
3. Enable one of the following buttons:
130
Natural — calculates cells in dependency order. Formulas without
dependencies are calculated first, followed by formulas that depend on
them.
Column-wise — starts recalculation in cell A1 of the first sheet and
proceeds down column A, ignoring formulas in other columns. When
column A is finished, recalculation continues in B1, and down column
B. This continues to the end of the sheet (column ZZZ), and on to the
last sheet in the notebook.
Row-wise — starts recalculation in cell A1, but proceeds by row,
starting at 1 and continuing through to row 1,000,000, to the last sheet.
If you specify Column-wise or Row-wise, you should set the number of
iterations to at least two. Otherwise, the notebook may be inaccurate.
To change the number of recalculation iterations
3 Type any number up to 255 in the # of Iterations box.
If the notebook has a formula with a circular reference, its cell address
appears on the Recalc Settings tab to the right of the # of Iterations box.
Elaborate formulas are sometimes deliberately constructed to contain
circular references, because the formulas require multiple evaluations to
attain an acceptable degree of accuracy.
If the notebook contains no circular references and the recalculation order
is set to Natural, the iteration count is ignored.
Working with the Formula Composer
The Formula Composer is a tool for creating, editing, and debugging
formulas. You can use the Formula Composer to build a formula from scratch
or to edit a formula. The Formula Composer dialog box provides the
following views of a formula:
Standard View — displays all three panes (Outline, Spreadsheet Function
Description, and Argument) when a function is selected
Argument View — displays the Outline and Argument panes
Outline View — displays only the Outline pane
131
Depending on the view setting you choose, you can see up to three panes
that provide information about the formula you are creating.
Formula Composer
Dialog.
Outline pane
In the Outline pane, you can examine the structure of a formula, edit parts of
the formula, and trace cell references and cell names. The Outline pane of
the Formula Composer works like Windows Explorer; it shows the hierarchy
of the formula you have created. You can expand or collapse parts of the
formula in the Outline pane to focus on the part of the formula you want.
Folder icons to the left of the formula outline indicate whether expressions
are expanded or collapsed. Expressions that cannot be expanded, such as
values, have a node (a small yellow circle) to their left. The outline can
consist of several levels, with each level containing a different expression. By
default, the Outline pane shows one expanded level of the outline.
Spreadsheet Function Description pane
The Spreadsheet Function Description pane provides a brief description of
the spreadsheet function you have selected in the Outline pane. When you
type a spreadsheet function (for example, @SUM) in the Expression edit
field of the Formula Composer, the Spreadsheet Function Description pane
appears to the right of the dialog box when you are in Standard View.
Argument pane
The Argument pane appears to the right of the dialog box (under the
Spreadsheet Function Description pane, in Standard View), and provides
entry fields for the spreadsheet function arguments. Parentheses around an
argument indicate an optional argument. When you enter a value for an
optional argument, you must also enter values for all preceding optional
arguments. For a short description of each spreadsheet function argument,
click to the left of the argument.
132
Changing Formula Composer views
When you select part of the formula outline, the Expression edit box changes
to show the expression you selected. If the selected expression is a
spreadsheet function, the right side of the dialog box displays the
Spreadsheet Function Description and Argument panes in Standard or
Argument View.
If an expression is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, a
spreadsheet function might be missing an argument), a red question mark
icon appears to the left of the outline. This icon alerts you when something is
wrong with part of a formula.
To switch Formula Composer views
Click one of the View buttons located on the Formula Composer Toolbar:
Standard View — displays all three panes (Spreadsheet Function
Description, Outline, and Argument)
Argument View — displays the Outline and Argument panes
Outline View — displays only the Outline pane
To expand a formula in an outline
1. Select the formula.
2 Click the Expand button.
To collapse the current expression of the outline
Click the Collapse button.
To expand or collapse part of a formula outline
1. Select part of the formula outline.
2. Press ENTER or double-click the outline.
3. Click one of the following buttons:
Expand
Collapse
You can also double-click an expression to expand or collapse it.
133
Creating a formula using the Formula Composer
The Formula Composer Toolbar has three buttons that help you enter each
argument of a formula:
Function button — nests a spreadsheet function in the formula
Name button — inserts a cell name in the formula
Pointer button — inserts a cell or cell reference
The Function, Name, and Pointer buttons are also used to enter spreadsheet
function arguments in the Arguments pane. When you click the Pointer
button, the Formula Composer dialog box shrinks to show only its title bar
until you make a selection. If an expression is incomplete or syntactically
incorrect (for example, a spreadsheet function might be missing an
argument), a red question mark icon alerts you to the error in the outline.
Expressions that cannot be expanded, such as values, have a small yellow
circle to their left.
To create a formula in the Formula Composer
1. Select a blank cell.
2. Click the Formula Composer button.
3. Create the formula using one or more of these methods:
Click the Function button to choose a function from the list.
Click an expression in the outline on the left. Double-click folders to
expand or collapse part of the outline. When you select part of the
outline, it appears in the Expression box.
To clear the Expression edit field
Press CTRL + BACKSPACE.
Inserting and nesting functions and cells
You can insert functions into formulas and nest spreadsheet functions in
other spreadsheet functions. When you nest spreadsheet functions, the
Spreadsheet Function Description pane displays the selected spreadsheet
function from the formula outline. For example, the following spreadsheet
function formula contains a nested @AVG spreadsheet function:
@ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2)
134
To insert a spreadsheet function in a formula
1. Click the Function button.
2 Select a spreadsheet function from several categories.
To insert a cell name in a formula
1. Click the Name button.
2 Select a name.
To insert a cell or cell reference
1. Click the Pointer button.
2 Select the cells to include in the formula.
When you click the Pointer button, the Formula Composer dialog box
shrinks to show only its title bar until you make a selection.
Editing Formula Composer Expressions
An expression is any isolated part of the formula that you choose in the
formula outline. You can create or revise formulas, or parts of a formula,
directly in the Expression box.
If an expression is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, a
spreadsheet function might be missing an argument), a red question mark
icon alerts you to the error in the outline. Expressions that cannot be
expanded, such as values, have a small yellow circle to their left. Click the
What’s This? button located next to the function or argument for more
information.
To edit a formula in the Formula Composer
1. Select a cell that contains a formula.
2. Click the Formula Composer button.
3. Edit the formula in the Expression box using one of the following
methods:
To edit the entire formula, select the first expression in the outline on
the left.
To edit part of the formula, select another expression in the outline.
135
Formula Composer Keys
The following list describes the shortcut keys that are available when you
work in the Formula Outline pane of the Formula Composer.
Key(s)
Description
CTRL + +
Expands the outline one level
CTRL + *
Expands the whole outline for the formula
CTRL + -
Collapses the current branch of the outline
CTRL + F
Goes to a referenced cell in the formula
CTRL + B
Returns to the previous cell containing a formula that references the
current cell
CTRL + E
Converts the current expression to a value
CTRL + O
Replaces the current expression with a spreadsheet function
CTRL + P
Switches to Pointer to specify a cell reference by pointing to a cell (or
cells) on a notebook sheet
CTRL + N
Replaces the current expression with a cell name
Moving and copying formulas and referenced cells
Formula references change in a logical manner when you move cells that
contain formulas or cells referenced by formulas. When moving formulas and
referenced cells, you should be aware of the following rules:
If you move a formula without moving the cells it references, the
references remain intact, regardless of whether they are absolute or
relative.
If you move a formula and the cells it references at the same time, the
references do adjust. For example, if A2 contains +A1+1, and you move
only A2 to B1, the formula still reads +A1+1. But if you move A1 and A2
at the same time, the formula reads +B1+1.
If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it
references, the two notebooks link so that the formula still references the
cells in the original notebook. If you move the formula back to the first
notebook, the links are removed.
If you move a cell without moving formulas that refer to it, formulas
update to refer to the new location, even if you specified the reference as
absolute. For example, if you move the contents of cell B4 to B6 in sheet
A, any formula referencing B4 to reference B6 is revised. If you move
A:B4 into A:B6 of a notebook named TAX, the formula’s reference
changes to [TAX]A:B6.
136
If you move a cell from within an area without moving formulas that refer
to the cells, formulas still refer to the same cells and no longer refer to the
moved cell. However, if you move one of the coordinate cells (the
upper-left and lower-right cells), the references to the cells expand or
contract to reflect the new location. For example, if you define BILLS as
B1..B7, then move cell B7 to B12, BILLS changes to B1..B12.
If you move a coordinate (corner) cell into another notebook, references
to the cells are not adjusted.
If you move an entire named or referenced selection of cells, the cell
name or the reference in affected formulas is updated.
If you move data into a coordinate cell of a referenced area or into a single
referenced cell, the formula containing the reference becomes invalid.
References in formulas to the single cell or selection of cells are replaced
with ERR, and cells that contain those formulas display ERR. If you name
a selection of cells, the coordinates in the cell names list appear as ERR.
Moving a formula or reference cell
You can move formulas to any spreadsheet location in your notebook. When
you move a formula, the formula readjusts to calculate the cells relative to its
new location. If you want the formula to calculate the cells it referenced
before the move, you must set the formula to calculate absolute cell
addresses. For information about setting cell addresses, see “Setting cell
addresses” on page 150.
To move a formula
1. Select the formula you want to move.
2. Click Edit, Cut.
3. Select the cell where you want to paste the formula.
4 Click Edit, Paste.
To move a formula by dragging
1. Select the cell you want to move.
2. Move the cursor to the edge of the cell until the pointer turns into a
four-headed arrow.
3 Drag the formula to the new location.
To undo a move operation
Click Edit, Undo immediately after the move.
137
Copying formulas
You can copy formulas by cutting and pasting them into new locations, or by
dragging them across your spreadsheet. When you copy data by dragging and
dropping the cells, the formulas adjust to correspond with their new
positions. When you copy formulas with Edit, Copy, and Paste, the formulas
adjust to the new location if it includes values to use in the formula. For
example, you can enter +C1+C2 in cell C3. Then, if D1 and D2 contain
values, when you copy the formula to cell D3, the formula adjusts to
+D1+D2.
When you copy a
formula, it adjusts to
correspond to its new
position.
However, if you copy the formula to D3, and D1 and D2 are empty, the Cell
Reference Checker alerts you that the formula is using an empty cell. You
can keep the adjusted formula (even though you have not yet entered data to
add, subtract, and so on) or use the original formula. You can also view
additional information about the formula.
The adjusted formula
now calculates the
data in cells D1 and
D2.
When copying formulas, you may specify absolute references in the original
formula. This keeps it if from adjusting to new addresses when you copy it.
When you copy a formula and paste it in a cell, the cell address automatically
changes in the formula to reflect the cell’s new location. All formulas
calculate based on a relative address unless you specify otherwise.
You can also make a
formula calculate
absolute cell
addresses.
138
For more information about setting cell addresses, see “Setting cell
addresses” on page 150.
To copy a formula
1. Click the cell that contains the formula you want to copy.
2. Click Edit, Copy.
3. Click the cell where you want to paste the formula.
4. Click Edit, Paste.
5. Click one of the following buttons:
Close — keeps the adjusted formula
Fix It — uses the original formula
Click Detail for additional information.
To copy a formula by dragging it
1. Select the cell you want to copy.
2. Move the cursor to the edge of the cell until the pointer turns into a
four-headed arrow.
3 Hold down CTRL and drag the formula to the new location.
To have help when copying formulas
1. Click Tools, Settings.
2. Click the General tab.
3. Enable the Cell Reference Checker check box in the Options section.
When you copy a formula that contains cell addresses, the Cell Reference
Checker shows you how the formula will appear in the new location.
Working with spreadsheet functions
Instead of composing formulas, you can use spreadsheet functions.
Spreadsheet functions are a set of standard built-in formulas used to simplify
complex calculations. Quattro Pro has more than 500 built-in formulas
(spreadsheet functions). These spreadsheet functions cover a range of
calculations, including database, financial, engineering, and statistical
calculations. Some common spreadsheet functions are @SUM and @AVG,
which add or average the cell values you reference.
139
For example,
@SUM(A1..A4,B1) is equivalent to +A1+A2+A3+A4+B1
@AVG(A5..A8) finds the average of the values in A5 through A8
@ROUND(A9,2) rounds the value in A9 to two decimal places
@ROUND(@AVG(A5..A8),3) rounds the average of the values in A5
through A8 to three decimal places
If you type a spreadsheet function in a cell, its arguments appear on the
Application Bar at the bottom of the screen. Arguments are the data used in
the calculation.
All spreadsheet functions begin with the @ sign. When typing a spreadsheet
function, you can omit the @ if it is not the first item in the formula. When
entering values in a function, you can use the Function Tip-As-You-Type
feature, which displays a tip on the next type of value you need to type in the
function. You can set Page View to show the formula rather than the end
value. You can also use the Array function to create an entire matrix of values
with one formula.
You can select individual functions from a function list or build a formula that
contains functions. You can also nest spreadsheet functions. Nesting involves
placing one function in another. For example, the formula
@ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2) finds the average of the data in a cell range
and rounds the average to two decimal places. It is more difficult to debug
complex formulas, however, so you may want to break them into smaller
formulas that reference a final formula.
The Quattro Pro spreadsheet function reference guide is available in the
Syntax rules for entering spreadsheet functions
Spreadsheet functions contain
the name of the spreadsheet function (such as @SUM or @AVG)
arguments (the values, cells, or text strings to be operated on)
commas that separate multiple arguments
parentheses around the arguments
These components, called the function syntax, and the order in which they
are used are called the language rules. Each spreadsheet function has its own
particular syntax. For example, @RECEIVED returns the redemption value
140
(the amount received after maturity) of a discount security. Calendar is an
optional argument.
@RECEIVED(Settle, Maturity, Investment, Discount, <Calendar>)
The syntax of a spreadsheet function formula must meet the following rules:
There must be a leading at sign (@), plus sign (+), or equal sign (=) at
the beginning of the formula.
You can enter the @function in either uppercase or lowercase letters.
When there are multiple arguments, separate them with a semicolon or
the argument separator specified in Tools, Settings, International,
Punctuation.
Enter arguments in the specified order.
Optional arguments appear within angle brackets, <>. If you specify an
optional argument, you must also specify all preceding optional
arguments.
Do not add a space between @ and the function name.
Entering arguments in functions
Arguments refer to the information required by a spreadsheet function. Most
spreadsheet functions need at least one argument. There are three types of
argument:
numeric values
cell values
string values
Some spreadsheet functions accept a combination or choice of types for a
single argument. For example, @SUM accepts cells in combination with
numeric values;
@SUM(B10..C25,50) totals numeric entries in cells B10..C25 plus 50.
You can separate arguments with a semicolon or you can separate arguments
with the setting in Tools, Settings, International, Punctuation. In the example
above, a comma (a possible Punctuation setting) separates arguments. If the
message “Not enough arguments” appears when you enter a spreadsheet
function, use a semicolon between arguments.
Entering numeric spreadsheet function arguments
A numeric value can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in any of
these forms:
141
an actual value, @SIN(1.571)
the coordinates of a cell containing a numeric value, @SIN(B5)
the name of a cell name containing a single numeric value,
@INT(TOTAL)
a formula resulting in a numeric value, @INT(B4*10)
another @function resulting in a numeric value, @INT(@PI)
a combination of these, @ABS(@INT(C4)+35-TOTAL)
Entering cell spreadsheet function arguments
Cells can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in a number of ways:
the coordinates of cells, @SUM(A1..B3)
the address of a single cell, @SUM(B3)
a cell name, @SUM(JANUARY)
You can use a combination of these in a list, for example,
@SUM(JANUARY,C15..D25,F10).
Entering string spreadsheet function arguments
A string value can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in the
following ways:
an actual string, in double quotes, @PROPER(“ACME Company”)
the address of a cell containing a label, @PROPER(G13)
the name of a single cell containing a label, @PROPER(COMPANY
NAME)
a formula resulting in a string, @LOWER(+MONTH&"Sales")
another spreadsheet function resulting in a string,
@LENGTH(@PROPER(“ACME Industries”))
Working with date functions
Date functions that require an integer date value as the Date argument
accept a valid date string, such as ‘12/31/1991’ or ‘31-Dec-1997’. The date
functions @DATE, @LWKDAY, @MDAYS, @NWKDAY, and @YDAYS
accept a standard year, such as 2001, in addition to the original year
arguments of 0 (1900) and 199 (2099).
For example
142
@DATE (40,12,31) and @DATE (1940,12,31) both return 14976
(31-Dec-1940)
@DATE (140,12,31) and @DATE (2040,12,31) both return 51501
(31-Dec-2040)
If you use arguments for date functions, Quattro Pro assumes the century
based on the following year ranges:
Argument
Year range
00 - 99
1900 - 1999
100 - 199
2000 - 2099
Entering functions in a cell
You can type spreadsheet functions in a cell. As you type a function, the most
likely function and its syntax appear at the bottom right of the screen.
Enclose arguments in parentheses. The result of the formula displays in the
cell. If the result is a numeric value, it becomes a value entry. If the result is
a string, it becomes a label entry.
In a formula, the left parenthesis is red until you type the right parenthesis.
Then, they both turn green. To identify a missing parenthesis or bracket,
double-click the cell, then move the insertion point through the formula.
When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns
red. In a formula, a parenthesis or square bracket is red until you type the
closing parenthesis or bracket, then, they both turn green. When you type
spreadsheet functions in a cell, it is important to use the proper syntax. For
example
@FUNCTION(Argument1, Argument2,...)
To see a list of spreadsheet functions
1 Click Insert, Function.
2 Scroll through the available functions.
To see Help for a function
Type any spreadsheet function in the cell, then press F1.
To create a formula using a spreadsheet function
1 Click a blank cell.
3 Choose a function, then click the Next button.
143
4 In the Formula Composer dialog box, complete your formula in the
Expression text box.
The Outline pane on the left shows a breakdown of your formula.
To enter a spreadsheet function in a cell
1 Select the cell.
3 Choose a category, then click a spreadsheet function from the list.
5 Enter the values, cell references, or text string as the arguments.
Optional arguments appear within angle brackets (<>).
To point to cells to include in the formula, click the Pointer button. If
the Pointer button is dimmed, move the insertion point after an
operator or a left parenthesis.
To add noncontiguous selections, click the Pointer button to select the
first cells, then hold down CTRL while selecting additional selections.
To include a cell name, click the Name button, then select the cell
name.
To nest another spreadsheet function, click the Function button, then
select the spreadsheet function.
Working with arrays
The spreadsheet function ARRAY and other features help you use data
arrays, which are selections of data you work with as a group. Instead of
entering several formulas, you can work with arrays and enter just one
formula. Working with arrays also saves computer memory, although it can
lengthen recalculation times. Array formulas can contain block arrays or
array constants.
A block array is a selection of rows and columns. With block arrays, you can
type one formula that enters results in many cells. An array constant is a
group of numbers used as an argument in a formula that can produce one or
many results.
144
Using block arrays in formulas
The array B2..D3
contains data in
three columns and
two rows that can be
worked with
independently, or as
one selection.
To total columns, you could enter @SUM(B2..B3) in B4, then copy it to C4
and D4. To take advantage of the array, however, you could select B4 then
type an array formula: @ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3).
The spreadsheet ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3) contains the same information as
three @SUM formulas. The array directs Quattro Pro to add the values in
each column and show the results in the formula cell and the two cells to the
right. The number of columns and rows in the output array depend on the
dimensions of the arrays in the array formula.
You can use any mathematical or logical operator in an array formula: +, -, *,
/, ^, =, <>, <=, >=, <, >, #AND#, #OR#, and &.
As with other formulas, calculations are performed according to operator
precedence: multiplication and division first, then addition and subtraction.
To change the calculation order, use parentheses.
Formula syntax
To create a formula using block arrays, type a selection followed by an
operator, followed by the next selection or value. For example,
@ARRAY(B2..D2-B3..D3)
@ARRAY(B2..D2*5)
The operator indicates the operation to perform on matching cells of each
block or the relationship between them. For example, - (minus) means
“subtract each cell of the second block from the equivalent cell of the first
block.” When the second formula above is calculated, it expands the 5 to a 1
X 3 array to match the first array. So, it calculates B2*5, C2*5, and D2*5,
then enters three formulas.
When you are working with rows, array results appear in the ARRAY formula
cell. For columns, the results appear beside the ARRAY formula cell. You can
mix columns and rows. Block arrays can be contiguous or noncontiguous, but
they must be 2-D.
You can enter more than two row or column blocks and use multiple
operators. For example, the formula @ARRAY(B2..B4+C2..C4*D2..D4)
145
means “multiply C2 by D2 and add B2, multiply C3 by D3 and add B3, then
multiply C4 by D4 and add B4.”
You can use cell names instead of references to specify arrays. If you later
change the selection identified by the cell name, all ARRAY formulas
containing the cell name automatically change to the new selection.
For example, you can make EXPENSES in the array
@ARRAY(EXPENSES*5), the selection C2..E4. You can also type
+B2..D2+B3..D3 in any of the above examples, to add ARRAY spreadsheet
function and parentheses.
Using array constants in formulas
An array constant is a group of numbers used as an argument in a formula.
You can use an array constant to provide values for a formula instead of
typing the values in a notebook. The numbers in the array are enclosed in
braces { } and separated by semicolons. For example, an array is used in the
formula @SUM({3;4;5}*5). The formula expands to
@SUM({3;4;5}*{5;5;5}) as it is calculated. The formula calculates 3 * 5 + 4
* 5 +5 * 5, and displays 60 as the total.
You can specify different rows in an array constant. To do this, separate rows
with the pipe symbol (|).
The values shown are
indicated by the
array constant
{1;2;3;4|5;6;7;8}.
The array constant {5;6;7;8} specifies values in the second row above. The
array constant {3|7} specifies values in the third column.
Working with arrays as functions and macro arguments
You can use block arrays and array constants as arguments for spreadsheet
functions other than ARRAY. Any spreadsheet function that accepts block
arguments can handle array operations, although different types of
spreadsheet functions handle them differently.
@ABS, @SQRT and many other spreadsheet functions normally take one
argument, which is a single value or an expression that results in a single
value, not a block. If you enter a block or array constant for these
spreadsheet functions, the spreadsheet function statement is converted into
an argument for ARRAY, and a value displays for each row or column of the
array.
146
Statistical functions
@SUM, @AVG, and other statistical spreadsheet functions always return a
single value, no matter how large an array you specify. For example,
@SUM(C4..C8*D4..D8) means “multiply each value in C4..C8 by the
equivalent value in D4..D8 and add the results.”
Database functions
The database functions, such as @DSUM, take three arguments: a database
block, the column to operate on, and a search criteria block. The first and
third arguments must be blocks, not array constants. The second argument
can be an array. In this case, the spreadsheet function is calculated once for
each value in the array.
Index, Lookup, and related functions
Using arrays as arguments for index, lookup, and related spreadsheet
functions can be convenient when writing and debugging macros. For
example, @ARRAY(@CELLPOINTER(A1..A16)) returns a whole column of
information about E1 when you select that cell and press F9 to recalculate.
Cells A1 through 16 contain @CELLPOINTER target attributes. While the
previous formula refers to an attribute list in the notebook, you can also
enter attributes as an array constant, for example,
{“contents”;"type";"prefix"}.
Tracing and editing errors in formulas and functions
You can edit formulas and trace errors. To edit a formula, select the cell and
type the change. To trace an error, use the Auditing tool. Auditing visually
shows data used in formulas. If you are looking at a formula cell, the Auditing
tool can show all cells that provide data to that formula. It can also show all
formulas that use the data from a particular cell. Auditing is particularly
useful for fixing errors.
Tips for solving errors
The following tips cover some common causes of errors:
If ERR displays instead of formula results, the formula contains an
erroneous calculation, such as divide by zero. ERR also displays when
data is missing or a cell address is incorrect.
If a function displays ERR, it may contain an unmatched parenthesis. To
identify a missing parenthesis or bracket, double-click the cell, then move
the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched
parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red.
147
If NA appears in a cell, some of the necessary information is not available,
such as when a formula is linked to another source and the notebook has
not been updated.
If the Circular Cell Reference button appears on the Application Bar at the
bottom of the screen, a circular-cell reference appears in the notebook.
For example, placing the formula +A1+A2 in cell A1 produces a
circular-cell reference. This formula is never updated because it relies on
itself for its results.
If a cell does not calculate a formula, Quattro Pro may be interpreting the
formula as a label. For example, Quattro Pro recognizes phone numbers
and dates and does not try to calculate them. When you enter a formula
that might be interpreted as a phone number or a date, type + before the
formula. For example, the following would be interpreted as formulas:
+202-555-3670
+12/12/94
Tracing precedent cells
The Trace Precedents option of the Auditing tool lets you view all cells that
provide data to or influence a formula cell. The Trace Precedents option
outlines all first-level precedent cells in blue. A first-level precedent cell is a
cell that provides data directly to the formula being traced. Once you have
identified the first-level cells, you can apply the Trace Precedents option to
them to find the cells that influence them, then repeat the process until you
find the cell causing the error.
To trace a formula through a notebook
1 Click a formula cell.
2 Click Tools, Auditing, Trace Precedents.
3 Click Tools, Auditing, Show Auditing Toolbar to display the Auditing
toolbar.
4 Click the Trace Precedents button to display the next (second) level of
precedents.
5 Continue to click the Trace Precedents button until no more precedents
display.
To trace formula cell references
1 Click a cell that contains a formula.
2 Click the Formula Composer button.
148
3 Click the cell reference in the outline.
4 Click the Follow Formula button on the Formula Composer Toolbar to
examine a cell’s relationship with other cells on the spreadsheet.
5 Click the Back button to return to the Formula Composer standard display.
If the Follow Formula button and the Back button are dimmed, select the
cell reference in the outline.
To see all cells that provide data to a formula
1 Click the formula cell, then click Tools, Auditing, Trace Precedents to
display the first-level precedents.
2 Click Tools, Auditing, Show Auditing Toolbar.
3 Click the Trace Precedents button to display the next (second) level of
precedents. Continue to click the Trace Precedents button until no more
precedents display.
To remove all arrows
Click the Remove All Arrows button.
Double-click a formula cell to outline all cells that provide data to the
formula in blue.
Point to each button on the Auditing Toolbar to see the button’s QuickTip
information.
Tracing dependent cells
The Trace Dependents option of the Auditing tool lets you perform a trace in
the reverse order. When you apply the Trace Dependents option to a cell, you
see all formulas that use the data from the selected cell. You can repeat the
process to trace all the formula cells that are dependent on those formulas,
and so on.
To trace cell dependents in a notebook
1 Click a cell.
2 Click Tools, Auditing, Trace Dependents.
149
3 Click the Trace Dependentsbutton to see whether the formula cells are
used by other formulas.
4 Repeat step 3 until no more dependents appear.
To see all formulas that use the data from a particular cell
1 Click the cell.
2 Click Tools, Auditing, Trace Dependents.
3 Click Tools, Auditing, Show Auditing Toolbar.
4 Click the Trace Dependents button to see whether the formula cells are
used by other formulas.
5 Repeat step 4 until no more dependents appear.
To remove all arrows
Click the Remove All Arrows button.
Point to each button on the Auditing Toolbar to see the button’s QuickTip
information.
Setting cell addresses
When you create formulas or perform certain tasks, you need to refer to
other cells by their cell address. This address is the intersection of the
column letter and the row number, such as A15 or B6. When referring to a
cell on a different spreadsheet, first specify the name of the spreadsheet, for
example, C:A15. You can also specify a block of cells in this way by creating a
cell address range, such as A5..D16.
When you reference data in formulas, functions, or macros you can refer to
the cell by
relative cell address
absolute cell address
cell name
By default, cell formulas calculate relative cell addresses.
Relative cell address
When you set a relative cell address, the formula calculates the cells relative
to its current location in the spreadsheet. When a cell that contains a formula
150
changes its cell address, the formula calculates the address relative to its
new location. For example, if you create a formula in cell A3 to add cells A1
and A2, and then move the formula to cell D3, the formula adjusts to add cells
D1 and D2.
Absolute cell address
When you set an absolute cell address in a formula, the formula always
references the same cells regardless of their location on the spreadsheet. For
example, if you create a formula in cell A3 to add cells A1 and A2, and then
move the formula to cell D3 on the same spreadsheet, the formula still
calculates cells A1 and A2.
You can set an absolute address in two ways, by setting the cells properties
or entering a dollar sign before the portion of the cell address you want to
make absolute. For example
$A$1 makes both coordinates of address A1 absolute
$A1 locks the address into column A, but lets the row coordinate change
A$1 locks the address into row 1, but lets the column coordinate change
$A:A$1 locks the address into sheet A and row 1, but lets the column
coordinate change
Cell names
You can set a formula to calculate a cell name. This means the formula
calculates the values associated with a name, rather than an address. The
formula calculates the data associated with the cell name regardless of the
location of the data. For more information about naming a cell see “Naming
cells” on page 153.
Typing cell addresses
An easy way to enter cell references in formulas is to point to them. Make
sure the insertion point is after an operator character, then click the cell you
want to include in the formula. You can also point to cells by dragging them
or using keyboard commands. To point to noncontiguous selections, select
the first group of cells, hold down CTRL, then select additional cells. When
every selection you want to refer to or act up on is highlighted, complete the
formula or command. For more information about operators, see “Working
with formulas” on page 124.
You can also type the cell address directly into the formula cell. Depending
on the cell selection you want to name, you must type the selection in a
specific way.
151
To specify
Type
Range of cells
Address of top-left cell, followed by one or two periods and the address of
the bottom right cell
C3..D6 (refers to cells C3, D3, C4, D4, C5, D5, C6, and D6) F4.F11 (refers
to cells F4 to F11)
Cells on another sheet
Sheet name and a colon, then the cell reference
B:B4
Cell in a different notebook
Filename in brackets, the sheet name, then the cell reference
[SALES]C:B5
Named cells
Name
EXPENSES
Cells in different places
Separate each selection with a comma
A2..A5,B7,D5..E12
3-D selection
The sheet references first, followed by the cell coordinates
A..D:A2..B5 (refers to cells on sheets A, B, C, and D)
You can enter the addresses of any two cells in opposite corners in any
order. The coordinates are rewritten to list the top-left cell followed by the
bottom-right cell.
If you rename a sheet, you can use the new name on its tab in the cell
reference or the sheet letter. Also, if you group sheets, you can refer to
them by their group name instead of by their individual sheet names.
Specifying absolute and relative addresses
You can specify absolute references in a formula. An absolute cell reference
always refers to the original cell address, regardless of where you copy the
formula. To prevent a cell reference from adjusting when you copy a formula,
make the reference absolute by entering dollar signs ($) before the column
and row coordinates. When copying between sheets, you can also make sheet
references absolute. Include a dollar sign before the sheet name. If you omit
the sheet reference in a formula, it adjusts to refer to the current sheet,
wherever it is copied.
For example, if you enter +$A$1+$A$2 in cell A3, it is interpreted as “Add
the values in cells A1 and A2.” When you copy this formula to cell B4, the
cells in the formula remain as A1 and A2.
In Edit mode, press F4 when a cell address is highlighted in the input line to
make a cell absolute. Press F4 repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute
combinations.
152
Press F4
Cell reference
starting reference
B6
1x
$A:$B$6
2x
$A:B$6
3x
$A:$B6
4x
$A:B6
5x
$B$6
6x
B$6
7x
$B6
Naming cells
Instead of referring to a single cell or cells by their coordinates, such as B10
or C15..F21, you can assign a specific name. This has several advantages:
If you move the contents of named cells, the names are still associated
with the same data, regardless of the new coordinates.
Referencing names in a formula makes the formula easier to understand.
For example, +PRICE - COST is more intuitive than B15 - D8.
Using names increases accuracy. If you mistype a name, Quattro Pro
alerts you to the error. If you mistype coordinates, you operate on the
wrong cells.
When you link to another notebook, you do not need to open the other
notebook to find the coordinates.
Consider the following formula, which calculates a monthly mortgage
payment:
@PMT(B3,B4/B6,B5*B6)
Here is the same formula using named cells:
@PMT(PRICE,INTEREST/MONTHS,TERM*MONTHS)
Before you use Insert, Name, Cells, check the labels you plan to use. If there
are duplicate labels or labels that duplicate existing names, the previous
assignments are overwritten. Quattro Pro lists existing names in the list box
on the left side of the toolbar directly above the spreadsheet window. You can
also make a table of named cells to see a list of existing names.
Guidelines for naming cells
Keep the following guidelines in mind when naming selections of cells:
153
Names can be up to 63 characters long.
Use any keyboard characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, spaces, punctuation marks,
and some special characters such as %). Accented characters such as Â
and Ä are also allowed if they are available on your keyboard.
If you use any of these characters in a name, you cannot enter the name a
formula.
Uppercase and lowercase letters are equivalent, for example, INCOME is
the same as income. Names always appear in uppercase letters in
formulas.
Names can define overlapping areas. For example, the following names
are acceptable:
HOTEL
B3..B7
TRANS
C3..C7
MEALS
D3..D7
TOTAL
B3..D7
Naming a cell
Naming a cell is easier than remembering the cell’s coordinates. It also
increases accuracy because the data in the named cell is attached to the name
and won’t change if the cell is moved to a new location.
When you select a named cell, the name displays in the upper-left corner of
the Quattro Pro desktop beside the input line. This box also displays a list of
cell names.
To name a cell
1 Select the cell.
2 Click Insert, Name, Cells.
3 Type a name in the Name text box.
Remember to type a name that does not appear on the list of existing
names to the left.
To change the cells assigned to a name
2 Choose the name from the list.
154
3 Enter the new coordinates in the Cell(s) box.
To change a name
Delete the existing name, then assign a new name to the cells.
By default, when you copy and paste formulas containing cell names, the
cell names in the new location use absolute cell referencing. To force
Quattro Pro to use relative cell referencing, precede the cell name with a
tilde (~). For example, AGE would be an absolute cell reference and
~AGE would be a relative cell reference.
If you copy cells and alter the contents of the upper-left or lower-right
cells of a named area, the name becomes invalid. Formulas referencing the
named area display ERR to indicate the formulas no longer reference the
data they did before. Deleting either of the two coordinates of a selection
of cells also makes any reference to that named area display ERR.
Naming selections using adjacent labels
You can name cells using adjacent labels. Quattro Pro lets you specify that
the cell immediately to the right or left, or above or below a label should
adopt that label as its name.
To name selections using an adjacent label
1 Select the label as a cell name.
3 Click the Labels button.
4 Indicate the position of the cell you want to name in relation to the
selected label.
For example, if the cell you are naming is below the label, click Down.
Each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) is used as a name for
the adjacent cell. The numeric values in the cells are ignored; you can use
only labels as names.
155
Later changes to the labels do not affect the cell names.
If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the
name. For example, a name that appears as “INCOME” may have been
entered as “INCOME.”
You can also use Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query, Field Names to
assign names to the cells in the first row of a database.
Naming selections automatically
When you name selections automatically, the label in each row or column is
applied to all selected cells in that row or column.
The label in each row or column is applied to all selected cells in that row or
column. If you checked more than one Location check box, a set of names is
created for each set of labels. For example, if you select A1..C4 in the next
figure and check the first two check boxes in the Generate Cell Names dialog
box, five names are created: Jan., B2..B4; Feb., C2..C4; Housing, B2..C2;
Utilities, B3..C3; and Food, B4..C4.
If you check Name Cells at Intersections, each cell has an additional name
created by combining the two sets of labels. Each name can have up to 64
characters. The following is a table of cell names for this example:
156
Cell
Name
B2
JAN._HOUSING
B3
JAN._UTILITIES
B4
JAN._FOOD
C2
FEB._HOUSING
C3
FEB._UTILITIES
C4
FEB._FOOD
To name selections automatically
2 Click the Generate button.
3 Type the cells to name, including label cells in the Cells box.
4 Check any of the following naming options:
Under Top Row
Right of Leftmost Column
Above Bottom Row
Left of rightmost Column
You can check more than one, depending on whether the labels are in the
top row, the leftmost column, the bottom row, or the rightmost column.
5 Consider the following option:
To name individual cells, check at least two of the location boxes, then
check Name Cells At Intersections.
Each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) is used as a name for
the adjacent cell. Numeric values in the selection are ignored; you can use
only labels as names. Later changes to the labels themselves do not affect
the cell names.
If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the
name. For example, a name that appears as “INCOME” may have been
entered as “INCOME ” (with a space at the end).
Creating a table of named cells
You can create a table that lists all of the named cells in the notebook. In a
two-column table of cell names, the first column contains names listed
alphabetically. The second indicates the corresponding coordinates.
To create a table of named cells
2 Click the Output button.
3 Select the top-left cell of the cells where you want the table to display.
157
Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for
each name. Existing data is overwritten in the cells used for the table.
A named cell table is not automatically updated. If you add, change, or
delete cell names, you must re-create the table to reflect the changes.
Deleting a cell name
If you no longer want to identify a cell or block of cells by a name, you can
delete that name.
To delete a cell name
2 Choose a name from the list, or type a name in the Name box.
Although clicking Delete All deletes all cell names in the notebook from
memory, the notebook data is not affected. Formulas that reference named
cells change so that they refer to cell coordinates instead of names.
To delete all names in the notebook, click Insert, Name, Cells, then click
the Delete All button. Click the Yes button to confirm that you want to
delete all names.
158
EDITING AND FORMATTING A
SPREADSHEET
7
Quattro Pro lets you edit and format cells, rows or columns, or the entire
spreadsheet. For example, you can copy or paste cells to different parts of the
notebook, change the color of a cell or text within the cell, change the text
orientation of a cell, and resize rows and columns to a specified height or
width. You can also create and edit headers, footers, and margins within your
spreadsheet.
Avoid presetting cell properties for large areas of the notebook because it
consumes memory and increases file size. It is more efficient to set
properties only in the cells or sheets you are currently using. Or change the
Normal style default properties to preset the notebook differently.
Quattro Pro uses the Spell Checker tool to ensure the spelling accuracy of
your document. You can easily search for specific spreadsheet data to edit in
Quattro Pro using the Find and Replace tool.
You can control changes to your spreadsheet by protecting selected cells, or
the entire spreadsheet. Editing in Group Mode lets you quickly make the
same changes to more than one spreadsheet simultaneously.
Editing spreadsheet data
Quattro Pro makes it easy to edit spreadsheet data. If your spreadsheet
contains large amounts of data, you can save editing time by using the Find
and Replace, and Spell Checker tools.
159
You can change cell content or you can edit parts of cells. If you make a
mistake while editing spreadsheet data, Quattro Pro lets you erase or undo
cell entries, actions, and operations.
You can also transpose columns and rows in the spreadsheet so that the rows
appear as columns and the columns appear as rows.
You can apply spreadsheet or cell protection to lock areas of your spreadsheet
and prevent unwanted data editing.
Finding and replacing data
Quattro Pro lets you quickly find a cell and replace the data it contains using
the Find and Replace tool. You can look for data in cell formulas or cell
values. You can also set conditions for the search criteria. For example, in an
expenses spreadsheet, you can look for only expenses greater than $300.
When using conditional searches, type a question mark (?) before the search
condition (e.g. ? > 300).
You can also choose from numerous search options. You can also use
Notebook Query to search a Quattro Pro database. For more information
about searching a notebook database, see “Querying notebook databases” on
page 292.
To find and replace cells
1 Click Edit, Find and Replace.
2 Type the text or value to find in the Find box.
3 Type the replacement text or value in the Replace box.
4 Type the cell or cells to search in the Cells box. Leave the box blank to
search the current sheet.
5 Enable one of the following buttons:
Formula — finds data in a formula
Value — finds data in a value
Condition — compares cells in the spreadsheet with any conditions
specified in the Find box (<, >, <>, >=, <=)
6 To further customize the search, enable one of the following check boxes
in the Options section:
Columns First — searches down columns before searching across rows
Match Whole — finds exact matches to the information entered in the
Find box
Case Sensitive — matches the capitalization of the text in the Find box
160
Find Next — finds the next occurrence of the search item
Find Previous — finds the previous occurrence of the search item
8 Click the Replace button to replace the found text with the data entered in
the Replace box.
To replace all occurrences of the search item with the replacement text or
value, click the Replace All button.
You can clear all search boxes by clicking the Reset button.
Checking spelling
You can use Quattro Pro to check the spelling of your spreadsheet. Use the
Spell Checker tool to search the document for misspelled or duplicate words,
and irregular capitalization. Use the QuickCorrect tool to automatically
replace common spelling and typing errors. For example, QuickCorrect
automatically replaces “adn” with “and”. QuickCorrect comes with a list of
commonly misspelled words linked to the correct spelling. You can add and
delete words from the list. For example, if you frequently type “frmo”, you
can have the word automatically corrected to “from.” You can also expand
acronyms and abbreviations. For example, if you frequently type a phrase
such as Quattro Pro, you can customize QuickCorrect to expand the acronym
QP to the full phrase each time you type the acronym.
Quattro Pro enables the QuickCorrect tool by default. However, you can
disable this tool if necessary.
To check spelling in your document
Click Tools, Spell Checker.
To add QuickCorrect words
1 Click Tools, QuickCorrect.
2 In the Replace box, type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly
misspell or mistype, or type an acronym or abbreviation to expand in the
document.
3 In the With box, type the correct spelling of the misspelled or mistyped
word, or type the expanded acronym or abbreviation.
4 Click the Add Entry button.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until you finish adding all the words to correct.
161
6 Enable the Replace Words As You Type check box.
7 Click the Close button.
To delete QuickCorrect words
2 Select an entry in the list box, then click the Delete Entry button.
To disable the QuickCorrect tool
2 Disable the Replace Words As You Type check box.
Protecting data
You can prevent users from changing an entire spreadsheet, specific cell
entries, or floating objects. Spreadsheet protection properties work in
conjunction with properties for cell protection. That is, cell protection works
only if you enable overall sheet protection using the Sheet Protection
property. Likewise, disabling sheet protection disables cell protection for
cells individually protected.
When you want to allow users to edit only specific cells, first protect the
entire sheet from editing, then “unprotect” specific cells users can change.
You can also restrict the type of data entered in a cell. For example, you can
restrict a cell to accept only date entries. For information about restricting
data, see “Restricting data” on page 115.
Using sheet protection properties, you can prevent users from moving,
resizing, editing, or deleting floating objects on the current spreadsheet.
Protected objects include floating charts and graphic objects, linked and
embedded objects using Dynamic Data Exchange or Object Linking and
Embedding, drawn objects, and form controls. You can also set protection for
individual objects. However, if you disable the sheet protection for objects,
Quattro Pro ignores the status of individually protected or unprotected
objects. For information about protecting floating objects individually, see
“Protecting graphics” on page 401.
Protecting your notebook with a password prevents unauthorized access. For
information about protecting your notebook with a password, see “Using
password protection” on page 703.
To protect all spreadsheet cells
162
2 Click the Protection tab.
3 Enable the Enable Cell Locking check box in the Sheet Protection
section.
To unlock cells in a protected spreadsheet
1 Select the cells to unlock.
3 Click the Constraints tab.
4 Enable the Unprotect check box in the Cell Protection section.
You can also right-click the cells, move the cursor to Cell Properties, click
Constraints tab, then enable the Unprotect button.
Hold down CTRL to select noncontiguous cells.
To protect all spreadsheet objects
3 Enable the Enable Object Locking check box in the Sheet Protection
section.
Changing cell content
There are two ways to change a cell entry. You can change the entire cell, or
you can make changes to data inside a cell.
You change cell content in Edit mode. When you first enter Edit mode, you
are also in Insert mode. Any characters you type within a cell display to the
left of the insertion point. You can over write existing characters in Overtype
mode.
Inside a cell, you can drag across text you want to change, or click where you
want to add new text. You can press DELETE to erase characters to the right
of the insertion point, or press BACKSPACE to delete characters to the left
of the insertion point. Using the Cut, Copy, or Paste commands you can move
text to different locations. You can also change the appearance of a cell using
the Property Bar. For more information about using the Cut, Copy, or Paste
commands, see “Copying and moving data” on page 169. For information
about changing the appearance of a cell, see “Formatting cells and applying
styles” on page 174.
163
To change from Insert mode to Overtype mode
Press INSERT.
You can return to Insert mode from Overtype mode by pressing INSERT.
To change the entire content of the cell
1 Click the cell, then type a new entry.
2 Press ENTER.
To change part of the cell content
1 Double-click the cell
2 Make the required changes to the cell content.
3 Press ENTER.
You can also select a cell by clicking the cell, then clicking anywhere in
the input line, or pressing F2.
You can also click the check mark in the input line to replace an old entry
with a new one.
You can move the insertion point within a cell by clicking in the cell or
input line, or by using the arrow keys.
You must press ENTER to store the changes in the cell. Pressing ESC
before you press ENTER returns the cell content to its original state.
Erasing cell entries
You can erase cell data using several methods:
erase the contents of selected cells but leave the formatting (alignment,
numeric format, font, etc.) unchanged
erase the formatting of cells but leave the contents unchanged
erase the contents of cells and remove formatting
erase and move the contents of cells to the Clipboard
164
To erase cell
Click...
Content but not formatting
Edit, Clear Values
Formatting but not content
Edit, Clear Formats
Content and formatting
Edit, Clear Cells
Data and formatting and move it to the Clipboard Edit, Cut
The Clear Formats command does not affect column width or row height.
Unnecessary cell formatting can add significantly to the size of a notebook
file. Clear Formats removes unnecessary formatting and reduces the size
of the notebook file.
Undoing actions and operations
The Undo command lets you reverse most operations after performing them.
You can undo most actions and operations in reverse order of performance.
For example, if you create a cell entry, and then want to remove it, you can
use the Undo command immediately after making the entry. This removes
the entry and restores any previous content entered in the cell. To reinstate
the change, use the Redo command.
The Undo command does not work for some actions. (The Undo menu
command appears dimmed immediately after you perform one of these
actions.) In all situations, except where program speed and available memory
are absolutely crucial, keep Undo enabled.
To undo an action or operation
Click Edit, Undo.
To redo an action or operation
Click Edit, Redo.
You can also click the Undo button and the Redo button to undo or redo
actions.
To enable the Undo command for all actions
165
3 Enable the Undo Enabled check box in the Options section.
Transposing columns and rows
Transposing columns and rows changes columns to rows and rows to
columns. For example, all data that appeared in a transposed column is now
displayed as a row. Although you can transpose data to the same location as
the existing cells, the transposed data usually takes a different shape than the
original data and does not overwrite it completely. Avoid overwriting existing
rows and columns when transposing by copying transposed rows and
columns to another area of the spreadsheet.
Do not transpose cells containing formulas because cell references do not
adjust properly.
The following example
shows a column
transposed to appear
as a row
To transpose columns and rows
1 Select the cells to transpose.
2 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Transpose.
3 In the To Edit field, specify the top-left cell where you want to copy the
transposed data. Do not specify a cell within the source cells or the data
appears disarranged.
The new data overwrites existing data in the destination cells.
Editing grouped data
When a notebook contains similar text or formats in several spreadsheets,
you can create groups to edit multiple spreadsheets at once. A spreadsheet
166
can belong to only one group. A change to one spreadsheet in a group affects
all spreadsheets in the group. For example, you can simultaneously change
the same cell in spreadsheet A, B, and C if you group these spreadsheets
together. Group mode lets you enter column or row headings and make
formatting changes to cells on multiple sheets simultaneously.
The QuickSum tool is ideally suited to use with groups. Quattro Pro writes
the appropriate formula in each spreadsheet in the group. Pay attention while
entering formulas that involve 2-D and 3-D references. (Watch the input line
as you point to references.) For information about using QuickSum, see
“Performing calculations using QuickSum” on page 121.
When you enable Group mode, a blue line appears below the sheet tabs to
identify the spreadsheet group. Turn off Group mode to perform some tasks
that use 2-D references.
Enable the Undo command before working in Group mode to ensure that you
can undo any unwanted changes. For information about enabling the Undo
command, see “Undoing actions and operations” on page 165.
You can work with named groups of cells in Quattro Pro. For information
about naming groups of cells, see “Naming cells” on page 153.
Creating, editing, and deleting spreadsheet groups
Creating spreadsheet groups lets you enter or delete data on multiple
spreadsheets simultaneously. You can edit or delete groups as required.
When you enable Group mode, Quattro Pro uses the group name when you
select cells or use formulas in a spreadsheet. For example, if you create a
group named 1stQtr that includes spreadsheets entitled Jan, Feb, and Mar, a
formula would read 1stQtr:A1:A10 instead of Jan..Mar:A1:A10.
To create spreadsheet groups
1 Click Insert, Name, Group of Sheets.
2 Enter a group name. You can use letters and numbers, as well as these
characters:
~‘!%_|\‘?
You can also use spaces, but not as the first character in a name.
3 Type the first and last spreadsheets within the group, then click OK.
To select the spreadsheets before creating the group, select any cell in the
first sheet, then hold down SHIFT and click the last sheet tab to include in
the group.
167
To edit a spreadsheet group
1 Click Insert, Name, Group of Sheets.
2 Click a spreadsheet group name.
3 Change the entries for First Sheet and Last Sheet.
To delete a spreadsheet group
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from the previous procedure.
2 Choose the name of the group to delete from the Defined Groups list.
3 Click Delete.
Entering, copying, and deleting data on multiple spreadsheets
You can enter, copy, and delete data in multiple spreadsheets using
spreadsheet groups. Make sure that Group mode is enabled before changing
grouped data. Entering data or formatting changes in one spreadsheet
changes the same cells in other spreadsheets within the group. Using the
Cut or Clear commands in Group mode affects all sheets in the group.
To turn Group mode on
Click View, Group Mode.
When Group mode is enabled, a blue line appears below the sheet tabs in
the group.
To turn Group Mode off , click View, Group Mode.
To enter data on multiple spreadsheets
1 Enter the data in a cell on any spreadsheet in the group.
2 Press CTRL+ENTER.
Cell formatting applied to the cell is applied to that cell location on all
spreadsheets in the group.
To copy data to spreadsheets in a group
1 Disable Group mode if Group Mode is checked in the View menu.
168
2 Select the source data to copy, then click Edit, Copy.
3 Click View, Group Mode to enable the Group mode option.
4 Select the destination cell in any spreadsheet in the group, then click Edit,
Paste.
To delete data from multiple spreadsheets
1 Select a cell or cells on any spreadsheet in the group.
2 Press CTRL+DEL.
Copying and moving data
Quattro Pro provides three different methods for moving or copying data.
The first method, the Drag and Drop feature, lets you move several cells by
selecting them and dragging them to a different location. While the Drag and
Drop feature can move and copy cells, it does not work on noncontiguous
selections, and you can not make multiple copies of your selection. For more
advanced moving and copying options, use the second method, the Cut, Copy,
and Paste commands. These commands use the Clipboard to move and copy
cells. The third method, the Copy Cells command, lets you specify the cells
to move or copy by name and provides a unique, timesaving option called
Model Copy.
Moving or copying a cell removes the properties from the original cell and
moves them with the data to the new cell location. If you paste cells you
copied or cut with Paste Special, you can control whether cell properties
paste with the cells. For more information about using Paste Special, see
“Using the Paste Special command” on page 173.
When you want to copy only formatting, you can use the QuickFormat tool.
For information about using the QuickFormat tool see, “Using the
QuickFormat and SpeedFormat tools” on page 175.
If you copy formulas, consider making the cell addresses absolute. For
information about copying cell formulas, see “Working with formulas and
spreadsheet functions” on page 123.
Using the Drag and Drop feature
Using the Drag and Drop feature lets you visually choose exactly where to
move or copy selected cells in a notebook. You can drag cells anywhere on
the current spreadsheet, between spreadsheets, or between notebooks.
Select and point to the edge of the cells to move. When the four-way arrow
appears, drag the data to the destination cell. A colored outline of the cell
selection moves with the four-way arrow as a guide to help you locate an area
169
in which to “drop” your selection. Be careful; dropping cells onto
unprotected data overwrites the content of those cells.
You can change the delay time for Drag and Drop if the four-way arrow
appears too slowly (or too quickly) when you drag objects.
To move cells by dragging
1 Select a cell or cells.
2 Point to an edge of the cells until the four-way arrow appears.
3 Drag the cells to the destination area using the colored outline as a guide.
4 Release the mouse button to drop the cells into place.
To copy cells by dragging
2 Hold down CTRL and follow steps 2 to 4 from the previous procedure.
To move or copy noncontiguous cells, use the Cut or Copy command.
To drag cells to another notebook
2 Point to an edge of the cells until the four-way arrow appears.
3 Drag the cells onto the notebook name on the Application Bar.
4 Hold down the left mouse button until the other notebook displays, then
drag the cells into the other notebook.
5 Release the mouse button to drop the cells into place.
Make sure you open the notebook to which you want to drag the selected
cells before moving or copying them.
To change the delay time for the Drag and Drop arrow
170
3 Type a new interval time, in milliseconds (ms) in the Cell Drag And Drop
Delay Time box. The default interval for Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time
is 5000 ms.
Using the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands
Copying cells in the notebook leaves the original cells intact while cutting
cells removes them from their original location. Copying and cutting cells or
cell content places a copy of the selection on the Clipboard. You can paste the
selection in
the input line of another cell or in a text box
a cell or cells within the current spreadsheet
another spreadsheet in the notebook, or in another notebook
When you paste the entire selection in a specific cell, the Clipboard uses that
cell as the upper-left position of the pasted information.
You can use the Copy and Cut commands to copy or move contiguous and
noncontiguous selections, to paste a selection to several locations without
reselecting the source, or to copy data to and from other Windows
applications.
Be careful to allow enough space to paste the complete source. Pasting a
selection on existing cells replaces the content and properties of those cells.
If you select a single cell, column, or row as the source selection, you can
make multiple copies by selecting more cells as the destination. You can fill
an area with data cut from the spreadsheet. The first time you use the Paste
command, you move the source data. Using the Paste command a second
time copies the source data throughout a destination area. For information
about filling data, see “Automatically entering data” on page 107.
To copy or move cells
1 Select the cells to copy or move.
To copy cells, click Edit, Copy
To move cells, click Edit, Cut
3 Select the location to paste the selection.
171
To copy or move noncontiguous cells
1 Hold down CTRL and select the cells to copy or move.
2 Follow steps 2 to 4 from the previous procedure.
To make multiple copies of a cell, column, or row
1 Select the cell, column, or row to copy.
2 Click Edit, Copy.
To make multiple copies of data cut from a spreadsheet
1 Select the cell, column, or row to cut.
2 Click Edit, Cut.
5 Select the destination area for the multiple copies of data.
6 Click Paste.
Using the Copy Cells command
Use the Copy Cells command to copy one or many cells. This command
copies cells a bit faster than copying them to the Clipboard. You can use the
Copy Cells command to copy the following:
cell or cell references either named or not such as B4..B4, or C5..D10, or
INCOME; copying named cells copies the value only, not the name
noncontiguous selections, such as B4..B4,C5..D10
cells in other sheets in the same notebook, such as C:B4..B6
cells in other notebook files, such as [C:\BUDGETS\SALES]B:D10..D15
Copied cells overwrite any data contained in the destination cells.
Use the Model Copy option to copy cells that contain absolute references to
cells within the copied area.
To copy or move data or objects other than cells, use the Clipboard features.
For more information about copying or moving data or objects, see “Using
the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands” on page 171.
172
To copy cells using the Copy Cells feature
1 Click Edit, Copy Cells.
2 Select the cells to copy in the From box.
3 Select the destination cells in the To box.
4 If you copy cells containing absolute references to cells within the copied
area, enable the Model Copy check box.
Instead of pointing to the cells you want to copy, you can enter new
coordinates or press F3 to choose from a list of cell names.
Using the Paste Special command
Pasting information using the Clipboard also pastes cell properties, formulas,
and labels. Paste Special lets you control what you paste by including either
more or less options than the Paste command. For example, you can paste
data without properties, or paste properties without data. You can paste from
other applications, or control the format of the data you paste in the
notebook. You can do simple math, or you can copy row and column sizes.
For information about using Paste Special for mathematical operations, see
“Combining files using Paste Special” on page 669.
Relative and absolute addresses let you control how formulas adjust when
you copy them. The Model Copy option lets you control this adjustment; it is
useful when the cells you copy contain absolute references to other cells
within that cell area. The Model Copy option adjusts absolute references to
the new copied location. Although the absolute reference adjusts, it remains
absolute to make future copies absolute.
Copied cells overwrite any data contained in the destination cells, unless you
select a math operation.
Pasting from another application
You can create a live data link with data in the Clipboard from a participating
Dynamic Data Exchange application. With linked data, your notebook reflects
changes from the other application. For more information about live links,
see “Linking and embedding objects” on page 672.
When data from other applications is stored on the Clipboard, you can choose
the format in which to paste the information. For example, when pasting
WordPerfect data from the Clipboard, you can paste it as unformatted text
directly in a cell. You can also paste the information in WordPerfect format.
Quattro Pro treats pasted WordPerfect data as an object which you can size
173
and move on the notebook. If you click the object, this launches the
WordPerfect application, which displays the data.
To paste data from the Clipboard using Paste Special
1 Select the destination for the pasted cells.
2 Click Edit, Paste Special.
3 Enable one or more of the paste special check boxes.
4 Click the Paste button.
For information about one or more of the check boxes in the Paste Special
dialog box, click the What’s This button and point to the appropriate check
box.
To link the copied cells to the source cells click the Link button on the
Paste Special dialog box. When you update the source, the copied cells
update also.
Formatting cells and applying styles
Quattro Pro lets you format cell content in various ways. Using QuickFormat,
you can copy formatting from one cell and apply it to numerous cells in the
spreadsheet. The SpeedFormat tool lets you apply predefined formats to your
data.
You can control the format of cell text by wrapping long strings of text within
the cell. By joining cells, you can create titles and vertical side bars across
multiple cells. Rotating text within a cell lets you control the angle in which
text is displayed. You can also format text by changing font and appearance
options. For example, you can change the font color to blue or underline the
text within a cell.
Using styles
Styles create a uniform look for notebooks. A style consists of several text
properties. You can apply predefined styles to text. For example, the
Currency style formats the cell as currency with two decimals. You can also
merge styles. Normal is the default style applied to all cells in a new
notebook. However, you can define new styles or modify predefined styles.
When you define a style, you set or disable properties. New styles save with
the current notebook. The following table outlines style settings in Quattro
Pro.
174
Style
Result
Comma
Sets the numeric format to a comma with two decimals
Comma0
Sets the numeric format to a comma with no decimals
Currency
Sets the numeric format to currency with two decimals
Currency0
Sets the numeric format to currency with no decimals
Date
Sets the numeric format to user defined (with the date format specified)
Fixed
Sets the numeric format to fixed with two decimals
Heading 1
Sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 18 point bold
Heading 2
Sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 12 point bold
Normal
Sets the numeric format and alignment to general; sets the font to Arial
(or Helvetica) 10 point regular; sets shading to white; turns protection
on; and sets the text color to black
Percent
Sets the numeric format to percent
Total
Inserts a double line above the active cell
Using the QuickFormat and SpeedFormat tools
Quattro Pro provides two formatting tools to help you format your
spreadsheet. Using the QuickFormat tool, you can copy and paste the
formatting (background color, font, numeric format, etc.) of one cell to
another cell or selection of cells.
You can use the SpeedFormat tool to apply a predesigned format to your data.
The SpeedFormat tool also lets you add custom formats or revise existing
ones. Using SpeedFormat overrides any existing cell property settings. New
formats are saved with the notebook. When you add or remove rows or
columns from a range of cells formatted using SpeedFormat, Quattro Pro
reapplies that format to the modified range.
The following
example shows a
sample of the
Green
SpeedFormat.
To copy cell formatting
1 Click the cell or cells with the format you want to copy.
175
2 Click the QuickFormat button on the toolbar to turn on QuickFormat.
3 Select the cell or cells where you want to paste the formatting.
To turn off QuickFormat, click the QuickFormat button.
To apply a predesigned format
1 Select the cells to format.
2 Click Format, SpeedFormat.
3 Choose a format from the Formats list box.
4 Deselect any properties (column headings, row headings, etc.) that you do
not want applied to the cells.
You can also click the SpeedFormat button on the Notebook toolbar.
To add a custom format
2 Choose a format to customize from the Formats list box.
3 Deselect any properties (column headings, row headings, etc.) you do not
want applied to the cells.
5 Type the name of the new format in the Format Name box.
6 Type the coordinates of the example cells in the Example Cells box.
7 Click OK.
The new format is available for you to apply to other cells.
Wrapping text
Text that appears wider than a column overflows to the next cell when that
cell is empty. If the next cell contains data, the overflow text is hidden and
the text appears truncated. You can adjust text in a cell to appear as a
paragraph within the cell, or you can enter individual lines of text within the
cell. Wrapping text works only on text, not on numeric data. You can include
up to 4096 characters (4KB) in a single cell.
176
The following
example shows a cell
containing wrapped
text.
Using the Text Reformat feature, you can adjust text in a cell to appear as a
paragraph covering several rows or columns. Although reformatted text
appears in several rows or columns, the data is stored in the left-most cells of
each row. The Text Reformat feature maintains the original row height.
However, row heights do change when you reformat entries with different
font sizes; the font size of the entry in the first row determines the font size
of the reformatted text. You can reformat only existing text; text entered
later is not affected. Type cell content that you want to reformat in one
column. Do not include blank cells between cells to reformat as cells
following a blank cell are not reformatted.
To wrap text within a cell
1 Click the cell where you want to wrap the text.
3 Click the Alignment tab, then enable the Wrap Text check box in the Cell
Options section.
To wrap text from the toolbar, click the Property button, then click
Alignment, Wrap Text.
To enter short lines of text in one cell
1 Click the cell where you want to enter the text.
3 Click the Alignment tab, enable the Wrap Text check box in the Cell
Options section, then click OK.
4 Type the first line of text.
5 Press ALT+ENTER to move to the next line.
177
6 Continue typing. Press ALT+ENTER to move to a new line until you
finish entering the text.
7 Press ENTER.
To wrap text over multiple rows or columns
1 Select the first cell to reformat, then click Format, Text Reformat.
2 In the Cells box, choose the columns or rows where you want the
reformatted text to appear. Begin with the cell you selected to reformat as
the upper-left cell. For example, if you selected cell A1, you can select
A1..B3 as the destination cells for the reformatted text.
If data already exists in the destination cells for the reformatted text, the
existing data moves down.
If you specify the destination cells for the reformatted text in the active
row only, it fills up as many rows as necessary to display the text within
the columns containing those cells.
If you specify both columns and rows as the destination cells for the
reformatted text, Quattro Pro reformats the text within those cells if
enough space exists.
Joining cells
You can combine cells using the Join feature. Joining cells lets you create a
title across multiple cells, or a vertical side bar by joining cells in a column. In
joined cells, you can center and align text and numbers as you would in a
single cell. You can join cells in rows, columns, or both. You can also perform
calculations and use formulas in a joined cell as you would in a regular cell.
To join cells
1 Drag across the cells you want to join.
4 Enable the Join Cells check box in the Cell Options section.
To quickly join and center cells, select the cells to join, then click the Join
Cells button on the Notebook toolbar.
178
When typing in a joined cell, press ALT+ENTER to return to the next
line inside the joined cell. Pressing ENTER moves the insertion point to
the next cell in the column.
To separate joined cells
1 Select the joined cells.
4 Disable the Join Cells check box in the Cell Options section.
Rotating text
By rotating text, you change its orientation. You can specify the degrees of
rotation. Rotating text works well with the Join feature. Join the cells first,
type your text, then rotate the text.
To rotate text
1 Click the cell with text to rotate.
4 Enable the Rotated button, then specify the degrees of rotation. Specify
90 or 270 to rotate the text vertically from the bottom of the cell to the
top.
Changing text font and appearance
You can change the font of the text in one or more cells by adjusting the font
face, font size, or text color. Changing the color of text does not affect cell
color or shading. (You may need to click outside the cells to see the new
shading.) When you change cell shading, choose a contrasting text color to
ensure visibility. If text does not appear on your printout, choose a darker
color; light colors print as white on some printers. You can create custom
colors using the Notebook palette. For information about using the Notebook
Palette, see “Changing colors in the Notebook palette” on page 414.
You can also change text appearance options. For example, you can underline
and italicize text, or you can set text to superscript or subscript.
Quattro Pro lets you preview changes to text font or appearance of selected
cells using the Corel RealTime Preview feature. When you select a font or
appearance option, Quattro Pro automatically displays a preview of the
179
change in the selected cells. If you use the Property Bar lists to change the
font face or text size, Quattro Pro displays an immediate preview of the
change beside the list. By default, Quattro Pro enables the Corel RealTime
Preview feature. However, you can choose to disable it. For more
information about Corel RealTime Preview, see “Zooming data and hiding
and displaying screen components” on page 65.
To change text font
1 Select the cells with text to format.
3 Click the Cell Font tab.
Face — sets the typeface of the selected text
Size — sets the size of the selected text
Color — sets the color of the selected text; click More to expand the
color palette selection
You can also select text by double clicking the cell and selecting the text
to change.
If a font face has a TrueType (TT) or Adobe Type Manager (a) symbol
beside it, text appears in print as it does on-screen. Font faces with a
printer symbol beside it print but may not appear in the correct font
on-screen. Font faces without a symbol appear accurately on-screen, but
may not appear in the correct font when printed.
When you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to
display the tallest letters in the row (unless you have set the row height).
To change text appearance
1 Select the cells to change.
2 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Appearance section:
Bold
Italics
180
Underline
Strikeout
You can also use the Bold, Italic, Underline, or Strikeout buttons on the
Property Bar to change the text appearance. To toggle off bold, italic,
underline, or strikeout click the button again.
To set text to superscript or subscript
1 Double-click the cell and select the data to change.
Click the Superscript button to display text as superscript.
Click the Subscript button to display text as subscript.
To toggle off superscript or subscript click the button again while the text
is selected.
Defining, changing, and deleting styles
You can define a style for cells in a notebook and set or disable properties.
Disabled properties have no effect on cells to which you apply the new style.
This lets you create partial styles that affect only a few properties at a time,
and combine new and existing properties. You can redefine existing styles by
adding, removing, or changing existing properties. If you redefine a style
used in the notebook, all cells using that style change to reflect the new
property settings. Styles save with the current notebook.
You can delete any style you no longer use except the Normal style. If you
delete a style, cells using this style revert to the Normal style.
When you set style properties, Quattro Pro uses default settings for each
property. However, you can customize each property setting. For example,
you can adjust the Font properties to set the font face to Times New Roman
and size to 12 point. Text which uses this style displays the style properties
you set.
To define a new style
1 Click Format, Styles.
2 Type a new name in the Define Style For text box.
181
3 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the properties you want to
include in the style.
4 Click any of the following buttons to set the properties for the style:
Alignment — sets the alignment properties for the cell
Format — sets the cell format properties
Protection — enables or disables cell protection
Line Drawing — sets the properties for cell lines
Shading — sets the shading, pattern, and color properties for the cell
Font — sets the font type for the text in the cell
Text Color — sets the font color for text in the cell
To change an existing style
2 Choose the style to change from the Define Style For list box.
3 Enable the Property check box for properties you want to change.
4 Click the Property button(s), and change the settings in the corresponding
dialog box.
Disable the Property check box to remove a property from the style
definition.
To delete a style
2 Choose the style name in the Define Style For list, then click the Delete
button.
Applying and merging styles
You can apply predefined styles to cells. You can choose a style from the
default style list in Quattro Pro or you can define a new style to apply to cells.
For more information about defining a new style, see “Defining, changing,
and deleting styles” on page 181.
When you apply a style, cells with preset properties do not change. You can
also copy a style to another notebook.
182
Quattro Pro lets you merge property settings for one style with those for
another style or formatted cell. For example, you can merge a cell with
purple text color properties with the Normal style. When you apply the
Normal style to cells in your notebook, the cells display the Normal style
properties and the text is purple.
To apply a predefined style to cells
1 Select a cell or group of cells.
2 Choose a style from the Style list on the Property Bar.
To copy a style to another notebook
1 Select a cell with the style format you want to copy.
2 Click Edit, Copy.
3 Select a cell or group of cells in another notebook.
4 Click Edit, Paste. The style name appears in the Style list box for that
notebook.
Click File, Open if the notebook you want to copy the style to is not
currently open.
To merge styles or preformatted cells
2 In the Define Styles For list box, select the style to merge, then click
Merge.
Enable the Style button and choose the style name from the Select
Style list box to merge another style
Enable the Cell button and type the cell address in the Select Cell box
to merge a formatted cell
Working with fills, patterns, and borders
Quattro Pro lets you add flare to your spreadsheet using fills, patterns, and
borders. You can choose from a broad selection of colors, patterns, and
borders to improve the appearance of your spreadsheet.
You can also create new colors to add to the color palette by modifying
existing colors. For information about adding colors to the palette, see
183
“Changing colors in the notebook palette” on page 414. When you print a
spreadsheet with color and it does not appear on your printout, choose a
darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.
Adding color to a spreadsheet
Quattro Pro lets you color cell backgrounds using the color palette. You can
also use colors to identify data ranges. With the spreadsheet Conditional
Color property, you can change the color of specific types of data: values
above or below a specified range, and ERR values. For example, you can
display all negative values in red or all values greater than 1000 in green.
When you enable the Conditional Color option, changing the text color does
not change the color of data designated as a normal value.
You can also color-code spreadsheet tabs. For example, you can make all tabs
for Expenses one color and all tabs for Revenue another color.
To color the cell background
1 Select the cells.
3 Click the Fill/Pattern tab.
4 Choose the solid pattern box, then choose a color from the Pattern Color
palette or click More to expand the color palette selection.
Click the Fill button to choose a background color using the Property Bar.
To add color to a range of data
2 Click the Conditional Color tab.
3 In the Smallest Normal Value text box, type the smallest value to which
you want to apply conditional color.
4 In the Greatest Normal Value text box, type the largest value to which you
want to apply conditional color.
5 Enable one of the following buttons, in the Option section:
Below Normal — sets the color of cells whose values are below the
smallest normal value
184
Normal Color — sets the color of cells whose values fall within the
range set in the Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value text
boxes
Above Normal Color — sets the color of cells whose values are above
the greatest normal value
ERR Color — sets the color to use for ERR and NA values generated
by formula errors
6 Choose the color to associate with the option you chose in the previous
step.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enable a different color for as many options as you
want to color code.
8 Enable the Enable check box to apply the colors you set to the
spreadsheet.
You can also right-click a sheet tab, then click Sheet Properties to access
the Conditional Color tab.
To turn off conditional colors, disable the Enable check box.
To color-code a spreadsheet tab
2 Click the Tab Color tab.
3 Disable the Use System Color check box.
4 Choose a color from the palette or click More to expand the color palette
selection.
the Tab Color tab.
Adding patterns to a spreadsheet
Quattro Pro lets you fill cells with patterned backgrounds. You can choose
the pattern and background color from the color palette or create new colors
using the notebook palette. For information about creating new colors, see
“Changing colors in the notebook palette” on page 414.
185
To add a pattern to cell backgrounds
1 Select the cells.
3 Click the Fill/Pattern tab.
4 Choose a pattern from the pattern display.
5 Choose a pattern color from the Pattern Color palette or click More to
expand the color palette selection.
6 Choose a background color from the Background Color palette or click
More to expand the color palette selection.
Adding lines and borders to cells
Quattro Pro lets you choose from a variety of lines and borders. You can draw
lines around a cell or you can add borders to a selection of cells. You can set
the style, thickness, and color of lines and borders in the spreadsheet.
Using the Line Drawing tool you can apply more than one border to selected
cells. For example, you can draw a double-line border around an entire cell
selection, or draw single vertical lines between the columns in the selection.
The Line Drawing tool provides a mock-up or sample box of the cell
selection to which you are adding lines. You can use the sample box to
indicate where to draw lines on selected cells. For example, clicking the
outer edges of the sample box draws border lines only outside of the
selection; clicking the inner lines in the sample box draws border lines
between every row and column in the selected cells.
You can also add lines for total and grand total columns in your spreadsheet.
To add borders to cells
1 Select the cells to which you want to add a border.
3 Click the Border tab.
4 Click Border Type, then choose a border from the list.
5 Click Border Color, then choose a border color from the list.
All — applies the borders to all the grid lines of the cell selection
186
Outline — applies the borders to only the exterior grid lines of the cell
selection
Inside — applies the borders to only the interior grid lines of the cell
selection
To add lines around or within a border
2 Click the Line button on the Property Bar, then choose a line or box
drawing.
To remove lines in a border
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of the “To add borders to cells” procedure.
2 Click No Line type.
3 In the sample box, click the lines to remove.
If you change your mind as you are adding lines, click the line you
recently changed, then click the No Change line type. This returns the
line to the line type in effect when you last clicked OK.
To cancel all changes, click the Cancel button.
To add lines for totals and grand totals
1 Select the cells to which you want to add lines.
3 Click the Cell Font tab.
4 In the Accounting Style section, enable one of the following buttons:
Single Line
Double Line
Aligning data
You can align data horizontally or vertically within a cell. Horizontal
alignment positions the data at the right or left edge of a cell, or centers the
data within a cell. You can also center data across selected cells. When you
indent a cell, data appears left-aligned and indented.
Vertical alignment positions data at the top, center, or bottom of a cell. Adjust
the row height or column width if you cannot see all data in a cell.
187
Using Text Orientation options, you can change the direction of cell text.
Usually, text displays horizontally within a cell, from left to right. Vertical
orientation, displays text from top to bottom.
Aligning data horizontally
Data automatically aligns itself in a cell according to the default alignment
setting: numbers and formula results are right-aligned, and labels and dates
are left-aligned. You can format a cell to align data horizontally at the left,
right, or center of a cell. You can also choose to indent data within a cell. You
can change the default alignment of all labels by changing the alignment
setting of the Normal style. You can also align data by preceding the data with
an aligning character:
‘ (apostrophe) = left-align
^ (caret) = centered
“ (quotation mark) = right-align
To align data horizontally in a cell
1 Select the cells to align.
4 In the Horizontal Alignment section, enable one of the following buttons:
General — right-aligns values and left-aligns labels
Left — left-aligns all types of data
Right — right-aligns all types of data
Center — centers cell data
Indent — moves text in from the edge of a cell
188
Click the Alignment button to change horizontal cell alignment using the
Property Bar.
To set the default alignment of all labels
2 Choose Normal from the Define Style For list.
3 Click Alignment, then set the alignment style.
Centering data across cells
You can center data over several cells. Although the data moves to the center
of the selected cells, it actually resides in the cell where you originally
entered the text. If you have applied shading to this cell, the cells over which
you centered text also appear shaded.
To center text over cells
1 Type the text to be centered in the left-most cell. (For example, if you are
centering text in row 12 across columns C, D, and E, type the text to be
centered in C12.)
2 Select the cells to center the text over starting with the cell containing
the text (highlight C12..E12 in this example).
5 Enable the Center Across Block button in the Horizontal Alignment
section.
To display the centered text in the input line, click the cell where the text
was originally entered.
If you enter text in a second cell where text is centered across cells, the
first entry is centered over formatted cells to the left of the next entry.
Aligning data vertically
You can align data vertically within a cell to appear at the top, middle, or
bottom of the cell.
189
The following
example shows the
vertical alignment
options available.
To align data vertically
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the “To align data horizontally in a cell”
procedure.
2 In the Vertical Alignment section, enable one of the following buttons:
Top — aligns text at the top of the cell
Center — aligns text at the middle of the cell
Bottom — aligns text in the bottom of the cell
Changing text orientation
You can change the text orientation of a cell to display text horizontally from
left to right, or vertically to display text from top to bottom.
The following
example shows the
difference between
horizontal and
vertical text
orientation.
You can also change the rotation of text within a cell. For more information
about rotating text, see “Rotating text” on page 179.
To change text orientation
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 from the “To align data horizontally in a cell”
procedure.
2 In the Text Orientation section, enable one of the following buttons:
Horizontal
Vertical
190
Working with numeric formats
Quattro Pro lets you format numbers in your spreadsheet. For example, you
can format a number to display a specific number of decimals. You can use
the existing numeric formats in Quattro Pro or you can create your own
numeric formats to further customize the appearance of numbers. For
information about creating custom formats, see “Working with custom
formats” on page 195.
There are two groups of formats: number formats and date/time formats. For
more information about Date/Time formats, see “Working with date, time,
and currency formats” on page 193.
By default, when you enter a number, the column width expands to fit it
(unless the number has a General format). If columns do not expand when
you enter numbers, enable the Fit-As-You-Go tool. For more information
about changing column width as you enter numbers, see “Using QuickFit and
Fit-As-You-Go” on page 209.
Changing the numeric format of cells
Numeric formats do not affect cell values; they affect only the way values are
displayed. For example, a format that limits the number of decimal places
that appear does not affect the precision of Quattro Pro calculations, which is
accurate to 16 significant digits.
When you enter numbers, Quattro Pro displays them in the default General
format. You can change how the number displays (for example, add commas,
dollar signs, specific number of decimals, other characters to the number,
etc.), select a predefined style, or set a specific numeric format.
A significant digit refers to any digit that is not a leading zero. For example,
the number 1.23 has three significant digits. The number .000829 also has
three significant digits because the leading zeros do not count. Decimals,
commas, dollar signs, and percent signs do not count as digits.
Quattro Pro rounds the appearance of numbers to the specified decimal place
in the case of fixed, scientific, currency, comma, and percent formats. The
general format rounds off fractional numbers as necessary to fit in the cell. To
round the number actually stored in a cell, use @ROUND. For information
about spreadsheet functions, see “Working with spreadsheet functions” on
page 139.
To change the numeric format of cells
191
4 Enable the button that corresponds to the format you want keeping the
following in mind:
If you enable General, numbers display exactly as you enter them.
If the format allows a variable number of decimal places, type a number
from 0 to 15 (the default is 2) in the Enter Number of Decimal Places
box.
If the format allows, choose how you want negative numbers to display.
If you enable Number, you can choose to include the 1000 separator
(comma).
If you enable Currency, choose the country currency symbol to use.
You can also use the Accounting Alignment option.
If you enable Fraction, choose the fraction type. Enable the Reduced
Fraction check box to reduce fractions to their lowest common
denominator.
If you enable Custom, select a previously defined custom format or
click Add to create a new custom format.
Quattro Pro has added the Euro to the available currency formats. You can
view the Euro currency symbol if you are using Microsoft Windows 98 or
if your system has a Euro compliant font installed.
If you enable the Hidden button, you hide cells. To prevent them from
being accidentally overwritten, protect the sheet with Format, Sheet
Protection, Enable Cell Locking.
For information about one or more of the check boxes in the Numeric
Format dialog box, click the What’s This button and point to the
appropriate check box.
Hiding zeros on a spreadsheet
Quattro Pro lets you hide all values that equal zero on your spreadsheet. For
example, a value such as .004 that appears as 0 if decimal precision is 0, will
still appear, even if Display Zeros is set to No, because it is not actually 0.
Hiding zeros does not remove zero values from the sheet. Zeros remain in
memory and reappear if you change the Display Zeros setting.
It is easy to accidentally overwrite cells containing formulas that evaluate to
zero. Make sure Undo is enabled, or consider protecting the spreadsheet. For
information about enabling Undo, see “Undoing actions and operations” on
page 165. For information about protecting your spreadsheet, see “Protecting
data” on page 162.
192
To hide zeros on a sheet
1 Click Format, Sheet, Display.
2 Enable the No button in the Display Zeros section.
Working with date, time, and currency formats
Quattro Pro lets you format dates and times in your spreadsheet. You can use
the existing formats in Quattro Pro or create your own custom formats to
further customize the appearance of dates and times. For information about
creating custom formats, see “Working with custom formats” on page 195.
The International currency, date, and time formats correspond to the
International settings located in Tools, Settings. If you change these settings,
you must conform to the new settings when you enter currency, dates, or
times. By default, Quattro Pro displays times in long form as HH:MM:SS (for
example, 09:32:30), or in short form as HH:MM (for example, 09:32) when
no seconds have been specified. Once you enter a date or time, you can
reformat it to any setting you choose. For more information about time
formats, see “Applying formats to dates and times” on page 105. For
information about changing the International currency, date, and time
formats, see “Using international settings” on page 57.
Editing dates in previous versions of Quattro Pro
Any two-digit years entered in a cell or formula as a label in earlier versions
of Quattro Pro now use the two-digit year entry window. For example, if cell
A1 contains the label ‘1/1/20’ (assumed to be 1/1/1920 in versions of Quattro
Pro prior to Quattro Pro version 7 upgraded for Windows NT), the formula
@DATEVALUE(A1) now returns the integer date value for 1/1/2020.
You should change any label previously entered using a two-digit year date
format to a four-digit year date format to explicitly indicate the century. (For
example, edit the label ‘1/1/20’ as ‘1/1/1920’.)
Once you have changed a date label from two to four digits, the century
designation remains unless you override it by re-entering all four year digits
of the date. For more information about date formats, see “Applying formats
to dates and times” on page 105.
Exchanging date information between applications
When you import data containing dates in strings or numeric format from an
application that does not support four-digit year date formats, the data
imported may also use the two-digit year window.
All Quattro Pro 8 date functions updated for easier multi-century use remain
compatible with previous versions of Quattro Pro. For example, @DATE
193
(26,3,12) will return 16873 (12-Mar-1926) in Quattro Pro 8 and all previous
versions.
Setting the date default to display four digits
You can set all dates to display in a four-digit year format by default. In
Windows (Settings, Control Panel, Regional Settings), set the preferred date
short style format to M/d/yyyy. Exit Windows (Settings), then set the default
Date Format in Quattro Pro to Windows Default (Tools, Settings,
International, Date Format).
Formatting dates
Quattro Pro stores each date you enter as a five-digit serial number. Quattro
Pro uses this number for calculations. If you type a date, it displays in the
format in which you type it. If you enter the date using @DATE,
@DATEVALUE, or @NOW, you must reformat the cells with the date
numeric format. Otherwise, Quattro Pro displays the results as a date serial
number. For example, 33857 appears instead of 10-Sep-92.
To format dates
4 Enable the Date button, then choose a specific date format from the list
box.
Formatting times
Once you enter a time in the spreadsheet, you can change to another time
format with the Numeric Format property.
To format times
4 Enable the Time button, then choose a specific time format from the list
box.
194
Working with custom formats
Custom formats let you change how values are formatted, including
numbers, dates, and times. Quattro Pro provides several predefined custom
formats. You can edit one of these formats or you can create a new format.
You can preview a custom format in the preview box located under the
Custom Formats list.
Using the advanced custom format options you can
customize the format of values (e.g., numbers, dates, and times)
set conditions in a format statement
adjust how a value displays using arithmetic operators for example, you
can divide 10,000 by 1,000 to display it as 10K; the value in the cell
remains 10,000 but displays as 10K in the spreadsheet
add rich text formatting to formatted values (e.g., font type, size, and
color)
display numeric values as horizontal bars to create a graphical
representation of data
A custom format can contain more than one format statement. Quattro Pro
maintains a summary of each format statement in the Format Summary
section of the custom format.
New custom formats are added to the Custom Formats list in all open
notebooks, but only the custom formats you apply to cells in open notebooks
are saved. If you paste a formatted cell into another notebook, the custom
format also copies.
For information about the available number formats, see “Adding numeric
format codes” on page 195. For information about the available date or time
formats, see “Adding date format codes” on page 197 and “Adding time
format codes” on page 198.
Adding numeric format codes
You can customize the format used for numbers in your spreadsheet using
numeric format codes. You can also customize the format of dates and times.
For information about customizing date formats, see “Adding date format
codes” on page 197. For information about customizing time formats, see
“Adding time format codes” on page 198.
For information about applying numeric format codes, see “Creating, editing,
and applying custom formats” on page 199.
The table below outlines and describes each numeric format code available in
Quattro Pro.
195
196
Numeric format code
Description
0
Always displays a digit. If the number does not have a digit in this
position, a zero appears. If there are more digits in the number than
zeros in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed
and the fraction portion is rounded.
9
Displays a digit if the number has one. If there are more digits in the
number than nines in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion
are displayed and the fraction portion is rounded.
, (comma)
Inserts a thousands separator (a comma unless specified otherwise with
the application’s International properties). If not part of a number code,
the comma is inserted wherever it is positioned in the format.
. (period)
Inserts a decimal separator (a period unless specified otherwise with the
application’s International properties).
E- or e-
Displays the number in scientific notation, preceding negative exponents
with a minus sign. If the format includes at least one zero or nine
following this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E
or e. If the exponent contains more digits than nines or zeros following
this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.
E+ or e+
Displays numbers in scientific notation, preceding positive exponents
with a plus sign. If the format includes at least one zero or nine following
this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E or e. If the
exponent contains more digits than nines or zeros following this symbol,
the extra digits are displayed.
?//M
Displays a fraction followed by the maximum number of digits for the
denominator.
?//
Displays a fraction followed by the denominator to use. The fraction is
not reduced.
?//R
Displays a fraction followed by the base denominator to use. The fraction
is reduced if possible.
* (asterisk)
Fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk.
_ (underscore)
Skips the space that would have been required to display the character
that follows the underscore. This lets you align numbers for formats with
optional trailing characters such as negative numbers with parentheses.
| (bar)
Displays the first character following the | code in the space that would
have been required to display the second character following the | code.
This allows the alignment of formats with different trailing characters,
such as the K Meg Gig predefined format.
LeftBar
Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting at the left of the cell
using the range 0 to 100. You can change the limits of the range and the
bar color.
CenterBar
Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting in the center of the
cell. Uses the range 0 to 100 from the center to the left, and 0 to 100
from the center to the right of the cell. You can change the limits of the
range and the bar color.
RightBar
Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting at the right of the
cell using the range 0 to 100. You can change the limits of the range and
the bar color.
General
Uses the General numeric format.
Adding date format codes
You can customize the format for dates in your spreadsheet using date format
codes. You can also customize the format of numbers and times.
For information about customizing number formats, see “Adding numeric
format codes” on page 195. For information about customizing times, see
For information about applying date format codes, see “Creating, editing, and
applying custom formats” on page 199.
The table below outlines and describes the date format codes available in
Quattro Pro.
Date format codes
Description
d
Displays the day of the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-31).
dd
Displays the day of the month as a two digit number (01-31).
wday, Wday, WDAY
Displays the day of the week as a three-character abbreviation in
lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.
1wday, 1Wday, 1WDAY
Displays the weekday as an abbreviation using the number of characters
you specify in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.
weekday, Weekday, WEEKDAY
Displays the day of the week in lowercase, with the first letter
capitalized, or in uppercase.
mo
Displays the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-12).
mmo
Displays the month as a two-digit number (01-12).
mon, Mon, MON
Displays the month as a three-character abbreviation in lowercase, with
the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.
197
1mon, 1Mon, 1MON
Displays the month as an abbreviation using the number of characters
you specify in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase
(e.g., SEPT).
month, Month, MONTH
Displays the name of the month in lowercase, with the first letter
capitalized, or in uppercase.
yy
Displays the last two digits of the year (00-99).
yyyy
Displays all four digits of the year (0001-9999).
* (asterisk)
Fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk.
_ (underscore)
Skips the space that would have been required to display the character
that follows the underscore. This lets you align numbers for formats with
optional trailing characters, such as negative numbers with parentheses.
| (bar)
Displays the first character following the | code in the space that would
have been required to display the second character following the | code.
This allows the alignment of formats with different trailing characters,
such as the K Meg Gig predefined format.
Adding time format codes
You can customize the time formats in your spreadsheet using time format
codes. You can also customize the format for numbers and dates in your
spreadsheet.
For information about customizing number formats, see “Adding numeric
format codes” on page 195. For information about customizing date formats,
see “Adding date format codes” on page 197.
For information about applying time format codes, see “Creating, editing, and
applying custom formats” on page 199.
The table below outlines and describes the time codes available in Quattro
Pro.
198
Time format codes
Description
s
Displays seconds as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).
ss
Displays seconds as a two-digit number (01-59).
[ss]
Displays a count in seconds that can exceed 60 (formats 00:01:01 as 61
seconds). This format should not be used with year, month, day, hour, or
minute codes.
mi
Displays minutes as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).
mmi
Displays minutes as a two-digit number (01-59).
[mmi]
Displays a count in minutes that can exceed 60 (formats 01:01:01 as 61
minutes). This format should not be used with year, month, day, or hour
codes.
h
Displays the hour as a one- or two-digit number (1-24). If the format
includes am/pm or AM/PM, the number is between 1-12. If am/pm or
AM/PM is not included, the 24-hour format (0-24) is used.
hh
Displays the hour as a two-digit number (01-24). If the format includes
am/pm or AM/PM, the number is between 01-12. If am/pm or AM/PM is
not included, the 24-hour format (00-24) is used.
[hh]
Displays a count of hours that can exceed 24 (e.g., formats one day and
one hour as 25 hours). This format should not be used with year, month,
or day codes.
.s
Displays the decimal portion of seconds (the number of digits to display
follows this format).
.mi
Displays the decimal portion of minutes (the number of digits to display
follows this format). This format should not be used with seconds codes.
.h
Displays the decimal portion of hours (the number of digits to display
follows this format). This format should not be used with minutes or
seconds codes.
a or A
Displays a shortened version of am/pm and sets the time to a 12-instead
of a 24-hour format in either lowercase or uppercase.
am or AM
Displays am/pm in either lowercase or uppercase and sets the time to 12
hour instead of 24 hour.
Creating, editing, and applying custom formats
With custom formats you can change the way dates, times, or numeric values
appear in your spreadsheet using a format statement. A format statement
must contain format codes. These codes, when applied to values in the
spreadsheet, change the way values are formatted. For example, you can add
a format statement with specific date codes to display the date 01/23/99 as
January 23, 1999. Or, you can use time codes to format the time 00:01:01 to
appear as 61 seconds.
You can add text with format codes. The text appears in a cell when you apply
the custom format. For example, if you use the numeric format code 9 and
then type cm in the Format box, the number five appears in the spreadsheet
as 5 cm.
You can edit an existing custom format or you can create a new custom
format. When you create a new custom format, you modify an existing format
and save it with a new name. By default, when you modify an existing format
Quattro Pro changes the format name.
199
For information about specific format code functions, see “Adding numeric
format codes” on page 195. “Adding date format codes” on page 197, and
To create a custom format
1 Select the cell for which you want to create a custom format.
2 Click Format, Selection, then click the Numeric Format tab.
3 Enable the Custom button.
4 From the Custom Formats list, choose the format that most closely
resembles the one to which you want to create, then click the Add button.
5 In the Format Summary section, type a format name in the Format Name
text box.
6 In the Format section, consider the following options:
To add a numeric format, click the Add Numeric Code button, then
choose a format code from the list box.
To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/Time Code button
then choose a format code from the list box.
To add rich text formatting to format codes (e.g., text color and font
type and size), select the format code in the Format box, then apply
formatting using the text formatting buttons in the Format section.
To add text to be displayed with the format, click inside the Format
box, then type the text.
A summary of the format statement appears in the Format Summary
section under the Format label.
You can add to the existing format codes in the Format section or you can
delete these codes altogether.
To edit a custom format
1 Select a cell formatted with the custom format to edit.
3 Click the Edit button.
4 Make the appropriate changes to the custom format.
200
When you edit a custom format, Quattro Pro applies the formatting
changes to all cells that use the custom format.
If the custom format contains multiple format statements, you can edit a
specific statement by selecting it from the Format Summary section, then
making the appropriate changes to the statement.
To apply a custom format
1 Select the cells to which you want to apply the custom format.
4 Choose a custom format from the Custom Formats list.
Setting conditional formats
Quattro Pro lets you set a condition within a format statement. When you set
a condition, you must specify the condition, and the resulting format to be
applied when the conditions are true (e.g., if X is greater than Y, then apply
the Z format). You must specify a default format statement which is applied if
the condition is false. The default format statement must not contain a
condition and must appear as the last format statement in the Format
Summary section
A custom format can contain multiple conditions. When you apply a custom
format to cells, all conditions within the custom format are evaluated.
Quattro Pro evaluates conditions from top to bottom until it finds a condition
that is “true,” or reaches the default format statement.
The following figure is an example of a custom format that contains multiple
format statements with conditions. The first column contains the conditions,
and the second column contains the formats to be applied when each
condition is true. The third column specifies how to adjust the value before
displaying it in the spreadsheet. For more information about adjusting values,
see “Adjusting how values display”Adjusting how values display>Proc4
The following figure
displays multiple
format statements.
The first column
contains conditions,
the second column
You can add or insert new format statements in the Format Summary
section. You can also delete format statements.
201
You can adjust how a value displays within a format statement. For
information about adjusting the way a value displays, see “Adjusting how
values display” on page 203.
To set a condition
1 Select the cell with the custom format to which you want to set a
condition.
5 In the Format section, create the format to apply if the condition is false
by considering the following options:
To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/ Time Code button
To add rich text formatting to the format codes (i.e., text color, font
type and size), select the format code in the Format box, then add the
appropriate text formatting using the text formatting buttons in the
Format section.
To add text to be displayed with the format, type the text directly into
the Format box.
6 In the If Condition section, choose the first term of the condition from the
First Term list box. Consider the following options:
If you choose Value, type a value in the text box
If you choose This Cell, Quattro Pro uses the currently selected cell
If you choose Other Cell, select a cell from the spreadsheet using the
Pointer button
7 Choose an operator from the Operator list box.
8 Choose the second term of the condition from the Second Term list box.
9 In the Format section, choose the resulting format code to apply when the
condition is true. Consider the following options:
To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/ Time Code button
202
To add rich text formatting to the format codes (e.g., text color and font
type and size), select the format code in the Format box, then add the
appropriate text formatting using the text formatting buttons in the
Format section.
To add text to be displayed with the format, type the text directly into
the Format box.
When creating the default format statement, you can add to or replace any
existing format codes that exist.
If you enable the Adjust Value Before Display check box, the adjustment
applies to the format statement that is currently selected in the Format
Summary section.
If you choose a bar format, you can adjust the limits of the bar range in the
Bar Format Values section. For more information about bar formats, see
“Displaying values as horizontal bars” on page 205.
Click the Add button in the Format Summary section to add another
format statement with condition after the currently selected format
statement.
Click the Insert button in the Format Summary section to insert a format
statement with condition before the currently selected format statement.
To delete a format statement
In the Format Summary section, choose the format statement to delete,
then click the Delete button.
Adjusting how values display
You can also use arithmetic operators to adjust the way formatted values
display in your spreadsheet. Say you have a table that contains populations of
European countries in millions. You can reduce the number of zeros that
display in the population column by adjusting how the population value is
displayed. This does not change the actual population figure. If you adjust the
value by dividing each population by one million, you can display the
necessary population figures without repeating zeros for each population. For
example, if you select a cell that contains a population figure of 12,000,000,
the number 12 displays in the cell. However, because you only adjust the way
the number displays, the number in the input line remains 12,000,000.
203
The following graphic
displays the
population table
before and after
adjusting the way the
values are displayed.
When you adjust how values display, make sure that the format statement
you adjust contains numeric, date, or time format codes.
To adjust the way values display
1 Select the cell with the value to adjust.
3 Enable the Custom button, then do one of the following:
To adjust the way values display in an existing custom format, choose
the format from the Custom Formats list, then click the Edit button.
To adjust the way values display in a new custom format, click the Add
button.
4 In the Format section, consider the following options:
To add a date or time format, click the Add Date/Time Code button.
5 Enable the Adjust Value Before Display check box.
6 In the First Term list box, choose one of the following terms:
Value — uses the specific value as the term; type the value in the
adjoining text box
This Cell — uses the value of the current cell as the term
Other Cell — uses the value of another cell as the term. This cell can
use either absolute or relative cell addressing; type the cell address or
select it using the Pointer button.
204
7 From the Operator list box, choose the operator.
8 From the Second Term list box, choose the second term to complete the
mathematic expression.
If you have multiple format statements with conditions, you can adjust the
way values display for each statement.
Displaying values as horizontal bars
The Bar format lets you visually identify patterns or anomalies in numeric
data. By displaying numeric values as horizontal bars you create a graphical
representation of your data. For example, consider a mousetrap company that
tracks monthly sales for 1998. By viewing these figures using a Bar format,
you can view any sales trends for the year and quickly identify the month
with the highest and lowest sales records.
This figure displays
the monthly sales
figures in numbers
and in a bar format.
You can apply a predefined Left Bar, Center Bar, or Right Bar format. You can
also change the color of the bar and the limits of the bar range. By default,
Quattro Pro uses the color red and a bar range from 0 to 100.
To apply a bar format
1 Select cells to which you want to apply the format.
4 From the Custom Formats list, choose one of the following bar formats:
205
Left Bar — displays the number as a red bar starting at the left of the
cell
Right Bar — displays the number as a red bar starting at the right of
the cell
Center Bar — displays the number as a red bar starting in the center
of the cell
To change the bar color
3 In the Format section, select the bar format code in the Format box.
4 Click the Text Color button, then choose a color from the color palette.
Click the More button to expand the color palette selection.
To change the bar range limit
1 Select the cells to which you want to edit the bar range.
4 From the Custom Formats list, choose the bar format to edit, then click
the Edit button.
5 In the Bar Format Values section, click the Lower Limit button, then
choose one of the following options:
Value — uses a specific value as the lower limit; type the value in the
adjoining text box
Other Cell — uses the value of another cell that is either relative to
the current cell or an absolute cell address as the lower limit; type the
cell address in the text box or select it using the Pointer button.
6 In the Bar Format Values section, click the Upper Limit button, then
choose one of the following options:
Value — uses a specific value as the lower limit; type the value in the
adjoining text box
Other Cell — uses the value of another cell that is either relative to
the current cell or an absolute cell address as the upper limit; type the
cell address in the text box or select it using the Pointer button.
206
Sizing rows and columns
Quattro Pro lets you resize rows and columns in your spreadsheet. You can
format just one row or column, or you can change the default height and
width for all rows and columns in your spreadsheet. You can hide columns
and rows you do not want to see on your desktop. Hiding rows or columns
does not delete them from the spreadsheet, it just hides them from view.
Resizing rows
Quattro Pro lets you change the row height for one row or multiple rows in
your spreadsheet.
To change row height
1 Select a cell in each row you want to resize, or select the row borders.
Press CTRL to select noncontiguous rows.
3 Click the Row/Column tab.
4 In the Row Options section, enable the Set Height button.
5 In the Units Of Measure section, enable one of the following buttons:
Points
Inches
Centimeters
6 Type the height in the Height Options box.
To use the mouse to change row height, select the row borders (press
CTRL to select noncontiguous rows). Move the pointer to the bottom
edge of a row border; the pointer turns into a double arrow. Drag the
double arrow to resize the rows.
Resizing columns
You can change the width of one column, or a selection of columns. You can
resize contiguous or noncontiguous column selections.
To change column width
1 Select a cell in each column you want to resize, or select the column
borders.
207
Press CTRL to select noncontiguous columns.
4 In the Column Options section, enable the Set Width button.
5 In the Units Of Measure section, enable one of the following buttons:
Characters
Inches
Centimeters
6 Type the width in the Width Options box.
To use the mouse to change column width, select the column borders
(press CTRL to select noncontiguous columns). Move the pointer to the
right edge of a column border; the pointer turns into a double arrow. Drag
the double arrow to resize the columns.
Working with default column widths and row heights
Quattro Pro uses a default column width for all columns in the spreadsheet.
This default is wide enough to display nine characters in the default font. You
can change the default width. If you change column widths, you can reset the
column width to the spreadsheet default width.
Columns whose widths you explicitly adjust (using QuickFit, the mouse, or
the Column Width property) are not controlled by the Default Width property.
Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width, you
must reset the column width to the spreadsheet default.
You can return row heights to the default size, which is determined by the
largest font used in the row.
To change the default column width for a spreadsheet
2 Click the Default Width tab.
3 In the Unit section, enable one of the following buttons:
Characters
Inches
208
Centimeters
4 Type a column width in the Column Width box.
the Default Width tab.
To restore the default column width
1 Select any cell in each column you want to resize, or select their borders.
Press CTRL to select noncontiguous columns.
4 Enable the Reset Width button.
To restore the default row height
1 Select a row.
4 In the Row Options section, click Reset Height.
Click the Properties button to access the Row/Column tab.
Double-click the row border to return the row height to the default size.
Using QuickFit and Fit-As-You-Go
The QuickFit tool adjusts column width to one character wider than the
longest entry. You can apply QuickFit to several contiguous columns at once.
If you select entire or partial columns, the width is based on the longest
entry in the selection. If a single-row (or just one cell) is selected, the width
is based on the longest entry in that row and all cells below it.
Number values that are wider than the cell width appear either in scientific
notation or as a row of asterisks (*********), depending on the numeric
format and width of the cell. Use the Fit-As-You-Go tool to automatically
increase the column width as you type so that number values are always
visible.
209
To increase column width using QuickFit
1 Select the cell containing the long text string.
2 Click the QuickFit button on the Notebook toolbar.
You can also double-click the column letter to increase column width.
To apply QuickFit to several contiguous columns, select a block of cells,
including all of the columns, then click the QuickFit button.
To enable Fit-As-You-Go
3 Enable the Fit-As-You-Go check box in the Options section.
Hiding rows and columns
Quattro Pro lets you selectively hide rows or columns from your view on the
desktop. Hidden rows or columns do not print. Although they are hidden
from view, they are still used in calculations. Columns move left to fill in the
empty space from the hidden column, and rows move up. However, row
numbers and column letters do not change. For example, if you hide column
B, the columns on-screen are labeled A, C, D, and so on. When you move or
copy hidden columns to a different part of the notebook, use the Paste
Special feature. For information about using Paste Special, see “Using the
Paste Special command” on page 173.
To hide rows or columns
1 Select the rows or columns to hide.
2 Right-click the rows or columns, then click Hide.
If you use Tools, Data Tools, Extract To File to save part of a notebook
that includes hidden rows or columns, the hidden rows or columns save in
the new file and remain hidden when you open the new file.
To reveal hidden rows or columns
1 Click Edit, Select All, or select cells on both sides of the hidden area.
2 Click the Properties button.
210
4 Click Reveal under Column Options or Row Options.
To reveal a hidden column with the mouse, place the pointer slightly to
the right of where the hidden column should be, then drag. For a hidden
row, drag from just below the hidden row’s border.
You can also reveal hidden columns or rows by selecting columns or rows
on both sides of the hidden area. Right-click the selection then choose
Reveal from the list.
Working with page breaks
You can change the look of your spreadsheet by specifying page breaks.
There are two kinds of page break: soft page breaks and hard page breaks.
Quattro Pro lets you view and find page breaks in the spreadsheet. You can
create or delete page breaks and convert existing ones to the opposite type.
For example, you can convert a soft page break to a hard page break.
Viewing and finding page breaks
You can view page breaks on your desktop. The page breaks displayed are
soft page breaks unless you have made them hard page breaks. Quattro Pro
also lets you search your document to find a specific page break. Page breaks
display as solid blue lines on your desktop, when you are in Page View or
Page Breaks View.
To view page breaks
Click View, Page Breaks.
Click View, Zoom and enable the 50% button to see multiple pages.
To find page breaks
1 Click Edit, Find Page Break.
2 Choose the type of page break to find from the list in the Break Type
section.
211
If you select Intersection, decide whether to search down or to the right
and enable the appropriate button.
3 Choose the type of page break to search for from the list in the Break
Classification section, then click Find Next to search forward in the
notebook. Click Previous to search backward through the notebook.
Inserting and deleting page breaks
Quattro Pro automatically creates soft page breaks at the bottom of each
page, according to your page size. You can insert either horizontal or vertical
hard page breaks to start a new page.
You can delete page breaks no longer needed or you can delete all page
breaks within the spreadsheet.
To insert hard page breaks
1 Click the cell where you want to create a page break.
2 Click Insert, Page Break, then click Create.
3 Select Vertical, Horizontal, or Intersection (for both), then click OK.
If you click next to (below or to the right of) an existing hard page break,
the new page break is created in the opposite direction. For example, if
you click next to a horizontal page break, then click Insert, Page Break, a
vertical page break is created.
You can also select a row or column , then click Insert, Page Break, Create
to create either a horizontal or vertical Page Break.
To delete hard page breaks
Click a cell below or to the right of the hard page break, then click Insert,
Page Break, Delete.
To delete all page breaks
Click Insert, Page Break, Delete All.
Converting page breaks
Quattro Pro lets you convert existing soft page breaks to hard page breaks.
When you drag an existing soft page break to a new location in the
212
spreadsheet, Quattro Pro automatically converts the soft page break to a
hard page break.
To convert soft page breaks to hard page breaks
1 Move the pointer over the displayed page break until it turns to a double
arrow,then right-click the page break.
2 Click Set Hard Page Break.
Right-click the hard page break, then click Remove Hard Page Break to
revert a hard page break to a soft page break.
To convert page breaks by dragging
1 Click View, Page Breaks.
2 Drag the blue page break line to a new location.
You can also drag page breaks in Page View by clicking View, Page.
Creating headers, footers, and margins
Headers and footers are lines of text that print at the top and bottom of each
page. Use headers or footers to include such information as page numbers,
title, date, time, and filename on each notebook page. You can format headers
and footers using header and footer codes. After creating a header or footer,
you can edit them as required.
Quattro Pro uses default margin settings. However, you can change the size
of the margins.
Inserting header and footer codes
You can type codes in a header or footer to add items such as page numbers
and dates instead of adding them from the Property Bar. For example, when
you enter text in a header or footer, you can use the bar character (|) to
change the text alignment from the left to either centered or right-aligned.
On some keyboards, the vertical bar character appears broken in the middle.
For information about adding headers and footers using the Property Bar, see
“Adding headers and footers” on page 214.
If you want to enter a “#” or a “@” as a symbol and not as a header or footer
code, insert a “\” in front of the symbol. For example, \@, displays as, @.
213
You can change the default date, time, or currency codes using the
International settings. For information about “Using international settings”
on page 57.
The following table outlines header and footer codes and their function.
Code
Description
| (vertical bar)
Centers text that follows
|| (two vertical bars)
Right-aligns text that follows
#p
Current page number
#p+n
Current page number plus the number n
#P
Number of pages in the document
#P+n
Number of pages plus the number n
#d
Current date in the short format specified in Tools, Settings,
International, Date Format
#D
Current date in the long format specified in Tools, Settings, International,
Date Format
#ds
Current date in Short Date format
#Ds
Current date in Long Date format
#t
Current time in the short format specified in Tools, Settings,
International, Time Format
#T
Current time in the long format specified in Tools, Settings, International,
Time Format
#ts
Current time in Short Time format
#Ts
Current time in Long Time format
#f
Notebook filename with no path (e.g. BUDGET.WB3)
#F
Notebook filename, including the path (e.g. C:\DATA\BUDGET.WB3)
#n
Moves to a new line
# (number sign)
Current page number; use for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS
Adding headers and footers
Quattro Pro lets you add headers and footers to your spreadsheet. You can
also change the distance between a header or footer and the first or last row
of data. Use the Property Bar for notebook headers and footers to add codes,
symbols, or other information to the header or footer.
214
To add a header or footer
1 Click View, Page.
2 Right-click the top or bottom margin, then click Create Header or Create
Footer.
3 Type the header or footer text.
4 Click Property Bar options to change the font, add header or footer codes,
symbols, or other information.
5 Click outside the header or footer to see the changes.
To add space between the header or footer
2 Click the Header/Footer tab.
3 In the Height box, increase or decrease the height value.
You can also drag the dotted line that borders the top or bottom of your
spreadsheet data to adjust the space between the header or footer and the
first or last row of data.
Editing headers and footers
Quattro Pro lets you edit headers or footers in your spreadsheet. For
information about header and footer codes, see “Inserting header and footer
codes” on page 213.
To edit a header or footer
1 Click View, Page.
2 Double-click in the header or footer dotted area.
3 Make the required changes to the header or footer.
4 Click outside the header or footer to see the changes.
You can also edit headers or footers in Page Setup. Click File, Page Setup,
then click the Header/Footer tab. Enter the appropriate changes in either
the header or footer text box.
215
Customizing margins
You can change margins to best present your data. Quattro Pro uses the
measurement system specified in the Windows Control Panel to determine
whether to use inches or centimeters for margin measurements. You can
override the default for a particular margin by entering in (inches) or cm
(centimeters) after its value. The default suffix is displayed next to each
default margin setting. For example, to set the left margin to three
centimeters when the default measurement system is inches, choose Left
Margin, then type 3 cm. Quattro Pro then converts the entry into the default
measurement system.
Some printers cannot print to the edge of the paper, and many print drivers
do not allow zero-inch margins.
To change margin settings
2 Click the Print Margins tab.
3 Choose the margin you want to adjust: Top, Bottom, Left, or Right.
4 Highlight the current margin measurement.
5 As you highlight a measurement, the margin line darkens in the drawing
in the center of the dialog box, the arrow indicates the margin you are
setting. Do one of the following:
For top and bottom margins, type the distance between the top or
bottom of the paper and the header or footer.
For left and right margins, type the distance from the edge of the
paper to the data.
Use inches if “in” is displayed next to the default margin settings; use
centimeters if “cm” is displayed. Use decimals to indicate partial inches or
centimeters, for example 0.5 centimeters.
To change margins while in Page View, move the cursor over the dotted
margin line until the pointer turns into a double arrow, then drag the
margin to set the current margin for a column or row of pages.
216
ORGANIZING AND
MANIPULATING DATA
8
Quattro Pro lets you organize and manipulate your data in different ways. You
organize your data by sorting, filtering, or grouping it. The Sort and
QuickFilter tools let you sort and filter data using preset options or
customized settings. You manipulate data using the combine and consolidate
features. The Consolidator tool lets you combine data from two files, or from
separate source locations using mathematical operations. Using the Outline
tool, you can group data automatically to show summary cells, such as totals
and averages, while hiding detail cells.
Sorting data
Sorting lets you order multiple criteria based on sort keys within the sort
selection. In Quattro Pro you sort data using two different tools. Using the
QuickSort tool, you can sort data in ascending or descending order. Using the
Sort tool, you can select more advanced sort options.
Sorting data in ascending order organizes your selection in the following
sequence:
labels beginning with numbers in numeric order
labels beginning with letters and special characters in ASCII order
values in numeric order
blank cells
217
For example, if you sort data in an address book in ascending order using the
sort key “LAST_NAME,” all last names would appear in alphabetic order,
starting with “A.” If you select descending order, the last names would
appear in alphabetic order, starting with “Z.”
You can specify up to five sort keys. Sorting begins with the first key. If there
are two identical entries, Quattro Pro looks at the second key. If the first two
fields are identical, the third key determines sort order, and so on.
This example shows
what a list of
names looks like
before and after
you sort by
LAST_NAME, in
ascending order.
The results of sorting
the same name list
by LAST_NAME, and
then by
FIRST_NAME, in
ascending order.
You can restore your data to its original sort order after performing several
sort operations, or undo a sort immediately after sorting. As well, the Sort
tool lets you reuse previous sort settings.
Cells entered in your spreadsheet after sorting your data are not displayed in
the sorted order. To include the new records in the correct sort order, re-sort
your data . Likewise, formulas that refer to cells outside of their row do not
update when you re-sort data. If your sort selection contains formulas that
reference cells outside the sort selection (for example, +A2), make them
absolute (+$A$2) or convert them to their end values before sorting. For
more information about making cell addresses absolute, see “Specifying
absolute and relative addresses” on page 152. For more information about
converting formulas to values, see “Viewing and converting formulas to
values” on page 128.
218
Sorting spreadsheet data
Quattro Pro provides two different sorting methods. For simple sorts, use
the QuickSort tool. Use the Sort tool to perform complex sorts. When you
sort data, make sure that you specify all the cells of each row you sort,
otherwise the sorted fields appear mismatched. Quattro Pro sorts dates by
their date serial numbers, and formulas by their results. To ensure numbers
sort in numeric order, include leading zeros or spaces with numbers stored as
labels. For example, enter the numbers ‘5 and ‘100, as ‘005 and ‘100 to sort
them correctly.
QuickSort — sorts your data in ascending or descending order according to
the specified sort keys. Sort settings remain until you select a different set of
sort keys.
Sort tool — lets you use sort options. For example, you can sort data from
left to right instead of top to bottom, or sort numbers last or blank cells first.
Quattro Pro saves up to five previous sort settings so that you can redo a
previous sort. You can also indicate which row contains your heading, or sort
keys, and sort all rows beneath the heading row according to the selected
sort options.
Using the Undo option, you can undo a sort.
To sort using QuickSort
1 Select the cells to sort.
2 Hold down SHIFT+CTRL and click the column to use as the first sort
key.
To use a second sort key, click that column next, and so on. You can
specify up to five sort keys.
3 Click a QuickSort button. The top button sorts in ascending order; the
bottom button sorts in descending order.
QuickSort saves the current sort settings until you select a different set of
sort keys.
To sort using the Sort tool
1 Click any cell in your data, then click Tools, Sort.
2 Select the cells containing the data to sort (heading rows included in the
sort selection do not sort).
219
3 If your data contains a heading row, enable the Selection Contains A
Heading check box.
4 Select a sort key from the list box in the Top To Bottom section.
5 Enable the Ascending check box to sort a key in ascending order, or
disable the Ascending check box to sort in the descending order.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each sort key you want to specify.
7 Click Options, and enable any of the following buttons:
Left To Right — sorts across rows instead of down columns
Sort Blank Cells First — sorts empty cells first
Sort Numbers Last — sorts numbers in each sort field last
Selection Contains A Heading — sorts using the heading row, (in the
Heading Size section, select the row where the heading appears)
8 Click OK, then click Sort.
By default, the data sorts by columns (top to bottom).
If your data contains a heading row, Quattro Pro automatically uses that
row of data as sort keys in the sort key list boxes, and enables the
Selection Contains A Heading check box.
You can also select sort keys in the Top To Bottom section by
double-clicking in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc. boxes of the Data Sort dialog box.
To reuse previous sort settings
1 Click Tools, Sort.
2 Select a sort setting from the list box in the Previous Sorts section.
The Data Sort dialog box retains up to five previous sort settings at a
time. Previous sort settings are saved with the notebook.
To undo the last sort operation
Click Edit, Undo.
220
Preserving and restoring the original sort order
You can preserve the original order of your data so that if you make an error
while sorting it, you can restore its original order. You preserve the original
order of the data by creating a numbered column in your spreadsheet before
you begin sorting. The numbered column tracks the original order of the
cells. You can restore your data’s original order by re-sorting your data using
this numbered column as the sort key.
To preserve the original sort order
1 Insert an extra column in the sort area before sorting your data.
2 Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series to fill the column with consecutive numbers.
3 Select the cells in the new column to the end of your data set, in the Cells
section.
4 Click OK.
To restore the original sort order
1 Select a cell in the numbered column created in the previous procedure.
2 Click the top (ascending) QuickSort button.
Filtering data
Filters provide a quick way to work with a subset of column data. When you
create a filter, Quattro Pro displays only the rows containing the values you
specify, temporarily hiding other rows in the list. For example, you can filter
a birthday list with columns for First Name, Last Name, Year, Month, and
Day, to display only those people who were born in January. You can perform
a simple data filter or customize your filter using the Top 10 or Custom
filters.
You can also sort columns alphabetically or numerically, in ascending or
descending order using the QuickFilter tool.
This examples sorts
the data numerically
by the middle
column.
221
This example sorts
the data
alphabetically by the
column on the right.
To create a sort order that you can customize and reuse, use the Sort tool.
For information about using the Sort tool, see “Sorting spreadsheet data” on
page 218.
The filter buttons above each column let you select which sort or filter option
to use. When you apply a filter to a column, the filter button above that
column turns blue. You can specify different types of filters within one
notebook. For example, in a column of income data, you can use the Top 10
filter to display the top 10% incomes. In a name column, you can create a
Custom filter and specify names that begin with S. The filter results display
only people in the top 10% income bracket whose names begin with S.
Using simple filters
When you filter data, Quattro Pro assumes that the first row of data contains
the heading and places the filter buttons in this row. If the data does not have
a heading row, you can insert a blank row above the data at the top of your
spreadsheet and set the filter buttons to display here.
You use the QuickFilter tool to perform simple sorts or filters of rows of data.
For example, you can sort a column in ascending or descending order, or
filter the data to display only rows that contain blank cells in that column. You
can also filter data by a single value. For example, in a personnel notebook,
you can select Sales from a job description column to display only sales
personnel.
You can undo a column filter to show all the cells or you can turn off the
QuickFilter feature altogether.
To display filter buttons above the data
1 Click any cell in the first row of data.
3 Click OK.
4 Select the blank row and the first row containing data.
5 Click Tools, QuickFilter.
222
To sort or filter data
1 Click in the data you want to sort or filter.
2 Click Tools QuickFilter.
3 Click the filter button on the column that you want to sort or filter.
4 Select one of the following sort or filtering options:
Blanks — displays only rows that do not contain data in the sort or
filter column
Non Blank — displays only rows that contain data in the sort or filter
column
Sort (A-Z) — sorts the column rows in ascending order
Sort (Z-A) — sorts the column rows in descending order
To filter by a single value
2 Choose the specific value from the QuickFilter list box.
To undo a column filter
1 Click the filter button in the column where you want to undo the filter.
2 Click Show All.
To turn off the QuickFilter tool
Click Tools, QuickFilter.
Using Custom and Top 10 Filters
You use the Top 10 filter to display rows in your data that contain specified
upper or lower amounts, for example, the top 10% of a class. When using the
Top 10 filter, the column where you create the filter must contain numeric
values.
Using the Custom filter, you can specify three conditions for filtering data.
For example, you can choose to display items that begin with A, or B, or C. If
you are filtering numeric values, you can choose to display values equal to,
greater than, or less than a certain amount.
For example, to display names that begin with A, B, or C, you would choose
the following:
begins with
A
Or
223
begins with
B
begins with
C
Or
To display only numbers between 50 and 100, you would choose the
following:
greater than or equal to
less than or equal to
50
And
100
To use the Top 10 filter
1 Click in the data to filter.
3 Click the filter button on the column to sort or filter, then click Top 10.
4 Select Top or Bottom to specify either the top or bottom values or
percentages, then specify a number.
5 Click Value to display a specific number of values, or click Percent to
display a percentage of the values.
To use the Custom filter
1 Click in the data to filter.
3 Click the filter button on the column to sort or filter, then click Custom.
4 Choose a phrase from the list box on the left.
5 Choose an item or type a value (letter or number) from the center list box.
6 To specify more than one condition, choose either And or Or from the list
box on the right, then specify another row of options. You can specify up
to three filter conditions.
Consolidating data
Consolidating data combines cells from different source areas into one
location using @function operators. In addition to summing values, the
Consolidator tool lets you choose from the following @functions: AVG,
COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, and VARS. For example, you can add
each item in a row of figures to the corresponding items in another row of
figures. You can also use row or column labels to consolidate areas of
equivalent data entered in different row and column orders. As long as the
data has identical row and/or column labels, the Consolidator tool can
combine it and sort the results in any order you specify.
224
This example shows
the result of
consolidating source
data using the SUM
operator.
The Consolidator tool lets you create and edit consolidation settings, or add
or remove source cells. You can save each consolidation setting and reuse
previous settings as required. If you no longer need a saved consolidation
setting, you can delete it. If you work with a database, you can use the field
names to automatically sort and then consolidate the data.
While you can use the Consolidator tool to perform permanent calculations,
its flexibility also makes it useful for data modeling. For more information
about data modeling, see “Using the Scenario tool” on page 245.
The Consolidator tool contains features similar to the Paste Special
command; both tools let you combine data from separate source locations.
For more information about the Paste Special feature, see “Using the Paste
Special command” on page 173.
Performing and editing consolidations
You perform and edit consolidations using the Consolidator tool.
Consolidation results appear in destination cells, overwriting any existing
data. By default, consolidation results are formulas.
To perform consolidations
1 Click Tools, Consolidate, New.
2 Select source cells (rows with rows, columns with columns), then click
Add. Repeat for each set of source cells to consolidate.
Click Browse to specify source cells in a different notebook.
3 Click Next, then specify an operator.
4 Click Next.
5 Specify destination cells in the Destination Cells block.
6 To match cells by label rather than position, click one or more label
options in the Use Label From section, then click Next.
7 Enter a consolidation name in the Consolidation Name box.
225
To edit a consolidation setting
1 Click Tools, Consolidate, Edit.
2 Select the consolidation setting to edit in the Consolidations section.
3 Edit the consolidation setting.
4 Click Consolidate to perform the new consolidation, or click Close to exit.
If the destination area is smaller than the source areas, results are limited
to the size of the destination area.
When the source and destination areas have different dimensions, the
Consolidator tool combines equivalent cells when possible. Cells without
equivalent dimensions are handled differently depending on the operator.
You can type labels in the destination cells or leave them blank and follow
the label order of the first source. If you click both column and row labels,
the Consolidator tool matches column labels first, then matches row labels
within columns.
Adding and removing consolidation source cells
You can add or remove consolidation source cells in a saved consolidation
setting. You can add both contiguous or noncontiguous source cells.
To add consolidation source cells
2 In the Consolidations section, select the consolidation setting you want to
edit.
4 Enter the source cells in the Source Cells box. Click the Browse button to
select cells in another notebook.
Hold down CTRL to select noncontiguous source cells.
5 Click OK.
Quattro Pro treats each noncontiguous source cell selection as a separate
entry. If you select 3-D source cells, the Consolidator tool treats the
selection on each sheet separately and combines each selection with
those on the other sheets.
226
To remove source cells
2 Select the source cells you want to remove from the list and click the
Remove button.
Reusing consolidation settings
Quattro Pro saves consolidation settings with your notebook so if you make
changes to your document and want to reconsolidate your data, you can reuse
previous consolidation settings.
To reuse a consolidation setting
2 Choose the name of the consolidation setting, from the Consolidations list
box, then click the Consolidate button.
Quattro Pro combines the current contents of the source cells; new
results appear in the destination area or areas.
To save a “snapshot” of consolidation source and destination cell contents,
click Tools, Scenario, Edit, Capture before performing the consolidation.
For more information about Scenarios, see “Using the Scenario tool” on
page 245.
Deleting consolidation settings
Quattro Pro lets you delete consolidation settings you no longer need.
To delete a consolidation setting
2 Choose the name of the consolidation setting from the Consolidations list
box.
3 Click Delete.
Working with outlines
An outline summarizes data in part or all of a notebook. The Outline tool
sorts row or column cells in groups to show summary cells,such as totals and
averages, while hiding detail cells. For example, if you have an organization
with several departments and each employee within each department
227
contributes a standard amount to charity each year, you can automatically
create an outline to display only the total amount (summary cells)
contributed by each department. The Outline tool hides each employee
contribution (detail cells) showing only the total amount per department.
Combining detail cells with the associated summary cells forms an outline
group. You can use the Outline tool to create outline groups automatically,
based on the summary cells within your spreadsheet, or manually, by
selecting the detail and summary cells to include in each outline group. You
can specify the row or column location of the summary cells in the outline.
You can also add and remove outline groups, or expand and collapse them
within your outline. Quattro Pro also lets you format, sort, and print your
outline.
Creating an outline automatically
Before you can automatically create an Outline, your notebook must contain
detail cells that are summarized in summary cells. For example, a summary
cell may contain an organization’s total revenue, and a detail cell may contain
individual employee contributions to the total revenue. Once you have
created detail and summary cells, select the Auto Outline tool.
You can create an outline manually if the rows and columns of summary cells
contain values instead of formulas, if summary cells are not adjacent to detail
cells, or if you want to add more outline groups. For more information about
creating outlines manually, see “Creating an outline manually” on page 228.
To create an outline automatically
1 Add a formula or formulas that summarize data cells in adjacent rows or
columns in a notebook. For example, add a column of totals next to the
cells you want to total.
2 Click any cell in the notebook.
3 Click Tools, Outline, Auto Outline.
The Outline indicators in the panel on the side or top of the notebook
show each outline group.
Creating an outline manually
You have the option to manually create an outline if the rows and columns of
summary cells contain values instead of formulas, or summary cells are not
adjacent to detail cells,. When selecting cells for an outline group, select cells
in the rows or columns and make sure to include the summary row or column
cells. Hold down CTRL to select multiple noncontiguous cells.
228
To create an outline manually
1 Add summary data cells in rows or columns in your spreadsheet.
2 Select the cells for the outline group, including the summary cells.
3 Click Tools, Outline, Group.
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 until you create all the outline groups required.
You can create groups, using the Outline Toolbar, by selecting the rows or
columns and clicking the Group button until you finish creating all outline
groups for your outline.
The Outline indicators located in the outline panel on the side or top of
the notebook identify expanded outline groups.
Positioning outline summary cells
Quattro Pro lets you specify where to position outline summary cells in the
spreadsheet.
To position outline summary cells
1 Click Tools, Outline, Options.
2 Select the location to display the row and column summary cells.
To position the outline summary cells using the Outline Toolbar, click the
Outline Options button.
The Summary indicator, which appears in each outline group in the outline
panel on the side or top of the notebook, shows the location (in what row
or column) of the summary cells for the outline group.
Grouping cells in an outline
Once you create an outline, you can group the cells in the outline . Outline
groups can include other outline groups. For example, if column C contains
subtotals for columns A-B, column E contains subtotals for columns A-D, and
column G contains grand totals of columns A-F, you can create outline groups
for columns A-C, A-E, and A-G. When creating multilevel outline groups,
select all of the detail and summary cells that make up each outline group
level.
229
This example shows a
multilevel outline
containing outline
groups within other
outline groups.
You can also remove all outline groups from a spreadsheet within your
notebook.
To group or ungroup outline cells
1 Click Tools, Outline, Show Outline Toolbar.
2 Select the row or column cells to group or ungroup, including the
summary cells.
3 Click Tools, Outline.
4 Choose one of the following:
Group — combines selected cells into a group
Ungroup — separates a group into individual cells
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you finish grouping or ungrouping the required
cells.
You can also group or ungroup cells using the Outline Toolbar. Select the
appropriate rows or columns, and click either the Group or Ungroup
button.
When selecting cells to group or ungroup, include the summary row or
column cells. Hold down the CTRL button to select noncontiguous cells.
To remove all outline groups from the current sheet
Click Tools, Outline, Ungroup All.
To remove all outline groups on the current sheet using the Outlining
Tools toolbar, click the Ungroup All button.
230
Expanding and collapsing outline groups
Expanding or collapsing an outline group lets you show or hide the detail
cells for that group. In a multilevel outline, you can expand or collapse the
outline groups in a specific level using the Outline Level indicators on the
outline panel. The outline panel is located on the side or top of the
spreadsheet. All data below the level you expand or collapse is either
displayed or hidden on your spreadsheet. You can also choose to show or hide
the outline panel as well as the Outline toolbar.
To expand or collapse an outline group
1 Select the outline group you want to expand or collapse, then click Tools,
Outline.
2 Choose one of the following:
Expand Group — expands details of the currently collapsed outline
group
Collapse Group — collapses details of the currently expanded outline
group
To expand or collapse the outline group using the Outlining Tools toolbar,
select the outline group you want to expand or collapse, then click the
Show Group or Hide Group button.
To expand or collapse the outline groups using the outline panel indicators
on the side or top of the notebook, click either the Plus indicator to show
all data cells, or the Minus indicator to show only the summary cells in an
outline group.
To expand or collapse a level of outline groups
In the outline panel, click the row or column level to expand or collapse.
To undo the expanded or collapsed level click the appropriate row or
column level indicator again.
To show or hide the outline panel
Click Tools, Outline, Show Outline.
231
To show or hide the outline panel using the Outlining Tools toolbar, click
the Show Outline button.
To show or hide the Outline toolbar
Click Tools, Outline, Show Outline Toolbar.
Formatting and sorting an outline
You can apply a predesigned format to cells in an outline and sort expanded
or collapsed outline groups. For more information about formatting, see
“Using the QuickFormat and SpeedFormat tools” on page 175. For more
information about sorting data, see “Sorting spreadsheet data” on page 218.
To apply a predesigned format to cells in an outline
1 Select the outline cells to format.
3 Choose a format in the Format section.
4 Deselect any properties you do not want applied to the cells.
5 Deselect any options (e.g. column headings, row headings) that you do not
want included in the format.
6 Click OK.
To apply a predesigned format using the Outlining Tools toolbar, click the
SpeedFormat button.
To sort an outline group
Follow all of the steps from the “To sort using the Sort tool” procedure.
Collapsed outline groups sort even though they are hidden in the
spreadsheet. To verify the sorted data, expand the outline group.
Printing an outline
Quattro Pro lets you print an outline to show as much or as little data as
necessary. For example, you can choose to show only summary data on your
232
printed outline. For more information about printing, see “Printing” on page
471.
To print an outline
1 Expand or collapse the outline groups to show or hide in your printout.
2 Click File, Print.
233
ANALYZING DATA
9
After you have entered, edited, and formatted data, you can perform many
powerful functions to summarize your data, answer specific questions, or
solve problems.
Quattro Pro has many statistical, numerical, and financial analysis tools you
can use to analyze and summarize your data. For example, you can perform
advanced regression analysis, compile descriptive statistics, find the moving
average, or construct an amortization schedule for your mortgage.
Using the Scenario Manager, you can examine your data from many different
angles and find out how your results will change when different variables are
modified. For instance, you can discover how a home-construction budget
would be affected if the price of lumber increased, or if interest rates fell.
Similarly, the What-If feature shows you the results of substituting a number
of values for one or two variables. Solve For allows you to specify the result
you want, and Quattro Pro demonstrates how to reach it.
Using statistical analysis tools
With Quattro Pro, you can perform a number of advanced statistical,
numerical, and financial analysis tasks. You can access any of the following
statistical analysis tools by clicking Tools, Numeric Tools, Analysis. The
Analysis Expert will guide you through the steps you must perform. Before
you use an analysis tool, make sure the input cells you are analyzing are
arranged properly and contain numeric data, not strings. The analysis tools
have varying restrictions on the contents of the input cells and size of the cell
area.
Analyzing data
235
Advanced Regression
Amortization Table
ANOVA: One-Way
ANOVA: Two-Way with Replication
ANOVA: Two-Way without Replication
Correlation
Covariance
Descriptive Statistics
Exponential Smoothing
Fourier
F-Test
Histogram
Mortgage Refinancing
Moving Average
Random Number
Rank and Percentile
Sampling
t-Test
Z-Test
Interpreting an amortization table
The amortization table tool lets you generate an amortization schedule,
showing principal and interest payments, as well as interest paid from start
to date and from year to date.
The table created by the amortization table tool consists of two sections. The
top section is the input section of the table in which you enter values about
your mortgage. You can change any of these input values to customize the
bottom section of the table.
236
Column name
Description
Interest Rate
The annual interest rate of the loan
Term
Number of years of the loan, not the number of payments
Original Balance
Money originally borrowed
Ending Balance
The amount of principal remaining to pay off at the end of the loan
Last Year
The number of years to show in the table
1st PMT
The first payment date for the mortgage
The bottom section of the table consists of 10 columns:
Column name
Description
Pmt #
Number of payments from the first payment to the last payment of the
loan or the last one in the last year specified by Last Year
Date
Date on which the corresponding payment number is due. Mortgage
payments are typically due on the first day of the month following the
month covered by the payment. The default date format is Month-Year
(MMM-YY).
Yr Rate
Equivalent yearly interest rate for the period; for fixed-rate loans, this
rate does not change; for variable rate loans, specify an estimated
average interest rate when you create the table, then replace individual
monthly rate values later by overwriting the calculated values.
P&I Payment
Shows the principal and interest payment for the corresponding payment
period. This will not vary for fixed loans, but will vary with variable
interest loans or other variable loans such as graduated payment loans.
In the case of “graduated payment” loans, you can type in the actual P&I
payment to replace the calculated value. Even if this results in a negative
amortization, the New Balance and other columns calculate correctly.
Negative amortization occurs when the P&I payment is insufficient to
cover the interest charged for the period, and so the loan balance
increases by the shortage amount.
Principal
Principal portion of the P&I payment
Interest
Interest portion of the P&I payment
Extra Prin
Amount of extra principal per pay period. If you intend to pay extra
principal for some portion of the loan, enter the amount in this column
at the row of the corresponding payment number. The extra principal
amount is included in every row that follows. If extra principal payments
vary from month to month, type in the actual extra principal amount
wherever it changes.
New Balance
Balance after each payment. The balance decreases with each payment
and eventually reaches zero (or Ending Balance, if it is not zero). The
amortization table stops short of zero if Last Year precedes the end of the
loan.
Analyzing data
237
Cum. Interest
Cumulative interest paid through the corresponding payment
Yearly Total Int
Cumulative interest paid for each calendar year. Use this column to
calculate the yearly interest paid for tax purposes.
Interpreting a mortgage refinancing table
The mortgage refinancing table provides you with information about
refinancing a mortgage and lets you compare your current loan with
candidate loans. The mortgage refinancing table consists of two sections: the
Current Loan section and the Candidate Loans section.
The Current Loan section takes information about your present mortgage
from the Analysis Experts dialog box.
Column name
Description
Rem. Term
The number of years remaining on the loan, not the number of payments
Balance
The remaining principal to pay off in the current loan
Rate
The annual interest rate of the current loan
Candidate Loan Rate
The annual interest rate of the proposed loan
Fees
The amount of percentage fees for the proposed loan
The Candidate Loans section takes information about the rates and terms of
different mortgages from the Analysis Experts dialog box. The table
calculates the gross savings by showing how different the monthly payment
is for the candidate loan compared to the current loan. It also calculates the
net savings, by determining the amount of money saved.
The Candidate Loans section of the table consists of 19 columns:
238
Column name
Description
Loan Description
Name of the candidate loan
Current Balance
Balance of the current loan
Cash Out
Cash removed from equity (a positive value), or cash paid up front into
the loan to pay down the balance or to prevent financing or loan fees (a
negative value)
Pct Fees
Percentage fees (points) charged by the lender (for example, 1.75%)
Fixed Fees
Fixed fees involved in the refinancing; if a loss (for example, a loan
prepayment penalty), enter a positive value; if a gain (for example, a
prorated return of prepaid Private Mortgage Insurance from payoff of
current loan), enter a negative number
Loan Amount
Amount of the candidate loan
Rate
Annual interest rate of the candidate loan
Term (yrs)
Loan term in years
Future Value
Future value of the candidate loan; enter a positive value if the loan
requires a balloon payment
P&I Payment
Principal and interest payment for each period
Fixed mo. Loan Fees
Fixed monthly loan fees (such as private mortgage insurance)
Loan Pmt
Monthly payment (Loan Pmt = P&I Payment + Fixed Mo. Loan Fees)
Savings: Gross
The difference in the monthly payment of the candidate loan and the
current loan; if negative, the candidate’s monthly payment is higher; if
positive, the candidate’s monthly payment is lower and all gross savings
are applied as extra principal
Savings: Term +/-
Portion of gross savings due to lengthening the term of the loan; if the
term is lengthened, Term +/- is negative; if the term is shortened, Term
+/- is positive
Savings: Cash I/O
Portion of gross savings due to closing costs paid up front (a negative
number), or the amount of gross savings that has already been reduced
by cash taken out (a positive number enclosed by “><”, which does
not affect the Net amount)
Savings: Net
Sum of savings from Gross, Term +/-, and Cash I/O
Payback: When
The initial estimate of the number of years it will take for the candidate
loan to pay for the cost of refinancing; displays “Never” if the refinance
loses money
Payback: Loan Life
The number of years you plan to keep the property before selling it or
refinancing
Payback: Bal chg
The difference in the balance at the end of Loan Life of the candidate
loan and the current loan due to extra principal paid on the candidate
loan; a negative number represents money saved
Creating a mortgage refinancing table
With Quattro Pro, you can create a mortgage refinancing table that provides
information about refinancing a mortgage and lets you compare your current
loan with other candidate loans.
To create a mortgage refinancing table
1 In the Equivalent P&I cell of the Current Loan section, overwrite the
value with your actual monthly principal and interest if you have paid
extra principal at any time during the current loan.
Analyzing data
239
2 In the Future Value cell of the Current Loan section, type a value if the
mortgage requires a balloon payment.
3 In the Fixed mo. Loan Fees cell of the Current Loan section, type any
loan-related fixed monthly fees, such as private mortgage insurance. Do
not include taxes or hazard insurance fees, which are not loan-related.
4 Type values in the following boxes of the Candidate Loans section:
Cash Out
Pct Fees
Fixed Fees
Rate
Term
Future Value
Fixed mo. Loan Fees
All other values in the Candidate Loans section of the table are calculated.
5 In the Loan Life cell of the Payback section, type a value to indicate the
number of years you plan to keep the candidate loan before selling or
refinancing.
Payback occurs when the balance of the candidate loan would be equal to
that of the current loan; that is, when Bal Chg equals zero, for equal
comparison of the loans, any cash put into the candidate loan is
alternatively considered a lump sum extra principal on the current loan.
When you create the table, any savings that result from refinancing are
automatically used to pay extra principal for the life of the candidate loan.
You can accurately determine the payback period by trying alternate
estimates in the Loan Life column until Bal Chg is near zero. Bal Chg is a
negative number when Loan Life is greater than the payback period.
To compare several candidate loans with the current loan, copy the row
for the first candidate loan into one or more rows below it, then enter
information for each loan.
Using frequency distribution tables
A frequency distribution is a table indicating the values that a variable can
take on and the frequency with which each value occurs. For example, you
240
can ask for the number of times that numbers between two and five appear in
a given block of cells.
You can supplement the statistical information in your notebook with
appropriate spreadsheet functions. For example, you can include these
formulas at the end of the weekly sales figures contained in a selection
named SALES:
@SUM(SALES)
Calculates total sales
@COUNT(SALES)
Calculates the number of sales in the column
@AVG(SALES)
Calculates the average sales amount
Creating a frequency distribution table
With Quattro Pro, you can create a frequency distribution table. To create a
frequency distribution table, you need one or more areas of values to count
and bin cells listing the value intervals, or bins, for each count. Bin cells
contain the range of intervals you want analyzed. The bin must be a single
column with a column of blank cells to its right, where the results will be
written.
To create a frequency distribution table
1 Enter values in a bin of ranges to analyze in a single column.
2 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Frequency.
3 Select the Value Cells.
4 Select the Bin Cells.
The bin cell ranges must be in ascending order.
The results display to the right of the Bin Cells.
To set up frequency bin cells
Click Edit, Fill, Fill Series.
Numbers must appear in ascending order, from top to bottom of the
column.
Analyzing data
241
Each value in the bin cells represents all values from it down to the
previous value. The first value represents any value less than or equal to
itself.
The result area will be one cell longer than the bin cells. The last cell
contains the number of values found that were greater than the final
number in the bin.
To create an XY chart of a frequency distribution, specify the bin cells as
the x-axis series and the results as the first series of values. For
information about working with XY charts, see “Working with XY charts”
on page 328.
Using regression analysis
Regression analysis shows the relationship between a set of independent
variables and one dependent variable. It can answer the question “To what
extent can a dependent variable, grade point average for example, be
explained and predicted by one or more independent variables, such as credit
hours and work hours?”
The relationship between dependent and independent variables is a linear
estimate. With one independent variable, regression analysis plots a line of
best fit, also called a regression line, through a scatter plot of each
independent-dependent value pair.
Because regressions assume a linear relationship, your results will be more
accurate if your data closely matches a linear model. To help you determine
accuracy, the regression table includes two standard error estimates. For
information about the regression output cells, see “Understanding regression
output cells” on page 242.
Understanding regression output cells
The regression output is nine rows deep and three columns wider than the
number of columns in the independent cells. Make sure to leave enough
blank space because any underlying data will be overwritten. The output
cells contain the following information:
242
Output Cell
Description
Constant
The y-intercept value, zero if Y Intercept is set to Zero instead of Compute
Std Err of Y Est
The estimated standard error of y values; the degree of deviation of
observed y values from predicted values
R Squared
The variance; the degree of relationship between independent and
dependent variables. With one independent variable, R Squared is the
square of the correlation between the two variables.
No. of Observations
The number of values for each variable; the number of rows in the
regression table
Degrees of Freedom
The number of observations minus the number of independent values
being computed by the regression. With Y Intercept set to Zero, Degrees
of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent
variables); with Y Intercept computed, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of
Observations) - (number of independent variables + 1).
X Coefficient(s)
The regression coefficients of the independent (x) variables; the slope of
the regression line representing the relationship between each
independent variable and the dependent variable.
Std Err of Coef.
An error estimate of the X Coefficient above it. Interpret each coefficient
as the X Coefficient value plus or minus the Standard Error of Coefficient.
Performing regression analysis
You can create a regression analysis table showing how sets of independent
variables affect a certain set of dependent variables. Regression analysis
answers the question “To what extent can one or more independent variables
explain and predict a dependent variable?” For example, you can estimate
how the number of hours worked affects production, or how advertising
expenditures affect sales.
To perform regression analysis
1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Regression.
2 Select the column of dependent data.
3 Select the column(s) of independent data.
4 Select the upper left cell of the output cells where you want Quattro Pro
to write the regression information.
The data cells you compare in regression analysis must have an equal
number of rows.
Regression tables are not automatically updated. If you alter the values in
the independent and dependent cells, click Tools, Numeric Tools,
Regression to see the new results.
Analyzing data
243
Enable the Zero button if you want to force the y-intercept to zero.
Using matrix operations
A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers. Each column in the matrix
corresponds to one variable, and each row corresponds to a linear constraint.
Quattro Pro can multiply two matrices or invert a matrix.
Matrix operations can help you solve sets of linear formulas and equations.
For example, suppose you have these four unique equations describing
variables w, x, y, and z:
1w+1x+2y+3z=10
3w+2x+2y+1z=20
1w+0x+3y+4z=15
1w+1x+0y+1z=6
You can express the coefficients of these equations (the numbers multiplying
the variables w, x, y, and z) in this “4 by 4" coefficient matrix:
1123
3221
1034
1101
And you can express the results in this “4 by 1" constant matrix (the first
variable is at the top of the list, the second is next, and so on):
10
20
15
6
You can use matrix multiplication and inversion to find the value of each
variable in the second matrix that satisfies the constraints in the first matrix.
Multiplying two matrices
Matrix multiplication is helpful when you need to multiply the elements of
one matrix by the elements of a second and sum their products. For example,
matrix multiplication can combine several types of building materials across
development phases, or it can compute job costs involving different labor
categories.
244
To multiply two matrices
1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Multiply.
2 Specify Matrix 1, the first matrix you want to multiply.
3 Specify Matrix 2, the second matrix.
4 Specify the Destination, the top left cell of the area where you want to
write the resulting matrix.
The number of columns in the first matrix must equal the number of rows
in the second matrix.
Inverting a matrix
Matrix inversion is the first step in solving sets of linear equations. When
you multiply a matrix by its inverse, the resultant matrix is an identity matrix
(all 1s and 0s, with only a single diagonal of 1s). You cannot invert a matrix
that is mathematically singular. A matrix is singular when its determinant
equals zero. You cannot invert a matrix with mathematical redundancies or
inconsistencies. You can use invert with “square” matrices only. A square
matrix is one with the same number of rows and columns.
To invert a matrix
1 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Invert.
2 Select the Source cells, the matrix cells you want to invert.
3 Select the Destination cells, the upper left cell of the cells where you want
to write the inverted matrix.
You can invert matrices up to 90 rows by 90 columns.
If you specify the same cells as the invert cells, the inverted matrix
overwrites the existing matrix.
Using the Scenario tool
Scenarios are snapshots of data models. A data model is a set of formulas
designed to simulate real life situations and conditions. Scenarios show
changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that
result. For example, a worst-case scenario shows what you can expect from
the least desirable set of variable values; a best-case scenario uses the most
Analyzing data
245
desirable values as input. Scenarios are often used to find the optimum
solution to a problem.
For a powerful and interactive approach to scenario analysis, use the
Scenario Manager. It highlights value changes for new data, so it is easy to
compare and summarize scenarios. At any time you can name and save
scenario variations in report form. The Scenario Manager tracks two types of
scenario cells: changing cells, which generally contain new data entries, and
result cells, which are formula cells that reference the changing cells. When
you save a scenario and generate a Scenario Summary Report, the report
includes values in all the shaded cells. When you work with groups of
scenarios, you can compare different parts of a problem theme.
Before using scenarios, you should create a data model. Enter formulas in
your notebook spreadsheet and add any supporting data. Choose how much
of the notebook to include in the scenario group: cells, a spreadsheet, or the
entire notebook. Choose which information to change with each different
scenario. These are the changing cells. Determine which formula cells
reference the changing cells and contain the results you are interested in.
These are the result cells.
Creating and displaying scenarios
You can use the Scenario Manager to help determine the best possible
solution to a problem. Once you plan your data model, you can create and
display scenarios. The Scenario Summary Report shows you how your
changing data affects the results. Each time you add a scenario, its changing
and result cell values are stored. You can view and print them whenever you
want. If you have checked a labels option or named each changing and result
cell, a label or name displays next to each value in the Scenario Summary
Report.
To create scenarios
1 Click a cell containing data.
2 Click Tools, Scenario, New.
3 Select your data cells.
4 Click Next.
5 Type a name in the Scenario name field.
6 Type a value for each changing cell in the Changing Cells And Their
Values field.
7 Click Add Scenario.
246
8 Click Next.
9 Click Show Scenario.
When you highlight a scenario in the list and click Show Scenario, the
values for that scenario display in the notebook. You can drag the Expert
window to a new location to view all scenario cells.
You can click Create Report to see a Scenario Summary Report.
By default, changing cells are yellow; result cells are green.
To display scenarios
2 Click Tools, Scenario, Edit.
3 Click a scenario name in the Scenarios list.
If you have several scenario groups, select the target group in the
Scenario Groups list before you select the scenario.
When you display a scenario, its changing cell and result cell values
replace those currently on-screen. You can change the contents of any cell
with standard editing procedures.
To display a Scenario Summary Report
3 Click Report.
4 Enable any of the following options in the Scenario Report dialog box:
Report all scenario groups — displays a report for each scenario group,
not just the active group
Use cell labels from the left — identifies scenario cells with text in
cells immediately to their left
Use cell labels from above — identifies scenario cells with text above
them
Analyzing data
247
Find Empty Sheet — places the report on the first empty spreadsheet
in the notebook
Insert report at — places the report on a spreadsheet that you specify
Editing scenarios
After you plan your data model and decide which variables will affect the
outcome, you can edit the data model as many times as you want. You can
also save the scenario you have edited by giving it a new name or
overwriting the active scenario. You can also highlight the changed and result
cells with color to help you understand how the scenario is affecting your
data.
To edit scenarios
2 Click the Settings button in the Scenario Manager dialog box to set a
capture area.
Sheet is the default, but you can choose Notebook or Cells.
3 Name and save the scenario baseline.
4 Name, save, and edit the scenario.
5 Rename the scenario.
Group1 is the default.
You can click Report to view the Scenario Summary Report.
To save edits to the active scenario
2 Click the Capture button.
3 Type the name of the active scenario in the Capture Scenario As dialog
box to replace it with current cells and values. You can type another name
to replace another existing scenario or create a new one.
Changes appear in the Scenario Summary Report when you click the
Report button.
248
To highlight changed and result cells with color
2 Click the Highlight button in the Scenario Manager dialog box.
3 Click a color square in the color selection pane for Changed and Result
cells.
By default, changed cells are yellow on color monitors; result cells are
green.
Disable the Highlight changes to the Base Scenario check box if you do
not want the changed and result cells to be highlighted with color.
Tracking scenario edits
With the Scenario Manager, you can track versions of your scenarios and
view previous versions. If you have been editing anywhere in the capture
area, save the current version in the Scenario Manager before you display a
previous version. Otherwise, edits may be lost. You can restore an unsaved
scenario as long as no edits have been made since you displayed the current
scenario.
To track versions using the Scenario Manager
2 Click the Settings button.
3 In the Scenario Group Settings dialog box, select the Capture Area to suit
your tracking needs; keep the area as small as possible, but remember
that changes outside that area will not be recorded.
4 Click Close.
5 Click the Capture button to set the baseline.
6 Make changes in the capture area until you are ready to save a version,
then click Capture again and enter a new version name.
If you want to track changes in cell attributes such as shading or fonts,
click Highlight and disable Highlight changes to Base Scenario to turn
highlighting off while you are editing.
7 Continue editing and saving versions until your work session is over. Be
sure to save a final version before you close the Scenario Manager dialog
box.
Analyzing data
249
To view previous versions of cells, a spreadsheet, or a notebook
2 Choose the target group in the Scenario Groups list if it is not active
already, then choose the target version from the Scenarios list.
Changing scenario edits
The Scenario Manager allows you to verify or change the area where
scenario changes are tracked, either in the notebook, on the page, or in
specific cells. You can also change the scenario baseline using Capture.
Capture acts like a camera that takes a snapshot of current data in the
capture area.
To verify or change the area where changes are tracked
3 Enable a Capture Area option:
Notebook — tracks changes within the entire notebook. Set Capture
Area to Notebook only if you are interested in tracking changing and
result cells across several spreadsheets and do not intend to use the
notebook for anything else but storing related scenarios.
Sheet — tracks changes in the active spreadsheet. Choose Sheet if you
will be changing data on a single spreadsheet but do not want to specify
where. Choose Sheet for most purposes.
Cells — tracks changes in the specified cells (2-D or 3-D).
If you edit data in the capture area, then display an existing scenario, any
changes not yet saved to a scenario are lost — unless you immediately
click Edit, Undo to restore them. Choose a capture area carefully to avoid
possible data loss or extra changing and result cells; the capture area
applies to all scenarios in the current group.
If you choose Notebook, scenario changes are tracked and displayed on all
spreadsheets except the Scenarios spreadsheet and Objects spreadsheet.
Use this setting carefully to avoid unexpected results. For example,
suppose you change spreadsheet B, save a scenario, change spreadsheet
C, then display the scenario you last saved. All data on spreadsheet B
appears but the changes on spreadsheet C disappear.
250
To change the scenario baseline
3 Type a name in the Scenario Name edit field.
The default baseline name is Base Scenario.
All changes within the capture area are tracked until you save another
scenario. The Scenario Manager tracks value changes against a baseline.
If you are working with an empty notebook, enter any labels and formulas
before you set the baseline. If you will be changing data that is already in
the notebook, set the baseline before you start the changes.
Deleting scenarios
Once you have finished your work session, you can delete a scenario. If you
are viewing the Scenario Summary Report when you delete a scenario, it still
displays until you click the Report button to update the report.
To delete scenarios
2 Click a name in the Scenarios list.
If the scenario is in another scenario group, choose the group name in the
Scenario Groups list before step 2.
Adding, renaming, and deleting scenario groups
A set of scenarios is called a group. Each notebook can have as many
scenario groups as you need, each with its own baseline. If you want to
compare several scenarios, you can add a scenario to a group of existing
scenarios, or you can rename a scenario if it helps you better understand how
you use it. When your comparison is finished, you can delete a scenario
group.
To add scenarios to a group of existing scenarios
1 Type new values in the changing cells.
Analyzing data
251
4 Type the new scenario name in the Scenario Name edit field.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 3 until you have added as many scenarios as you want.
They are saved permanently when you save the notebook.
To rename a scenario group
New — lets you add a new scenario group
Rename — lets you rename a scenario group
Delete — lets you delete a scenario group
To delete a scenario group
2 Select the group in the Scenario Groups list.
Using What-If tables
What-If tables show the results of substituting a number of values for one or
two variables in a formula. Also called sensitivity tables, What-If tables can
answer questions such as “What if my company’s expenses increase 10%,
20%, 30%? And, what if production increases 10% to 25% at the same time?”
What-If tables can also be used to look up values, such as postal charges for
different parcel weights. You can create basic tables that use data you supply,
or you can use tables that refer to data already entered in the notebook.
Creating one-variable What-If tables
You can create one-variable What-If tables by varying a single value that is
referenced by one or more What-If formulas. You can build a basic table that
uses only the data you supply, or you can build a table that refers to data
already entered in the spreadsheet. Each formula is calculated using the
values in the substitution column, and the column below each formula is
filled in with calculated values.
252
To create one-variable What-If tables
1 Type a column of values to substitute in one or more formulas. (This will
be the left column of the table.)
2 Type one or more formulas in the row above the first substitution value,
starting in the column to the right.
These formulas must refer to a blank cell (the input cell), which can be
any cell outside the table.
3 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, What-If.
4 Enable the One Free Variable button.
5 Select the What-If Table cells containing both formulas and substitution
values.
6 Select the Input Cell, the blank cell referenced in the formulas.
To create a What-If table to display results of numeric scenarios
2 Click the Expert button in the What-If dialog box.
3 Follow the steps in the What-If expert.
Creating two-variable What-If tables
Two-variable What-If tables show the results of varying two values in a
What-If formula. You can build a basic table that uses only the data you
supply, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the
spreadsheet.
To create two-variable What-If tables
1 Type a column of substitution values.
2 In the row above and to the right of the substitution column, enter a
second set of substitution values.
3 In the top left cell of the table, enter the formula to be used in calculating
table values. It should refer to two blank cells.
5 Enable the Two Free Variables button.
6 Select the What-If table cells, including the formula and both substitution
ranges.
Analyzing data
253
7 Select the Column Input Cell and Row Input Cell, the two blank cells
referenced in the What-If formula.
Using goal seeking with the Solve For tool
The Solve For feature lets you calculate a formula backward, starting with
the result and solving for a variable that produces that result. You specify the
result you want, then indicate which variable can be adjusted to reach that
result. Instead of calculating an optimum solution, the Solve For feature
changes a single variable to reach the solution you specify.
Performing goal seeking using the Solve For tool
When you know the result you want, but aren’t sure how to reach it, use the
Solve For feature to help you find the answer.
To perform goal seeking using Solve For
1 Enter the formula to solve; it should reference one variable cell.
2 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Solve For.
3 Select the cell containing the formula in the Formula Cell edit field.
4 Type the result you want from the formula, or reference a cell containing
the target in the Target Value edit field.
5 Select the the cell that can be varied to achieve the result you want in the
Variable Cell edit field.
You can change the calculation options. Max Iterations determines how
many passes from one to 1000 Solve For can make to solve the formula.
The default is five. Accuracy specifies how close Solve For must get to the
Target Value. The default is 0.0005.
Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear
problems
The Solve For feature allows you to substitute values in a single formula to
meet a specified goal. However, you can use the Optimizer if you need to find
optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems. With the Optimizer, you
can
evaluate formulas with one or more variables
254
solve sets of linear and nonlinear equations and inequalities
find a minimum or maximum solution, or meet an exact goal
find values that satisfy problem limits, or constraints
Once you define a problem, you can save Optimizer settings for future use.
You can also print reports of interim and final problem solutions.
Solving a problem with the Optimizer tool
To solve a problem with Optimizer, you can maximize or minimize a single
formula, make it meet a target value, or solve a set of equations or
inequalities. You must first define the problem and assign a cell to each
variable in the problem. If you are solving a set of expressions, add them as
constraints. You can also enter constraints when goal seeking to set upper
and lower limits for the Solution Cell formula.
To solve a problem with the Optimizer tool
1 Enter a single formula into a cell. The formula should reference any
variable cells you have assigned.
2 If you are solving a set of expressions, enter their left terms into cells.
You can enter the right term into adjacent cells, or you can enter the value
into the Optimizer directly when adding constraints.
3 Click Tools, Numeric Tools, Optimizer.
4 If you have a goal-seeking problem with one formula, enter its location in
the Solution Cell input box.
Enable one of the following buttons:
Max — maximizes the formula
Min — minimizes the formula
None — chooses a default solution cell
Target Value — makes the solution cell formula reach an exact value
5 Type the variable cell or cells in the Variable Cell(s) input box.
You can enter them as a selection (A1..A4) or as lists (A1, B1, C1).
You can assign up to 200 variable cells.
Variable cells must not contain dates, formulas, or text, and they must not
be protected.
Analyzing data
255
Entering an optimizer constraint
Constraints are conditions that serve as problem limits, or the range of
acceptable values. All constraints must be met before an answer is
considered acceptable.
To enter an optimizer constraint
3 In the Cell edit field, enter a cell containing a formula that must be
bounded, or that must equal a target value. You can select a single cell, or
select cells that must all have the same bound.
4 Enable the operator that connects both terms of the constraint and
describes their relationship: less than or equal to (<=), equal to (=),
greater than or equal to (>=), or Integer (cell must be a whole number).
5 In the Constant edit field, type a value for the target or bound, or specify a
cell that contains a value.
You can specify a selection of cells equal to or larger than the number of
cells included on the left side of the constraint. Each cell on the left is
compared with the corresponding cell on the right. A single cell on the left
is compared with the upper left cell of the cells on the right.
To edit a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box, then click the
Change button.
To delete a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box, then click the
Delete button.
Saving an optimizer model
Once you define a problem, you can save Optimizer settings for future use.
To save an optimizer model
2 Click Options.
3 Click Save Model.
4 Select cells to hold the model in the Save Model dialog box.
256
The cells must be three columns wide, with enough rows to hold the
model. You can select the cell in the upper left corner of the cells.
The last Optimizer problem you defined is always saved with the note.
Reusing an optimizer model
After you have saved an Optimizer solution, you can reuse it.
To reuse an optimizer model
3 Click the Load Model button.
4 Select the cells containing the model you want to use.
Producing an optimizer report
With Quattro Pro, you can produce an Optimizer report. The Optimizer
report shows how well the constraints were met and indicates
starting and final values for the solution cell
starting and final values for the variable cells
value, binding, slack, and dual value for the constraints
Slack is the difference between the constraint constant value, or, Right Value
and the value actually used in the solution.
Variable dual values are sometimes called reduced gradients. They show how
a one-unit increase in the variable affects the solution cell.
Constraint dual values, or Lagrange Multipliers, measure the amount by
which the solution could be improved if the constraint were relaxed by one
unit.
Increment for variable cells is the amount of increase in the Gradient value
before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For
constraint cells, Increment is the amount of increase in the Right Value
before the binding status changes.
Decrement for variable cells is the amount of decrease in the Gradient value
before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For
constraint cells, Decrement is the amount of decrease in the Right Value
before the binding status changes.
Analyzing data
257
If you enable the Assume Linear Model button in the Optimizer Options
dialog box, the Optimizer report also indicates
Gradient, Increment, and Decrement for the variable cells.
Right Value, Increment, and Decrement for the constraint cells.
Binding status, Yes or No, indicates whether the constraint affects the
solution; if No, the constraint can be eliminated.
To produce an optimizer report
1 Define the Optimizer problem.
4 Click the Reporting button.
5 Select the Answer Report Cells.
6 Select the Detail Report Cells.
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK.
9 Click the Solve button.
258
SUMMARIZING DATA USING
CROSS TAB REPORTS
10
Cross Tab Reports let you summarize large amounts of data from both
spreadsheets created in Quattro Pro and external databases. With Cross
Tabs, you can analyze information based on two or more variables.
Cross Tab Reports are dynamic. A dynamic report has responsive data. For
example, when you drag a cell to a new location, this changes all columns
affected by the cell’s new location. A dynamic report may contain drop-down
arrows, links to other data, or sensitive data that reveals its origin when
clicked with your mouse.
Cross Tab Reports are a useful way to display and explore data stored in
online analytical processing (OLAP) databases. OLAP is a software tool that
provides fast, interactive access to information located in an external
database. OLAP goes beyond the simple data storage and retrieval
capabilities of traditional databases. With OLAP, you can transform raw data
into meaningful strategic information by creating a model that supports
explanatory reporting and forecasting.
The fundamental principle behind OLAP technology is fast, interactive data
analysis. You can run queries and generate reports on the fly using
multidimensional databases. You can manipulate these dynamic reports to
filter, sort, hide, and display data.
Summarizing data using Cross Tab Reports
259
Getting familiar with the Cross Tabs Report dialog box
To create Cross Tab Reports, you must make some decisions about the
report before building it. You must choose the fields to analyze, where to
place the fields in the report, on which spreadsheet to display the report in
the notebook, and how to align the data fields. You make these decisions
when you build the report in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box.
Source data
The source data is the data you want to summarize in a Cross Tab Report.
This data is contained in a Quattro Pro database (a selection of cells in a
spreadsheet), or an external database. You can use an OLAP server to access
an external database. All of the fields in the source data appear in the Fields
list.
Destination
In the Destination box, you tell Quattro Pro where you want the report that
you are building to appear. If you do not select a destination, Quattro Pro
places the report on the next available, unprotected spreadsheet, starting at
cell A1.
Align data fields
Quattro Pro lets you select the alignment of the Cross Tab Report data fields.
When you choose to align the data fields by row, the Cross Tab Report data
appears vertically in the report. When you choose to align the data fields by
column, the data appears horizontally.
You might find it easier to view the report on your screen when the data
fields are aligned by row. Alignment by row is the default.
Fields list
All of the available fields from the source data are listed in the Fields list. You
might have to scroll to view all of the fields if your source data has many
fields. You must decide which fields you want to include in the Cross Tab
Report and where in the Layout area to place them. Although you can place
multiple fields in each position of the Layout area, you cannot place an
individual field in more than one position of the report.
Layout
The Layout area is a mock-up of how the final Cross Tab Report will appear
on the spreadsheet when you ask Quattro Pro to build the report. Using the
mouse, you drag fields from the Fields list into the Layout area. Choose from
the four positions available:
260
Pages — fields appear in the upper-left corner of Cross Tab Reports.
These fields have a list box that you click, allowing you to select which
Pages field item to view. You do not need to place a field in the Pages
position of the Layout area for Quattro Pro to build a Cross Tab Report.
Columns — fields appear vertically along the top of the Cross Tab
Report.
Rows — fields appear horizontally along the left side of the Cross Tab
Report.
Data — fields contain the data that you want to analyze in the Cross
Tab Report. Data fields can contain labels or values.
Creating Cross Tab Reports
With Quattro Pro, you can summarize database information in report form.
Creating Cross Tab Reports lets you
arrange data into categories
calculate, analyze, and examine data
You can use Cross Tab Reports to analyze and organize data located in
notebooks and databases. For example, a company may maintain a database
with addresses of customers in different cities, including information on
customer sales. The database effectively stores the information but does not
allow you to analyze the data in a convenient or precise manner. Using the
Cross Tab Report feature, the company can analyze, organize, and summarize
the data into a constantly updated report on area sales. The same database
can be used to analyze sales by salesperson for each product that the
business sells.
Planning and interpreting your data analysis
Before you produce a Cross Tab Report from a data source like a database,
you must plan which data fields you want to analyze. The Cross Tab Report
feature analyzes data by using selected data fields as row or column labels
and numeric data fields as the data being analyzed. The fields in the row and
column areas are used as selection criteria to determine which values from
the database to include at intersections of the row and column field labels.
For example, assume your database contains product sales information (data).
In the Cross Tab Report, you place the field containing the names of your
company’s salespeople along the left of the spreadsheet (rows), and the field
containing the products you sell along the top of the spreadsheet (columns).
The intersection of the labels “Salesperson A” and “Televisions” shows the
total number of televisions that Salesperson A sold.
261
Accessing data contained in Quattro Pro notebooks or external
databases
You can use Cross Tab Reports to summarize large amounts of information in
Quattro Pro or an external database. If you do not have access to an external
database, you can create original data in any spreadsheet of your notebook.
For information about creating databases in Quattro Pro notebooks, see
“Creating notebook databases” on page 282. To summarize data that is
contained in more than one spreadsheet of your notebook, you can connect
the spreadsheets and create a Cross Tab Report. After you create or select
the source data that you want to summarize, you can produce dynamic Cross
Tab Reports.
Creating Cross Tab Reports using the menu or the toolbar
Using the menu or the Cross Tabs Report toolbar, you can create Cross Tab
Reports, format the report or field options, expand, copy, or delete reports,
change the display options, or refresh the report if you make changes to the
source data. You can also drill down or roll up field details in OLAP Cross Tab
Reports from the menu or the toolbar. You can use the menu to create and
modify Cross Tab Reports by clicking Tools, Data Tools, Cross Tabs, Report.
You access the Cross Tabs Report toolbar by clicking View, Toolbars and
enabling the Cross Tabs Report check box. You can place the Cross Tabs
Report toolbar on your spreadsheet, or move it to a different area of the
screen, such as the Application Bar.
Using macros
You can use macros to perform difficult or lengthy procedures when setting
up or creating Cross Tab Reports if you plan to create several reports from
the same data. For information about working with scripts and macros, see
“Using macros” on page 489. A macro is a sequence of keystrokes or
commands, stored in a notebook, that you can play to perform an action
automatically.
Creating source data for Cross Tab Reports
You can input original data if you do not have existing or external database
information. You can enter source data on any spreadsheet of the notebook
with as many fields as you wish. Field names can be as long as you want; data
can consist of either values or labels. For information about creating
databases in Quattro Pro, see “Creating notebook databases” on page 282.
Building Cross Tab Reports
After you decide which data fields you want to analyze, you can build a Cross
Tab Report in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box. All of the available data
262
fields from your source data are listed in the Fields list. To create a Cross
Tab Report, you must
drag at least one field into the Rows position. These fields are displayed
horizontally along the left side of the report.
drag at least one field into the Columns position. These fields are
displayed vertically along the top of the report.
drag at least one field into the Data position. These fields contain the data
that you want to summarize. Data fields that contain labels are
summarized (by default) by a count of the labels, while data fields that
contain values are summarized (by default) by a sum of the values.
To build Cross Tab Reports
1 Click a spreadsheet cell containing data.
2 Click the Report button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar. The source data
is highlighted.
3 In the Cross Tabs Report dialog box, drag a field from the Fields list into
the following positions of the Layout area:
Rows position
Columns position
Data position
Pages position
Dragging a field to the Pages position is optional. Fields placed in the
Pages position appear in the upper-left corner of the Cross Tab Report and
have a list box so that you can select the desired field item to view. If
fields are placed in the Pages position, you can expand the report. For
more information about expanding Cross Tab Reports, see “Expanding
Cross Tab Reports” on page 278.
You can drag more than one field into each position of the Layout area but
fields cannot appear more than once in each position.
The Cross Tab Report is placed on cell A1 of the next available,
unprotected spreadsheet, unless you select an alternate destination in the
Destination text box.
After you summarize your data, you might find it useful to display your
Cross Tab Report as a chart. For more information about creating charts,
see “Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart ” on page 305.
263
Connecting multiple spreadsheets to produce Cross Tab Reports
Your data does not have to be on the same spreadsheet of the notebook for
you to create a Cross Tab Report. You can connect two or more spreadsheets
that contain data, and create Cross Tab Reports to summarize the data.
To connect multiple spreadsheets to produce Cross Tab Reports
1 Click a spreadsheet cell containing data.
2 Click the Report button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
3 Click the Pointer button in the Source Data box.
4 Hold down the SHIFT key and click the tab of the spreadsheets where
your data is stored. You must click the spreadsheet tabs in ascending
order.
5 Click the Maximize button on the Cross Tabs Report dialog box.
6 Build a Cross Tab Report.
After you connect multiple spreadsheets of data, the first field in the
Fields list of the Cross Tabs Report dialog box is [SHEET]. You can drag
this field to the Pages, Rows, or Columns positions of the Layout area.
Creating Cross Tab Reports using OLAP data sources
Cross Tab Reports are particularly suited to displaying and exploring data
contained in OLAP servers. You can create Cross Tab Reports from fields in
an OLAP server by selecting an OLAP server as your data source. You can
also import Cross Tab Reports you create with OLAP software into a Cross
Tabs Report Creation dialog box.
Selecting OLAP data sources
When you create a Cross Tab Report, Quattro Pro lets you select a data
source other than your active notebook. Choosing an alternative data source
lets you to manipulate data stored in an OLAP server. OLAP data sources can
contain a very large amount of data.
To select OLAP data sources
1 Click an empty cell on the spreadsheet.
3 Enable the OLAP Report button in the Report Type dialog box.
264
4 Click OK.
5 Type a user ID and password in the Connect to Provider dialog box.
6 Select a data source in the Cross Tabs Data Sources dialog box.
Importing OLAP Cross Tab Reports
You can import existing online analytical processing (OLAP) Cross Tab
Reports from your OLAP server provider. Importing an existing OLAP
report lets you use a report template, which you can also modify. Changes
you make to the report template are not reflected in the original OLAP
server report.
To import OLAP Cross Tab Reports
1 Click an empty spreadsheet cell.
3 Enable the OLAP Report button in the Report Type dialog box.
4 Select the desired server in the Cross Tabs Data Sources dialog box.
5 Type a user ID and password in the Connect to Provider dialog box.
6 Select a data source.
7 Click Import Report in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box.
8 Select a report type in the Import Templates Dialog box.
9 Select a report in the Import Report dialog box.
You must have an OLAP provider running in the background before you
can connect to the server.
You can also click the Import button in the Cross Tabs Report dialog box
to import OLAP Cross Tab Reports.
Formatting Cross Tab Reports
Once you summarize data in a Cross Tab Report, you can change the report
name from the default, align data fields by row or column, and display row or
column summaries.
You can also change the appearance of the data in the Cross Tab Report.
When you ask Quattro Pro to check for changes in the source data it
265
automatically updates the data in the Cross Tab Report. If there are blank
cells in the Cross Tab Report because of missing source data, you can enter a
custom label to appear in the empty cells of the Cross Tab Report. You can
preserve the data formatting from the source data to the report and center
the field names in the report.
Naming Cross Tab Reports
Although Quattro Pro generates default titles for all Cross Tab Reports that
you create, you can give them more descriptive or specific names.
To name Cross Tab Reports
1 Click a cell on the Cross Tab Report.
2 Click the Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
3 Type a name for the report in the Name box.
The default name is Cross Tabs Table 1.
If you generate several Cross Tab Reports from your source data, the
report names must be unique.
Report names cannot be blank.
Aligning data fields by column or row
You can significantly change the appearance of Cross Tab Reports depending
on whether you align the data fields by column or by row. Data fields aligned
by row are generally easier to view on your screen than aligned by column.
To align data fields by column or row
By Row — data appears vertically in the report
By Columns — data appears horizontally in the report
The default data field alignment is By Row.
266
Showing column and row summaries
When you create Cross Tab Reports, you can ask Quattro Pro to display the
totals and grand totals for both column and row data. Showing column and
row totals is useful because it gives you a better understanding of how each
field relates to the total. This feature can help you see an overall picture of
your data.
To show column summaries
3 Enable the Show Column Summaries check box.
To show row summaries
3 Enable the Show Row Summaries check box.
You can enable both row and column summaries for your Cross Tab
Report.
Controlling Cross Tab Report data
Cross Tab Reports are dynamic, meaning that changes in the source data are
reflected in the Cross Tab Report. You can ask Quattro Pro to automatically
check the source data when you open the report and update the report if the
source data has changed. You can have a custom label appear if there are
blank cells in the source data. This feature is useful if you are using a
database with a large number of records.
To control Cross Tab Report data
2 Enable either of the following Data check boxes:
Update Data On Open — checks the source data when the report is
opened and updates the data if it has changed
Display In Empty Cells — specifies the label to appear in the Cross Tab
Report when a cell is empty. You can enter a custom label, such as an
asterisk, or choose from the available presets.
267
You cannot edit or delete data in a Cross Tab Report. To edit the values in
a Cross Tab Report, make a static copy of the report. For information
about making static copies of Cross Tab Reports, see “Making static
copies of Cross Tab Reports” on page 277.
Customizing the appearance of Cross Tab Reports
Quattro Pro can apply a preset format to the report, preserve the data format
from the source data, or center the field names in the report.
To customize the appearance of Cross Tab Reports
2 Enable any of the following Format check boxes:
Format Cross Tabs Report — applies a preset format to the fields and
data, making the report easier to read
Preserve Data Formatting — maintains the numeric format of the
source data, such as currency
Center Labels Across Blocks Of Cells — centers the field names
(labels) across the column of data. (By default, field names are
right-aligned).
Format Cross Tabs Report is enabled by default.
Formatting Cross Tab Report fields
A field is a category of information that appears in a database column.
Examples of fields include name, city, and country. Each field in a database
has items — the individual entries that occur in a field. For example, a field
named “Country” might have field items that include France, Venezuela, and
Kenya.
When you create a Cross Tab Report, you can format and customize the fields
that appear in the report. You can rename a field in the Cross Tab Report,
while keeping the field name as it appears in the source data. You can change
a field’s position in the report from row to column, pages, or data. This
changes the Cross Tab Report significantly, as the data may be completely
different when you change field positions. You can specify which field items
appear in the Cross Tab Report if you want to hide certain field items and
display others.
268
You can summarize and compare fields using the field summary and data
comparison features. Only fields in the Data position of a Cross Tab Report
can be summarized or compared. You can calculate the average, standard
deviation, and variance for data fields or display the data as a percentage of
the total. These features are useful if you need to analyze, summarize and
compare the information in the report or present the report as an overall
picture of the data.
Changing field names
You can change a field name in a Cross Tab Report. The field name is
changed only in the report — it is not changed in the original data. When you
edit the report, the field name retains its name in the Cross Tabs Report
dialog box if you drag it to another position of the layout. If you drag it back to
the Fields list, the field name reverts to its original name.
To change field names
1 Click on the field to change.
2 Click the Field Options button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
3 Type a new name in the Label box in the Field dialog box.
Double-click the field name to quickly access the Field dialog box.
Changing field positions
After you create a Cross Tab Report, you can change the position of any field.
You may want to change a field’s position to explore hidden relationships in
the data. There are four positions: Rows, Columns, Data, and Pages. Row
fields are displayed along the left side of the report, column fields are
displayed along the top of the report, and pages fields are displayed in the top
left corner of the report.
Changing a field’s position can significantly change the information that
appears in the Cross Tab Report. Certain fields are more useful in some
positions than others. For example, a field with several hundred field items is
not an appropriate choice for the Pages position of the Cross Tab Report
because you must scroll through several hundred different versions of the
Cross Tab Report to view all of the data.
To change field positions
1 Click on the field to change.
269
3 In the Position area of the Field dialog box, click the position where you
want to move the field.
The field’s current position is enabled when you open the Field dialog box.
You can change a field’s position without accessing the Field dialog box.
For information about dragging Cross Tab Report fields, see “Dragging
Cross Tab Report fields” on page 276.
Double-click the field name to quickly access the Field dialog box.
Hiding field items
Fields can contain multiple field items. For example, your database may have
“Region” with four field items: East, West, North, and South. If a field has
more than one field item, you can prevent selected items from appearing in
the Cross Tab Report. The item’s information is still available, but it is not
displayed in the report. You may want to hide field items if a particular item is
not relevant or necessary to your report. This feature is useful if your Cross
Tab Report is large or complex.
To hide field items
1 Click on the field to modify.
3 Enable the field items to hide in the Hide Field Items list.
You cannot hide all items in a field.
Double-click the field to quickly access the Field dialog box.
Calculating field summaries
You can choose from many field summary options, including calculating the
sum, average, and standard deviation. Only fields in the Data position of
Cross Tab Reports can be summarized because they are the fields that have
numeric values.
270
You can display an enormous amount of information about your data if you
enable all of the summary options; include only those options which are most
relevant.
To calculate field summaries
1 Click on the data field to modify.
3 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Summary list:
Sum — calculates the sum of items for numeric field items
Count — calculates the number of occurrences for label field items
Average — calculates the average
Max — displays the maximum value
Min — displays the minimum value
StdDevp — calculates the population standard deviation
StdDevs — calculates the sample standard deviation
Varp — calculates the population variance
Var — calculates the sample variance
CountNonBlank — counts non-blank cells for a field
You cannot drag field summaries because they are superficially generated
on the report.
The default Summary option is Sum for values, and Count for labels.
Performing field data comparisons
Quattro Pro lets you choose from many field data comparison calculations.
Field data comparisons are useful when you want to summarize and analyze
the data. Only fields in the Data position of Cross Tab Reports can be
compared because they are the fields with numeric values.
You can display an enormous amount of information about your data if you
enable all of the data comparison options; decide which options are most
relevant and include only them.
To perform field data comparisons
1 Click on the data field to modify.
271
3 Click the Compare>> button in the Field dialog box.
4 Select one of the following options from the Data Comparison list:
Difference From — displays all data in the data area as the difference
between the value for the specified field and field item
% Of — displays all data in the data area as the percentage of the value
for the specified field and field item
% Difference From — displays all data in the data area as the difference
between the value for the specified field and field item, but displays the
difference as a percentage of the base data
Running Total In — displays the data for successive items as a
cumulative total
% Of Row — displays all data in each row as a percentage of the total
for each row
% Of Column — displays all data in each column as a percentage of the
total for each column
% Of Total — displays all data in the data area as a percentage of the
grand total of all of the data in the Cross Tab Report
Index — displays the result using the following calculation: ((value in
cell) X (grand total of grand totals)) / ((grand row total) X (grand
column total))
Formatting OLAP Cross Tab Reports and report fields
You can perform many of the same formatting procedures with OLAP Cross
Tab Reports as you can with non-OLAP Cross Tab Reports. You can rename
OLAP Cross Tab Reports, align the data fields by row or column, and update
the OLAP Cross Tab Report when it is opened to reflect changes in the
source data. For more information about formatting OLAP Cross Tab
Reports, see “Formatting Cross Tab Reports” on page 265.
There are some important differences between OLAP Cross Tab Reports and
Cross Tab Reports created from a selection of cells in a Quattro Pro
spreadsheet. You have access to the OLAP Data Source Explorer when you
produce OLAP Cross Tab Reports. This tool lets you drag fields and
elements from the Explorer to the OLAP Cross Tab Report, and gives you
more analytical power to produce a report with the type of information you
need. OLAP Cross Tab Reports have fields that often have several additional
layers of information, referred to as elements. Because OLAP databases can
be very large, Quattro Pro lets you display as much or as little of the data as
you want. You can manipulate the OLAP Cross Tab Report fields by drilling
272
down element levels (showing more detail) or rolling up (showing less
detail). You can also filter and delete the elements to show only the most
relevant information in the OLAP Cross Tab Report.
Row and column summaries are not available in OLAP Cross Tab Reports.
You cannot preserve data formatting from the source data to OLAP Cross
Tab Reports.
Using the OLAP Data Source Explorer
The OLAP Data Source Explorer is a tool that appears when you access data
from an OLAP server database. You can use the OLAP Data Source Explorer
to add field elements and explore their hierarchies. The Explorer is a tree,
with branches that expand and collapse, giving more or fewer details with
each click of the mouse. Using the OLAP Data Source Explorer, you can
select field elements and drag them into your Cross Tab Report. The report
is automatically updated when you drag the field element into the report.
If you close the OLAP Data Source Explorer window, you must exit and
reconnect to your provider to retrieve the window.
You cannot drag field elements from the Cross Tab Report back to the
OLAP Data Source Explorer.
Drilling down OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements
When a database is large or complex, the field elements have many levels.
Drilling down a Cross Tab Report element reveals all hidden details
associated with a field. You can drill down to the bottom of an element, or
drill down one level at a time. Drilling down is a navigational technique that
lets you to explore levels of data ranging from the most summarized (up) to
the most detailed (down). The drilling paths may be defined by the
hierarchies within dimensions or other relationships that may be dynamic
within or between dimensions.
Assume your database contains information about the Olympic Games. If you
drill down “Olympics”, details appear that contain information related to the
Olympics: whether it was a winter or summer games, the country that
hosted the Olympics, and the city where the games were held. Because some
countries have hosted more than one Olympics, there are more details
associated with those countries.
273
You can see how the
“Olympics” field can
be drilled down to
reveal elements and
subelements. You can
choose the amount of
detail to show. Drill
down by clicking the
Plus button, or roll
up by clicking the
Minus button.
Drilling down is useful when you want to analyze your data or compare the
details of one element with other elements. It takes you from the most
general detail of an element to the more specific detail(s).
To drill down to the bottom of OLAP Cross Tab Report field
elements
1 Click the element to drill down.
2 Click the Drill Down button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
To drill down level by level
Click the Plus button in the element cell.
The Minus button indicates that the element has been drilled down.
Rolling up OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements
Rolling up a Cross Tab Report element performs the opposite function to
drilling down; it takes you from the most specific detail of an element to more
general detail(s). Rolling up is desirable when you want to see an overall
picture of your data. You can roll up to the top, or roll up an element one level
at a time.
To roll up to the top of OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements
1 Click the element to roll up.
2 Click the Rollup button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
274
To roll up level by level
Click the Minus button in the element cell.
Filtering OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements
Because OLAP source data is often very large, it is important to be able to
minimize the amount of information that appears in your Cross Tab Reports.
Level filtering lets you select specific field elements from the level to display
in the Cross Tab Report, rather than displaying all elements in a level.
In the Elements Selection dialog box, there are two elements lists. The list
on the left side of the dialog box is the Source List and the list on the right is
the Filtered List. Move elements from the Source List to the Filtered List to
choose the elements that will be shown in the OLAP Cross Tab Report.
To filter OLAP Cross Tab Report field elements
1 Double-click the name of the field to filter in the OLAP Cross Tab Report.
2 Click Filter in the Field dialog box.
3 In the Element Selection dialog box, highlight the element(s) in the
Source List that you want to move to the Filtered List.
When you open the Element Selection dialog box and all of the field
elements are in the Filtered List, click the Remove All button to move
them to the Source List so that you can select the elements to display in
the OLAP Cross Tab Report.
To move all of the elements from the Source List to the Filtered List, click
the Add All button.
To add or remove elements, double-click their name in the Source or
Filtered List.
You can drag elements from the Source to the Filtered List and from the
Filtered to the Source List.
Removing OLAP Cross Tab Report elements
After you create OLAP Cross Tab Reports, you can delete elements from the
report to minimize the amount of data it contains.
275
To remove OLAP Cross Tab Report elements
1 Click the element to remove.
2 Click the Remove Element button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
Manipulating Cross Tab Reports
After you select your source data and produce a Cross Tab Report, there are
many ways you can manipulate your Cross Tab Reports. You can place the
report on a specific spreadsheet of the notebook, or change the location of
the report once it is created. You can also make a copy of your Cross Tab
Report. The copy is static, meaning it is no longer connected to the source
data and, therefore, any changes in the source data are not reflected in the
static copy. If you modify your source data, the Refresh feature updates the
Cross Tab Report to reflect any changes in the source data. Expanding a
Cross Tab Report places field items of the Cross Tab Report onto several
different spreadsheets of the notebook. When you finish with a Cross Tab
Report, you can save or delete it.
Dragging Cross Tab Report fields
You can drag the fields in the report to different areas of the report. The data
is automatically updated each time you change a field’s position. You cannot
drag fields to certain positions in the Cross Tab Report. Quattro Pro warns
you if you try to drag a field to a prohibited location.
To drag Cross Tab Report fields
1 Click on the field to move.
2 Move the cursor across the name of the field until it changes to cross
hairs.
3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the field to its new position.
Changing the location of Cross Tab Reports
You can specify on which spreadsheet you want Quattro Pro to place your
Cross Tab Reports. If you do not specify where you want them to appear,
Quattro Pro automatically places reports on the next available, unprotected
spreadsheet of your notebook. After you create a Cross Tab Report, you can
move it to another spreadsheet of your notebook.
276
To change the location of Cross Tab Reports
2 Click the Pointer button in the Destination box and drag an area on the
spreadsheet where you want your Cross Tab Report to appear.
You can place one or more Cross Tab Reports on any spreadsheet of the
notebook. Be sure you do not overwrite an existing Cross Tab Report;
select a destination range that does not overlap existing Cross Tab
Reports.
You can also type the destination in the Destination box.
Making static copies of Cross Tab Reports
You can make an exact copy of a Cross Tab Report. This is called a static copy
because it is no longer connected to the source data so any changes made to
the source data are not reflected in the static copy. The static copy is placed
on the next available, unprotected spreadsheet of your notebook.
To make static copies of Cross Tab Reports
1 Click any cell of the Cross Tab Report to copy.
2 Click the Copy Static button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
You can determine whether a report is dynamic or a copy from the
appearance of the field names. In dynamic Cross Tab Reports, the field
names are grayed.
Refreshing Cross Tab Reports
The Refresh feature updates the data in the Cross Tab Report when changes
are made to the source data. You cannot edit or remove data values in the
Cross Tab Report. If you need to edit the values in a Cross Tab Report, make
a static copy of the report. For information about making a static copy of
Cross Tab Reports, see “Making static copies of Cross Tab Reports” on page
277.
277
To refresh Cross Tab Reports
1 Click any cell of the Cross Tab Report to refresh.
2 Click the Refresh button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
Expanding Cross Tab Reports
The Expand feature lets you to open a Cross Tab Report onto several
different spreadsheets of your notebook. You can expand a report only if you
have a field in the Pages position of the Cross Tab Report. For example, say
you generate a Cross Tab Report, which is placed on spreadsheet B. You have
a field named “Year” in the Pages position with two field items, 1990 and
1991. When you expand the Cross Tab Report, the first field item (1990) and
the data associated with it is placed on spreadsheet C, and the second field
item (1991) and the data associated with it is placed on spreadsheet D.
To expand Cross Tab Reports
1. Click any cell of the Cross Tab Report to expand.
2. Click the Expand button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
The report is expanded on to the next available, unprotected spreadsheets
of the notebook.
Hiding and showing the details of Cross Tab Report fields
You can conceal information about a selected field so that you have the same
level of information for data analysis, but fewer details are shown in the
report.
For example, assume that your Cross Tab Report has two fields in its
columns: “Year” (with field items 1991 and 1992) and “Quarter” (with field
items Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4). When you ask Quattro Pro to Hide Details of the
Year field, the resulting report shows the field items for “Year” (1991 and
1992) without showing the breakdown for the values by quarter. Therefore,
the Cross Tab Report has the same information as before, but with fewer
details.
You must have more than one field in the rows or columns of a Cross Tab
Report to use the Hide Details feature.
If you hide the details of a selected field, you can make them reappear at any
time by using the Show Details feature.
278
To hide the details of Cross Tab Report fields
1 Click the name of the field to hide.
2 Click the Hide Details button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
To show the details of Cross Tab Report fields
1 Click the name of the field to show.
2 Click the Show Details button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
Saving and deleting Cross Tab Reports
When you save your source data, any Cross Tab Reports that you have
created are also saved. When you reopen your source data, the Cross Tab
Reports are also opened. If you do not want to save a report, be sure to
delete it before you save your source data file.
You can also save OLAP Cross Tab Reports. OLAP Cross Tab Reports are
not attached to the source data because the source data is contained in an
external database. Therefore, you must save OLAP Cross Tab Reports in
their own file, separate from the source data.
To save Cross Tab Reports
Click File, Save.
To delete Cross Tab Reports
1 Click a cell of the Cross Tab Report to delete.
2 Click the Remove button on the Cross Tabs Report toolbar.
You can retrieve a deleted Cross Tab Report if you immediately click the
Undo button or press CTRL+Z.
279
USING DATABASES
11
Databases are collections of information organized as fields, records, and
files. A field is a single piece of information; a record is a set of fields; and a
file is a set of records. A database can contain information such as names and
addresses of clients, patient records, or product inventory.
There are many
examples of
databases. This table
shows the records,
field names, and
number of fields each
can have.
With Quattro Pro, you can set up databases in notebooks. Quattro Pro
recognizes each row as a record and each column as a field in the database.
Data Forms is a tool you use to create and edit notebook databases using a
form. You can enter and update database information manually in the
notebook if you do not want to use Data Forms.
Querying databases
A query is a request for information from a database. You can use queries to
find information in a database that matches your search criteria. You can
query notebook and external databases using search formulas, AND and OR
queries, and wildcards. These functions can broaden or narrow your search
criteria. When you query external databases, the output data can be imported
as a database table.
Using databases
281
Accessing information stored in external databases
To save the work of re-entering data stored in other software programs, you
can import external databases to Quattro Pro notebooks. You can retrieve
database information stored in Paradox, dBASE, or using any Open Database
Connectivity (ODBC) or Borland Database Engine (BDE) data source
provided there is a full conformance 32-bit ODBC or IDAPI driver installed
for the data source. The Database Desktop lets you view, edit, query, and
create new external databases. You can also import database tables, which
contain only a portion of data extracted from a database. Database tables are
useful when the database contains a large amount of data and you want to
analyze only a part of it.
Working in different spreadsheet environments
If you work in different spreadsheet environments, or share files with other
spreadsheet program users, you can change the compatibility settings of
Quattro Pro. You can create or edit notebooks in formats compatible with
Microsoft Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, and previous versions of Quattro Pro. You can
change the default Menu Bar, file type, and increase or decrease the size of
the notebook to make Quattro Pro compatible with other spreadsheet
programs. For information about changing the compatibility options, see
“Using compatibility settings” on page 55.
Using Database Desktop
The Database Desktop is a companion program to Quattro Pro that you can
use to access information in Paradox and dBASE database files. Using this
program, you can query external databases, add, edit, or delete database
records, or create new dBASE or Paradox database files. This program does
not install in the Typical installation of WordPerfect Office 2000. You must
perform a custom installation to be able to access the Database Desktop. For
more information about Database Desktop, see “Database Desktop basics.”
Summarizing database information using Cross Tab Reports
You can use the Cross Tab feature to create more elaborate tables that
summarize information from notebook databases or external databases. For
information about using the Cross Tab function, see “Summarizing data using
Cross Tab Reports” on page 259.
Creating notebook databases
You can create a database in Quattro Pro notebooks. Quattro Pro recognizes
the cells containing the field names and data records as database cells. When
you enter database cells in a Quattro Pro database, you must ensure that
282
database cells fill a rectangular area that can contain any number of blank
cells
database cells are entered in a contiguous format and are confined to one
spreadsheet
field names are entered in the top row of the database cells, one name per
column (each column of the database cells is a field)
field names are labels with no blank spaces at the beginning or end
field names are unique; they are different from other field and cell names
you use
the first row of data is entered directly below the field names without
leaving a blank row or inserting a row of symbols
you use the same type of data throughout each column — do not mix
labels and values in the same column
Creating notebook databases using Data Forms
You can use the Data Forms tool to create databases in Quattro Pro. Data
Forms helps you do the basic functions of adding, deleting, or changing
records in your database using a form, instead of typing the information
directly in the notebook cells.
The Data Forms tool lists each field from your database. You type in the
information, then Quattro Pro automatically places it in a row in your
notebook database. Once you complete your database, you can use Data
Forms to edit your records. This tool lets you search your database, taking
you instantly to the record you need — it is not necessary to scroll through a
lengthy notebook. Once you find the record, you can either edit or delete it
directly in Data Forms.
Creating notebook databases manually
In addition to using Data Forms, you can also manually enter the data records
in the appropriate rows of your database. If you choose to create a database in
this way, you must type the information directly in the notebook cells without
the structured help of a form.
Setting up notebook databases
You can set up databases in Quattro Pro notebooks using a form that lists
your field names, or you can enter the information without the use of a form.
You must follow certain conventions when setting up notebook databases.
For information about these conventions, see “Creating notebook databases”
on page 282.
Using databases
283
The Data Forms tool automates the process of entering records in a database.
This tool creates a form from your database field names in which you can
enter the data in the appropriate fields. Additionally, you can create notebook
databases manually by typing data (records) under the appropriate columns
(field names).
To set up notebook databases using Data Forms
1 Type field names (e.g., Name, Address, City) in individual columns of Row
1 in an empty notebook.
For example, type Name in A1, Address in cell B1, City in cell C1.
2 Select the field names in Row 1 and the empty cells directly beneath them
in Row 2.
For example, if you have field names in cells A1 to F1, select the block of
cells from A1 to F2.
3 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form.
4 Click OK.
5 Type the record information in the appropriate fields.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each record, except the final one.
8 Type the final record.
To set up notebook databases manually
1 Type field names in individual columns of Row 1 in an empty notebook.
2 Type the data in the rows beneath the appropriate field name columns.
Searching for records and navigating databases
You can use Data Forms to search for records in your notebook database
when you need to edit or delete existing records, or discover if there are
duplicate records in your database. To narrow your search, fill out as many
fields with search criteria as you can. To broaden your search, use wildcards
in your search criteria. For information about using wildcards as search
criteria, see “Using wildcards as search criteria” on page 292.
Data Forms has several navigational tools that let you move quickly through
the database when searching for records. These include navigational buttons
and the Slider.
284
To search for records
1 Click a cell in the database.
2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Form. All of the database cells are highlighted.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Search button.
5 Type the information to search in the appropriate fields.
6 Click the Record Forward button.
To navigate databases
All of the database cells are highlighted.
3 Click any of the following buttons:
First Record button — moves directly to the first database record
Last Record button — moves directly to the last database record
Record Forward button — moves forward one database record
Record Back button — moves backward one database record
When searching for records, the navigation buttons only navigate records
that meet the search criteria. To navigate all database records, clear the
search criteria.
You can also navigate databases using the Slider. As you drag the slider
across its bar, Quattro Pro displays the record number above the bar. You
can drag the Slider from the first record to the last record, and can stop at
any record.
Adding database records
You can use Data Forms to add new records to the end of your notebook
database. After you add records, you can sort the notebook database
alphabetically or numerically. You can quickly sort cells by clicking the Sort
button on the Selection Formatting toolbar. For information about the
Selection Formatting toolbar, see “Working with toolbars” on page 24.
Using databases
285
To add database records
3 Click OK.
5 Type the record information in the appropriate fields.
Click Close instead of the New button to add the last record in a session.
Editing and deleting database records
Using Data Forms, you can change information in existing records and delete
records that you no longer need.
To find specific records, use the Search function. For information about
searching for records in notebook databases, see “Searching for records and
navigating databases” on page 284.
To edit database records
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Record Back button to locate the record to edit.
5 Edit the record.
6 Click the Record Forward button to save the changes.
7 When you are finished editing records, click the Close button to save the
changes.
If you do not want to save your editing changes to a particular record, click
the Revert button to reinsert the original information in the record.
286
To delete database records
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Record Back button to locate the record to delete.
6 Click Yes.
You cannot retrieve records after you delete them.
Preparing notebook database search queries
Using Notebook Query, you can query notebook databases for records that
match your search criteria. Querying is useful when your database is large or
complex, or if a manual search of the database is difficult or time-consuming.
Preparing to query your notebook database is a three-step process. First, you
must create a criteria table. Next, you must create the search output cells for
viewing the results of your query. Finally, you can set up search formulas,
AND and OR queries, and wildcards in the criteria table to help you narrow
or broaden your search.
You can use Data Forms to conduct simple searches of database records. For
more information about using Data Forms, see “Searching for records and
navigating databases” on page 284.
You can also use a variety of spreadsheet functions with databases. These
functions use database cells and criteria tables, just as in a database search.
For information about using spreadsheet functions, see “Working with
formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.
Creating a criteria table and search output cells
A criteria table consists of a row of field names that must match one or more
fields in the database cells, and one or more rows of search criteria. The
criteria table must be contiguous and confined to one spreadsheet, but does
not have to be on the same spreadsheet as the database cells.
You can use AND and OR queries, search formulas and wildcards when
defining your search criteria in a criteria table.
Using databases
287
Your data search results are placed in search output cells. You create these
output cells on an area of the notebook where database records that match
your search criteria will be copied. It is important to place your output cells
in an area that does not overlap with either the database cells or the criteria
table.
To create a criteria table
1 Copy the names of the fields to search in the first row of the table.
2 Enter the search data beneath the appropriate field names.
To search for exact matches — type search criteria exactly as the data
appears in the database
To search for conditional matches — type search criteria using search
formulas, wildcards, or queries
To require each record to meet more than one criterion, enter the criteria
in the same row, under the appropriate field names.
To search for records that meet any of the given criteria, use a separate
row for each criterion.
To create search output cells
In the first row of the output cells, copy the names of the fields to include
in the output from the database.
The output cells do not have to be on the same spreadsheet as the criteria
table or the database cells.
Using AND and OR queries in a criteria table
A query is a request for information from a database. You can include AND
and OR queries in search criteria tables when searching through databases.
These queries can help you either narrow or broaden your search. To get the
most out of your search, combine AND and OR queries.
When you use AND queries, all data must match all search criteria in all rows
of the criteria table.
When you use OR queries, data can match criteria in one or more rows of the
criteria table, but not necessarily all rows.
288
The following procedures use the example of a database that contains two
columns listing first and last names of company employees to illustrate how
you can use AND and OR queries to search a database.
A simple database
listing the first and
last names of
company employees.
To use AND queries
1 Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table.
2 In the same row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria
table.
For example, to create an AND query in a criteria table in the example
described above, type Kelly in the row under First Name and Kind in the row
under Last Name. The criteria are entered in different cells of the same row
in the criteria table.
An example of a
criteria table using
an AND query.
Quattro Pro searches for records with the last name Kind and first name
Kelly. The search results reveal only one possible match. The output cells
contain a record for Kelly Kind.
To use OR queries
2 In a different row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria
table.
To create an OR query in a criteria table using the database example, type
Barbara in the row under First Name and Kind in the next row under Last
Name.
Using databases
289
An example of a
criteria table using
an OR query.
Quattro Pro searches for any records with the last name Kind and the first
name Barbara. The search results reveal five matches. The output cells
contain records for Kelly Kind, Steve Kind, Barbara Kind, Barbara Smith, and
Barbara Wong.
To combine AND and OR queries
2 In the same row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria
table.
3 In a different row, type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table.
To combine AND and OR queries in a criteria table using the database
example, type Kelly in the row under First name, type Kind in the same row
but under Last name, and Barbara in a new row under First Name.
An example of a
criteria table
combining an AND
and OR query.
Quattro Pro searches for any records with the last name Kind and the first
name Barbara or Kelly. The search results reveal four matches. The output
cells contain records for Kelly Kind, Barbara Kind, Barbara Wong, and
Barbara Smith. Records for Kelly Smith, Kelly O’Toole, and Steve Kind do
not match the search criteria and are therefore not displayed in the search
output cells.
Using search formulas in a criteria table
Search formulas are a powerful database search tool. They let you specify
conditions that must be met for Quattro Pro to find matching records. Your
search conditions can be as specific or as general as you want. For example,
you can create a search formula that looks for payments of less than $25.00
290
(+~PAYMENT<25) or records dated after January 1, 1939
(+~DATE>@DATE(1939,1,1)). When you reference another cell in a
criteria table formula, while the cell reference on the left needs to be
relative, the reference on the right needs to be absolute; for example:
+~AGE>$H$5.
You can also use search formulas that use cell names to represent field
names. Using Field Names, you can generate cell names that refer to the first
record in the database. When you use field names or named cells on the left
side of a search formula, the name must be relative. You can indicate a
relative cell name by preceding it with a tilde (~). For example,
+~WAGE>25 is a valid search criteria. However, +WAGE>25 is invalid.
The following table shows the operators and symbols you can use in search
formulas.
Use
To indicate...
=
Equals
<>
Not equal
<
Less than
>
Greater than
<=
Less than or equal to
>=
Greater than or equal to
#AND#
Both expressions are true
#OR#
Either the first or the second expression may be true
#NOT#
The first expression is true, the second is false
To use search formulas in a criteria table
1 Type search formulas under field names of the criteria table using any of
the operators and symbols listed in the table above.
2 Click Tools, Data Tools, Notebook Query.
3 Click Field Names in the Notebook Data Query dialog box.
You cannot combine search formulas with wildcards.
Logical formulas in criteria tables display either 1 (true) or 0 (false).
Using databases
291
Using wildcards as search criteria
Wildcards are placeholder characters that represent one or more characters.
They are a powerful searching tool for searching for text in database cells.
You can use wildcards or search formulas as search criteria, but you cannot
combine wildcards with other operators. For example, +~Item=tape is a
valid comparison formula. However, if you enter the formula +~Item=t?p ,
the exact string t?p is found; records containing tip, tap, or top are not found.
The following table lists the wildcards you can use as search criteria.
Use...
To search for...
?
Any single character in a label. For example, t?p finds tip, top, or tap,
but not tape or stop.
*
Any number of characters to the end of a label. For example, ten* finds
tender, tension, and tent, but not attention.
~
All labels in a field except those that match the search condition. This
symbol is referred to as tilde. For example, entering ~Boston under the
City column in the criteria table finds all records that do not have Boston
in the City field.
To use wildcards as search criteria
Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table using any of the
wildcards listed above.
Querying notebook databases
After creating a criteria table, setting up search formulas, queries, or
wildcards, and creating search output cells, you can query notebook
databases. For information about query preparation, see “Preparing notebook
database search queries” on page 287.
Quattro Pro lets you highlight matching records, making it easy for you to
scroll through the database records to see all records which match your
search criteria. You can also make copies of records that match your search
criteria and display them in the search output cells.
You can delete records that match your search criteria from the database. Use
caution when doing this unless you are certain you want to remove the
records. You can use the delete function in conjunction with the highlight
function, allowing you to see the records that match your search before they
are deleted.
292
Highlighting matching records
Using the Locate feature, you can highlight all records that meet the
conditions specified in the criteria table. Quattro Pro highlights the first
record in the database cells that meets the search conditions. You can
navigate to other records that meet your criteria. Press UP ARROW to move
to previously found matches, or DOWN ARROW to move to the next match.
If there are no matching records, Quattro Pro beeps and returns you to the
Notebook Data Query dialog box.
To highlight matching records
2 Select the database cells in the Notebook Data Query dialog box.
To select database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking
syntax. For example, [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the
notebook called DATA.
3 Select the criteria table.
4 Select the output cells. Select only the first row of the output cells which
contains the field names so that you do not limit the range of the output
cells.
5 Click the Locate button.
Press ESC to return to the Notebook Data Query dialog box.
Copying and eliminating duplicate matching records
You can copy matching records in a notebook database to the search output
cells. Only fields whose names are written on the first row of the output cells
are copied.
All data in the cells beneath the output cells is erased before it is extracted;
do not store notebook data in that area of the spreadsheet. You can avoid
losing data by specifying an output area larger than one row; this also limits
the number of records the output cells accept.
To eliminate records from the output cells that match in all fields, use Extract
Unique instead. Matching records are eliminated from the output cells only,
not from the database.
Using databases
293
To copy matching records
4 Select the output cells.
5 Click the Extract button.
To eliminate duplicate matching records from the search output
cells
5 Click the Extract Unique button.
Deleting matching records
Quattro Pro lets you delete matching records from your notebook database.
After you set up the criteria for matching, you can find and delete all records
that match. Records below the deleted records move up to fill in the empty
rows.
You may sometimes want to see the records that match your search before
they are deleted. You can view the records, then decide whether to delete
them. For information about using Locate to highlight matching records, see
“Highlighting matching records” on page 293.
To delete matching records
294
You can click Edit, Undo to restore a record if you accidentally delete it.
Querying external databases
With Quattro Pro, you can search for records and information in external
Paradox or dBASE database tables. The Notebook Query feature lets you
extract information from the external database without first having to
translate the file. You can use Query By Example (QBE) to format queries of
external databases.
When you query external databases, you must create a criteria table
specifying the type of information you are searching for and output cells to
hold the results of the search. For information about criteria tables and
output cells, see “Creating a criteria table and search output cells” on page
287.
When you are working with external database tables, it is useful to assign
aliases for your private and working directories. Aliases are shortcut names
used when path names are long or complicated.
You can use Database Desktop to view search results in or delete records
from external databases. For more information about using Database
Desktop, see “Using Database Desktop” on page 302.
You can use linking syntax to query a database file created with Paradox. This
lets you access database information without first having to translate the
database into a notebook file. You can query an external database by
specifying cells, and including the name of the file and directory, if they are
different.
Querying external databases using Notebook Query
You can link to an external database using Tools, Data Tools, Notebook
Query. This lets you access information in database files created with
Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE (versions II, III, and IV). You can extract
information from the database without first having to translate the file.
With Notebook Query, you can use Extract and Extract Unique to search
external databases. However, Locate, Delete, and Field Names do not work
with external databases.
To query external databases using Notebook Query
2 In the Database Cells box, type the path of the external database file using
linking syntax.You do not need to type the path if the database path is
already in your Working Directory.
Using databases
295
The format of linking syntax is [Database]A1..A2, where [Database] is the
name of the database, including the path; for example,
C:\PARADOX\SAMPLE.DB. The cells specified after the file name can be
any valid area with at least two rows. A1..A2 acts as a hook into the
database. It remains A1..A2, no matter how large the database area
actually is.
5 Click the Extract button.
If your criteria contain formulas with cell references to data elsewhere,
those cell references must be absolute. For example, for a table with
Name and Age as column titles, you could enter +~age>25 to identify all
entries where age>25. To reference the cell C1 that contained the value
25, entering +AGE>C1 would not work. Instead, you would need to
enter +~AGE>$A:$C$1 as the criteria, using absolute references.
Using Query By Example
In database management systems, Query By Example (QBE) refers to a
method of forming queries in which the database program displays a blank
record with a space for each field. You can then enter conditions for each field
to be included in the query. For example, to find all records where the age
field is greater than 65, you type >65 in the age field.
Once you use the Query by Example technique to create a .QBE file in
Paradox or Database Desktop, you can run the QBE query from Quattro Pro.
Use Insert, External Data, Table Query, then specify a .QBE file or a QBE
query in a notebook selection.
A QBE query in a notebook selection always starts with the word Query and
ends with the word EndQuery. The best way to learn the QBE syntax is to
create queries in Database Desktop or Paradox, import them into Quattro
Pro, then experiment by revising them.
To use Query By Example
1 Click Insert, External Data, Table Query.
Query in File — indicates that the query is located in a .QBE file
Query in Selection — indicates that the query is located in a notebook
selection
296
3 Type the location of the query in the Query File box.
4 Select the destination for the query results in the Destination box.
The QBE query and the database table must be in your working directory.
For information about setting up a working directory, see “Assigning
aliases for private and working directories” on page 297.
You can make a query selection easy to read by setting the font for the
QBE selection to a non-proportional font, such as Courier.
Assigning aliases for private and working directories
An alias is a shortcut name that takes the place of a long path name. When
using external database tables, it is convenient to assign aliases for your
private and working directories. A private directory is a location for your
temporary answer tables and other nonshared files. A working directory is
where a database application or a feature looks for external database tables.
To assign aliases for private and working directories
1 Click Insert, External Data, Aliases.
2 In the Private Directory box, type the path for your private directory.
3 In the Working Directory box, type the path for your working directory.
You can click the Browse button to insert a path.
Importing data from external databases
When you need to work with data stored in databases created in other
software applications, you can import the data to save the work of retyping it
or opening a large database as a spreadsheet file. You can import database
files with up to 1,000,000 records.
You can work with external database tables in Quattro Pro. Database tables
contain data extracted from a database, arranged in a specified sequence.
Tables are useful when your database contains a large amount of data and you
need to work with only a certain portion of it. You can link to or import
external database tables. You can also control the amount of information that
you import by joining or filtering database tables.
You can access and retrieve data from Paradox, dBASE, or any Open
Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Borland Database Engine (BDE) data
Using databases
297
source, provided there is a full conformance 32-bit ODBC or IDAPI driver
installed for that data source. When using an ODBC driver to access data,
password-protection is an issue for the driver. For information about the
installation and conformance level of a specific driver, refer to the driver
documentation. ODBC and IDAPI drivers may be purchased separately from
a third party.
Inserting external databases
You can insert into Quattro Pro databases created with other software
applications. If the external database file has more than 1,000,000 records,
close the file when you are done, but do not save it. If you save the file,
records that are not displayed are lost.
To insert external databases
1 Click File, Open.
2 In the Open File dialog box, choose the database file.
If no ODBC sources are listed in the Data Type list, you need to add them.
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel. Click ODBC.
If no Borland Database Engine (BDE) sources (also called aliases) are
listed, you can create them. Click Start, Programs, WordPerfect Office
2000, Utilities, Borland Database Engine 5.01.
You can also insert external databases by clicking Insert, External Data,
Import Database File.
You can also insert external databases using an Expert. For information
about importing external databases using an Expert, see “Importing
external database tables” on page 299.
Linking to external database tables
You can insert external database tables as linked data into notebooks using
Table Link. Changes made in the source data are reflected in the linked table
when you reopen it.
You can open files with .DB or .DBF extensions directly in Quattro Pro and
edit them as if they were spreadsheets, as long as they do not contain index
or memo files. Quattro Pro can also create new .DB and .DBF files.
298
For best results, use Database Desktop to work with external database
tables. For information about using Database Desktop, see “Using Database
Desktop” on page 302.
To link to external database tables
1 Click Insert, External Data, Table Link.
2 Select the cell location for the linked database table in the Table Link
dialog box.
3 Click the Browse button in the Table box.
4 Choose the database file in the Open File dialog box.
5 Click the Open button.
6 Click OK.
You can also link to external database tables by clicking the Table Link
button on the Data Manipulation toolbar . For information about the Data
Manipulation Toolbar, see “Working with toolbars” on page 24.
You can use @TABLELINK to link directly to an external database table,
which allows you to specify the number of columns and rows to display.
For information about using spreadsheet functions, see “Working with
formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.
Importing external database tables
You can choose the type of database tables to import from external databases.
You can import data from Paradox, Borland Database Engine (BDE), or
ODBC.
You have several options when importing database tables from external
databases. You can display duplicate rows of information in the data you
import. For example, if the imported data lists all customers who have
ordered books, any customers who have ordered more than one book are
listed on a new row for each book.
You can include field names as column headings in the first row of data you
import.
To import external database tables
1 Click Insert, External Data, Expert.
2 Choose the type of the data you are going to import from the Data Type
drop down list box.
Using databases
299
3 Type the path where the database is stored in the Database Path box.
5 Enable the tables to import in the Select Tables dialog box.
7 Double-click the fields to import in the Available Fields section of the Set
Criteria dialog box.
8 Select a destination for the import results in the Destination box.
9 Click the Finish button.
You can change the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list by
clicking the Arrow Up button or the Arrow Down button. The Arrow Up
button moves the highlighted field up one position; the Arrow Down
button moves the highlighted field down one position.
You can remove a field from the Selected Fields list by selecting the field
then clicking the Trash Can button.
You can update imported data that has changed in the original database. To
do this, click a spreadsheet cell containing the data, then click Insert,
External Data, Expert, Finish.
To set import options for external database tables
2 Click Options in the Set Criteria dialog box.
3 Enable any of the following check boxes in the Import Options dialog box:
Allow Duplicate Rows — displays duplicate rows of information in the
data you import
Include Column Headings — displays field names as column headings
in the first row of data you import
Keep Query Definition — maintains the parameters you specify the
next time you import data tables from external databases
Joining and filtering external database tables
You can join two or more data tables from external databases. When using
more than one table, you must join common fields in the tables, even if they
have different field names, to avoid duplicating their records in the data you
import. For example, if two tables contain the same customer identification
field, you should use the customer identification field to join the tables.
300
Because external databases can contain a large amount of information, it is
useful to minimize the amount of information that you import, retrieving only
the portions of data you want. For example, you can list only those customers
who have ordered a particular book so that you can send them a letter
announcing the sequel.
To join external database tables
2 Select the tables to join.
3 Click Query Properties in the Set Criteria dialog box.
4 Click the Joins tab in the Query Properties dialog box.
5 Choose a field from the first Field list.
6 Choose the common field from the second Field list.
7 Select = from the Operator list.
8 Click OK.
You can join more than two tables by clicking And, then repeating the
above steps.
To filter external database tables
2 Click Query Properties in the Set Criteria dialog box..
3 Click the Filters tab in the Query Properties dialog box.
4 Choose the field you want to filter from the Criteria Field list box.
5 Select an operator (such as = or >) from the Operator list.
6 Enable the List Values check box to list a few sample values from the
selected field in the Value list, then select one of those values, or type a
value.
7 Click OK.
Using databases
301
Click And to narrow the filter results. For example, you can generate a list
of customers who have a credit limit above a specified amount and who
live in a certain city.
Click Or to broaden the filter results. For example, you can generate a list
of customers who live in a certain city or who bought a specified product.
Click Clear to clear the filter criteria and start again.
Opening password-protected tables
You can open password-protected tables. For security, as you type the
password, the pound symbol (#) represents the characters you type.
When you import a password-protected database file by clicking Insert,
External Data, Import Database File or by clicking File, Open, the password
for the table is discarded when you close the file. When you perform a Query
by Example query using Insert, External Data, Table Query, the password is
functional until you exit Quattro Pro.
To open password-protected tables
1 Click File, Open.
2 Type the password for the table in the Password dialog box.
Add — stores the password in memory so that if other tables you want
to query require the same password, you can open them without
re-entering the password
Remove — releases the password from memory so that if any table you
want to query requires the password, you must re-enter the password
to open it
Remove All — deletes all passwords from memory so that you must
enter a password for any protected table you want to query
Using Database Desktop
Database Desktop lets you create, view, sort, modify, and query database
tables in a variety of Paradox, dBASE, and Structured Query Language (SQL)
formats. Using Database Desktop, you can
view and query databases
add, edit, and delete database records
copy data from an external database into Quattro Pro
302
create new dBASE or Paradox databases
link external database data to corresponding data in Quattro Pro, and have
your notebook updated whenever the database changes
query external databases from Quattro Pro and have the results returned
directly to the notebook
Database Desktop is installed only when you install WordPerfect Office 2000
using a custom installation. Read the help information provided with
Database Desktop to find out about its features.
Installing Database Desktop
The Database Desktop program is installed only with the custom installation
of WordPerfect Office 2000, not with the typical installation. You can use
Install As You Go to access Database Desktop if you have installed
WordPerfect Office 2000 using the typical installation.
To install Database Desktop
1 Click Insert, External Data, Database Desktop.
2 Follow the directions for Install As You Go.
Using Database Desktop help
A complete online Help guide is available when you start Database Desktop.
Help for Database Desktop is available if you have performed a custom
installation of WordPerfect Office 2000 and have selected Additional Help
Files.
To use Database Desktop help
1 Click Insert, External Data, Database Desktop.
2 Click Help, User Guide Topics.
Contents — browses the online help by chapter
Index — searches for topics in the index
Find — finds help topics based on a keyword
Using databases
303
PRESENTING SPREADSHEET
DATA IN A CHART
12
You can make charts from data contained in your spreadsheet. A chart
presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot, display a
trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data in your
spreadsheet. Using charts to analyze your data is faster and easier than
examining the data cell by cell.
Quattro Pro provides several different chart types. Certain chart types are
best suited for specific types of data, and each basic chart type can be
displayed in various ways, such as 2-D, 3-D, or rotated.
You can customize the various aspects of a chart to suit your requirements,
and manage and share the chart within notebooks and with other
applications.
For more information about specific chart types, see:
“Working with line and area charts” on page 312
“Working with bar charts” on page 317
“Working with pie, doughnut, and column charts” on page 322
“Working with specialty charts” on page 327
“Working with bullet charts” on page 341
“Working with analytical charts” on page 345
Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart
305
Choosing a charting tool
A chart presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot,
display a trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data in your
notebook. You can create floating charts or window charts. Both appear on
the Objects sheet as icons.
Quattro Pro gives you three options for creating a chart:
QuickChart — a button you can click to create a floating chart; Quattro
Pro chooses the most appropriate chart type based on the selected data.
Chart Expert — a Quattro Pro expert that helps you create floating and
window charts from start to finish; you enter data at each stage of the
creation process. The Chart Expert can also select a chart type based on
the selected data.
custom charting tool — a tool you use to create a window chart from
scratch; you enter the data and select all chart options manually.
Using any chart tool, you can create area, line, bar, pie, doughnut and column,
or specialty charts. “Expert’s Choice” is the chart type Quattro Pro selects
when you use the QuickChart button or the Chart Expert tool.
Creating charts with the QuickChart button
Use the QuickChart button to create a chart on a notebook sheet using
defaults, including a chart type selected by Quattro Pro. For more
information on selecting data to use in a chart, see “Selecting chart data” on
page 308.
To create a floating chart
1 Select the cells you want to plot.
If surrounding cells contain explanatory labels that you want to use as axis
or legend labels, include them in the selection.
2 Click the QuickChart tool, then drag over the area of the notebook sheet
to where you want to place the chart.
If you click the notebook sheet instead of dragging the mouse, Quattro
Pro creates a default chart.
3 Release the mouse button to create the chart.
Creating charts
The Chart Expert prompts you to provide specific information to
automatically create a chart. It lets you choose a chart type or, using Expert’s
Choice, Quattro Pro selects an appropriate chart type based on the selected
306
data. For more information about selecting data to use in a chart, see
“Selecting chart data” on page 308.For helpful information while you create
the chart, click the Tip button in the Chart Expert.
To create a chart using the Chart Expert
1 Select the cells containing the data you want to plot, including any column
labels.
2 Click Insert, Chart.
3 Follow Chart Expert steps.
The chart name is displayed in the Chart List and next to the chart icon
on the Objects sheet. If you are creating many charts in a notebook,
having charts named Chart 1, Chart 2, etc., may be confusing.
To reverse the order of a series or switch columns and rows, enable the
Reverse Series or Row/Column Swap check box. This feature is useful in
3-D bar and unstacked charts when a series with high values is plotted at
the front of the chart, obscuring the other series.
Another way to assign cell series is to type the coordinates in the series
box.
Creating custom charts
The New Custom Chart tool lets you choose what to include and exclude in a
chart, from selecting the chart type to specifying the spreadsheet data. For
example, when no chart type is selected, Quattro Pro automatically assigns a
chart type based on the number of data points and series you entered. If you
omit titles, the chart does not display titles for axes or series data by default.
To create a chart from scratch
1 Right-click the spreadsheet, then click New Custom Chart.
2 Click the Pointer button to select the cells on the notebook sheet that you
want to include in the series.
You can select a single cell, a contiguous selection, or noncontiguous
selections.
3 Click the Type tab, choose a chart category from the Category list, then
click an icon to choose a chart type.
307
If no chart type is selected, Quattro Pro assigns one.
4 Click the Titles tab to enter the Title, Subtitle, and chart axes titles.
If no titles are entered, no axes or series titles will be displayed.
5 Click the Name tab to enter a name for the chart in the Chart Name box.
If no name is entered, Quattro Pro assigns a default name (for example,
Chart 1).
The chart name is displayed in the Chart List and next to the chart icon
on the Objects sheet. If you are creating many charts in a notebook,
having charts named Chart 1, Chart 2, etc., may be confusing.
To reverse the order of a series or switch columns and rows, enable the
Reverse Series or Row/Column Swap check box. This feature is useful in
3-D bar and unstacked charts when a series with high values is plotted at
the front of the chart obscuring the other series.
Another way to assign cell series is to type the coordinates in the series
boxes.
For more information on selecting data to use in a chart, see “Selecting
chart data” on page 308.
Selecting chart data
Every chart you create must have at least one data series. A data series is a
set of numbers representing the values of something being measured or
reported. To create a chart, you must select a data series on your
spreadsheet to use in a chart, and ensure the data is organized in the way
that produces the chart you want.
Selecting a data series
You can select a data series by pointing before you create a chart, when using
the Chart Expert, or within the Series dialog box. You can select rows,
columns, and noncontiguous blocks in a single series.
Blank columns and rows can create a series of zero values that may skew
your chart; delete them or exclude them from your selection before you
create the chart.
308
To select a data series
1 Click the Pointer button to the right of a Chart data box in the Step 1 of 5
window in the Chart Expert.
The chart and the Step 1 of 5 window move behind the notebook. The
current coordinates for the series are highlighted on the notebook.
2 Drag to select the cells.
3 Do one of the following to return to the Chart Expert:
Click the Maximize button in the Chart Expert title bar.
After selecting a data series, press ENTER.
Click the Next button to go to the next Chart Expert window.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 again to re-select the data series.
You can use the Pointer button to select a cell or a group of cells by
clicking a cell on the spreadsheet, then dragging to select the cells, rows,
and columns desired.
If you want to select a non-contiguous block of cells, hold down the CTRL
key as you select cells by pointing.
Double-click the Chart data box to minimize the Step 1 of 5 window. This
hides the Chart Expert behind the spreadsheet so that you can select your
data without obstructions.
Setting up your data axes
All charts except pie, doughnut, and column charts have two references for
plotting data: the x-axis and the y-axis. The x-axis is a horizontal line at the
bottom of the chart pane with fixed reference points; the column labels in
your data series are used for x-axis labels to explain what each data series
represents. Y-axis labels show the values being represented. Depending on
the data series, Quattro Pro determines the range and increment amounts of
the y-axis. If your y-axis range is greater than 1000, you can use the Show
Units option to simplify the scale and add a title beside the y-axis (for
example “(thousands)”).
There are a few exceptions to this format:
Rotated charts have a vertical x-axis and a horizontal y-axis. Quattro Pro
reverses the axes of rotated charts automatically.
309
In XY charts (scatter diagrams), the x-axis series is data, not labels.
Quattro Pro scales the x-axis to match the data. When you right-click the
x-axis of an XY chart and click Properties, the properties match the y-axis
properties.
If the chart is a 2-D bar, line, or area chart, you can assign any series to a
secondary y-axis, which appears on the right side of the chart.
You can select specific series for x and y axes when you create a custom
chart.
For more information about creating a custom chart, see “Creating custom
charts” on page 307.
Assigning chart data
How Quattro Pro plots your data depends on the range and values of the cells
you select before you create the chart.
When the selection contains more rows than columns or an equal number of
rows and columns:
Quattro Pro plots each column as a single series.
If the first series contains labels, the labels are placed along the x-axis.
This column of labels is called the x-axis series.
If the first row contains labels, these labels are used in the chart legend.
This row is called the legend series.
When a selection contains more columns than rows:
Quattro Pro plots each row as a single series.
If the first row (the first series) contains labels, these labels become the
x-axis series.
If the first column contains labels, these labels become the legend series.
Blank columns and rows can create a series of zero values that may skew the
chart; delete them or exclude them from your selection before you create the
chart. If you have noncontiguous selections, Quattro Pro uses the dimensions
of the first selection to determine whether to plot rows or columns.
If you specify a 3-D selection, Quattro Pro starts the selection with the row
or column from the first sheet, then appends the corresponding cells from
succeeding sheets to form the series. For example, if you select
A..C:B3..D11, the first series is A..C:B3..B11, the second series is
A..C:C3..C11, and the third series is A..C:D3..D11. Pie charts, doughnut
charts, column charts, and 3-D area charts plot negative numbers as positive
values.
310
To add series to a chart on a notebook sheet
1 Select the cells.
2 Point to an edge of the selected cells until you see a four-way arrow.
3 Drag the cells over the chart.
4 Release the mouse button while the pointer is over the chart.
If you drop the series while the mouse pointer is not over a chart, you
move the cells to where the pointer rests.
Adding linked data to charts
You can display the data from linked cells on the chart. This is useful when
you use a chart type that shows information that lacks specific numeric
content (for example, in a surface chart). If you select multiple cells, a linked
picture of them appears on the chart. If you select a single cell, the data in
that cell displays on the chart (for example, the number in the cell). The cells
in the chart update with any changes you make to the data or properties of
the notebook cells.
To add data to a chart
1 Select a chart.
2 Double-click the chart (so you see a thick outline around the chart).
3 Click Insert, Link to Cells.
4 Drag a rectangle on the chart where you want the data to appear, then
release the mouse button.
5 Click the Pointer button next to the Select Cells box in the Link Cells
dialog box, then choose the cell or group of cells you want to display.
6 Enable one or both of the following check boxes in the Border Options
section:
Row Borders
Column Borders
7 Enable one or both of the following check boxes in the Grid Lines section:
Horizontal
311
Vertical
8 Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box in the Display Scaling section
to match the same aspect ratio used on the notebook.
You cannot select noncontiguous selections with the Link to Cells tool.
Working with line and area charts
Line charts plot series values as points, then connect the points in each
series with a line. You can customize markers, line styles, and other
properties by right-clicking a line and clicking Properties.
Area charts (except 3-D, unstacked area charts) plot cumulative rather than
individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second
series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third
series is charted on top of the second, and so forth.
You can modify chart properties such as the type of analysis performed on a
series, and fill and border settings for the data series.
For more information about modifying chart properties, see “Editing x and y
axes” on page 365.
Lines charts and 3-D Floating Marker charts have additional properties that
you can modify. For information about modifying line charts, see “Modifying
line charts” on page 315 and “Modifying 3-D Floating Marker charts” on
page 316.
2-D line and area charts include:
hows how values change over time. This simple chart, the 2-D line chart is
easy to read when there are many data series plotted.
Rotated Line charts shows the pattern of values over time, but the
x-axis and y-axis positions are reversed. The rotation leaves more room
for long x-axis labels.
2-D area charts shows how each series affects the all the data over time.
Although only the first line plotted is an accurate pattern (a dip in a
further series might appear as a rise if values beneath it are high), the
size of the area corresponding to each series represents its contribution
to the whole.
312
Rotated Area charts shows the series contribution to the data results
represented by the width of each series. This chart type reverses the x
and y axes, so areas are stacked side by side.
3-D line and area charts include:
Ribbon charts shows line charts plotted on 3-D grids, with each line
flattened out into a segmented ribbon. Ribbon charts are good for
showing trends over time, but individual points are less visible than on
standard line charts.
3-D area charts shows series plotted as 3-D areas inside a 3-D grid.
3-D unstacked area charts shows changes over time. It plots actual
series values, not cumulative values. The first series is plotted at the
back of the chart; additional series are drawn in front of it. Like line
charts, 3-D unstacked area charts are useful for showing changes over
time.
3-D floating marker charts show each point in a series, but individual
points are not connected (as they are on a standard line chart). Floating
solid shapes (cubes, spheres, pyramids, diamonds, hexa-diamonds, or
octa-diamonds) represent the points against a 3-D grid. This chart type
is not available in the Chart Expert, but you can convert an existing
chart into a 3-D floating marker chart. For information about creating
3-D floating marker charts, see “Creating 3-D floating marker charts”
on page 315.
Creating line charts
Use this procedure to create line, rotated line, and ribbon charts.
To create a line chart
1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart.
3 Consider one of the following options:
Swap rows/columns — rotates the x and y axes to display the data
horizontally
313
Reverse series — plots the last series first, then moves backward
through the series order (this is useful when a series with high values
is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series)
4 Click the Next button, then click the Line or Area chart icon in the
General Chart Type list.
5 Next, then click one of the following icons:
Regular — creates a 2-D line or rotated 2-D line chart
3-D — creates a ribbon chart
6 Type descriptive names in the following boxes:
Title — the title of the chart
Subtitle — the subtitle of the chart
X-Axis — the title of the x-axis
Y-Axis — the title of the y-axis
7 Enable one of the following buttons in the Destination section of the Step
4 of 5 Chart Expert window:
Current Sheet — creates the chart on the spreadsheet
Chart Window — creates the chart on a separate page
8 Click the Next button, then choose a color combination from the Color
Scheme list.
Creating area charts
Use this procedure to create 2-D or 3-D area charts.
To create an area chart
horizontally
5 Next, then click one of the following icons:
314
3-D — creates a 3-D unstacked area chart
Stacked — creates a 2-D area chart or a 3-D area chart.
8 Click the Next button, choose a color combination from the Color Scheme
list.
Creating 3-D floating marker charts
This type of chart is a modification of an existing chart, and is not available in
the Chart Expert.
To create a 3-D chart with floating markers
1
Select a chart that contains multiple data series.
2 Click Chart, Type/Layout.
3 Choose Area/Line from the Category list.
4 Click the 3-D Floating Marker chart icon.
Modifying line charts
You can customize each line in a line chart using Line Series Properties. You
can modify options, the type of analysis performed on the data series, the
marker style, as well as color and fill style options.
To change the marker style of a line series
1 Select a chart on a notebook sheet.
2 Right-click a series and click Properties.
3 Click the Marker Style tab, then click a marker icon.
315
Enable the AutoSize check box to let Quattro Pro size the marker in
proportion to the rest of the chart, with a default size of five.
Disable the AutoSize check box to enlarge the marker manually, then
move the Weight slider to create a larger or smaller marker.
5 Repeat this procedure for all the other series.
To change the line style
2 Click the Line Settings tab.
Choose a line color from the on-screen color palette.
Click a line style icon. Clicking None will display only series markers,
not the line.
For more information about modifying the kinds of analysis a line displays,
see “Working with analytical charts” on page 345.
For more information about modifying the line color and fill, see
“Changing colors and fill of chart objects” on page 382.
Modifying 3-D Floating Marker charts
You can modify a 3-D Floating Marker chart just like any other 3-D chart. You
can also modify the shape and size of the floating markers used to show
specific data points. When you modify a floating marker, all the floating
markers on the chart will display the same property settings.
To change the shape of float and markers
1 Select the 3-D floating marker chart, then right-click Float Series
Properties.
2 Click the Float Style tab, then click the Floating Marker Type icon that
matches the shape you want.
3 Click an icon in the Cross Section View to select the 3-D shape.
4 Move the Weight Slider to increase or decrease the size of the floating
markers.
316
Working with bar charts
Bar charts show each value in a series as a bar. Values are plotted against the
y-axis scale; the taller the bar, the greater the value.
You can modify bar chart properties. including the bar width, the bar margin
percentage, and the bar overlap options. In 3-D bar charts, you can also
select different 3-D risers (or bar shapes). For more information about
modifying bar chart properties, see “Modifying bar charts” on page 321.
2-D bar chart types include:
2-D bar shows each series value as a bar plotted against the y-axis scale.
When you plot more than one series, the bars appear side by side,
providing a good comparison of corresponding values in different series.
Rotated Bar emphasizes that values “move forward,” rather than
increase by plotting values as horizontal bars. This is also a good choice
if you have long x-axis labels.
3-D bar chart types include:
3-D bar shows series values as columns, with square tops and bases on
a three-dimensional grid. The first series is plotted across the front of
the chart from left to right. Bars that represent additional series are
plotted, in order, in front of the first series.
Rotated 3-D bar shows series values as horizontal columns on a 3-D
grid. The first series is plotted at the back of the chart, and additional
series are drawn in front of the first series. Unlike standard 3-D bar
charts that display legend text along the z-axis, a rotated 3-D bar chart
has a legend box.
2.5-D bar shows the values in each series as vertical bars that project
from the front to the back of a 3-D grid.
Rotated 2.5-D bar shows the values in each series as horizontal bars
that project from the front to the back of a 3-D grid. The first value in
the first series is plotted on the base of the chart, and corresponding
values of additional series are layered on top, in order.
317
Step similar to 3-D bar charts, but adjacent bars touch to emphasize the
progression of values in the series. The step chart serves the same
purpose as a 3-D unstacked area chart, but the steps emphasize
individual values.
Multiple bar plots each series in its own small bar chart to provide
side-by-side comparisons of different sets of data. Although each series
looks like a separate chart, it is really one chart. Each unit displays the
same y-axis scale, x-axis divisions, and so forth. Any changes to one
chart are reflected in the others. You can plot as many series as you like
in a multiple bar chart, but the size for each series gets smaller as you
add new series.
Working with stacked bar charts
Stacked bar charts show the relationship of each value to the total, for
example, how total sales are divided between regions. You can also modify
stacked bar charts properties. including the bar width, margin percentage,
and overlap options. In 3-D bar charts, you can also select different 3-D risers
(or bar shapes). For more information about modifying stacked bar chart
properties, see “Modifying bar charts” on page 321.
Stacked bar charts include:
Stacked bar plots the corresponding values of different series in
vertical stacks, showing both the total reached by the combined values
and the contribution of each value to the total. The first series is plotted
on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order. Stacked bar
charts may be 2-D or rotated 2-D.
100% stacked bar charts shows the relationship of each value to the
total by displaying the percentage of the total contributed by each
series. They may be 2-D, rotated 2-D, 3-D, or rotated 3-D.
3-D stacked bar shows individual and cumulative values. The first
series is plotted on the base of a 3-D grid; additional series are stacked
on top. 3-D stacked bar charts may be rotated.
Comparison has lines connecting the boundaries between series. This
makes it easier to compare series values or proportions from one bar to
318
the next. They may be stacked bar or 100% stacked bar charts, 2-D, or
rotated 2-D.
Creating bar charts
Using the Chart Expert, you can create two general bar charts: bar, and
rotated bar.
To create a bar chart
Select multiple data series if you want to create multiple bar charts.
horizontally
4 Click the Next button, then click the Bar chart icon in the General Chart
Type list.
5 The Next button, then click one of the following icons:
Regular — creates a 2-D bar, 2.5-D bar, or 3-D bar chart
Multiple — creates multiple bar charts
list.
319
To create a rotated bar chart with the Chart Expert
2 Click the Next button, then click the Rotated Bar chart icon in the
3 Click the Next button, then click an icon in the following list:
Regular — creates rotated bar, rotated 2.5-D bar, or rotated 3-D bar
chart.
list.
Creating stacked bar charts
You create 2-D, 3-D, or rotated stacked bar charts with the Chart Expert.
To create a stacked bar chart
1 Select the cells to plot in your chart.
horizontally.
Type list.
5 Click the Next button, then click one of the following icons:
320
Stacked — creates 2-D stacked bar, comparison stacked bar, or 3-D
stacked bar chart
100% Stacked — creates 2-D 100% stacked bar, 100% stacked bar
comparison, or a 2.5-D stacked bar.
list.
Modifying bar charts
Bar Series Properties let you change the bar width, margin percentage, and
overlap options. In 3-D bar charts, you can also select different 3-D risers (or
bar shapes).
To modify a bar chart
1 Select a bar chart.
2 Right-click a bar series, then click Bar Series Properties.
3 Click any of the following tabs:
Series Options — controls the way the selected series is plotted
Bar Options — sets the width, spacing, and overlap of all bars in the
graph
Riser Style — controls you change the shape of the 3-D bars
Fill Settings — sets the type of fill for the bars in the series
Border Settings — sets the line thickness of the border and the border
color
For information about modifying 3-D charts, see “Working with 3-D charts”
on page 356.
321
Working with pie, doughnut, and column charts
Pie, doughnut, and column charts plot a single series. Each value is plotted
as a percentage of the whole and negative values are plotted as though they
were positive. You can modify the layout and change the way labels display in
these charts. You can use the drawing tools in the chart window to add
graphics and text to the center (hole) of doughnut charts. With pie charts and
doughnut charts, you can explode slices (or separate them from the whole
pie) to emphasize the data in that slice.
Pie charts include:
Pie plots each value in a series as a slice of the pie.
2-D multiple pie displays different data series as side-by-side pie charts.
Use this chart type to show the proportion of individual values to the
whole, and how these proportions change from series to series.
3-D pie plots each value in a series as a slice of the pie; the pie has a
thicker look for a more dramatic appearance.
3-D Multiple Pie displays different data series as side by side 3-D pie
charts. Use this chart type to show the proportion of each value to the
whole, and how these proportions change from series to series.
Doughnut charts include:
Doughnut plots each value in a series as a slice of a doughnut (ring)
shape. They can be either 2-D or 3-D.
Column charts include:
Column represents values as sections of a vertical bar. The first value in
the series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top,
in order.
3-D column plots series values as sections of a column. Like the 2-D
version, 3-D column charts plot series values from the bottom up.
322
2-D multiple column displays each series as an individual column chart.
Like multiple pie charts, multiple column charts show the proportion of
individual values to the whole, and how these proportions change from
series to series. In addition, the column arrangement leaves more room
for labels.
3-D multiple column plots each series as individual 3-D column charts.
They serve the same purpose as 2-D multiple column charts.
Creating pie charts
With the Chart Expert, you can create 2-D and 3-D pie charts.
To create a pie chart
1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. (Select multiple data series
if you want to create multiple pie charts.
3 Click the Next button, then click the Pie Chart icon in the General Chart
Type list.
4 The Next button, then click one of the following icons:
Regular — creates a 2-D pie chart or 3-D pie chart
Multiple — creates multiple 2-D pie charts or multiple 3-D pie charts.
list.
Creating doughnut charts
You can create 2-D or 3-D doughnut charts with the Quattro Pro Chart
Expert. The following is an example of a doughnut chart:
323
This doughnut chart
shows the percentage
of t-shirts sold in
different sizes.
To create a doughnut chart
3 Click the Next button, then click the Pie Chart icon in the General Chart
Type list.
4 The Next button, then click one the following icon:
Doughnut — creates a 2-D doughnut chart or 3-D doughnut chart
list.
Creating column charts
You can create a column chart with the Chart Expert, including displaying the
series in reverse order. The number of data series selected in step 1 of the
procedure reflect the number of column charts created.
324
To create a column chart
1 Select the cells you want to plot in your chart. (Select more than one data
series if you want to create multiple column charts.)
3 Enable the Reverse Series check box to display the series in reverse
order.
Type list.
5 Click the Next button, then click one of the following icons:
Multiple Columns — creates 2-D column charts
3-D column charts — creates a 3-D column chart
list.
Modifying pie, doughnut, and column charts
You can modify pie, doughnut, and column chart layouts. By default, the label
for each slice of a pie or doughnut, or section of a column chart, shows what
percentage the segment contributes to the whole. A tick mark connects the
label and the slice or column section. When you define an x-axis series for
one of these chart types, its labels appear next to the percentages.
To change the layout of a pie, doughnut, or column chart
1 Select the chart, and click Chart, Type/Layout.
2 Choose a pie, doughnut, or column chart type, then click the desired chart
type icon.
325
To change the labels in a pie, doughnut or column chart
1 Select the chart.
2 Right-click the chart, then click Chart Properties.
3 Click Label Options.
4 Enable one of the following Data Label buttons:
Currency — shows the values in dollars
Percent — shows the data as a percentage of the value of the whole
series. (default)
Value — shows the actual data that appears in the spreadsheet page
None — no value are displayed next to the slice
5 Disable the Show Tick check box to prevent ticks displaying on the chart
if necessary.
(Be sure to do this if you selected the None option in step 3.)
6 Click any of the following tabs to customize label text:
Text Settings — change fill style, color, and background color
Text Font — change font face, size, or appearance.
Exploding a pie or doughnut chart slice
An exploded slice of a pie or doughnut chart is separated from the rest of the
chart for emphasis. You cannot explode column segments.
This example shows a
slice exploding from
a pie chart.
To explode a chart
1 Select the chart, and right-click Pie Chart Properties.
326
2 Click the Explode Slice tab.
3 Move the Explode Distance slider to set the distance (a percentage of the
pie or doughnut radius).
Type a percentage of the chart radius in the box next to the Explode
Distance slider.
Working with specialty charts
Quattro Pro lets you create specialized charts for your spreadsheets,
including surface and combination charts. Specialty charts often require
special consideration when organizing your data.
Specialty charts include:
XY plots data against two scaling axes.
High-Low is mostly used for tracking daily stock market prices.
Radar plots circles with a line for each x-axis value extending from the
center to the edge, like the spokes of a wheel. Y-axis values for each
series are charted on the spokes.
Variance shows how the values in each series deviate from the zero line,
which is an arbitrary baseline you choose using the Scale property.
Surface charts include:
3-D surface shades the area between each series with a different color.
3-D shaded surface shades a single-colored surface as though a light is
shining down from directly above the chart. Flat areas, where values are
the same from series to series, or from one point to another in the same
series, are lightest. Areas where there are great differences between
adjacent values have the darkest shading.
327
3-D contour has shading that follows the grid lines, making it easy to
compare points on the surface with values on the y-axis scale.
The next two chart types are combination charts:
Line bar and area bar mixes bars, lines, and areas in the same chart to
highlight a series or contrast between different series in the chart.
Quattro Pro builds these combination charts automatically.
High-Low bar is used when showing stock market activity and volume
(number of shares exchanged that day). The bar in a High-Low chart
represents the volume.
Quattro Pro also lets you create bullet charts. These can be text charts
suitable for inserting in slide shows, analytical charts for pointing out trends
and patterns in data series, and 3-D charts. (3-D charts is not a specific chart
type, but charts of this type have additional customization options.
Working with XY charts
XY charts have x-axis series that contain numeric data rather than text
labels. The y-axis scale is calculated from the data in all the other series you
plot. Each series value is plotted as a pair of coordinates. The first coordinate
is an x-axis series value; it determines where the data point is placed relative
to the x-axis. The second coordinate is the corresponding value in the series
you are plotting; it gives the data point’s position relative to the y-axis.
For example, if you have a spreadsheet where the first column is the x-axis
series, (with values 1, 2, 3, 4) and the other two columns are plotted as the
first and second series, (with the values 1, 2. 3. 4 and 10, 20, 30, 40), Quattro
Pro plots the values in the first series as (1,1), (2,2), (3,3), and (4,4). The
coordinates of the second series are (1,10), (2, 20), (3, 30), and (4, 40).
An XY chart.
328
XY charts are useful for illustrating statistical trends. You can also plot
frequency distributions and regression analyses.
For more information on adding these features to an XY chart, see “Working
with analytical charts” on page 345.
Creating XY charts
You create an XY chart with the Chart Expert. Quattro Pro automatically
designates an x-axis series only when the series contains labels. If the x-axis
series contains dates, the XY chart plots the data against the serial number of
each date.
To create an XY chart
horizontally
4 Click the Next button, then click the Line/Area chart icon in the General
Chart Type list.
5 Click the Next button, then click the XY chart icon in the Specific Chart
Type list.
list.
329
Modifying XY charts
You can modify XY charts the same way as you modify other charts. You can
also display an XY chart as a Scatterplot chart, where the XY chart displays
only the data points, not the connecting line between the points.
To create a scatterplot chart
1 Select the XY chart.
2 Right-click a line series to change.
3 Click the Line Settings tab, then click the None icon.
Working with High-Low charts
High-Low (open-close) charts are often used to track daily stock prices. You
need at least two series to create this type of chart (to represent the highest
and lowest price a stock reached each day). To create a “bar and whisker”
High-Low chart, you need at least four series (the two additional series
represent the opening and closing prices for the stock each day).
How Quattro Pro plots additional series depends on the number series you
assign to the chart.
If you plot...
Result...
Three series
The third series shows the close data (the price of the stock at the end of
the business day). This data is shown as a tick mark to the right of the
I-beam.
Four series
The third series shows the open data (the price of the stock at the
beginning of the day) and the fourth series shows the close data. Each
open value is shown as a tick mark to the left of the I-beam, and each
close value is shown as a tick mark to the right of the I-beam.
More than four series
Additional series are plotted as lines (as though they were part of a line
chart).
A common use for the fifth series is to display the volume data, or number of
shares of stock that changed hands that day. Volume data is usually much
larger than High-Low data, so the High-Low data does not show up well in
the chart. The High-Low-bar chart has special formatting to deal with this
problem. High-Low-bar charts plot the first four series as regular High-Low
charts. The fifth series, however, is plotted as bars against the secondary
y-axis. The secondary y-axis scale is adjusted to plot the bars on the lower
quarter of the chart, where the bars are unlikely to cover the High-Low
values. To do this, Quattro Pro calculates the high and increment values for
the secondary y-axis, then multiplies them by four (the increment
adjustment makes the scale less crowded).
330
A sample of a
High-Low chart.
High-Low marker styles
Quattro Pro offers four High-Low marker styles:
Style...
Description...
Bar style (the default)
A “bar and whisker” or “candle” chart. A line connects high and low
values and a bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is
higher than the open value, the bar is white. When the open value is
higher than the close value, the bar is blue. (Retain this light and dark
relationship if you change fill colors.)
I-Beam
Shows high and low values at each end of an I-beam. Open and close are
represented by left and right tick marks.
Line
Connects corresponding high and low values with a line, and shows open
and close values as left and right tick marks.
Marker
Assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values,
and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.
A High-Low chart
using the Marker
style.
331
Creating High-Low charts
You can create a 2-D High-Low chart using the following procedure. The
default marker style is Bar which displays the data using bars and whiskers
or candle symbols. If you want a different marker style, you must modify the
markers. For information about changing the marker style, see “Modifying a
High-Low chart” on page 333.
To create a High-Low chart with the Chart Expert
horizontally
4 Click the Next button, then click the Specialty chart icon in the General
Chart Type list.
5 Click the Next button, then click the High-Low chart icon in the Specific
Chart Type list.
list.
Creating a volume series for a High-Low chart
Use this procedure to create a High-Low chart with a volume (fifth) series.
This series is plotted against the second y-axis. Once the chart displays the
volume series, you can also plot the volume data on the primary y-axis.
332
To add a volume series to a High-Low chart
1 Right-click the notebook sheet, then click New Chart Window.
2 Assign cells to each series by pointing, then click OK.
3 Click Chart, Type/Layout.
4 For Category, click Bar.
5 Click the High-Low-Bar icon.
To plot volume data on the primary axis of a High-Low chart
1 Select a High-Low chart containing a volume series.
2 Right-click the volume series in the legend, then click Line Properties.
3 Enable the Primary button in the Y-Axis section.
For more information on using multiple y-axes, see “Adding another y-axis to
Modifying a High-Low chart
You can modify the style of a High-Low chart by changing the series style;
for example, a line series can become a marker or I-beam series. When you
change the style of one series, all series (except the volume series) in the
chart are changed. You can also customize the marker style, or shapes, used
to mark the points on a High-Low chart.
To change the style of a High-Low chart
2 Right-click any High-Low marker, and click Bar Series Properties.
3 Click the Hi-Lo Bar Style tab.
4 Enable one of the following bar styles:
bar
I-beam
line
marker
To change the marker style of a High-Low chart
1 Select a High-Low chart.
333
2 Right-click the first marker in the series (usually the marker closest to
the x and y axes), and click Bar Series Properties.
3 Click the Marker Style tab.
4 Choose one or both of the following options:
Marker Style icons — changes the shape and type of the marker
AutoSize — a check box that gives the markers a standard size
5 If AutoSize is disabled, move the Weight slider to increase or decrease the
size of the markers.
Working with radar charts
Radar charts can highlight trends. Growth trends show as outward spirals;
static or fluctuating trends look more like circles or stars. Radar charts can
also simplify series comparisons; the series with the highest values occupies
the most area. You can customize radar chart markers and lines.
A sample radar
chart.
Creating radar charts
You can create a radar chart in the Chart Expert.
To create a radar chart
horizontally
334
Chart Type list.
5 Click the Next button, then click the Radar chart icon in the Specific Chart
Type list.
list.
Modifying radar charts
You can modify the radar chart properties, line properties, and the
background.
To change the line properties for a radar chart
1 Select the chart.
2 Click Chart, Edit.
3 Choose the radar chart icon from the list.
4 Click a line series in the Legend, then click Line Properties.
Marker Style — changes the marker symbol and size
Fill Settings — changes the fill for the markers
Line Settings — changes the color and thickness of the line series
To change the chart properties
2 Right-click on the chart, then click Chart Pane Properties.
335
Border Position — controls the way the chart pane grids are displayed
Fill Settings — changes the fill type for the chart
Border Settings — changes the line style and color for the chart
When a hidden chart pane border coincides with an axis, the axis line is
hidden, but all other features, such as tick marks, are displayed.
Right-click any part of the chart and click the Properties option.
Working with variance charts
Variance charts have a zero line set as a series option so that the chart
displays data series containing positive and negative numbers. The zero line
provides the frame of reference for determining variance. Values less than
zero are plotted below the zero mark; values above zero are plotted above
the zero mark. The zero line in the following figure, for example, is set to
show how temperatures vary from the freezing point on the Farenheit scale.
A sample variance
chart.
Variance charts can be modified in the same way as regular charts.
For information about modifying charts, see “Editing charts” on page 362.
Creating a variance chart
You can create a variance chart with the Chart Expert. A variance chart
requires some values in a data series to be below zero.
To create a variance chart
1 Select the cells to plot in your chart. Select data which contains values
greater and less than zero.
336
horizontally
Type list.
5 Click the Next button, then click a 2-D chart type in the Specific list.
For example, bar or line chart.
list.
Setting a zero line
You can adjust the zero line value of the y-axis in a variance chart using the
y-axis properties options. The Zero Line At option appears as a Scale option
only for Variance charts.
To change the zero line value for the y-axis
2 Click Chart, Axes, Primary Y-Axis.
3 Click the Scale tab.
4 Type a value for Zero Line At no greater than the High scale setting, and
no less than the Low scale setting.
337
Working with surface charts
Surface charts plot rows and columns as lines that form a “mesh” on a 3-D
frame. When you chart a square array of cells, values in columns correspond
with mesh lines from left to right. Rows of data correspond to mesh lines
from front to back. Each data point is represented by an intersection of two
mesh lines. How the surface of the mesh is shaded depends on the type of
surface chart (3-D Surface, 3-D Contour, or 3-D Shaded Surface you choose.
You can customize area properties for surface charts as you would most other
charts.
Creating surface charts
With the Chart Expert, you can create 3-D Surface, 3-D Contour, or 3-D
Shaded Surface charts.
To create a surface chart
horizontally
is plotted at the front of a graph, obscuring other series
5 Click the Next button, then click the one of the following icons in the
Specific Chart Type list:
3-D Surface — creates a surface chart with shading the area between
each series with a different color.
3-D Contour — creates a surface chart with shading that follows the
grid lines, making it easier to compare points on the surface with
values on the y-axis scale.
3-D Shaded Surface — creates a surface chart with a surface that
appears lit from above the chart. Flat areas, where values are the same
from series to series, or from one point to another in the same series,
are lightest. Places where there are great differences between adjacent
values have the darkest shading.
338
4 of 5 Chart Expert window::
list.
Modifying surface charts
You can modify most object properties of a surface chart, including the
surface area displayed. In addition, you can modify surface charts the same
way as you modify 3-D charts. For information about modifying 3-D charts,
see “Working with 3-D charts” on page 356.
To modify the surface area of a surface chart
1 Select a surface chart.
2 Click Chart, Edit, then choose the surface chart from the list.
3 Right-click a data series on the surface area, then click Area Series
Properties.
4 Choose one of the following tabs:
Series Options — changes the data series used (you can re-select the
data series or add a Legend)
Analyze — chooses an analysis method for the data series
Fill Settings — changes the fill and color used for the data series
Border Settings — changes the color and border line style of the series
For more information about applying analysis settings to a data series, see
“Working with analytical charts” on page 345.
339
Working with combination charts
Combination charts mix bars, lines, and areas in the same chart to highlight a
series or contrast different series in the chart. Quattro Pro builds three
combination charts automatically: line bar, area bar, and High-Low bar charts.
Line bar charts and area bar charts plot the first series as a line or area, and
plot all other series as bars. High-Low bar charts plot corresponding data
points in the first and second series as I-beams, then plot all other series as
bars. For more information about High-Low bar charts, see “Working with
High-Low charts” on page 330.
You can create your own custom combination charts by overriding the chart
type for any series in 2-D bar, rotated bar, 2-D line, rotated line, and variance
charts. For example, to create a multiple line chart or multiple area chart,
right-click any bar in a multiple bar chart, click the Properties option, then
override the chart type for the series with a line or area type.
Creating a combination chart
You can create a combination chart with the Chart Expert.
To create a combination chart with the Chart Expert
horizontally
Chart Type list.
5 Click the Next button, then click the one of the following icons in the
Specific Chart Type list:
Line-Bar chart
Area-Bar chart
High-Low bar chart
340
list.
Creating custom combination charts from existing charts
Quattro Pro lets you override the chart type of an existing chart by modifying
the series properties. You can modify any series in a 2-D bar, rotated bar, 2-D
line, rotated line, or variance charts. High-Low charts restrict the override to
the fifth series or greater.
To create a custom combination chart
1 Click a chart to select it.
Make sure the chart belongs to one of the types listed above.
2 Right-click the series to change, then click Properties.
3 Enable one of the following buttons on the Series Option tab:
Bar
Line
Area
Default
For information about customizing the fifth series in High-Low charts, see
“Working with High-Low charts” on page 330.
Working with bullet charts
Bullet charts are text charts with data Quattro Pro interprets as label data
(for example, text or data containing numbers like dates). Bullet charts use
text data to create bulleted items in an outline form. A bullet chart consists of
a title, followed by major bulleted items and, optionally, minor bulleted items.
To create a bullet chart, you must enter your data in a specific order on the
spreadsheet. Bullet chart cells have up to three columns of labels:
341
Column
Contains:
First column
the bullet chart title and, optionally, the subtitle
Second column
major bullets
Third column
minor bullets
The third column is optional as you can create a bullet chart with only one
level of bulleted items. However, you cannot create a bullet chart with more
than two levels of bulleted items. You start new bullet charts by leaving blank
rows or columns in the spreadsheet. You can create a bullet chart on its own
page or on the spreadsheet.
Bullet chart cells
look like this:
The bullet chart
created from cells
looks like this:
You can change the bullet style, fonts, colors, and line spacing used in a bullet
chart by changing the properties of the bullet series.
Creating a bullet chart
When you create a bullet chart, Quattro Pro recognizes data in the cells as
text and not numerical data. As a result, the Chart Expert and the
QuickChart button behave the same way when you create this kind of chart.
You can also create a bullet chart with the custom chart tool.
342
To produce a full-page bullet chart with the custom chart tool
1 Type the title of the bullet chart in a notebook cell, for example, cell A1.
2 Type the text for subtitle in the cell directly below the first cell.
3 Continue to type the text for the bullet chart in spreadsheet cells, moving
down and one cell to the right for each sublevel of data.
4 Select these cells.
5 Right-click the selected cells, click New Custom Chart, and click OK.
6 To return to the notebook, click the Close button in the top right corner of
the bullet chart window.
To create a bullet chart on a spreadsheet
3 Click or drag to where you want the chart.
To create a bullet chart on a spreadsheet with QuickChart
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 in the first procedure.
2 Click the Chart button, then click or drag to where you want the chart.
Only the text contained in the bullet chart cells is used to create bullet
charts. Cell properties such as fonts and colors do not affect the bullet
chart. However, the cell Numeric Format property does affect how
numeric values will appear in the bullet chart.
For information about putting bullet charts in slide shows, see “Creating
slide shows” on page 449.
Applying templates to bullet charts
Templates are useful if you want to create a bullet chart with a certain look or
color scheme. Any template can be applied to a bullet chart. Quattro Pro
provides more than 30 templates in the Chart Gallery.
To apply a template to a bullet chart
1 Select an existing bullet chart.
343
2 Click Chart, Gallery.
3 Choose a template icon from the Style section.
To apply a template using the Chart Advisor
1 Select an existing bullet chart.
3 Click the Advisor button.
Move the sliders to choose the style (Informal/Formal,
Entertaining/Serious, Sophisticated/Simple, Vivid/Subdued, or
Plain/Fancy)
Enable a check box to select the format (Onscreen, 35mm slide, paper
color, or Transparency color)
5 Click the Advise button, then click one of the four template icons the
Advisor displays matching the criteria selected in step 4.
Modifying a bullet chart
You can modify bullets and fonts, and add new data to an existing bullet chart.
Changes made at the bullet series level affect only that level of bullet, not all
the bullets. For example, modifications made to major (first level) bullets do
not affect minor (second level) bullets.
To customize a bullet chart
To edit a bullet chart in its own window, right-click anywhere in the
notebook window, click Edit Chart, and choose a chart in the list.
To edit a bullet chart on a spreadsheet, right-click the chart, click Edit,
and specify the chart.
2 Click the part of the chart you want to edit.
3 Right-click, and click one of the following options:
Bullet Series Properties
Chart Pane Properties
Background Properties
Chart Title Properties
344
Chart Subtitle Properties
4 In the dialog box, change the formatting options as required.
To customize bullet series properties
1 Follow step 1 from the previous procedure.
2 Right-click a bulleted item, and click Bullet Series Properties.
3 Change the following options as required. You can change the bullet style,
bullet indentation, and bullet color, as well as line spacing, text font, and
text settings.
To change the title, subtitle, or text for bulleted items
Edit the data in the notebook cells used to create the bullet chart.
To locate the source cells for a bullet chart, right-click the spreadsheet,
click Edit Chart, then click Chart, Series. The source cells for the bullet
chart are listed in the 1st Series box.
Working with analytical charts
Quattro Pro can calculate new data points and graph them without changing
data in the spreadsheet. This feature is called analytical charting. For
example, suppose your spreadsheet contains daily sales totals. Analytical
charting allows you to graph average monthly totals. If daily sales vary
widely, you can display a “moving average” to smooth the data points. You
can also show general trends by fitting the data to a line or an exponential
curve. You can also build tables of analysis results.
Working with Aggregate charts
Aggregation combines multiple data points and plots them as a single point
that can be the sum, average, standard deviation, minimum, or maximum of
the data. Plotting aggregates transforms a chart series and reveals
relationships not immediately apparent in the spreadsheet, such as weekly
averages for information recorded daily. The example below shows daily
sales data aggregated so that each point represents a weekly sales average.
345
A sample Aggregation
chart.
In the example above, Series Period is set to Days, Aggregation Period is set
to Weeks, and Function is set to AVG. It helps to think of the Aggregation
commands as useful standards for simple periodic aggregation. For example,
when you specify Days for the Series Period, Months for the Aggregation
Period, and AVG for Function, Quattro Pro will average 30 data points, plot
the average, average the next 30 points, plot the average, and so on.
Line charts work well with aggregation because they easily show trends. Bar
charts are also impressive when plotting aggregated data over time, although
trends are not as easy to see when you chart multiple series in the same
chart.
Creating an Aggregate chart
You can modify Aggregate charts for the following options: Series Period,
Aggregation Period, and Function. Since you will often aggregate a series
according to a time period, the Aggregation commands are based on one day
representing a period of one. For the purposes of aggregation, Quattro Pro
uses the following standards:
Time Period
Equals
Week
7 days
Month
30 days = 4 weeks
Quarter
90 days = 12 weeks = 3 months
Year
360 days = 51 weeks = 12 months = 4 quarters
To create an aggregate chart
1 Select a Line, Area, or Bar chart.
2 Click Chart, Edit Chart, and specify the chart.
3 If your chart shows data for many dates, you can display one label per
week.
346
Right-click the x-axis, click X-Axis Properties, then click the Tick Options
tab.
4 Click the 2 button in the Number of Rows list, disable the No Overlapping
Labels check box, then choose a number from the Skip Labels list (for
example, 6).then click OK.
This combination displays the labels in two rows, with the label showing
for every seventh day in a chart displaying daily results. You can modify
the options in the Tick Options tab to match the time period used in a
specific chart.
5 Select the chart, then right-click the line, area, or bar that represents the
data series you want to analyze, then click Line Properties in the
submenu that appears.
6 Click the Analyze tab, then choose Aggregate from the Method list.
7 Choose a Series Period from the Period list.
Aggregation commands are based on one day representing a period of 1.
The Series Period indicates what the series values represent, or what
period exists in the series. For example, if the series contains weekly
information, choose Weeks.
8 Choose one of the following periods from the Aggregation Period list:
Weeks — shows weekly data, and aggregates by 7 (default)
Months — aggregates by 30
Quarters — aggregates by 90
Years — aggregates by 360
9 Choose one of the following functions from the Functions list:
SUM — uses @SUM to total the data
AVG — uses @AVG to average the data
STD — uses @STD to calculate the population standard deviation
STDS — uses @STDS to calculate a sample standard deviation
MIN — uses @MIN to specify a series minimum
MAX — uses @MAX to specify a series maximum
VAR — uses @VAR to calculate the population variance
VARS — uses @VARS to calculate a sample variance
347
You can view multiple aggregate relationships in the same chart if you
aggregate by the same period for each analysis.
For more information about working multiple relationships, see “Viewing
relationships and creating tables from analytical charts” on page .
Working with Moving Average charts
The Moving Average analysis smoothes fluctuating data points by plotting
progressive averages. This helps eliminate cyclic, seasonal, and fluctuating
patterns and can accentuate a trend’s direction and substantiate trend
reversals. Line and area charts are most effective for displaying moving
averages.
Starting with the first point in the series, Quattro Pro calculates and plots the
average for a specified previous number of points, called a period. At each
following point, Quattro Pro maintains the specified period: it drops the
oldest value (the one farthest from the new point) so the number of points
averaged is always the specified period. Quattro Pro then calculates and plots
the new average, and continues in this way. For example, if daily sales vary
widely, you could determine a general trend by smoothing data points with
the period set at three points to be averaged. In this case, each day’s sales
would be averaged with the previous two so that each point is tempered by
previous points and data is smoothed to show a general trend.
The chart below displays two moving averages with daily data. The moving
average with a period of three provides a smoother line through the daily
data. A moving average with a period of nine provides an even smoother
effect, although it is less true to the daily totals.
A sample Moving
Average chart.
You can also perform a standard (weighted) moving average. When you select
this option, Quattro Pro places greater numeric emphasis, or weight, on
recent points (closest to the point it is working with) and less weight on older
points (farthest from the most recent point).
348
Creating a Moving Average chart
You can modify the following Moving Average options: Period and Weight.
Period indicates the number of points to average. Weight lets you select a
weighted moving average.
When you specify Standard as the Weight, greater numeric emphasis is
placed on recent points (closest to the point being analyzed) than on older
points (farthest from the most recent point). The oldest point is multiplied by
1, the next multiplied by 2, and so on; the most recent point is multiplied by
the specified period. The weighted moving average is determined by dividing
the sum of the weighted points by the sum of the weights.
To create a moving average chart
1 Select a line or area chart.
2 Right-click the chart, then click Edit.
3 If your chart shows data for many dates, you can display one label per
week.
tab.
4 Enable the 2 button in the Number of Rows list, disable the No
Overlapping labels check box, then choose a number from the Skip Labels
list (for example, 6).
for every first day in the week. You can modify the Tick Options tab to
match the time period used in a specific chart.
5 Select the chart, then right-click the line or area that represents the data
series you want to analyze.
6 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose Moving Average
from the Method list.
7 Choose the number of points to average in the Period list.
8 Choose one of the following options from the Weight list:
None — does not apply a weight to the moving average (default)
Standard — applies a weighted moving average
Working with Linear Fit charts
Regression analysis is a mathematical method that shows relationships
between multiple variables, so it is often used to predict values of one
variable by taking into account the values of the others. In Quattro Pro, a
349
Linear Fit series generates a regression line that best fits the data. Linear Fit
is useful for showing a general trend among fluctuating points. For more
information about linear regression, see also “Using regression analysis” on
page 242.
Linear Fit calculates and plots regression information in a line, even if the
data does not have a general trend. For information about how to use this line
to project future data based on past relationships, see “Viewing multiple
relationships in analytical charts” on page 354.
A sample of a Linear
Fit chart.
Creating a Linear Fit chart
This is the procedure for creating a straight line to illustrate the trends in the
chart data.
To create a Linear Fit chart
2 Click Chart, Edit, then click OK.
3 If your chart shows data for a large number of dates, you can display one
label per week.
tab.
example, 6).
for every first day in the week. You can modify the options on the Tick
Options tab to match the time period used in a specific chart.
350
5 Select the chart, then right-click the line or area that represents the data
6 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose Linear Fit from
the Method list.
If you specify an area larger than the number of existing data points in
step 3, for example by including future dates, additional values are
projected based on the plotted line.
Modifying Linear Fit charts
You can modify Linear Fit charts by changing the properties for the line
series, as well as any other modifications you make with other charts. For
more information about modifying line series properties, see “Changing
colors and fill of chart objects” on page 382.
To modify the line series properties
not the line.
Working with Exponential Fit charts
An Exponential Fit chart generates a curve to fit data that increases or
decreases geometrically (through multiplication rather than addition). For
this feature to work, all values in the series must be of the same sign (either
all negative or all positive) and none can be zero.
If you specify an area larger than the number of existing data points,
additional values are projected, based on the plotted curve.
In any Exponential Fit charts, you can display different data series and data
relationships. For example, you can compare weekly maximum sales totals
with weekly sales averages.
351
A sample of an
Exponential Fit chart.
Creating an Exponential Fit chart
An Exponential Fit chart generates a curve to fit the data. For example, if no
exponent is applied to the data, the results display a straight line. By applying
the Exponential Fit attribute, Quattro Pro displays a curved line based on an
exponential calculation.
To create an Exponential Fit chart
2 Click Chart, Edit, then click OK.
3 If your chart shows data for many dates, then you can display one label per
week.
tab.
example, 6).
for every first day in the week. You can modify the options on the Tick
Options tab to match the time period used in a specific chart.
5 Select the chart, and right-click the line or area that represents the data
6 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose Exponential Fit
from the Method list.
Modifying Exponential Fit charts
You can modify Exponential Fit charts by changing the properties for the line
series, as well as any other modifications you make with other charts. For
352
more information about modifying line series properties, see “Changing
colors and fill of chart objects” on page 382.
To modify the line series properties
not the line.
Viewing relationships and creating tables from analytical
charts
When you create analytical charts, Quattro Pro lets you view multiple data
series on the same chart. You can also take the chart data from single or
multiple data series and generate a table on the spreadsheet of the chart
results.
Viewing multiple relationships in analytical charts
You can view more than one relationship in the same chart without
redesigning your spreadsheet or making repetitive calculations. Just specify
the same cells for several series and perform different analyses on each
series.
For example, to view weekly maximum sales in the same chart as weekly
averages, as in the chart below, create a chart specifying the same cells for
both the first and second series and specifying line or area as the chart type.
A chart showing
multiple analytical
relationships.
353
Creating Tables based on analytical chart results
Graphs show trends, but sometimes you need exact data for further analysis.
Quattro Pro allows you to generate a table of analytical charting results in a
spreadsheet. Once created, you can also use the table values to label graph
points on your charts.
You can specify the table location by selecting a single cell; Quattro Pro
enters the table data in cells downward as needed. Make sure there is
enough room for the table; Quattro Pro may overwrite unprotected existing
data. Try specifying a cell below and to the right of the unprotected data.
You specify the table size by selecting a block of cells. Depending on how you
want to view the table values, you can specify a block one row wide, one
column wide, or composed of multiple rows and columns. Quattro Pro fills
the block starting with the upper-left cell, fills the column, then starts at the
top of the next column, and so on. If the block you selected is too small,
Quattro Pro displays only what the selected block will hold.
If the type of analysis is Linear Fit or Exponential Fit, and you specify a table
block larger than the number of existing data points, Quattro Pro projects
additional values based on the plotted line or curve and enters them after the
others. This projection feature applies only to standard line graphs, not to XY
graphs.
Table data can be
used to label points
in an analytical
chart.
Viewing multiple relationships in analytical charts
The following procedure describes how to set up the relationship between
two different data series; in this example, weekly sales and weekly averages
are shown in an existing chart.
To view more than one relationship in a chart
1 Select an analytical chart.
2 Right-click a line or area, click Series Properties, then click Analyze,
Aggregation.
354
3 Choose Days from the Series Period list, choose Weeks from the
Aggregation Period list, then choose AVG from the Function list.
4 Right-click the second series and choose the same options, but choose
MAX from the Functions list.
Creating tables based on analytical chart results
Follow these procedures to generate a table of analytical chart results in a
spreadsheet. The second procedure describes how to see all the table values
if the selected block is too small to display all the data. Once you create a
table, you can use the values to label the chart points.
To create a table with analytical chart results
1 Create a column heading in a cell on the spreadsheet.
(Adjust the column width to fit the heading.)
2 Select the chart.
3 Right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to
analyze.
4 Click Line Properties, click the Analyze tab, then choose one of the
following options from the Method list:
Aggregation
Moving Average
Linear Fit
Exponential Fit
5 Click the Pointer button to the right of the Table box, and select one of the
following:
a single cell to specify the top left corner of the table
a block of cells. Quattro Pro fills the selected cells with table data.
Labeling analytical charts with table values
When you have created a table on the spreadsheet to display the analyzed
values, you can label the points on the chart using the same values. These
values are displayed close to the points. You can select whether the labels
appear above, below, or on either side of the points.
To label chart points with values in tables
1 Select the chart.
355
2 Right-click the line or area that represents the data series you want to
label.
3 Click Line Properties, then click the Series Option tab.
4 Type the series representing the table with analytical chart results in the
Label Series box.
For example, enter the column or block.
To align chart point labels
1 Select the analytical chart.
2 Right-click a label, then click Label Series Properties.
Label Alignment — positions labels above, below, left, right, or
centered on the point
Format — specifies the numeric format (if the label contains numeric
data)
Text Font — specifies the font face, size, or appearance option
Text Settings — specifies the color and fill for the label text
Working with 3-D charts
Quattro Pro lets you create 3-D charts for most chart types, although there is
no specific 3-D charts category. 3-D charts are more complex chart types as
they have extra properties (for example, 3-D backgrounds, view perspective,
depth, and a z-axis).
Selecting 3-D data
When you specify a 3-D selection, you select the same cells on several
sheets. To create the 3-D chart, Quattro Pro starts the selection with the row
or column from the first sheet, then appends the corresponding cells from
succeeding sheets to form the series. For example, if you select
A..C:B3..D11, the first series is A..C:B3..B11, the second series is
A..C:C3..C11, and the third series is A..C:D3..D11.
Modifying 3-D charts
You can display or hide each wall and the base of 3-D charts by changing the
3-D options. You can view a 3-D chart from a different vantage point, creating
interesting effects, or reveal objects in a chart that were previously hidden,
by changing the 3-D View options.
356
In some 3-D charts, a legend box appears when you define a legend series.
Many 3-D charts display legend labels along the z-axis. Because of overlap,
you may have to modify the legend labels. In addition, the legend position
cannot be moved for some 3-D charts (for example, 3-D bar charts).
For information about modifying legends, see “Customizing Legends and
Titles” on page 375.
For more information about modifying 3-D bar charts, see “Modifying bar
Modifying 3-D chart options
Each wall in a 3-D chart is a separate object. You can hide or reveal the walls
and the base of a 3-D chart. Additional features like grid lines can be
displayed on the walls and the base. Grid lines on the walls of 3-D charts are
part of the y-axis; grid lines on the base are part of the x-axis.
To change 3-D options
1 Select a 3-D chart on a spreadsheet.
2 Click Chart, Perspective.
3 Click the 3-D Options tab.
4
Enable or disable any of the following check boxes:
Show Left Wall — hides or reveals the left wall
Show Back Wall — hides or reveals the back wall
Show Base — hides or reveals the area under the series display
Thick Walls — gives the chart 3-D walls.
To display grid lines on transparent walls
1 Repeat steps 1 to 4 from the previous procedure, but enable the Thick
walls check box in step 4.
2 Click OK.
3 Right-click the wall on the chart, then click Area Fill Properties.
4 Click the Fill Settings tab, then choose one of the following Fill Style
options:
None
Solid
357
Wash
Bitmap
5 Click Chart, Axes, then click X-Axis or Primary Y-Axis.
6 Click the Major Grid tab, then choose one of the following options:
Border Color
Grid Line Style
If you select the None Fill Style, only the outline of the wall or base is
displayed.
If you display a bitmap in the background of a 3-D chart, some printers
may not print all of the bitmap.
Adjusting the 3-D chart perspective
3-D charts are created with a default perspective. Enable the Perspective
check box to turn this feature on. In the Perspective dialog box, the sample
chart displays the results of different property settings.
To change the 3-D view options
2 Click Chart, Perspective.
3 Click the 3-D View tab.
4 Move the sliders for any of the following options:
Rotation — pivots the chart on its base (you can adjust rotation to any
angle between zero and 90 degrees; the default is 30 degrees)
Elevation — shifts your view of a graph to different heights (when
elevation is set to zero, you are at the same level as the base of the
chart. Increasing the angle to 90 degrees shifts your view to the top of
the chart; the default is 30 degrees)
Perspective — makes objects in the distance appear smaller than
closer objects (if this feature is enabled, you can adjust the amount of
perspective that appears)
Depth — controls the apparent thickness of a 3-D chart (if you move
the slider to 166, the top and base of a 3-D bar are square (moving the
slider left flattens the chart, or makes it more 2-D)
Height — controls the proportion of height to width in a chart
358
To return all 3-D View options to the default settings, click the Reset
button.
Modifying a 3-D chart legend
In 3-D charts, the z-axis displays the legend series. For example, in a 3-D bar
chart the column names are displayed along the base of the chart. If several
data series are displayed, the legend will appear crowded. You can reduce the
text or choose a different font to achieve a better display.
To modify legend text for the z-axis
2 Right-click the legend, then click Legend Properties.
Text Font — lets you specify the font face, size, or appearance
Text Settings — lets you select a fill style, color and, in the case of 3-D
text, you can also select background color and perspective
For more information about modifying legends, see “Adjusting legend
properties and x-axis series” on page 377.
You can also select a chart, and right-click the legend text to change
legend properties.
Once you display a legend, you can drag it to any position.
Changing the chart type
You can change the chart type using the Chart Types dialog, the Chart
Gallery, the Chart Advisor, or by changing a chart’s properties.
The Chart Types dialog lets you select a different category type and chart
style, without changing the color scheme of the chart.
The Chart Gallery is a collection of pre-designed chart templates and color
schemes that make formatting charts easy. Instead of changing the properties
of individual chart elements, you can quickly change the overall look of a
chart using the Chart Gallery’s visual tools.
359
You can choose from six chart categories: bar, rotated bar, pie, line or area,
and specialty are categories for plotting numeric series. The templates
category provides different template styles used to format charts, and is
accessible only from within the Chart Gallery.
The Chart Gallery color schemes apply colors to all elements of numeric
charts, including the background, chart pane, titles, text, legends, axis and
series labels, chart walls, and series. Color schemes are not available when
you select a templates style or if selected chart is a bullet chart. The chart
color scheme does not affect the color of drawn objects, such as text boxes,
lines, and shapes, that you add to a chart.
The Chart Gallery also includes Chart Advisors; these present a selection of
styles that match stylistic criteria you specify.
Changing chart types
You can change the chart type by selecting a different chart category and
chart style. For example, you can convert a bar chart into a line chart or pie
chart.
To change the chart type in the Chart Type dialog box
1 Select a chart.
2 Choose a chart category from the Category list box in the Chart Type
dialog box.
3 Click a chart icon in that category.
Changing chart types with the Chart Gallery
You can change the chart type for most charts using the Chart Gallery on the
Chart menu. You can use the Chart Gallery to format selected charts on
notebook sheets, chart icons on the Objects sheet, a chart window, or charts
in the Light Table view of a slide show.
To change the chart
1 Select one or more charts.
If you selected a slide in the Light Table window, click Slides, Chart
Gallery.
3 Select a chart category, style, and color scheme. If you need help deciding
on the right style for a chart or chart background, click the Advisor button.
360
For information about using the Chart Advisor, see “Using the Chart
Advisor” on page 361.
For information on customizing a High-Low chart, see “Modifying a
High-Low chart” on page 333.
If you have a bullet chart or a blank chart selected when you click Chart,
Gallery, the Chart Gallery dialog box lets you select a template style for
the chart. You can click the Advisor button to show suggested template
styles based on stylistic criteria you specify. For information on
customizing a Bullet chart, see “Modifying a bullet chart” on page 344.
You can change the chart type using the Chart menu by selecting Type,
Layout, choosing a chart category from the list, then a chart type. (The
name of the chart type you selected appears below the chart icons.)
Using the Chart Advisor
The Chart Advisor lets you select a chart type based on the parameters and
options you select in the advisor. The view window shows you how the same
data displays in four different charts types, so you can view the chart before
accepting the changes.
To apply a chart type
1 Select a chart or master slide.
(If you select multiple charts, the Advisor button does not appear in the
Chart Gallery dialog box.)
2 Click Chart, Gallery. (If you selected a slide in the Light Table window,
click Slides, Chart Gallery.)
3 Choose a chart type from the Category list, then click the Advisor button.
4 Move any of the following Constraints sliders:
Individual/Cumulative — selects charts pointing out individual data
results or grouped results
Differences/Trends — selects charts emphasizing differences or trends
in the data
Simple/Fancy — selects simple or more sophisticated chart types
5 Click the Advise button to generate a selection of suggested styles.
6 Choose one of the styles from the Suggestions list, then click the Apply
button.
361
With bullet charts, the Chart Advisor offers more constraint options than
listed in the above procedure. For more information about modifying
bullet charts, see “Applying templates to bullet charts” on page 343.
Combining chart types in a single chart
You can combine different chart types in a single chart to represent different
data series (for example, a chart with bars, lines, and markers) by overriding
the chart type of a selected series in a chart. You can override a series on a
2-D bar, line, variance, and High-Low chart, and on rotated bar and line
charts. (High-Low charts restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.)
To changing the chart type for a series
1 Select a chart.
2 Right-click a series, then click Series Properties.
3 Enable one of the Override Type buttons:
Bar
Line
Area
Default
The original selection is enabled when you open the Series Properties.
To return the series to the original chart type, enable the Default
Override Type button.
Editing charts
When you edit a chart in Quattro Pro, you can make changes that affect the
overall look of the chart. Many modifications involve changing the properties
for different chart objects. Things you can change include chart properties
and the color and fill of chart objects.
Using chart object properties
When you modify charts and chart objects, you will make your changes to
many of the following properties:
362
Alignment Property
The Alignment property affects the placement of text within chart titles
and text boxes. To change alignment, select the text box or chart title,
right-click the box or title, then click the Properties option.
Text Font Property
The Text Font Property is available for all text objects, including titles,
axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the chart window
toolbar.
Text Settings Property
The Text Settings Property is available for all text objects, including titles,
subtitles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the Chart
toolbar. Wash, Bitmap, and 3-D options are not available for the y-axis and
y2-axis in 2-D and 3-D chart types, and for the x-axis in rotated chart
types.
Box Settings Property
The Box Settings property is available for the chart background, text
boxes, and floating charts. A preview of the box type and color appears in
the lower-right corner.
Border Color Property
The Border Color property lets you specify a color for the border of the
active floating object.
Border Settings Property
The Border Settings Property is available for every solid object that
appears in or on a chart, except the chart background and text boxes. It
sets the style, thickness, and color of the object’s border.
Fill Settings Property
The Fill Settings Property is available for every solid object that appears
in or on a chart, including bars, areas, line chart markers, and drawn
objects such as ellipses and rectangles. Fill settings are also available for
Map Legends.
363
Name Property (Chart Icons)
The Name property is available when you view the properties of chart
icons and slide show icons on the Objects sheet. This property lets you
rename charts and slide shows.
Editing chart methods
With floating charts and window charts, you can edit the chart object or parts
of the chart using the Properties dialog box.
To edit a chart
Right-click the chart, then consider the following options:
Type/Layout — changes the chart type
Series — modifies or rearranges the data series
Titles — modifies the title or subtitle
View — displays the selected chart in full-screen view
Chart Properties — sets the protection and print options, changes the
object name, modifies the border or box type, or selects a source
chart
To edit a floating chart on a spreadsheet
Select the chart, and right-click the area to modify, then click Properties.
To edit a window chart
Right-click an empty place on the notebook, click Edit Chart, then select a
chart.
To edit a chart on the Objects sheet
Double-click a chart to edit it.
When you click a chart that is only partially visible in the spreadsheet, the
window scrolls automatically to display the entire chart. If the chart
cannot fit in the window, Quattro Pro opens it on a separate page.
Changing chart window and chart pane properties
Modifications to the chart window allow you to change the chart proportions
or display a grid. When you change the chart pane properties, you can
364
customize the border position, the background fill of the chart pane, and the
border.
To change chart window properties
1 Select a chart on a spreadsheet.
2 Right-click on the border (the slash lines), then click Graph Window
Properties.
3 Set one or both of the Aspect Ratio and Grid properties:
Aspect Ratio — affects the proportion of width to height in a chart.
Grid — lets you display a grid to help you draw, size, and position chart
objects
To change properties for a chart on its own page, right-click on the
notebook sheet, click Edit Chart, then select the chart. Right-click the
chart title bar. If the chart window is maximized, right-click the area
outside the chart border.
To change chart pane properties
2 Right-click the area bordered by the x and y axes in a 2-D chart (a bar
chart, for example).
3 Click the Chart Pane Properties.
Border Position — sets whether a border line appears on the left, right,
top, and bottom of the pane. It also sets whether a grid appears on top
of the chart.
Fill Settings — sets the foreground and background color of the pane,
and the type of fill style used.
Border Settings — sets the color and thickness of the border line.
Editing x and y axes
You can modify the Quattro Pro charts you create. For example, by making
changes to the x-axis or y-axis, you can change the look of your chart. You
can change either axis by redefining cell series selection, selecting ticks to
separate axis divisions, selecting label font and text settings on the x-axis and
the y-axis, and applying a grid style.
365
In addition, you can add a secondary y-axis to show two different series of
data against the same x-axis. If information in the x-axis series changes, you
have to manually update the chart legend and the series properties, or you
can override the existing label series.
Changing x-axis properties
You can modify any x-axis property using the X-Axis Properties dialog box.
Change specific appearance options and modify the labels. You can also adjust
the scale, show units, and display a logarithm on the scale.
Modifying x-axis properties
Use the X-Axis Properties dialog box to modify the x-axis. You can redefine
the data series, font and text settings, and major grid styles.
To change specific x-axis properties
1 Select a chart on a speadsheet.
2 Click Chart, Axes, X-Axis.
X-Axis Series — lets you redefine the cells you want to include in the
series
Tick Options — lets you change the short, vertical lines that separate
divisions on the x-axis and adjust the label display (there are four tick
styles: None, Below, Above, and Across)
Text Font — lets you select a different font or font size for the x-axis
labels
Text Settings — lets you select shadowing, color, and fill style for
labels
Major Grid Style — lets you select a new line style and color for a grid
4 Make the changes you want.
To apply major grid style options
1 Click a chart on a notebook sheet.
3 Click the Major Grid Style tab.
4 Click a line style icon.
The option in the upper-left corner turns the grid lines off.
366
5 Click Color.
6 Select a line color from the palette, or use the color scales to create your
own.
If you want to set major or minor grid styles on the y-axis, follow the
steps from the previous procedure. For more information about working
with the y-axis, see “Changing y-axis properties” on page 371.
There are two other ways to access the X-Axis Properties dialog box:
Select a chart, right-click the x-axis of most bar, line, and area charts, then
click Axis Properties
Right-click the spreadsheet and click Edit Chart. Choose the correct chart
from the Edit Chart list box, and then right-click the x-axis. Click X-Axis
Properties.
Changing x-axis tick options
You can modify the appearance of tick marks and labels. Tick marks are the
short vertical lines that separate major divisions of the x-axis. There are four
tick options: None, Below, Above, or Across.
To change tick options on the x-axis
3 Click the Tick Options tab.
4 Choose a tick style:
None — no vertical lines between major divisions of the x-axis
Below — short vertical lines below the x-axis
Above — short vertical lines above the x-axis
Across — short vertical lines display above and below the x-axis
You can assign tick options for the y-axis using the same method. For
information about y-axis properties, see “Changing y-axis properties” on
page 372.
367
Adjusting the scale of the x-axis
Quattro Pro automatically adjusts the x-axis scale to fit the range of values
plotted against it. In an XY chart, you can change the High, Low, Increment,
and number of Minors values to fine-tune the chart.
To adjust the x-axis scale of an XY chart
1 Select the chart.
4 Enter a suitable number in one of the following boxes:
High — sets the highest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a
value that is higher than the values in the data series, the plot for the
value will appear to run off the right side of the chart)
Low — sets the lowest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a
value that is lower than the values in the data series, the plot for the
value will appear to run off the left side of the chart)
Increment — determines the numeric “distance” between major x-axis
divisions (X-axis labels, major tick marks, and major grid lines are
placed at these divisions. Enter zero if you want Quattro Pro to
calculate an increment using the new High and Low settings)
No. of Minors — specifies the number of evenly-spaced minor tick
marks or grid lines between the major x-axis divisions
To set a descending axis scale
Reverse the High and Low values in step 4 in the above procedure.
To set the scale back to its default axis settings
Enable the Automatic check box.
Showing units on the x-axis
If the numbers displayed on the x-axis are 1000 or greater, you can simplify
the labels using the Show Units option. Show Units displays only the first
characters of the label, and automatically adds the appropriate unit title in
parentheses along the x-axis, for example, “Thousands” or “Million”.
To display units on a numeric x-axis
1 Select a chart.
368
4 Enable the Show Units check box. (Disable to turn the feature off.)
5 To change the font, color, or other properties of the unit title that is now
displayed along the x-axis, right-click the title, then click the Properties
option.
Scaling the x-axis logarithmically
In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10
times the value of the previous major division. This type of scale is useful
when you plot series with wide ranges in magnitude.
A sample chart using
a logarithmic scale.
To create an x-axis logarithmic scale
1 Select a chart.
4 Enable the Log button.
If you are unable to set your x-axis to logarithmic scaling, select the XY
chart type instead of the Line chart type.
Modifying x-axis labels
You can modify any x-axis in any Quattro Pro chart. Occasionally, the length
of words used in labels may overlap, making the chart hard to read. You can
modify the labels properties to correct this.
369
To modify axis labels
1 Double-click the chart, and then double-click an axis.
2 Select the color, appearance, style, size, and font desired for the labels.
To hide axis labels
1 Double-click the chart, then double-click the x-axis.
2 Click Tick Options, then disable the Display Labels check box.
To delete axis labels
1 Select a chart.
2 Click Chart, Series.
3 Select the axis label series in the Axis box, then press DELETE.
To prevent x-axis labels from overlapping
1 Select a chart.
3 Click the Tick Options tab.
4 Use one of these options to adjust the label display:
Display Labels — toggles the label display on or off
Number Of Rows — places the labels in a single row, or in two or three
staggered rows
No Overlapping Labels — eliminates some of the labels when label
text would otherwise overlap (the default setting is On (enabled).
Disable this option to activate Skip n Labels)
Skip n Labels — sets the number of labels to eliminate to prevent
overlap (for example, if you skip two labels, the first label in the x-axis
series is displayed, the second and third labels are skipped, the fourth
label is displayed, the fifth and sixth labels are skipped, and so on)
Length Limit — specifies the maximum number of characters
displayed in a label (any additional characters will not appear in the
label)
370
The Text Font Property is available for all text objects, including titles,
axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the chart window
toolbar.
Changing y-axis properties
Quattro Pro automatically adjusts the y-axis scale to fit the range of values
plotted against it. You can change the High, Low, Increment, and No.
(number) of Minors values to fine-tune the chart or to zoom in on a specific
area.
High — sets the highest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a value
that is lower than the values in the data series, the plot for the value will
appear to run off the top of the chart)
Low — sets the lowest value displayed on the scale (if you enter a value
that is higher than the values in the data series, the plot for the value will
appear to run off the bottom of the chart)
Increment — determines the numeric “distance” between major y-axis
divisions. Y-axis labels, major tick marks, and major grid lines are placed
at these divisions.
No. of Minors — specifies the number of evenly-spaced minor tick marks
and/or minor grid lines between the major y-axis divisions.
In addition to scale modifications, you can set the y-axis to display units or a
logarithmic scale.
Secondary y-axes
You can plot a series in 2-D bar, line, and variance charts on a secondary
y-axis. High-Low charts restrict this feature to the fifth series or greater. You
may want to do this, for example, when the values in one series are much
larger or smaller than those in other series. When there is a wide variation
between series, the y-axis scale range can be so large that some series are
barely visible above the x-axis. If you plot the series that differs most on the
secondary y-axis, the primary y-axis adjusts to accommodate the other
series.
You can also use this feature when the data is based on a different kind of
scale. For example, on a High-Low (open-close) volume chart, you can plot
share prices on the primary y-axis, and the volume (number of stocks traded)
on the secondary y-axis.
The secondary y-axis will have the same properties as the primary y-axis.
371
Changing y-axis properties
Use the Y-Axis Properties dialog box to modify the y-axis. You can change
any of the y-axis properties, including the way the y-axis displays units.
To change the y-axis properties
1 Select a chart.
3 Click one of the appropriate tabs:
Scale — selects the range of numbers used on the y-axis
Tick Options — sets the style of the short, horizontal lines that
separate divisions on the y-axis (there are four tick styles: None, Left,
Right, and Across)
Numeric format — lets you choose from a large list of formats or
custom numeric formats
Text Font — sets the font or font size for the y-axis labels
Text Settings — sets the shadowing, color, and fill style for labels
Major Grid Style and Minor Grid Style — sets the number of lines on
the y-axis and between ticks
In Quattro Pro charts, the method you use to assign a grid style is similar
for the x and y axes, other than the y-axis lets you assign a major and a
minor grid style. If you want information about assigning either grid style,
see “Modifying x-axis properties” on page 366.
For information about changing tick options, see “Changing x-axis tick
options” on page 367.
For a descending axis scale, reverse the high and low values. To return to
the default setting, enable the Automatic check box.
Showing units on the y-axis
If the numbers displayed on the y-axis are greater than 1000, you can adjust
the scale to display only the unit title along the y-axis; for example. by
selecting the Show Units option, display “Thousands” or “Millions”,
372
To show units on the y-axis
1 Select a chart.
4 Enable the Show Units check box.
(Disable the check box to turn the feature off.)
5 Right-click the title, and click Properties to change the font, color, or other
properties of the unit title displayed along the x-axis.
Scaling the y-axis logarithmically
In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10
times the value of the previous major division. This type of scale is useful
when you plot series with wide ranges in magnitude.
A sample of a chart
using a logarithmic
scale.
To create an y-axis logarithmic scale
1 Select a chart.
4 Enable the Log button.
Setting a zero line on the y-axis
This turns your chart into a variance chart. A variance chart requires values
below zero in one of the data series.
For information about setting a variance line, see “Working with variance
373
Changing the numeric format of the y-axis
This procedure allows you to change the type of numeric format displayed on
the y-axis. For example, you can display data using currency symbols or
percentages.
To change the numeric format for the y-axis scale
1 Select the chart.
4 Select a format option from the following options:
General — displays numbers as entered
Number — displays negative and positive values, including decimals
Currency — displays numbers using currency symbols
Scientific — displays numbers with scientific notation, allowing only
one digit in the integer portion of the number
Fraction — displays numbers as fractions
Percent — displays numbers as percentages
Date — displays numbers as date values in the format you choose
Time — displays numbers as times in the format you choose
Custom — lets you choose from a list of formats you have previously
created
Adding another y-axis to charts
A secondary y-axis displays on the right side of the chart, while the primary
y-axis displays on the left. Quattro Pro scales the secondary y-axis to
accommodate the highest and lowest values in the series. The secondary
y-axis has the same properties as the primary y-axis.
To plot series on the secondary y-axis
1 Select the chart.
2 Right-click the chart series marker, then click Line Series Properties.
3 Click the Series Options tab.
4 Enable the Secondary button in the Y-Axis section.
374
Customizing legends and titles
You can customize both chart legends and chart titles. You can also add a
subtitle to a chart and a title to the chart’s legend.
Understanding legends
A legend box appears as soon as you define a legend series in all 2-D (except
pie, column, and doughnut) charts, and in some 3-D charts. For more
information on 3-D charts labels, see “Modifying a 3-D chart legend” on page
359.
When you add or delete a data series, the legend series (if one is defined)
does not change automatically. If you insert or delete a series from a chart,
you also have to edit the legend accordingly.
If you add on additional series, another bar, line marker, or area boundary
point is added at each x-axis division. If you see new x-axis divisions without
labels after you add a series, this means the new series has a greater number
of data points than the other series in the chart. Select the series again, and
assign a selection that has the correct number of values.
You can also enter legend label text (or label cell coordinates) for individual
series by right-clicking the series and clicking Properties.
Understanding chart titles
You can create a title and subtitle for any numeric chart type, but not for
bullet charts or blank charts. You can also use this option to place titles on
the chart axes. On 2-D charts, you can add titles for the x-axis, the primary
y-axis (the left, or Y1 axis) and for a secondary y-axis (the right, or Y2 axis).
3-D charts will not display secondary y-axis titles. You can change the title
and subtitle properties including the spelling, font size, and type. You can edit
the main title and subtitle text directly on the chart, or change the title or
subtitle in the Titles dialog box.
Instead of typing in a title, you can reference the cell that contains the
appropriate text using the title box. Just type the cell reference preceded by a
backslash (\). For example, type \G8 in the title box displays the text in cell
G8 as the title. You can use @STRING and other string spreadsheet
functions with numeric formulas to create dynamic titles that change along
with your data. For example, entering the following formula in cell G8 creates
a string that displays the average of cells C5..C9 after the equal sign:
+"Five-Year Mileage Average = “&@STRING(@AVG(C5..C9),0)
375
Adding titles and labels to charts
Quattro Pro lets you add titles and subtitles to charts. It also lets you add
labels to bars or data points in a chart.
To add titles to a chart
1 Right-click the chart, then click Titles.
2 Type text in the appropriate boxes.
To add labels to bars or data points on a chart
1 Enter a series of labels into the cells (if suitable labels do not already
exist).
2 Right-click the bar, line, or area that represents the series, then click
Series Properties.
The Series Options property is automatically selected.
3 Click the Pointer button to the right of the Label Series box, then select
the cells on the notebook sheet that contain the labels.
The cells you specify as the label series can contain text or data. For
example, if you assign the same cells to the data series and the label
series of a bar chart, Quattro Pro places a label with the actual data value
over each bar in the series.
Changing title and subtitle properties
A single text box encloses the chart title and subtitle. When you create a
title, you do not see the text box because its fill style and box type are set to
None by default. You can change the title and subtitle properties such as
alignment, font, color, box, and fill. The chart title’s Alignment property also
sets the alignment for the subtitle.
To change title or subtitle properties
1 Select the chart.
2 Click Chart, Titles.
3 Click one of the following Chart Title tabs:
Alignment — positions the title left, right, or center
Text Font — sets the font face, size, or appearance
376
Text Settings — sets the fill settings, color, and background color if a
pattern or wash has been selected
Box Settings — sets the type of border for the title field
Fill Settings — sets the fill and background colors for the title field
You can edit the main title and subtitle text directly on the chart, or
change the title or subtitle in the boxs of the Chart, Titles dialog box.
The Text Settings Property is available for all text objects, including titles,
subtitles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the Chart
toolbar. Wash, Bitmap, and 3-D options are not available for the y-axis and
y2-axis in 2-D and 3-D chart types, and for the x-axis in rotated chart
types.
Positioning the chart legend
You can position a legend at the right side of the chart or at the bottom of the
chart. You can also choose not to display the legend.
To position a legend
1 Select the chart.
2 Click Chart, Legend.
3 Click the Legend Position tab, then click one of the following icons:
None — hides the legend
Bottom — displays the legend on the bottom of the chart
Right — displays the legend on the right of the chart
You can also manually drag the legend to a new location on the chart.
Adjusting legend properties and x-axis series
Legend labels appear in the legend box of 2-D charts (except pie and column
charts), and in some 3-D charts. In most 3-D charts, legend labels appear
along the z-axis. In multiple charts, legend labels appear as “titles” of the
sub-charts that represent each series.
377
To adjust the legend and x-axis series
1 Select the chart.
2 Click Chart, Series.
3 Click the Pointer button to edit the Legend box.
Repeat this step to edit the X-Axis Series box.
4 Hold down the CTRL key, then point to the label for each series, in order.
To override a legend label
1 Select the chart.
2 Click Edit, Chart.
3 Right-click the chart series marker and click Series Properties.
4 Type the label text or enter the label’s cell address preceded by a slash
(for example, \A:E5) in the Legend box.
Modifying the legend’s appearance
You can change how the legend appears on the chart.
To customize the legend
1 Select the chart.
3 Click one or more of the following tabs:
Text Font — sets the font face, size, or appearance
Text Settings — sets the text color and fill
Box Settings — sets the type of border for the legend
Fill Settings — sets the fill and color of the legend box
For information about changing fill and color of text on the Text Settings
tab, see “Changing fill and border properties” on page 383.
You can also double-click any series box to edit the series.
378
Adding graphics to charts
You can add clipart and graphics to Quattro Pro charts. You can draw different
shapes to emphasize aspects of the chart, or insert an existing graphic.
Understanding the aspect ratio of charts
Depending on the intended purpose of the slides, adjusting the aspect ratio of
charts sets the proportions of the chart in relation to the way the chart can be
viewed. For example, a chart can appear in a full screen format (suitable for
adding to a slide show) or as a floating chart. You can also choose an aspect
ratio suitable for 35 mm slide formats. As a chart moves from one display to
another, its overall shape sometimes shifts. You can control these changes by
setting a chart’s aspect ratio. If you want to add graphics to a chart, it is
important to set the aspect ratio so that no distortion occurs to the graphics if
a different aspect ratio is selected later.
Drawing objects on a chart
Quattro Pro includes a drawing toolbar that contains drawing tools you can
use to create arrows, circles, rectangles, and other graphic effects on your
charts. This is useful for highlighting certain aspects of data represented on
your charts.
This toolbar includes a set of quick-access tools and buttons:
Cut button
, Copy button
, and Paste button
objects to and from the Windows Clipboard
Import button
imports a file
Selection Tool button
with a drawing tool
Text tool
transfer
switches to selection mode when you finish
creates text boxes
The following drawing tools create shapes:
Line tool
Arrow tool
Polyline tool
Freehand drawing tool
Polycurve tool
379
Polygon tool
Rectangle tool
Rounded Rectangle tool
Ellipse tool
For more information about drawing objects, see “Adding graphics to
spreadsheets” on page 393.
Maximize the chart window to make drawing easier.
Inserting graphics in your charts
Quattro Pro lets you add clipart or other graphics to the charts you create.
The procedure for adding these objects to charts is the same as if you were
adding them to the spreadsheet. For more information about adding graphics
to your charts, see “Designing borders, lines, and shapes” on page 404.
Adjusting the aspect ratio of charts
To save time, choose the aspect ratio for your final output before you begin to
change properties or draw objects. A 35 mm slide has different proportions
than an 8.5 x 11-inch sheet of paper, for example. A graph and its labels may
look right when the aspect ratio is set to 35 mm screen slide, but everything
may need to be resized when the aspect ratio is changed to printer view. The
following examples show the same chart viewed with different aspect ratio
options:
The Floating Chart
aspect ratio view of a
chart.
380
The Screen Slide
aspect ration view.
The 35-mm aspect
ratio view.
The Printer Preview
apsect ratio view.
The Full Extent
aspect ratio view.
381
You set the aspect ratio for charts and maps the same way. For more
information about changing the aspect ratio, see “Changing the aspect ratio
of maps” on page 426 in the maps help.
Changing colors and fill of chart objects
While the Quattro Pro chart tools provide you with pre-defined color
combinations, you can customize the color and/or the type of pattern fill for
specific chart objects. For example, the chart background is the area behind
the title, the legend, the chart itself, and any drawing elements you added. If
the default background color you originally select appears too bright, you can
select a more conservative background.
You can also change the color of chart items, and change the fill and border
properties (pattern or plain color for inside and around chart objects).
Quattro Pro contains a default color palette. Custom colors can be added to
the palette and stored with the application. For information about
customizing the color palette of a notebook, see “Changing colors in the
Notebook palette” on page 414.
Changing the color of chart items
You can change the color of a specific item in a chart using the Properties
dialog box. For example, Chart Background has two property tabs that
control the appearance of the chart background settings: fill settings and
chart button. You can also display patterns or images in most chart items.
To change the color of a chart item
1 Select the chart.
2 Right-click the chart item (for example, bar or pie slice), then click
Properties.
3 Click the Fill Settings tab.
4 Choose from the following options:
None
Pattern
Wash
Bitmap
To change the chart ‘s background
382
2 Click Chart, Background.
3 Set the Fill Settings, Box Settings, and Chart Button properties.
Fill Settings — assigns a fill color, background color, and fill style to the
background
Chart Button — controls slide shows. You can assign a macro or show a
different chart when the user clicks on an area outside of defined
text-box chart buttons
For more information on using chart buttons in slide shows, see “Using
chart buttons to create slide show jumps” on page 467.
If you display a bitmap in the background of a 3-D chart, some printers do
not print all of the bitmap.
Select a chart, right-click the background, then click Background
Properties.
Changing fill and border properties
You can modify the fill settings of chart objects, including text, backgrounds,
legends, and data series. A solid object has two areas, an interior and a
border. The appearance of the interior is determined by the way Fill Settings
properties are set.
The Border Settings properties control the appearance of the perimeter of
the object.
The Fill Settings properties make the box transparent (None), or fill it with a
solid color, a two-color pattern, a wash, or an imported bitmap graphic. If the
fill style is a pattern, the Pattern Color is the color of the pattern. If the fill
style is a wash, the Start Color is distributed over the End Color.
The Border Settings properties set the color of the frame or box around the
object. The choices range from “no frame” to 3-D styles.
To change the fill settings
1 Select a chart.
2 Right-click the object, and click Properties.
383
4 Choose a fill style:
None — makes the object transparent
Solid — makes the object one solid color
Pattern — gives you a choice of 24 two-color patterns (the color of the
pattern is the Foreground Color; the background behind the pattern is
the Background Color)
Wash — gives you a choice of six bi-colored wash styles (in a wash, the
first color is distributed over the second color)
Bitmap — fills the object with an imported bitmap graphic
5 If you selected Pattern or Wash in step 4, choose the foreground color and
background color.
To select a new box type or border style.
1 Right-click the border of the chart, then click Chart Properties.
2 Click one or both of the following tabs:
The Box Type — determines the thickness of the border, or whether to
add a drop shadow, or make it transparent
The Border Color — determines the color of the border (or box)
around the chart.
To print text that has a Wash fill on some laser printers, you may have to
select the Print Truetype fonts as graphics option. To set the option, click
File, Print, Details, Properties, Fonts.
For more information about using an imported bitmap for a fill, see “Filling
and cropping shapes with graphics” on page 398.
If you want to change an item’s Fill Settings or Border Settings, click the
object, then click the Properties button to display the Properties dialog
box.
Managing charts
After you have created a chart, it is important to know how to manage it
using basic menu commands. Procedures for saving, closing, and deleting
charts are similar to the procedures you use to perform these actions on
other objects created or added to a notebook.
384
Saving charts
When you save a notebook, Quattro Pro saves every chart in that notebook.
To save a chart in a notebook
Click File, Save.
To save a chart in a notebook under another file name
box.
Closing charts
You can close a floating chart with the Close button. Charts on their own
pages can be closed with menu commands or with shortcut keys.
To close a chart using the Close button
Click the Close button at the far right of the title bar of the chart.
To close a chart using a menu command, double-click the Control menu
box in the upper left corner of the window.
To close a chart using keystrokes, press CTRL + F4.
Deleting charts
Quattro Pro lets you delete charts that you no longer need.
To delete a chart on a spreadsheet
1 Select a chart.
2 Click Chart, Delete Chart.
3 Select the chart name from the list that appears.
Click Edit, Cut, to cut the chart from the notebook.
385
To delete a chart on the Objects sheet
1 Click an icon.
Click the Cut button.
Click Edit, Cut.
Press DELETE.
Moving charts on your spreadsheet
You can move charts anywhere on your spreadsheet. For information about
copying charts within your notebook, see “Sharing Quattro Pro charts” on
page 386.
To move the chart to another position on the spreadsheet
1 Click the chart border.
Square handles appear at eight positions on the border of the chart.
2 Drag the chart to the desired location.
Resizing charts
You can resize a chart the same way you resize other graphic objects.
To resize a chart’s height or width
1 Click the chart border.
2 Drag a top, bottom, side, or corner handle.
To change the height and width of the frame at the same time, click the
chart border, then drag a corner handle diagonally.
Sharing Quattro Pro charts
You can share charts with other notebooks in Quattro Pro, or export them to
other applications. For example, if you are writing a document in a word
processing application like WordPerfect or Microsoft Word, you can add a
chart you created in Quattro Pro to illustrate a point.
386
Copying charts within a notebook
There are three ways to copy a chart within a notebook: use the Drag and
Drop feature, use the Copy and Paste Special options to copy and paste a
selection of chart attributes, or use the Insert option.
The Edit, Paste Special option lets you copy the attributes of a chart,
including the style, data, and annotation objects (drawn objects like
rectangles, ellipses, etc.), from one chart to another. You can use the Paste
Special option to copy some or all attributes of a chart template to several
charts at a time.
The Insert option lets you add a chart to another part of a notebook by
selecting from a list of all the charts stored in that notebook.
Copying charts between notebooks
You can copy charts between notebooks using the Edit, Paste Special option
or the Drag and Drop feature. These methods give the container notebook a
record of where the original data is located. (The data is not physically
copied.) Each time you open the destination notebook, Quattro Pro checks
whether the source notebook is open. If it is closed, Quattro Pro provides
three options:
Open Supporting — opens the source notebook. If the notebook contains
links to closed notebooks, those notebooks will also open
Update References — accesses linked values in closed supporting
notebooks without opening them. This takes up less memory than
opening the notebooks
None — temporarily replaces links to closed supporting notebooks with
the value NA (not available). This lets you examine or edit notebooks
when you do not need the linked values. It saves the time required to
update values and the memory required to open supporting notebooks.
If the destination notebook already has a chart with the same name, the new
copy is given a default name (for example, Chart 6).
For more information about replacing link placeholders with the actual link
values in charts, see “Using OLE automation with OLE objects” on page 545.
Copying charts within a notebook
Quattro Pro lets you copy floating charts and window charts into other areas
of the notebook. Copying also allows you to change a floating chart into a
window chart, and vice-versa.
387
To copy charts using the Clipboard
Click the border of a chart on a spreadsheet.
On the Objects sheet, select the chart icon(s) you want to copy.
2 Click Edit, Copy.
3 Select one of the following locations:
a spreadsheet — places the copy as a floating chart.
the Objects sheet — places the copy in a chart window.
To copy a window chart using the Clipboard
1 In the chart window, click Edit, Select All.
2 Click Edit, Copy, then close the window.
3 Select one of the following locations:
a spreadsheet — places the copy as a floating chart.
the Objects sheet — places the copy in a chart window.
You cannot paste a chart directly into a chart window.
Click the QuickTab button to display the Objects sheet, or to return to the
notebook from the Objects sheet.
Inserting charts in notebooks
In addition to copying charts to other parts of a notebook, Quattro Pro lets
you insert a chart stored on the Object sheet to another area within a
notebook.
To insert a chart on a notebook sheet
1 Go to the sheet where you want the chart to appear.
2 Right-click the notebook sheet, then click Insert Chart.
3 Select a chart from the list.
388
4 Click OK.
The mouse pointer changes to a miniature chart.
5 Click the upper left corner of the area where you want the chart to appear,
or drag the mouse to specify the size and placement of the chart.
6 Release the mouse button.
If the chart has too much background area, change the chart’s aspect ratio.
Select the chart, click View, then click one of the following options:
Floating Chart, Screen Slide, 35mm Slide, Printer Preview, or Full Extent.
You can insert the same chart in more than one place in the notebook.
Whenever you make changes to a chart, all charts on a notebook sheet
associated with that chart reflect those changes.
Copying charts to another notebook
You can copy charts to another notebook in three ways: by dragging and
dropping the charts; using the Edit, Paste Special commands; or cutting and
pasting to the Clipboard.
To copy a chart to another notebook using Drag and Drop
1 Open the source and container notebooks.
2 Click Window, Tile so you can see both notebooks.
3 To copy charts from the Objects sheet, click the QuickTab button at the
bottom of each window to display the Objects sheet for both notebooks.
4 Press CTRL while dragging the chart from the source notebook to the
Objects sheet of the container notebook.
5 Release the mouse.
When you open a notebook containing charts copied from other
notebooks, the Hotlinks dialog box is displayed. Enable Open Supporting
or Update References to display the charts in the current notebook.
If you drag a chart to a notebook sheet or chart icon without pressing
CTRL, you will move the chart instead of copying it.
389
For information about cutting and pasting to the Clipboard, see “Copying
charts within a notebook” on page 387.
For more information on how to use Edit, Paste Special, see “Copying
selected attributes of charts” on page 390.
Copying selected attributes of charts
Quattro Pro lets you copy some or all of the attributes on one chart and apply
them to another chart. For example, annotations can be copied. The
container chart for the Paste Special option must be an existing chart (or a
blank chart); you cannot use Paste Special to create a new chart.
You can also copy chart attributes and create a template for new charts. This
second option applies the style and properties to the destination chart’s data.
To copy selected attributes to another chart
1 Select the chart that has the attributes you want to copy.
3 Click Edit, Copy.
Select the chart to which you want to copy the attributes.
Select a blank chart on the spreadsheet
6 Enable the check boxes that correspond to the attributes you want to
copy.
By default, all the check boxes are enabled when the
To copy chart attributes to create a template
1 Select the chart that has the attributes you want to copy.
3 Click Edit, Copy.
4 Select the chart to which you want to copy the attributes.
6 Disable Data Series, but leave the other check boxes enabled.
390
To preserve annotation objects already existing in the destination
chart
Disable the Annotations check box.
Enabling the Annotations check box erases all annotation items in the
destination chart, even when there are none to copy from the source
chart.
Paste Special does not copy annotations drawn on a blank chart type or
chart templates selected with the Chart Gallery.
Adding charts to other applications
You can save a chart as a graphic file, which allows you to use it with other
applications. When you save a chart this way, you also save any drawn
shapes, imported graphics, or text boxes associated with the chart. For
example, if you are writing a report in a word processing application like
WordPerfect or Microsoft Word, you can import any chart from one of your
Quattro Pro notebooks.
If you want to include charts in a 35-mm slide show, you must set the chart’s
aspect ratio to 35mm slide before saving as a graphic and talk to a slide show
service bureau about which file formats they support. This adjusts the chart
object proportions so the whole chart appears centered on the slide. For
more information about setting the aspect ratio of charts, see “Adjusting the
aspect ratio of charts” on page 380.
To save a chart as a graphic
1 Select the chart, then click Chart, Export to File.
2 Choose a destination and filename.
3 Click the Browse button next to the File Name box.
4 Choose a file format from the File Type list.
5 Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list.
7 Type a filename in the File Name box, then click OK.
8 Enable the Bitmap Gray Scale check box to save the map without colors.
391
.GIF files must be exported when you are in 256 color (or less) mode.
.JPG files can only export in true color mode.
392
ADDING GRAPHICS TO
SPREADSHEETS
13
Quattro Pro lets you display your spreadsheet data in a wide variety of
graphic formats. You can insert clipart images and create graphics that exist
in a layer above the notebook, but are part of the sheet in which they appear.
You can draw lines and shapes and add text boxes directly on a notebook
using tools on the toolbar. You can insert a regular or animated graphic into
your spreadsheet.
Creating graphics
You can add graphics to spreadsheets, move and resize graphics on a
spreadsheet, group graphics in charts or maps, or crop and fill a graphic
shape with another graphic.
Drawing in Quattro Pro
Quattro Pro includes a drawing toolbar that contains drawing tools you can
use to create arrows, circles, rectangles, and other graphic effects on charts,
maps, or spreadsheets. You can also access these tools from the Insert,
Shape menu.
When you install Quattro Pro, you cannot see the Charts and Drawing
toolbar. For information about displaying the drawing toolbar, see “Accessing
drawing tools in Quattro Pro” on page 404.
This toolbar includes a set of quick-access tools and buttons:
Adding graphics to spreadsheets
393
Cut button
, Copy button
, and Paste button
objects to and from the Windows Clipboard
Import button
imports a file
Selection Tool button
with a drawing tool
Text tool
transfer
switches to selection mode when you finish
creates text boxes
The following drawing tools create shapes:
Line tool — use to draw straight lines in any direction
Arrow tool — use to draw arrows in any direction
Polyline tool — use to draw zig-zag lines in any direction
Freehand Drawing tool — use to draw multiple lines that follow the
path of your mouse
Rectangle tool — use to draw precise rectangles and squares
Rounded Rectangle tool — use to draw rectangles and squares with
rounded corners
Ellipse tool — use to draw ovals and circles
Polycurve tool — use to draw curved shapes that follow the path of
your mouse
For more information about using more advanced drawing tools, see
“Creating graphic images in Quattro Pro” on page 394.
Creating graphic images in Quattro Pro
Quattro Pro uses the Corel Presentations Draw window, creating new
graphics or shapes to add to your spreadsheets.
394
Corel XXXX: Chapter 13
To create a new graphic in Quattro Pro
1 Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture to launch Corel Presentations.
2 Click Insert, Shape, and select one of the following shapes:
Text Box
Arrow
Line
Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Ellipse
Polyline/Polygon
3 Click outside the Draw Picture window to return to the spreadsheet.
If you want to move an object as you draw it, hold down the right mouse
button while dragging the shape to a new location.
If you want to delete an object while you are drawing it, press ESC to
cancel the drawing.
Selecting and deselecting graphics
Before you can edit, move, or resize a graphic, you must select it.
To select a graphic
Click the graphic.
To select a graphics group
Click any graphic in the group.
To select multiple graphics individually
1 Click a graphic.
2 Press SHIFT while clicking additional graphics.
395
To select multiple graphics in an area
1 Right-click any toolbar, then click Charts and Drawing Tools, and select
the Select Object tool.
2 Point just outside one corner of the area, then drag diagonally until the
selection box encloses the graphics you want.
To deselect a graphic
Click the graphic while you press SHIFT.
Moving and resizing graphics
You can move, resize, and change the size of a graphic.
To move a graphic
1 Select a graphic.
2 Drag to its new location.
Do not drag the graphic handles as this will resize it.
To change the height or width
1 Select a graphic.
2 Drag a top, bottom, or side handle.
To change the height and width proportionally
1 Select a graphic.
2 Drag a corner handle diagonally.
For information about cropping graphics, see “Filling and cropping shapes
with graphics” on page 398.
Grouping graphics in charts, maps, or the Draw Picture window
Group two or more graphics in a chart to manipulate them as a single graphic
in subsequent operations. For example, you could group all the graphics in a
complex drawing to move them at the same time.
396
Once you group graphics, you can move and resize them as a single object.
You can nest a grouped graphic within other grouped graphics. If you ungroup
a group that had other groups nested within it, these groups remain intact.
For information about customizing grouped graphics, see “Changing the
properties of grouped graphics” on page 418.
To group graphics
1 Click in the chart, map, or Draw Picture window.
2 Hold down SHIFT and click the objects you want to group.
3 Right-click the selected graphics, then click Group.
To ungroup graphics
2 Select a grouped graphic.
3 Right-click the selected objects, then click Separate Objects.
To nest groups within other groups
2 Select any combination of groups and individual graphics.
3 Right-click one of the selected groups, then click Group.
To ungroup a group containing nested groups
2 Right-click the groups, then click Separate Objects.
You can click the Group button on the toolbar to group objects. This
button activates when you select two or more objects or shapes.
You can ungroup grouped objects if you click the Ungroup button.
Arranging graphic object layers and overlapping graphics
A layer is one of a series of transparent planes on which you can place objects
in a drawing. You can control how objects overlay each other by moving the
layer and the objects they contain. Use layers to organize different
components of complex drawings.
397
To arrange object layers
1 Select the object or group of objects.
2 Click Format, Object Order.
3 Click of the following options:
Bring Forward — moves the object one layer closer to the top
Send Backward — moves the object one layer closer to the bottom
Bring To Front — brings the object to the front or top of the layers
Send To Back — sends the object to the bottom layer
You can also layer graphics using tools for each of the above options on the
Property Bar or on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar Object Layer
buttons.
Filling and cropping shapes with graphics
When you import a graphic file (.BMP, .GIF, .JPG, .PCX, or .TIF format),
Quattro Pro places the graphic in a rectangular container. You can also fill any
drawn object in a chart window or a drawn object on the notebook with a
bitmapped graphic.
A bitmap fill style has four options:
Crop To Fit — displays only the part of the graphic that fits within the
object
Tile To Fit — fills adjacent blocks of the object with copies of the same
bitmapped graphic
Shrink to Fit — shrinks or enlarges the bitmap to fit within the object (the
default)
3-D Perspective — (for 3-D chart walls only) adjusts a bitmap to simulate
the depth of a 3-D wall
The upper-left corner of the rectangle around the graphic is a reference point
that cannot be changed or eliminated. If you drag a handle on the left or top
side of the graphic to resize the container, the right or bottom side of the
bitmap becomes cropped. Any part of the image left outside the resized
frame is deleted when you return the graphic image to the drawing window.
To fill a shape with a graphic
1 Click the shape, then click Format, Selection.
398
2 Click the Fill Settings tab, then choose Bitmap in the Fill Style list.
Crop To Fit — to crop the drawing (cut out all pieces that do not fit)
Tile To Fit — to fill adjacent blocks of the graphic with the same
graphic
Shrink To Fit — to shrink or enlarge the drawing to fit it within the
graphic
3-D Perspective (for 3-D chart walls only) — to adjust a graphic to
simulate the depth of a 3-D wall
5 Choose the drive and folder where the graphics file is stored.
If you want to crop a graphic, select Bitmap in the Fill Style list, then
enable the Crop to Fit button on the Fill Settings tab.
Managing and sharing graphics
Once you create a graphic, you can work with it as an object and as a graphic
file. You can open, save, and close files containing graphics. You can rename a
graphic with a name you can recognize in the objects list. You can share
graphics between Quattro Pro projects and between Quattro Pro and other
applications. You can also
import a copy of a graphic (sometimes this is done with the Paste
command)
export a copy of a graphic created in Quattro Pro to another application
Before you can import or export a graphic, check to see whether the graphic
format is one of the types compatible with Quattro Pro 9. For more
information about compatible graphic formats, see “Graphic formats for
importing” on page 681 and “Graphic formats for exporting” on page 681.
Opening, saving, and deleting graphic files
You can save any graphic you create or add to the spreadsheet when you save
the notebook. You can also delete graphics from your notebooks.
399
To save a graphic in a Quattro Pro notebook
Click File, Save.
To use the Save As feature to save a graphic in a Quattro Pro
notebook
box.
To delete a graphic in Quattro Pro
1 Click the graphic.
You can also press DELETE to remove a selected graphic.
Renaming graphics
You can change the object name of charts, maps, text boxes, OLE objects,
and controls such as buttons and check boxes. You can reference the Object
Name in macros that work with this item. For more information about
referencing objects, see “Using macros” on page 489.
To rename a graphic
1 Right-click the graphic, then click OLE Object Properties.
2 Click the Object Name tab.
3 Type a new name in the Object Name box.
You cannot change the object name of shapes on the spreadsheet or in the
Draw Picture window. You can however, change the object name of the
Draw Picture window which is an OLE object container.
400
Protecting graphics
You can protect or lock graphics to limit access, for example, a data entry
form for other users. You can protect the entire sheet, then unprotect the
graphics you want users to edit. Or you may want to unprotect a chart that
graphs the data that users enter.
To protect a graphic
1 Click the graphic, then click Format, Selection.
3 Enable the Locked check box.
To unprotect a graphic
1 Click the graphic, then click Format, Selection.
3 Disable the Locked check box.
To unprotect all graphics on a sheet
3 Disable the Enable Object Locking check box.
If you want an alternate way to display the OLE Objects Properties dialog
box, click the graphic, then click the Property button.
Inserting graphics from other sources
Quattro Pro lets you insert graphic files created in other applications in your
spreadsheets, charts, and maps. After you insert a graphic, you can adjust the
size and position of the graphic. For more information about sizing and
positioning graphics, see “Moving and resizing graphics” on page 396.
To import graphics in other formats
Open the spreadsheet where you want to insert a graphic
Click the chart, map, or Draw Picture window
401
2 Click Insert, Graphics, From File.
3 Browse through the category folders until you find the graphic file you
want to insert.
4 Select the file.
You can also click Insert, File, then specify the name of the graphic file
you want to insert.
Adding Quattro Pro graphics to other applications
You can export graphics by cutting and pasting the graphic or by exporting
the graphic as an object. You can paste an image into Microsoft Paint or into
CorelDRAW to save it as a separate object. Any annotations added to a chart
or map remain with the chart or map when exported.
To paste a Quattro Pro image into Microsoft Paint
1 Select the area you want to include in the image.
The area must be contiguous.
2 Click Edit, Copy.
Make no further changes in Quattro Pro until you paste this image.
Click Start, Programs, Accessories, Microsoft Paint to launch this
application
Maximize Microsoft Paint if it is already running
Be sure to paste the image into the target application immediately after
copying it to the Clipboard from Quattro Pro, before making any changes
to the Quattro Pro notebook. Otherwise, the image is invalid and
unavailable.
To export a Quattro Pro chart or map
1 Click the chart or map.
2 Click Chart, Export to File.
3 Click the browse button next to the File Name box.
402
8 Enable the Bitmap Gray Scale check box to save the chart or map without
colors.
The Bitmap Gray Scale option is not available for .EPS files.
.GIF files must be exported when you are in 256-color (or less) mode.
.JPG files can only be exported in true color mode.
Working with Clipart
Quattro Pro contains a scrapbook of Clipart and other graphics that you can
add to your notebooks. The Scrapbook is a window in which you can browse
folders that store collections of:
Clipart (including .WPG, .GIF, and .JPG files)
Photos (.BMP)
Sounds (including MIDI and WAVE files)
Movies (.AVI)
Web images (.GIF)
The Scrapbook provides drag-and-drop access to these folders. In addition,
the Scrapbook lets you organize, store, and access favorite files.
Clipart files are usually WordPerfect graphic (.WPG) files which are metafiles
containing vectored or bitmap images, or Encapsulated PostScript. This type
of graphic is used in several Corel Office Suite applications, including Corel
Presentations. You can add images to the Scrapbook by copying and pasting
.WPG files into the Clipart folder. You can also create your own group of
images and display them as a new category folder in the Scrapbook by
creating a new folder, then copying and pasting .WPG image files into it.
Corel Presentations 9 can automatically read and convert images in many
standard formats, including .JPG, .BMP, .PCX, and others. For more
information about converting imported graphics in Corel Presentations, see
“Import graphics formats” on page in the Corel Presentations 9 help.
Use Clipart to add interest and emphasis to highlight ideas in notebooks,
slides, and charts. Thousands of Clipart images and photos are provided with
WordPerfect Office 2000. During a typical installation, only some of these
403
images are copied to your hard drive. The remaining Clipart images are
stored on the WordPerfect Office 2000 CD.
For more information about the Scrapbook, see Using Scrapbook in the
online Help.
Designing borders, lines, and shapes
Quattro Pro lets you draw graphics, including shapes, lines, and arrows, on
the spreadsheet or within a floating window. With drawing tools, you can
draw simple lines, shapes, polylines, and polygons on notebooks, charts, and
maps.
The Draw Picture feature launches the Corel Presentations drawing tools.
Some of these tools include special drawing toolbars that let you click
buttons to make selections for drawing tools, line widths, color selections,
and special effects.
Accessing drawing tools in Quattro Pro
There are two ways to access drawing tools in Quattro Pro: displaying the
Charts and Drawing Tools toolbar, or automatically when you launch the
Draw Picture window from Corel Presentations. For more information about
some of the drawing tools, see “Drawing in Quattro Pro” on page 393.
To display the Charts and Drawing Tools toolbar
2 Enable the Chart and Drawing Tools check box in the Toolbars list.
3 Drag the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar to the toolbar area if you want
to display the toolbar permanently.
To use drawing tools from Corel Presentations
Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture.
404
Once you drag the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar to the toolbar area,
the toolbar does not display if you disable the Chart and Drawing Tools
check box in the Toolbars list. However, if you display the same toolbar
later, it will default to the permanent position. For more information about
managing toolbars, see “Working with toolbars” on page 24.
Pick the correct Aspect Ratio for a chart before you begin to draw;
otherwise, you may have to resize, reposition, or even redraw elements to
fit the final format. For more information about adjusting the aspect ratio
of graphics, see “Adjusting the aspect ratio of charts” on page 380.
Click the Close button on the top right side to close the toolbar.
If you want to keep a drawing tool selected after you use it, double-click
the tool. Click it again to deactivate it.
Drawing simple lines and shapes
You can add lines and shapes to charts or maps within a notebook. Graphics
added to charts and maps are stored with the chart or map; when a chart or
map is exported or pasted into another location, the graphics remain
attached. For drawing lines and shapes, you can access various tools from the
following tool flyouts:
The Line Tools Flyout
405
The Shape Tools
Flyout
To draw a line or arrow on a chart, map, or spreadsheet
Click the chart or map where you want to add the graphic
Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture (this opens the floating window
where you can draw)
Proceed to step 2 if you want to draw directly on the spreadsheet
2 Open the Line Tools flyout on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar, then
click of the following buttons:
Line — lets you draw a straight line
Arrow — lets you draw a straight arrow
3 Point where you want to start the line or arrow.
4 Drag to where you want the line or arrow to end.
You can customize the lines and arrows that you draw. The properties for
lines and arrows that you draw on a sheet differ from the properties of
lines and arrows drawn in a chart window. For more information about
changing line and arrow properties, see “Editing and customizing
graphics” on page 414.
To draw a shape on a chart, map, or spreadsheet
Click the chart or map where you want to add the graphic
Click Insert, Graphics, Draw Picture (this opens the floating window
where you can draw)
Proceed to step 2 if you want to draw directly on the spreadsheet
406
2 Open the Basic Shapes flyout on the Chart and Drawing Tools toolbar,
then click of the following buttons:
Rectangle — creates a rectangular shape or square shape
Ellipse — draws a circle or an ellipse
Rounded Rectangle — creates rectangular shapes with rounded corners
3 Drag the mouse until the shape is the size you want.
If you want to create a perfect square or circle, press SHIFT while
dragging the mouse to create the shape.
You can also click Insert, Shape to draw lines, arrows, and shapes.
If you want to modify the shape, change the properties of the object. For
more information about modifying shapes, see “Editing and customizing
You can make a spreadsheet graphic transparent which allows you to see
the cells beneath it. For more information about making graphics
transparent, see “Making graphics transparent” on page 418.
Drawing polylines and freehand lines
Quattro Pro lets you draw a regular polyline or a freehand line on a chart,
map, on the spreadsheet or in the Draw Pictures window. If you create a
polyline with one of the polyline tools, you can create polylines with or
without arrows.
To draw a polyline
Click the chart or map
Open the spreadsheet where you want to add the polyline
2 Click a polyline tool on the Line Object flyout.
3 Drag to create each segment in the polyline.
4 To end the polyline, double-click.
To draw a freehand line on a chart or map
1 Click the chart or map.
2 Click Insert, Shape, Freehand Line or Freehand Polygon.
407
3 Drag to draw the shape.
4 To end the shape, release the mouse button.
Drawing polygons
Quattro Pro lets you draw regular or freehand polygons on a chart or map, on
the spreadsheet, or in the Draw Pictures window. You can select a polygon
tool from the main menu or from the Basic Shapes Flyout. To create a
freehand polygon (or shape), use one of the following drawing tools:
The Freehand drawing tool
The Polycurve drawing tool
To draw a polygon
Open the spreadsheet where you want to add the polygon
2 Click one of the polygon shapes on the Basic Shapes flyout .
3 Drag to create each side of the polygon.
4 To end the shape, double-click.
You can also end the polygon by right-clicking or clicking very close to the
starting point.
To draw a freehand polygon using the Freehand drawing tool
2 Click the Freehand drawing tool on the Line Tools Flyout to draw a
freehand lines similar to how you would draw them by hand.
3 Drag the mouse to create the desired shape, then double-click to end the
line.
To draw a freehand polygon using the Polycurve drawing tool
408
2 Click the Polycurve drawing tool on the Line Tools Flyout to draw curved
lines and shapes.
3 Click the spreadsheet where you want to start the shape, drag the mouse,
then click when you want the line to change direction.
4 To end the shape, release the mouse button.
You can close an open shape created with the Freehand drawing tool by
double-clicking the shape (you will see small white circles wherever the
line curved when creating the shape), then dragging one of the end points
to join with the other end point. The closed shape automatically has a
default fill color. For information about changing the fill color of drawn
objects, see “Changing the color or background of graphics” on page 416.
Making text into graphics
Quattro Pro lets you convert regular text to a graphic using TextArt or text
box graphics. TextArt differs from text box graphics in that TextArt can be a
geometric shape, whereas text in a box exists in a cell or a rectangular frame.
Use TextArt for creating shapes like pennants, circles, and waves. Use text
box graphics for formatting text in cells on a spreadsheet, or creating an
active chart button that triggers a macro command when clicked.
Creating TextArt
Use TextArt to change words in your documents into designs. You can shape
the image using patterns, colors, and other options, or you can select from a
wide variety of predesigned shapes. Besides creating 2-D TextArt images,
you can create 3-D TextArt images if you select the 3D TextArt component
during a custom installation.
An example of
TextArt.
TextArt designs are graphic images. They are contained in a graphics box
that can be moved and sized in the notebook. They can also be used in any
Windows application as an OLE object.
409
Adding TextArt
The TextArt dialog has four different tabs:
General — lets you enter the text you want displayed as well as select the
shape, font and font style, and justification settings
2D Options — sets pattern fill, shadow types, outline, rotation, or a preset
TextArt style
3D Options — sets lighting effects, bevel and depth, rotation, or a preset
3D TextArt style
Advanced 3D Options — sets the texture for the face and bevel, the
texture size and lighting, and the quality of the texture
To create text-shaped art
1 Click the spreadsheet where you want to create text-shaped art.
2 Click Insert, Graphics, TextArt, then type the text you want.
3 Select various options to make it look the way you want it.
4 When you are finished, click outside the text box.
Creating 3D TextArt
You can create more advanced TextArt using the 3D options in the TextArt
dialog box.
To create 3D TextArt
1 Click the spreadsheet where you want to create text-shaped art.
2 Click Insert, Graphics, TextArt, then type the text you want.
3 Enable the 3D Mode check box.
4 Click of the following tabs:
3D Options
Advanced 3D Options
Creating text box graphics
Text boxes can be used on your spreadsheet to format text in individual cells
or to create buttons that can link the current spreadsheet to another data
source or type of display. For example, you can add a chart button to a chart
or map that links to a spreadsheet or Internet address. When text box live
buttons are used in slide shows, they create jumps between parts of the slide
410
show. For information about creating chart buttons in slide shows, see
“Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps” on page 467.
You can create a text box, type text in it, add texture and color to the
background, and position and size the box just as you would any graphic. The
text box exists in a layer above the notebook, but is still part of the notebook.
An example of a text
box.
You can create a text box, move and size a text box, add bullets to a text box,
add 3-D text to a text box, or place text in a formatted cell:
You can also create text in a normal cell, then rotate the text and add fill
colors, borders, and textures to the cell. You can also change the color of the
cell background, add a border to a cell, or add other cell formatting.
For information on cell formatting, see “Formatting cells and applying styles”
on page 174.
Creating text boxes
You can create a text box using menu commands or using the Text Box
button on the Charts and Drawing Tools toolbar. When you type in your text,
the text wraps to fit the width of the box, and the depth of the box increases
automatically. The Alignment property turns this wordwrap feature off and
on. For information about turning off the alignment property, see
“Customizing a text box” on page 412.
To create a text box
Click Insert, Shape, Text Box
Click the Text Box button
Click the spreadsheet to create the text box.
Drag out a text box to the size you want.
3 Type text.
411
To type a reference to a label cell, type a backslash (\), a forward slash (/),
the cell reference, then a closing backslash (for example, \/A:A1\).
4 Click outside the text box to see the label text instead of the reference.
To add a text box to a chart or map (so that the text box moves with the
chart or map), click the chart or map, then create the text box.
Adding bullets to a text box
You can add bullets to your text box by typing a reference code. The
following shows the available bullets and the codes that create them:
To add bullets to a text box
1 In a text box, type a bullet code, for example, \BLT1\ or \BLT2\.
2 Click outside the text box to see the bullets.
You can also create bullet charts, charts that consist of bulleted lists.
Bullet charts are easier to revise because their text is based on notebook
data. For more information on bullet charts, see “Working with bullet
Customizing a text box
Once you create a text box, you can modify its properties to achieve a variety
of different effects. You can convert regular text into 3-D text or display the
text without the box outline.
To customize a text box border or box type
1 Click a chart, then click Format, Selection.
412
2 Select one of the following tabs:
Alignment — changes alignment, or tab settings
Text Font — changes font, size, and appearance
Text Settings — changes the fill style and color of the text
Box Settings — changes the frame around the text box
Fill Settings — changes the background of the text box (pattern, wash,
bitmap)
Protection — locks the contents of the text box
Object Name — sets the object name (used in the Object list or
referenced in macros)
Print — sets whether the text box is printed with the spreadsheet
To make 3-D text in a text box
1 Click a text box.
3 Click the Text Settings tab, then choose 3-D from the Fill Style list.
4 Click a 3-D style button.
5 Enable the Shaded check box, then choose a shadow color from the
Background Color list.
6 Move the slider to change the perspective of the text.
To create a text box with a transparent box border
1 Click a chart, then click Format, Selection.
2 Click the Box Settings tab.
3 Open the Fill Color color picker, then select No Color in the upper-left
corner of the color picker.
4 Choose the None line option from the Box Type list.
Moving and sizing text boxes
You can move and resize text boxes just like any other graphic.
To move a text box
1 Click the text box border to select it.
2 Drag the border to move the box to a new location.
413
To size a text box
1 Click the text box border to select it.
Drag a sizing handle to the appropriate size.
Drag a corner handle to size in two directions at once.
Editing and customizing graphics
You can customize color palettes and color selections used with Quattro Pro
graphics. You can use color palettes to change the fill and border properties of
chart elements and drawn shapes.
Each palette square has the following properties:
Fill Settings — selects the foreground and background color of the
graphic, and sets the fill style (none, solid, pattern, wash, or bitmap
graphic)
Border Settings — sets the color and thickness of the lines that form
the boundary of the graphic
The large square to the right of the palette displays the active palette
selection. Objects you create with a drawing tool display the Fill Settings and
Border Settings shown in this square.
The easiest and most efficient way to customize the appearance of a graphic
is to click it, then modify the properties. Drawn graphics have many of the
same properties as charts. For example, the rectangle properties are also
found in the Chart pane and Bar Series properties. You can also make a
graphic transparent. When you group graphics, you can make changes that
are applied to the entire group.
Changing colors in the notebook palette
When you cannot find a color in an existing palette, you can define your own
colors. You can save custom colors in the notebook palette. This palette gets
saved with the notebook. For information about saving graphics with
notebooks, see “Opening, saving, and deleting graphic files” on page 399.
To define a new color for the notebook palette
2 Click the NBPalette tab.
3 Click a color on the onscreen color palette that you want to modify, then
click Edit Color.
414
4 Move the slider in one or both of the following:
Circle Color Wheel — lets you choose lighter or darker settings, as
well as move into different color sectors of the color wheel
Vertical Scale — lets you select lighter or darker settings within the
area selected displayed in the color wheel
You can also choose a new color by typing numbers in the Color Values
section of the Select Color dialog box.
Returning to the default palette
If you customize the colors in the palette and want to delete the new colors,
you can reset the palette to the default palette that comes with Quattro Pro.
To reset the default palette
2 Click the NBPalette tab.
3 Click the Reset Defaults button.
Creating custom colors
Quattro Pro provides three models for creating new colors: HLS, RGB, and
CMY. Only one model displays at a time, but all three update when you
change a color setting. Choose whichever model you prefer.
Color
Description
HLS
Hue, Luminosity, and Saturation — Hue is the basic color: red, yellow,
orange, or green, for example. Saturation is the amount of white mixed
with the hue. Brightness is the amount of light energy present. When
brightness is zero, no light is present, and the result is black for every
hue and saturation value. By adjusting the saturation and brightness,
you can easily control the amount of gray in a color.
RGB
Red, Green, and Blue — You mix different amounts of red, green, and
blue to form all other colors.
CMY
Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. You mix different amounts of these colors to
form all other colors. Commercial printing houses often use this model to
mix colors.
415
Changing graphic properties
Quattro Pro lets you modify any graphics you create or insert. You can set
box properties and border colors. You can also change the box type and colors
for charts, maps, OLE objects, and controls such as radio buttons and check
boxes.
To change graphic properties
1 Select a graphic.
3 Change any settings.
To change a graphic’s border display
1 Click the graphic, then click one of the following:
Format, Selection
the Properties button
2 Click the Box Type tab, then click one of the following line types:
None
Thin
Medium
Thick
3 Enable the Drop Shadow check box to add a shadow to the item.
To change a graphic’s border color
1 Click the graphic, then click one of the following:
Format, Selection
the Properties button
2 Click the Border Color tab, then click a color on the color palette.
Changing the color or background of graphics
You can change the background color or the type of fill used in the
background of most graphics by modifying the properties. If you create a
graphic using Draw Picture, you must follow a different procedure for
modifying the background of the window.
416
To change the background color or pattern of a graphic
1 Select the graphic (until you see slashes around the perimeter and
handles inside the frame).
2 Click Chart, Background.
4 Choose one of the following in the Fill Style list:
Pattern — sets the pattern or background fill color
Wash — sets the start and end colors of the wash fill
To change the color or pattern background of the Draw Picture
window
1 Double-click the Draw Picture window.
2 Right-click, then click Page Setup.
3 Click the Page Color tab.
4 In the Fill Style list, click one of the following options:
None — sets a white background
Pattern — selects a pattern display and the color combination you want
to display
Gradient — selects a gradient effect and a color combination
Texture — selects a Quattro Pro texture pattern, or you can browse
and choose a texture from another file or application
Picture — selects a Quattro Pro graphic to display in the background,
or you can browse and choose a graphic from another file or application
In order to do step 2 in the above procedure, you must have a print driver
installed.
Choose from more colors by clicking More and specifying a color. You can
add the color to the custom colors by clicking Add to Custom Colors, then
clicking OK.
417
Changing the properties of grouped graphics
Once you group graphics in a Draw Picture window, you can modify them as
a group using the Properties dialog box.
To change the properties of every graphic in a group
simultaneously
1 Click a graphic in the group.
Be careful to select the graphic, not the blank space between the graphics.
2 Right-click, and click Object Properties.
3 Make the modifications you want.
To change the fill and border settings of all solid graphics in a
group simultaneously
1 Click the object or Draw Picture window.
2 Click the group, then click Object Properties.
3 Click one or more of the following tabs:
Fill — sets select the color and fill type
Line — sets the line style, color, width, joints, and start and end
markers
Shadow — sets the shadow direction, offset, and shadow color
4 Make the appropriate changes on the selected tab.
Making graphics transparent
You can make drawn graphic shapes, the Draw Picture window, and inserted
graphics in your spreadsheet transparent. One way to use a transparent
graphic is when you want to create a watermark on a spreadsheet. If you
mark the graphic as transparent, the color won’t display.
To make an inserted graphic transparent or the Draw Picture
window
1 Click the graphic border.
Click Format, Selection
Click the Properties button
3 Click the Box Type tab, then enable the Transparent check box.
418
To make a drawn shape transparent
1 Click the shape, then click Format, Object Properties, Fill.
2 Click the Fill tab, then choose None for Fill Style.
Aligning and spacing drawn graphics
You can align or center drawn graphics in the Draw Picture window and
adjust the amount of space between graphics. You can align
single objects — align with respect to the draw window margins
multiple objects — align all objects within the selection area (for example,
Align, Left aligns all selected objects with the left edge of the object that
is furthest left)
The Space Evenly option places an equal amount of space between three or
more objects; the left most and right-most objects do not move, however,
other objects move to make all objects equidistant
To align or center graphics
1 Select the graphics or shapes you want to align.
2 Click Edit, Arrange, Align Objects.
Left — aligns the left sides of the selected graphics with the left
margin of the draw window
Right — aligns the right sides of the selected graphics with the right
margin of the draw window
Top — aligns the top edges of the selected graphics to the top margin
of the draw window
Bottom — aligns the bottom edges of the selected graphics to the
bottom margin of the draw window
Center Left/Right — aligns graphics vertically with respect to the draw
window
Center Top/Bottom — aligns graphics horizontally with respect to the
draw window
Center Both — moves both graphics to the center with respect to the
draw window
To space graphics
1 Select the graphics you want to space.
419
2 Click Edit, Arrange, Space Evenly.
Left/Right — spaces the graphics horizontally
Top/Bottom — spaces the graphics vertically
You can also use Snap To Grid to align chart and dialog graphics.
Right-click the chart or the dialog window title bar, then click Grid, Snap
To Grid.
Changing sections of .CGM or .CLP graphics
Computer graphics metafile (.CGM) and Quattro Pro graphics for DOS
(.CLP) files function as groups of graphics. To edit or change a part or all of
this type of graphic, the graphic must be ungrouped and then, after editing,
regrouped. For more information about working with grouped graphics, see
“Grouping graphics in charts, maps, or the Draw Picture window” on page
396 or “Changing the properties of grouped graphics” on page 418.
To change sections of .CGM or.CLP graphics
1 Select the graphic.
2 Click Format, Ungroup.
Handles appear around the individual objects in the graphic.
3 Click an object, then click the Properties button to change settings such as
the fill and border.
4 When you are finished, select all the objects and click Format, Group to
regroup the graphic.
If you want to ungroup graphics, you can right-click the graphic, and select
Ungroup.
You can also group graphics using the Group button.
420
ADDING MAPS TO
SPREADSHEETS
14
Maps can expose trends in adjoining regions that would be hidden in a
spreadsheet table or a numeric chart. You create maps just as you create
charts. They can appear in the same places — next to data or on its own
page. You can also customize maps and include them in a slide show.
Quattro Pro automatically selects the most appropriate map from those
available, then assigns colors or patterns to each region. Before you create a
map, it is important to arrange data in a suitable format.
Quattro Pro maps contain the following parts:
Title and subtitle — gives the map name and an indication of what
information the map shows.
Legend — provides users with a key to understanding the meaning of
patterns and colors used on a map, and the range of data each section
represents.
Pin — identifies cities or other important information.
Symbol — identifies the type of marker assigned to mark pin locations.
Overlay — is a layer of data which is superimposed on top of the basic
map. Highways, city locations, state borders and site locations (for
example, regional offices) can be added to maps with overlays.
After you create a map, you can change the way that data is represented on
your map, as well as add customized details like symbols and other graphic
Adding maps to spreadsheets
421
effects. You can edit the whole map or only portions of it. Once the map
contains all the features you want to include, you can copy and save it.
The Mapping component is accessible in Quattro Pro only if you have
included it with a custom installation of Quattro Pro.
Quattro Pro can recognize regions belonging to installed maps only. For
example, if you have data from states in India, Quattro Pro will not
recognize those states as part of India without installing the map India by
State.
All region names to be used in a map must be of the same type. For
example, you cannot use France, Germany, and Sicily as region names in
the same map, as Sicily is a part of Italy, and not a nation. If you replace
Sicily with Italy, however, you can display your data in a map of Western
Europe.
Setting up map data
You can create a map from spreadsheet data, sample data provided with
Quattro Pro, or a blank map. The Datamap files installed with the Quattro
Pro mapping component contain statistical and geographic data related to
various world regions. Sample data is stored in data map files and can be
copied to your spreadsheet and combined with your own spreadsheet data.
You can also sort and filter columns to obtain data results for a specific
category. For more information about sorting and filtering data, see
“Organizing and manipulating data” on page 217.
Quattro Pro automatically fills in the map with the data you provide. To have
Quattro Pro interpret your data correctly, enter it on the spreadsheet in the
following sequence:
A spreadsheet
showing region
name, color, pattern,
and pin information.
If you include latitude and longitude decimal values to identify a location,
enter them in the following order:
422
A spreadsheet
showing longitude
and latitude data.
Column A contains region names or IDs. You can list country names in
full, (for example, United Kingdom, France, Germany), or you can list
standard abbreviations (for example GB, FR, DE).
Column B contains color data associated with each region name.
Variations in this set of data are displayed as different colors in the map.
Color data can be either numbers or text.
Column C contains pattern data associated with each region name.
Variations in this second set of data are displayed as different patterns in
the map. Pattern data can be either numbers or text.
Column D contains either (1) the pin location or (2) latitude.
Column E contains either (1) the pin label or (2) longitude.
Column F contains pin labels if you have entered latitude and longitude.
Latitude is expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds north or south of
the equator.
Longitude is expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds east or west of
the prime meridian that runs through Greenwich, England.
For Quattro Pro to interpret latitude and longitude coordinates, you must
convert them to decimals. The simplest way to convert coordinates to
decimals is to use the @LLDEC function to create a new series. The
resulting coordinates are preceded by a minus sign if they are south of the
equator or west of the prime meridian. For example, the longitude coordinate
38×20’40"W converts to -38.334444. For more information about converting
latitude and longitude values to decimals, see the Quattro Pro spreadsheet
function @LLDEC function.For more information about Quattro Pro
spreadsheet functions, see the Reference Information in the online Help.
Map data is easier to select when you arrange it in adjacent columns. If your
notebook has blank columns or columns containing other data between your
map data columns, you need to exclude those columns from your selection.
Using Quattro Pro datamap files
You can copy columns and rows of data directly from a datamap file, or choose
only the data you need to create the map you want. Each datamap file is
write-protected preventing you from deleting any data. The regional datamap
423
files you can copy data from are: Australia, Canada, Europe, Japan, Mexico,
and the World. For example, if you want statistics on Australia, open the file
Australia.wb3. For a complete listing of all the files with descriptions of their
contents, read the datamaps.txt included in the Datamaps folder.
To copy data from the datamap file
1 Open a new notebook and save it with a new name of your choice.
2 Open a datamap file.
The default location is usually (C:\PROGRAM
FILES\COREL\WORDPERFECT OFFICE
2000\PROGRAMS\DATAMAPS).
3 Select the data you want to copy to your notebook.
Creating, sizing, and moving maps
You can use the Map Expert to create maps representing your data. The Map
Expert allows you to create floating maps or full-page maps. You can also
create map titles or subtitles in the Map Expert at the same time you create
your map. You can create a map without titles or subtitles, simply by leaving
those text boxes blank in the Map Expert.
When you create a map with data, Quattro Pro calculates the full range of
map data and assigns each map region one of six colors or patterns,
depending on where that region lies in the data range. The map legend
identifies the range of data associated with each color or pattern. The upper
range of the first group of ranges is greater than the lowest value or group of
values, and the upper range of the last group of ranges is greater than the
highest value in the map data.
When you create a map with Quattro Pro, the Map Expert displays a Check
Region list box when it encounters an unknown region in the data. You can
replace the unknown name with one from the list Quattro Pro provides, or
you can skip the region. If you skip the unknown region, the map displays no
data for that region. For example, you can replace an area name with an
abbreviation, or vice-versa.
You can also resize floating maps. You can change the aspect ratio for both
floating maps and full page maps to view the map’s proportions in relation to
the way the map is displayed.
Creating, moving, and sizing floating maps
Using the map expert, you can create a floating map from the data on your
spreadsheets. A floating map appears on the spreadsheet with the data it
424
represents. Once you create a floating map you can adjust the size and move
it anywhere on your spreadsheet.
To create a floating map
1 Select the cell references containing the map data.
The first cell must contain the first map region name.
2 Click Insert, Graphics, Map.
3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert.
4 Click or drag where you want to place the map on the spreadsheet.
You can create a blank map by not entering any cell references in the color
or pattern boxes in the Step 1 of 5 window of the Map Expert.
To move or resize a floating map
1 Click the borders of the map to select it.
Drag to move the map to where you want.
Drag a sizing handle to change the width or height.
Drag a corner handle to change the width and height without changing
map proportions.
You can also start the Map Expert by clicking the Create Map button on
the Experts And Numeric Tools toolbar.
Click the Tip button during any step in the Map Expert for more
information.
Creating full page maps
Quattro Pro lets you create maps on a separate page rather than on the
spreadsheet with the data it represents. You can also convert full page maps
into slides. For more information about adding maps to slide shows, see
“Adding charts and other objects to slide shows” on page 452.
To create a map on a separate page
1 Select the cell references containing the map data.
425
The first cell must contain the first map region name.
2 Click Insert, Graphics, Map.
3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert.
When you reach the Step 4 of 5 window in the Map Expert, enable the
Map Window button in the Destination section to create the map on a
separate page.
You can create a blank map by not entering any cell references in the color
or pattern boxes in the Step 1 of 5 window of the Map Expert.
Changing the aspect ratio of maps
When you change a map’s aspect ratio, you are changing the height and width
proportions of the map. Quattro Pro provides you with the following pre-set
aspect ratios: Floating chart, Screen Slide, 35-mm Slide, Print Preview, and
Full Extent. Changing the aspect ratio also changes the proportions of the
title and the legend. For this reason, maps with the Full Extent aspect ratio
often look different on a spreadsheet page than they do on their own page or
in one of the two slide formats. The Print Preview option provides a view of
how the same map looks when printed on 8.5 x 11 inch paper. For
information about printing maps, see “Printing charts, maps, and slide
shows” on page 484.
To change a map’s aspect ratio
1 Click the chart.
2 Click View, then click one of the following:
View Floating Chart — (default) retains the proportions of the floating
map, even when you print the map or display it on its own page
Screen Slide — displays the proportions for maps intended for use in
an onscreen slide show
35mm Slide — displays the correct proportions to a map that you plan
to send to a slide service for processing into 35-mm slides
Printer Preview — displays how the map looks when printed with the
current page setup
Full Extent — adjusts the map proportions to fill the window and fit
the area designated for the floating graph
426
To see examples of aspect ratio in Quattro Pro, see “Adjusting the aspect
ratio of charts” on page 380.
Displaying portions of a map
Quattro Pro provides you with zoom tools that let you view the map (or a
portion of the map) with increased or reduced magnification. You can create a
new map from the magnified view. For example, if you zoom a map of Africa
by Country, you can view a single country (for example, Egypt) on your map.
You can return to the original view of the region, as that zoom view does not
override the original.
You can print the magnified map if you use the Print command with the
selected zoom. If you save the notebook, the map is saved with the
magnification.
To use the zoom tool on a map
1 Click a map.
2 Right-click the area you want to zoom, then click one of the following:
Zoom To Normal — returns the map to its original magnification.
Zoom In — lets you expand a section of the map to fill the map window.
After you click Zoom In, the pointer changes to a magnifying glass.
Click and drag the pointer to select the section of the map you want to
magnify.
Zoom Out — reduces the magnification.
Center — lets you make a different point the center of the map window
without changing magnification. Right-click the point you want to make
the center of the map, then click Center.
Representing data using colors, patterns, and
overlays
Quattro Pro lets you use spreadsheet data and represent it on your map in
the form of colors and patterns. A map consists of one or more overlays with
or without spreadsheet data. For example, a map of the U.S. usually shows
state borders, but may also show highways or the location of major cities.
Each of these sets of boundaries or locations is called an overlay because
they can be laid on top of each other, like overhead transparencies or sheets
of tracing paper.
There are three types of overlays you can add to a map:
427
Region — shows boundaries, such as states or districts. A basic map
consists of one region overlay. You can link color or pattern data to region
overlays.
Static — shows other features, such as highways or the world grid. You
cannot alter the content of a static overlay.
Pin — shows points, such as cities or corporate offices. Unlike static
overlays, pin overlays are dynamically linked to location coordinates in
Quattro Pro notebooks, so you can select the points you want to display
and mark them with symbols or labels.
Every time you add an overlay to a map, the map becomes more complex.
Use overlays conservatively, so that your maps are easy to read. If you want
to use data from a different file or notebook, copy the data to your working
notebook or open the file before you add an overlay to your map. When the
Map Data dialog box is displayed, you can switch between open notebooks,
but you cannot open any other files.
Displaying map data by color or pattern
When you create a map, you have the option of displaying spreadsheet data
on the map. Colors and patterns show ranges related to the data on the
spreadsheet. You can include this information when you create the map with
the Map Expert, or you can add it to your map at a later time. You can also
remove the colors or patterns from a map related to a data selection.
Adding color and pattern data to maps
You can add color or pattern data series to maps at any time.
To add color and pattern data to a map
1 Right-click the map, then click Data.
Enter the cell references for the data you want to represent colors in
the Color Data box.
Enter the cell references for the data you want to represent patterns
in the Pattern Data box.
You can also edit a map following these methods: From the Objects Sheet,
click View, Objects, then double-click the map icon. You can also
right-click the map to bring up editing options.
428
Removing color and pattern data from maps
You can remove a color data series or a pattern data series from a map.
To remove map data
1 Right-click the map, then click Data.
Select the series in the Color Data edit field.
Select the series in the Pattern Data edit field.
3 Press DELETE.
Displaying region and static overlays on maps
If you want to associate color or pattern data with the regions in an overlay,
you need to select region names or IDs along with your color or pattern data.
If you leave the color, pattern, or pin location and label fields blank, Quattro
Pro adds only the region boundaries to your map.
If you add a region overlay to a map that already contains color data but no
pattern data, you can display pattern data in the regions defined within the
new overlay. Conversely, you can add color data to your overlay if the original
map has only pattern data. If you add an overlay from a different geographic
location, you need to zoom out before you can see the new overlay in the
map.
A basic map consists of one region overlay. You can display two different
regions in the same map using overlays. For example, if you create a map of
Canada, you can add a United States overlay and a Mexico overlay.
You can display the same type of data as colors or patterns across more than
one overlay if:
the data has the same type and increment, and
the regions in each overlay do not overlap. For example, you can add an
overlay of Canada by province onto a map of the United States, as long as
both regions use data sets of population data with the same increment,
such as population in thousands. You cannot, however, mix Canadian
employment data with United States population data, unless you display
one in colors and the other in patterns.
Unlike other types of overlays, static overlays do not require any notebook
data. Static overlays display correctly only if they are appropriate for the
current map. For example, a static overlay of U.S. highways is of no use in a
map of Japan.
429
Quattro Pro includes two static overlays: the U.S. Interstate Highways
overlay, and the World Grid overlay. The U.S. Interstate Highways overlay
marks in the major highways which cross the United States. The World Grid
overlay adds longitude and latitude lines to the map.
Adding region overlays to maps
You can add region overlays to a map to display regional boundaries.
To add a region overlay to a map using the Map Data dialog box
1 In a notebook spreadsheet, click a map.
Click Chart, Map, Data.
Double-click a map, then click Chart, Series.
Right-click a map, then click Data.
3 Click the Add Overlay button.
4 Click the Region tab.
When you create a map with the Map Expert, the first region overlay is
added automatically when you create the map.
Displaying multiple regions in maps
You can extend a map to add other regions to it. For example, you can add the
Africa overlay to a map of Asia if you want to show all the countries in the
Middle East. If you add another region to a map, make sure you add that
region’s region, color and pattern data to your spreadsheet. For more
information about organizing map data, see “Setting up map data” on page
422.
To display another region on a map
1 Add the region data to your spreadsheet, including any color or pattern
data.
2 Right-click the map, then click Data, Add Overlay.
3 Select a region to add, then click OK.
4 Enter the cell addresses for the new region in the Region Names box.
430
5 Enter the cell addresses for the new region data you want represented by
color.
6 Enter the cell addresses for the new region data you want represented by
patterns.
7 Zoom out to view the new region added to the map.
For information about using the zoom feature with Quattro Pro maps, see
“Displaying portions of a map” on page 427.
Adding static overlays to maps
Quattro Pro includes two static overlays which apply pre-set data to your
maps: the World Grid, and the U.S. Highway grid.
To add the World Grid or the U.S. Highway grid
1 Right-click the map, click Data, Add Overlay.
2 Click the Static tab.
3 Choose one of the following overlays in the Static overlay list:
US Interstate Highways
World Grid
Working with city and location overlays
Quattro Pro lets you create pin overlays to show specific locations. You can
mark any location on a map using names or coordinates. If you enter names
of U.S. state capitals, world capitals, or world major cities, Quattro Pro can
mark those on the map. To enter any other location, use the latitude and
longitude coordinates.
You can also create pin symbol overlays for other features you want to
display on the map. For example, you can show the location of important
buildings, geographic landmarks, and historic sites. If you want to add
specific locations to a map, you can create an overlay that includes longitude
and latitude intersection points relative to the locations.
Adding cities to maps with pin overlays
Pin overlays can display locations of cities or towns. You can add pin overlays
when you create the map or at a later time. Before you add a pin overlay,
make sure the spreadsheet data is organized correctly. Enter the names of
major cities, their longitudes and latitudes in the three columns next to your
431
other map data in your notebook. Or, copy the same data from a datamap file
into the appropriate columns. For more information about organizing map
data, see “Setting up map data” on page 422.
To add major cities with the Map Expert
1 Select the data on the spreadsheet.
2 Click Insert, Graphic, Map.
3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert until you get to step 4.
4 Click the Mark Points on Your Map button.
5 Do either or both of the following:
Enter the cell addresses for the Pin IDs in the Pin IDs box.
Enter the cell addresses for the pin labels in the Pin Labels box.
To add major cities to an existing map
1 Click the map.
2 Right-click, and click Data, Add Overlay.
3 Click the Pin tab, and enable the Use Pin Name button.
4 Choose a city overlay in the list.
5 Type the cell addresses containing the pin IDs in the Pin ID Cells box.
6 Type the cell addresses containing the pin labels in the Pin Label Cells
box.
To add major cities to a map using longitude and latitude
2 Click the Pin tab, and enable the Use Lat/Long. button.
3 Type a name for the overlay in the Name box.
4 Type the cells containing the latitude values in the Latitude Cells box.
5 Type the cells containing the longitude valued in the Longitude Cells box.
6 Type the cells containing the pin labels in the Pin Label Cells box.
432
Adding specific pin locations to maps
You can add pin locations of corporate branch offices, historic sites, or
geographic landmarks to your maps. Before you add a pin overlay, make sure
the spreadsheet data is organized correctly. Enter the names of locations and
their longitudes and latitudes in the three columns next to your other map
data in your notebook. For more information about organizing location data,
see “Setting up map data” on page 422.
To add pin locations to a map with the Map Expert
1 Select the data on the spreadsheet.
2 Click Insert, Graphic, Map.
3 Follow the directions in the Map Expert until you get to step 4.
4 Click the Mark Points on Your Map button.
5 Type a name for the overlay in the Name box.
6 Type the cell references containing the latitude values in the Latitude
Cells box.
7 Type the cell references containing the longitude valued in the Longitude
Cells box.
8 Type the cell references containing the label names you want to appear
next to the pins in the Pin Label Cells box.
To add pin locations to an existing map
1 Click the map.
2 Right-click, and click Data, Add Overlay.
3 Click the Pin tab, enable the Use Lat./Long. button.
4 Follow steps 5 to 8 in the previous procedure.
5 Click OK.
For information about changing the pin symbol or the appearance of the
pin symbols and labels, see “Customizing pin location labels” on page 434
and “Customizing pin location symbols” on page 434.
433
Customizing pin location labels
You can change the appearance of a pin label by applying different font
properties. You can also display only the labels at the pin location or the
labels next to a symbol.
To change the appearance of pin location labels
1 Click a region on the map.
2 Click the Property button.
3 Click the Pin Symbol tab.
4 Enable the Display Pin Labels check box.
5 Click the Font tab.
Choose a new font from the Face list.
Choose a new font size from the Size list.
Choose a font color from the Color list.
To display pin labels but no pin symbols on maps
4 Enable the Display Pin Labels check box.
5 Disable the Pin Symbol check box.
Pin labels appear in your map only if you select them along with your pin
names or latitude and longitude coordinates. If you do not include the
labels in your selection, pin locations are marked with a symbol or left
blank, depending on the Display Pin Symbol setting.
Customizing pin location symbols
You can change the pin symbol that displays next to any label. For example,
you can display symbols that represent schools, direction arrows, or other
landmarks on your map.
434
To change the location symbol
1 Click the map.
4 Enable the Display Pin Symbols check box.
Choose a new font from the Face list.
Choose a new font size from the Size list.
Choose a font color from the Color list.
6 Choose a symbol from the Symbol list to change the symbol used.
To display pin symbols with no pin labels in maps
4 Disable the Display Pin Labels check box.
5 Enable the Pin Symbol check box.
Hiding labels and symbols
You can hide either the label or the symbol of a pin location.
To hide a pin location or symbol
Disable the Display Pin Labels check box to hide the pin label.
Disable the Pin Symbol check box to hide the pin symbol.
Moving and resizing legends, titles, and objects
The region displayed on a map is an object. Legends, titles, and any
additional graphics you add to a map, are also map objects. Each object can be
435
resized or moved around on the map independently. As well, multiple objects
can be selected and moved or resized as a unit.
Moving map objects on the map
You can move the title and subtitle, the legend, and the region. The title and
subtitle move as a unit.
To move a map object
1 Click the object to select it.
2 Drag to move the object to its new position on the map.
To move multiple map objects
1 Click a map object to select it.
2 Press SHIFT and click a second map object.
3 Drag to move the objects to their new positions on the map.
Resizing map objects
You can change the size of the titles, the legend, and the region. Resizing
titles and subtitles means resizing the text box around them.
To resize a map object
1 Click the object to select it.
map proportions.
To resize multiple map objects
1 Click an object to select it.
2 Press SHIFT and click another map object.
map proportions.
436
Editing maps
When you want to change a map, you can edit the map and the map objects
by modifying the properties associated with each. You can change the box
around the map, the background, and the type of font used in any text
displayed on the map. You can select the alignment of titles, or insert a
graphic as fill into a map or a background.
Editing map properties
Quattro Pro lets you edit maps using the main menu, using the submenu, and
from the Objects sheet. Like charts, any map you create is stored on the
Objects sheet at the back of the notebook. For information about editing
specific map properties, see “Editing maps” on page 437.
To edit a map from the main menu
1 Click the map you want to edit.
2 Click Chart, Edit Chart, then specify the chart.
3 Click the part of the map you want to edit.
4 Right-click, then click the Properties option at the bottom of the
submenu.
This option varies depending on what you have selected.
5 In the dialog box, select formatting as required.
To edit a map using the submenu
1 Click the map you want to edit.
2 Click the part of the map you want to edit.
3 Right-click, and click the Properties option at the bottom of the submenu.
This option varies depending on what you have selected.
To edit a map from the Objects sheet
1 Click View, Objects to go to the Objects sheet.
2 Double-click the map icon you want to edit.
Right-click the part of the map you want to edit, then click the
Properties option at the bottom of the submenu.
437
Double-click the part of the map you want to edit to display the
Properties dialog.
Redrawing maps to reflect data selections
You can redraw the map automatically when you make changes to
spreadsheet data, or you can choose the option of manually updating the
maps.
To set map redraw options
1 Click the map.
2 Right-click the region, click Map Properties, then click the Redraw
Options tab.
Automatic — lets you update the map every time the source data
changes.
Manual — lets you update the map only when you click Redraw in a
submenu.
To redraw the map manually
Right-click the map, then click Redraw.
Changing map borders
You can customize a map border (or the box around the map) to coordinate
with a color scheme used on the map itself. The drop shadow option also
creates a 3-D look to the map border.
To change map borders
1 Right-click the map, then click Map Properties.
2 Click the Border Color tab, then click a color on the on-screen Color
Palette.
3 Click the Box Type tab, then enable a box type button (None, Thin,
Medium, or Thick) to choose the line style.
4 Enable the Drop Shadow check box to create a drop shadow behind the
border.
438
Changing the map background
You can change the map background to display colors, patterns, or wash
effects. In addition, you can also make the background transparent.
To change the map background
2 Click Chart, Background Properties.
3 Choose a background fill type from the Fill Style list:
Pattern — to choose a solid color or two-color pattern.
Wash — to choose a wash effect using one or two colors.
4 You can do one or both of the following:
Choose a color from the Start Color list.
Choose a color from the End Color list.
To make the map background transparent
1 Right-click the map, then click Map Properties.
2 Click the Border Color tab, then click a color on the on-screen Color
Palette.
3 Click the Box Type tab, then enable the Transparent check box.
Making the background transparent overrides the background fill options
you set on the Background Properties dialog box.
Displaying a graphic in the map background
Quattro Pro lets you use a graphic file as a background fill for a map. You can
select from any of these formats: .BMP, .TIF, .PCX, .GIF.
439
To display a graphic in the background
1 Click a map on a notebook sheet.
2 Click Chart, Background Properties, Fill Settings.
3 Choose Bitmap in the Fill Style list.
Crop To Fit — cuts out areas of the graphics which do not fit.
Tile To Fit — covers the entire map background with the graphic
image.
Shrink To Fit — shrinks or enlarges the drawing to fit within the map
background.
6 Choose the drive and folder where the graphics file is stored.
Changing map font properties
You can select different text properties like font, appearance, and size for
titles, subtitles, and legend titles in maps. You can also select the fill style
and color of the text.
To change map font properties
1 Click the map.
2 Right-click the text you want to modify, then click Chart Title Properties.
440
Text Font — to change the face, size, or appearance of the font.
Text Settings — to change the Fill style or color settings.
Adding, editing, and deleting map titles
You can add titles, subtitles, or legend titles to your maps, either as a step in
the Map Expert, or after the map is created. As well, if the map has an
inappropriate title or subtitle, you can delete it. You can retype a title or
subtitle to reflect contents of any map. For example, if you change the data
shown in the map, you can update the titles to indicate what data the map
displays.
To add titles to maps using the Map Titles dialog box
1 Right-click the map, then click Titles.
2 Type text in any of the following boxes:
Main Title
Subtitle
Legend title
To delete a map title
1 Right-click the map, then click Titles.
2 Choose the title(s) you want to delete, then click DELETE.
To retype text in a title or subtitle
1 Click the map, then click the title or subtitle you want to modify.
2 Put the pointer at the end of the text, and hold down BACKSPACE until
you have removed the undesired text.
3 Type the new title or subtitle.
You can also click a map, then click Chart, Titles to display the Map Titles
dialog box.
If you want to remove the existing text in a text frame, press DELETE.
441
Changing the alignment of titles and subtitles
Quattro Pro lets you align your titles and subtitles from the Titles Property
dialog box, or by manually moving the titles in question.
To change the alignment of titles and subtitles in maps
1 Click the map, right-click the text you want to modify, then click
Properties.
2 Click the Alignment tab, then click either the left alignment button or the
right alignment button.
To move titles manually
1 Click the edge of the title or subtitle.
A text frame displays around the titles.
2 Drag the text frame where you want the titles.
Editing map legends
In Quattro Pro, legends are map objects that help control how data is
represented on the map. You can edit the map legend, change map legend
colors, patterns, position, or layout. Each color or pattern in a legend and its
associated range of values is called a bin. For example, red might represent
values ranging from 0 to 500, blue might represent values of 500 to 1000, and
so on. In this case, a region with a value of 375 would be red, and a region
with a value of 725 would be blue.
A map can contain only six colors and six patterns, but you can display data
for many regions at once by assigning multiple regions to one of the available
colors or patterns. You can use the Map Legend Properties to override bin
assignments.
Adding titles to map legends
You can give a map legend a title at any time.
To add a title to a map legend
1 Click the map, then click Chart, Legend.
2 Click the Title tab, then type the title in the Legend Title box.
442
You can also right-click the legend, then click Legend Properties to
display the dialog box. Then, follow step 2 in the above procedure.
Adding and editing legend text
You can add new text to the legend, or edit text you add to a legend. The text
you add to the legend replaces the numeric values connected to the legend
on the map display.
To add text to a legend
1 Click a map on a spreadsheet.
Colors
Patterns
4 Type the text you want in the Legend Text boxes next to each color or
pattern bin.
To edit text in a legend
Colors
Patterns
Leave the Legend Text boxes next to each color or pattern bin blank to
display only numeric values.
Enter the text you want to display in the Legend Text boxes next to
each color or pattern bin.
Changing legend color selections
You can choose the set of colors you want to represent the data on your map
legend. You can also exclude color data from some map regions by requiring
exact matches with bin values.
443
To change map legend colors
3 Click the Colors tab.
4 Click the current color and select a new color to change the color
associated with a color bin.
To exclude color data from some regions
2 Enable the Set Bin Values Manually check box.
3 Enable the Require Exact Match check box.
You can also exclude color data from some regions by requiring exact
matches with bin values.
For information about any legend properties option, click the What’s This
button, then click the option.
Changing legend pattern selections
You can choose the set of patterns you want to represent the data on your
map legend. You can also exclude pattern data from some regions by
requiring exact matches with bin values.
To change map legend patterns
3 Click Patterns.
4 Click the current pattern, then choose a new pattern in the Pattern list to
change the pattern associated with a pattern bin.
To exclude pattern data from some regions
3 Enable the Require Exact Match check box.
444
You can also make changes to a legend by clicking a chart, right-clicking
the legend, then clicking Legend Properties or by clicking a map, then
clicking Chart, Legend.
Changing legend bin values
You can change the values assigned to a legend by changing the maximum
values for the color or pattern bins.
To change the values of the map legend
Colors
Patterns
5 Enter new values in the Maximum Value boxes next to each color bin.
Positioning the legend
You can change where the legend sits on a map. As well, you can place the
legend on the right of the map or below the map. You can also drag the
legend to another position on the map. For information about dragging the
legend, see “Moving and resizing legends, titles, and objects” on page 435.
To change the position of a legend
1 Click a map.
2 Click Chart, Legend, Legend Position.
Legend right — to place the legend to the right of the map.
Legend below — to place the legend below the map.
Hiding and displaying the legend
You can display only the color or pattern legend. As well, you can hide the
whole legend.
445
To hide the color or pattern legend
1 Click a map.
Colors
Patterns
4 Disable one of the following check boxes:
Show Color Legend
Show Pattern Legend
To hide the legend
1 Click a map.
3 Click the Legend Position tab.
4 Click the Hide legend button.
Once you hide a legend, you cannot access the properties dialog box by
right-clicking the map.
To display a hidden map legend
1 Click a map.
3 Click the Legend Position tab.
Legend right — to display the legend to the right of the map.
Legend below — to display the legend below the map.
Saving and copying maps
After you have created and customized a map, you can save the map with
your spreadsheet. You can also copy the maps you make to other locations on
your spreadsheet. You can save maps independently from the spreadsheet as
graphic files, which allows you to use the map with other applications.
446
Saving and deleting maps
When you save a notebook, Quattro Pro saves every map in that notebook.
You can see the maps saved on a notebook by opening the Objects sheet.
To save a map in a notebook
Click File, Save.
To delete a map
1 Click the map.
2 Press DELETE.
Copying maps
You can insert the same map in more than one place in the notebook. Any
time you make changes to a map, all maps on a spreadsheet associated with
that map reflect the changes. If you do not want the maps to automatically
update to reflect changes to the source data you must use the manual redraw
feature. For more information about working with the redraw feature, see
“Redrawing maps to reflect data selections” on page 438.
To insert a chart on a notebook sheet
1 Click the spreadsheet where you want to insert the map.
2 Right-click the spreadsheet, then click Insert Chart.
3 Choose a map from the list.
4 Click OK.
The mouse pointer changes to a miniature chart.
5 Drag the mouse to specify the size and placement of the map.
If you create a map, you can change its aspect ratio if the chart appears to
have too much background area. For information about changing the map’s
aspect ratio, see “Changing the aspect ratio of maps” on page 426.
Saving maps as graphic files
When you save a map as a graphic file, you also save any drawn shapes,
imported graphics, or text boxes associated with the map. If you want to
include maps in a 35-mm slide show, you must set the map’s aspect ratio to
35mm Slide before saving as a graphic and talk to the slide service bureau
447
about which file formats they support. This adjusts the map object
proportions so the whole map appears centered on the slide. For more
information on setting the aspect ratio of maps, see “Changing the aspect
ratio of maps” on page 426.
To save a map as a graphic
1 Click the map.
2
Click Chart, Export to File.
8 Enable the Bitmap Gray Scale check box to save the map without colors.
.GIF files must be exported when you are in 256 color (or less) mode.
.JPG files can only export in true color mode.
448
DEVELOPING SLIDE SHOWS IN
QUATTRO PRO
15
Quattro Pro lets you create professional-looking slide shows with a variety of
graphic and automation effects. You can create slide shows using maps,
charts, and graphics stored in a notebook.
You can use a variety of features to build your slide show. Master slides let
you apply formats to all the slides in your slide show at once. Transition
effects determine how the slide show moves from slide to slide. Chart
buttons let you create jumps between slides.
The slides you create are stored in miniature form on a virtual light table. In
Light Table view, you can add, copy, move, and edit slides. You can also
change the slide order, transition effect, transition speed, and display time
assigned to each slide.
The Light Table
displays slides in the
order in which they
will appear in the
slide show
Creating slide shows
All the objects you create in your notebook — charts, maps, and graphics —
are minimized into icons and placed on the Objects sheet. You can create
slides directly from these icons. Because there are many types of icons
Developing slide shows in Quattro Pro
449
residing on an Objects sheet, the term “chart icon” will be used to describe
any graphical icon.
Once you have created a slide show, a slide show icon appears on the Objects
sheet.
You can create slide shows from bullet charts. Bullet charts are especially
effective in slide shows. They can be used to introduce graphics, list key
information, or summarize main points.
The slides that make up a slide show are stored on the Light Table.If you
decide your slide show requires a slide of a chart that you have not yet
created, you can create a new chart slide from the Light Table.
Your slide show is saved as part of the current notebook when you save
the notebook.
Creating slide shows from Objects sheet icons
There are two methods of creating slide shows with Objects sheet icons. You
can create slides directly from icons on the Objects sheet, or you can create a
blank slide show on the Light Table and then add icons from the Objects
sheet to your slides.
When you create a slide show without specifying any formatting, the current
default formats are applied to your slides.
To create a slide show on the Objects sheet
1 Click View, Objects.
2 Hold down SHIFT and select the icons you want to turn into slides.
Be sure to select them in the order in which you want them to be shown.
3 Click Tools, New Slide Show.
4 In the Slide Show Name text box, type a name for the slide show.
To view a chart icon in its own window, double-click it.
To create a slide show on the Light Table
2 Click a blank area of the Objects sheet to deselect all icons.
450
3 Click Tools, New Slide Show.
4 Type a name for the slide show and click OK.
This opens the Light Table.
5 Click Window, Tile Top to Bottom to display both the Objects sheet and
the Light Table.
To add an existing notebook chart to the slide show, drag the chart icon
from the Objects sheet to the Light Table.
To add a blank slide, click Tools, New Slide, From New Chart, then
leave all the series blank.
To close the Light Table and return to the Objects sheet
Click the Close button in the upper right corner of the Light Table window.
You can also close the Light Table window by clicking CTRL+F4.
If you select an icon by mistake, hold down the SHIFT key and click the
icon to deselect it.
Creating slide shows from bullet charts
You can create slide shows from bullet charts created from data on a
spreadsheet. For information about creating bullet charts, see “Working with
bullet charts” on page 341.
To create a slide show from bullet charts
1 Select the bullet chart data on your spreadsheet.
2 Click Tools, Slide Show, New.
3 Follow the steps in the Slide Show Expert.
4 When you have finished using the Slide Show Expert, the Light Table
displays the slides in a thumbnail view.
Leave a space between the bullet charts on your spreadsheet to
distinguish them as individual charts.
451
Creating slides from cell data
You can create a new chart on the Light Table and turned it into a slide. For
more information on creating a new chart, see “Creating custom charts” on
page 307.
To create a slide from cell data
1 On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon.
2 Click Tools, New Slide, From New Chart.
3 In the New Custom Chart dialog box, fill in the cell data that describes
your new chart.
Adding charts and other objects to slide shows
You can add a single chart icon or several chart icons to a slide show using
the drag and drop method.
To add a chart to a slide show using only the Objects sheet
On the Objects sheet, drag one or more chart icons and drop them on a
slide show icon.
To add objects from the Objects sheet to a slide show on the
Light Table
the Light Table.
3 Drag an object from the Objects sheet to the Light Table.
When you drag the icons to the Light Table, they are arranged in the slide
show in the order they are selected.
For information about adding slides to your slide show, see “Adding slides
to existing slide shows” on page 466.
452
To select more than one object icon, hold down SHIFT and select the
object icons.
You can drag slides from the Light Table to a spreadsheet to create a
chart.
Previewing slide shows and changing the view
Previewing a potential slide show gives you an idea of how your slides will
look when they are full-size and in sequence.
You can view your slides and resize them on the Light Table. If you have a
large slide show, you can choose to view your slides in a small format to see
more slides at once. Choose a large slide format to view the slides in more
detail, for example, to read the text on slides.
Previewing charts on the Objects sheet
On the Objects sheet, you can preview how your charts look on a full screen
before you turn them into slides.
To preview charts
1 Hold down SHIFT and select several charts, in the sequence you want to
present them, from the chart icons on the Objects sheet.
2 Click Tools, Play Slide Show.
3 Click anywhere on the chart to move to the next chart.
Chart buttons work when you display charts in this way. For information
about creating chart buttons, see “Using chart buttons to create slide
show jumps” on page 467.
Double-click a chart to preview it before adding it to the slide show.
Viewing slides
You can view your slides on the Light Table.
To view a slide
On the Objects sheet, double-click a slide show icon.
453
Double-click a chart to preview it before adding it to the slide show.
Changing the viewing size of slides
You can change the size of the slide displayed in the Light Table. If you want
to fit more slides on the Light Table, you should choose the small format for
your slides. If you want to read text on a slide, you should choose the large
format.
You can also view slides by name.
To resize slides
2 Click View, then click one of the following options:
Small Slides
Medium Slides
Large Slides
To view slides by name
2 Click View, Name Only.
You can also resize slides by right-clicking the Light Table background,
clicking SlideSorter Properties, then clicking the Slide Type tab and
enabling the appropriate button.
Using master slides
A master slide sets the overall look of your slide show. It maintains common
elements such as a corporate logo, chart annotations, or a background style
for all the slides in a slide show. When the master slide contains a bullet
chart, this slide determines the position, size, and color of chart titles,
bullets, and bulleted text for all bullet chart slides in the show.
Chart elements are not carried over to other slides. For example, if the
master slide contains a pie chart, a pie chart will not appear in each slide.
454
The first slide position in the Light Table is reserved for the master slide. If a
slide follows the master slide, any chart elements that have a defined fill
color will overlay the master slide background. If the slide already has a
colored background fill style, the master slide format is ignored.
The master slide does not display when you play the slide show unless you
include it as a separate slide.
Master Slide Gallery
The Master Slide Gallery provides a collection of pre-designed slide
templates. You can choose a template to serve as a master slide for your slide
show.
Creating a new master slide
Master slides serve as templates for the entire slide show. Once you format a
master slide, all slides can adopt its format.
To create a master slide
2 Click Slides, New Master Slide.
A master slide model appears.
3 Right-click the part of the slide you want to customize, and click
Properties.
4 In the dialog box, select the desired formatting.
If you do not want a slide to use the master slide as its template, turn off
the Use Master Slide option before you select a master slide. For more
information about turning the Master Slide option off, see “Disabling the
master slide format for particular slides” on page 457.
Selecting a pre-defined master slide
The Master Slide Gallery provides a collection of pre-designed slide
templates. The template styles in the Master Slide Gallery are identical to
the ones in the Chart Gallery.
To create a master slide from a template
455
2 Click Slides, Master Slide Gallery.
3 Choose a template style.
If you need help deciding on the right style for a chart or chart
background, click the Advisor button.
To have Quattro Pro advise you on a master slide template
1 Follow steps 1-3 in the above procedure.
2 Click the Advisor button.
3 Move any of the following Constraints sliders depending on the effect you
want to achieve:
Informal/Formal
Entertaining/Serious
Sophisticated/Simple
Vivid/Subdued
Plain/Fancy
4 Enable any of the following check boxes depending on how you want to
present your slides:
Onscreen — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for
viewing onscreen.
35mm Slide — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for
viewing in 35 millimeter slides.
B+W Paper — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for
viewing on paper in black and white.
Color Paper — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for
viewing on paper in color.
B+W Transparency — the Advisor suggests slide templates
appropriate for viewing on black and white transparencies.
Color Transparency — the Advisor suggests slide templates
appropriate for viewing color transparencies.
5 Enable one of the following check boxes depending on the slide show
environment:
Darkened Room — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate
for viewing in a darkened room.
456
Lighted Room — the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for
viewing in a lighted room.
6 Click the Advise button.
7 Choose one of the styles from the Suggestions list, then click the Apply
button.
To use only some of the attributes of the master slide, see “Disabling the
master slide format for particular slides” on page 457.
Selecting a master slide from existing charts
You can use an existing chart as your master slide instead of choosing a
template style from the Master Slide Gallery.
To select a master slide from an existing chart
2 In the Light Table, click the background.
3 Click SlideSorter Properties.
4 Click the Master Slide tab.
5 Choose a chart to set as the master slide.
The master slide appears in the first slide position in the Light Table
window. It does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also
included as a separate slide.
Disabling the master slide format for particular slides
When your slide show uses a master slide, you can disable the master slide
format for particular slides. You can also choose to apply only some of the
master slide features.
To disable the master slide format for a particular slide
2 Right-click the slide, then click Slide Properties.
457
3 Click the Slide Effect tab.
4 Disable the Use Master Slide check box.
To apply only some master slide attributes to a slide
1 Select the master slide.
2 Click Edit, Copy.
This copies the master slide to the Clipboard.
3 Select the slide you want to customize.
5 In the Paste Special Chart dialog box, enable the check boxes for the
master slide features you want to keep.
Using slide transitions
A slide transition consists of three components: transitions effects that
determine how your slide show moves from one slide to the next; the length
of time that effect takes; and the amount of time a slide stays on-screen
before automatically moving to the next slide. To move from slide to slide,
you can choose transition effects such as dissolve, tilt up or down, spiral, and
curtain up or down. You can set the speed of the transition effect to slow,
medium, or fast. You can also determine how many seconds the slide will
display.
You can set a transition effect as the default transition for all slides in a slide
show.
Adding slide show transition effects
By default, each slide uses the “wipes right” transition effect to the next
slide in a slide show. However, you can choose from several types of
transition effects:
Wipes — simulates turning a page; the second slide appears to be
“underneath” the first one.
Tilts — gives the effect of one image “pushing away” another.
Dissolve — breaks up the slide into pixels as it changes to the next slide.
Overlaying slides
Use overlays to build slides from other slides. This method is effective for
displaying bullet charts one bullet at a time. The first slide would show only
the first bulleted item. The second slide would build on the first by adding
458
the second item. The subsequent slides would continue building until the
entire list is displayed.
Selecting slide show transitions and display times
You can choose several special transition effects when moving from one slide
to another.
To select a transition effect and speed
2 Right-click the appropriate slide and click Slide Properties.
4 From the Transition Effect list box, choose a transition effect.
By default, each slide immediately wipes right to the next slide.
5 To determine the speed of the transition effect, enable one of the
following buttons:
Slow
Medium
Fast
To quickly change the transition effect and speed of the effect
On the Light Table, select the slide and use the list boxes on the left side
of the Property bar to select the transition effects and speed for that slide.
For a description of transition effects, see “Using slide transitions” on
page 458.
Avoid Dissolve — 2x2 pixels unless there is good reason to keep your
viewers waiting (perhaps to increase suspense).
Moderate dissolves and fade out/fade in can be restful, but fast dissolves
(when run at full speed) can be abrupt.
Setting a display time for each slide
The display time determines how long each slide will be displayed.
459
To set a slide display time
2 Right-click the appropriate slide, and click Slide Properties.
4 In the Display Time list box, type the number of seconds you want the
slide to be displayed before the slide show moves to the next slide.
Entering zero (the default) will display the slide until the viewer clicks the
mouse or presses a key.
Overlaying slides
Use overlays to build slides one upon the other. Overlays effectively present
slides with bulleted lists. The first slide shows only the first bulleted item.
The second slide then builds on the first by adding the second item.
Subsequent slides continue building until all bulleted items are displayed.
The slides must be in the proper sequence for this effect to work.
To create slide overlays
2 Select the slide located after the slide you want to overlay, and right-click.
4 To overlay the previous slide instead of replacing it, enable the Overlay
Previous Slide check box.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the rest of the slides in the sequence.
Setting slide show defaults
Instead of setting transition effects, display times, master slides, and so forth
for each individual slide, you can establish default settings for all the slides in
your slide show.
If you create default settings for a slide show that contains customized slides,
these settings will affect only the slides you add after setting these defaults.
The following buttons set default features:
460
Transition Effect — controls the way each slide appears.
Slow, Medium, and Fast buttons — control the speed of the transition
effect.
Overlay Previous Slide — makes the selected slide overlay the
previous one instead of replacing it.
Use Master Slide — makes the selected slide display the template
style and chart elements used in the master slide. The master slide
also affects the position and color of chart titles and bulleted text in
bullet chart slides.
Skip Slide In Presentation — skips the selected slide during the slide
show presentation. (You can skip a slide without removing it.)
Display Time — specifies how long (in seconds) the slide will remain
on screen. Enter zero to display the slide until the viewer clicks the
mouse or presses a key.
To set slide show defaults
1 In the Light Table, right-click the background and click SlideSorter
Properties.
2 Click the Default Effect tab.
3 Choose default settings for the features listed above.
For information about using transition effects, see “Using slide
transitions” on page 458. For information about master slides, see “Using
master slides” on page 454.
Editing and formatting slides
When you edit a slide show, Quattro Pro displays the slides as though they
were laid out on a virtual light table. In Quattro Pro, this is called the Light
Table view. From this vantage point, you can edit a single slide or make
changes that affect the entire slide show.
The Light Table shows all the slides in the slide show in miniature form and
in the order in which they will appear in the slide show. You can rearrange
the order of slides, change the bullets in a bullet chart, or change slide text,
borders, or colors.
When you edit a slide, you edit the chart from which the slide is made.
However, deleting a slide does not remove the corresponding chart from the
notebook. You can also edit the chart in a chart window or on a spreadsheet.
461
You can modify slide shows by adding new slides from the Objects sheet,
copying existing charts to your slide show, or adding slides from another
slide show.
Quattro Pro also lets you rename slides and slide shows, and add comments
to slides.
Editing a slide show
You can edit a slide show from a spreadsheet or from the Objects sheet.
To edit a slide show from a spreadsheet
1 On a spreadsheet, click Tools, Slide Show, Edit.
2 From the Select Slide Show list box, choose a slide show to edit.
To edit a slide show from the Objects sheet
1 Click Tools, Edit Slide Show.
2 From the Select Slide Show list box, choose a slide show to edit.
The Slide Show Property Bar contains additional tools for editing slide
shows and formatting slides.
Moving, copying, and deleting slides
You can build and modify a slide show by copying, moving, and deleting
slides. You can also copy or move slides from other slide shows in other
notebooks.
To move a slide to a new position
On the Light Table, drag the slide icon to a new location.
To copy charts and slides into a slide show
1 Select one of the following:
charts on a spreadsheet
chart or slide show icons on the Objects sheet
slides in a Light Table window
When you select a slide show icon, all slides in the slide show are
selected.
462
2 Click Edit, Copy.
3 On the Objects sheet, double-click the slide show icon for the slide show
that will receive the copied slides.
4 Click Slides, Edit Slide Show.
5 Select the slide that will appear before the copied slides.
The slide(s) will be added after the selected slide.
You can also copy a slide by pressing CTRL and dragging the slide to a
new location.
To drag one or more slides between multiple Light Tables
2 Click File, Open, and select another notebook file where you have created
a slide show.
3 Repeat step 1.
4 Click Window, Tile Top to Bottom to display the two Light Tables on the
same screen.
5 Drag one or more slides from one Light Table and drop them into the
other Light Table.
Add slides directly by dragging chart icons to a slide show icon in the
Objects sheet.
You can also drag slides from the Light Table to a spreadsheet to create a
chart.
Rearranging the slide order
You can rearrange the order of slides in your slide show.
To rearrange the order of the slides
463
2 Click and drag the slide icon to a new position.
The pointer turns into a four-way arrow.
To rearrange slides, you can also use the Edit, Cut, Copy, and Paste
commands.
The Light Table scrolls to reveal more slides if you drag the pointer to the
top or bottom edge.
Changing slide bullets
You can change the bullets in a bullet chart slide to a variety of styles.
To change slide bullets
2 Double-click the slide to enlarge the view.
3 Right-click a bullet, then click Bullet Series Properties.
4 Choose any of the following options:
Bullet Style — sets the bullet symbol
Bullet Indentation — sets the indentation
Bullet Color — sets the bullet color
Text Settings — sets text color, background, and fill settings
Text Font — sets the text size, style, and appearance
Line Spacing — sets the amount of spacing between bullet lines
When you edit a slide, your changes affect the corresponding chart.
However, deleting a slide does not remove the corresponding chart from
the notebook.
Changing slide text
You can change slide text by changing the original chart or graphic in the
notebook or by making changes from within the Light Table.
464
To edit slide text
Edit the text on the spreadsheet.
This will change text in both the chart and the slide.
To change slide text fonts
3 Right-click an area with text, then click the Properties option.
4 Do one or both of the following:
To change the font of bullets, click the Text Settings tab or the Text
Font tab.
To change the font of a slide title or subtitle, click the Title Font (or
Subtitle Font) tab or the Title (or Subtitle) Text Settings tab.
Changing slide borders or colors
You can change the border of a slide, and the colors or patterns of individual
elements in the slide. For example, you can change the color of the
background, chart bars or lines, or fill patterns.
To change slide borders
2 Right-click the border, then click Background Properties.
3 Click the Box Settings tab.
4 Do either of the following:
To change the border color, choose a color from the Fill Color list box.
To change the border type, choose a box type.
To change the color of slide elements
2 Right-click an element to modify, then click the properties option.
4 Make the desired color changes.
465
Adding slides to existing slide shows
After you have created a slide show, you can expand it by adding new slides.
To add slides to a slide show
Light Table.
To add an existing chart to the slide show, drag the chart from the
Objects sheet to the Light Table.
To create a new slide from cell data, click Slides, New Slide, From New
Chart, and then fill in the series data.
To add a blank slide, click Slides, New Slide, From New Chart, and
then leave all of the series blank.
For information about filling in series data, see “Creating custom charts”
on page 307.
Renaming slides and slide shows
You may want to rename a slide or an entire slide show. Renaming slides lets
you apply a more meaningful name when you have used the default names
(Chart 1, Chart 2, etc.) for charts and graphics.
To rename a slide
1 Right-click an icon on the Objects sheet, then click Icon Properties.
2 Enter the new name of the chart in the Name dialog box.
To rename a slide show
1 Right-click the slide show icon on the Objects sheet, then click SlideShow
Properties, Name.
466
Adding and viewing slide comments
If you want to make special note of a slide, you can attach a short comments
to it. This comment is contained in a dialog box and will not appear on the
slide.
To add comments to a slide
2 Right-click a slide, then click Slide Properties.
3 Click the Slide Comment tab.
4 Type a comment in the Enter Text box.
To view a slide comment
Follow steps 1 to 3 in the above procedure.
Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps
You can jump from one slide to any other by simply clicking it. This is done
by creating a text box chart button which is connected to a macro.
Chart buttons let you construct branching presentations driven by the
viewer’s clicks. This hypertext-like ability offers virtually unlimited
possibilities. For example, you can set up a self-playing slide show that starts
by asking the viewer what he or she wants to learn.
You can create an invisible background chart button that defines what will
happen when a viewer clicks anywhere outside the text box chart button. For
example, this button lets you specify what will happen when a viewer
randomly clicks in a slide show.
Each chart can have many text box chart buttons, but only one background
button.
Chart buttons are active whenever a chart appears full-screen in a slide show
or when you right-click the chart and choose View. Chart buttons are inactive
in a chart window or in a chart on a spreadsheet.
Creating chart buttons
You can create a jump to another slide in your slide show by creating a chart
button. When you click a chart button on a slide, you can jump forward or
backward to different sections.
467
To create a chart button
1 Click a chart on a spreadsheet.
2 Click Insert, Shape, Text Box, and drag to create the button on the chart.
3 Type a button name in the text box.
4 Right-click the text box, then click Text Box Properties.
5 Click the Chart Button tab.
6 Enable the Select Chart check box.
7 In the Select Chart list box, select a chart to jump to.
8 Enable the Execute Macro check box.
9 Type a macro name in the box. For example, if you created the button in
Chart 1 to jump to Chart 2, in the Execute Macro text box, type
Slide.GoTo “Chart 2".
For more information about macros commands, see the Quattro Pro
Macro Command List in the Reference information section of the Quattro
Pro online Help.
Chart buttons are active whenever the chart appears full-screen — in a
slide show or when you right-click the chart and choose View. They are
inactive in a chart window or in a chart on a spreadsheet.
Creating background chart buttons
You can create an invisible background chart buttonchart button. When you
click anywhere in the background of the slide, the slide show jumps to a
pre-defined slide.
To create a background chart button
1 Right-click the background of the chart, then select Background
Properties.
2 Click the Chart Button tab.
3 Enable the Select Chart check box.
4 Select a chart to jump to in the Select Chart list box.
468
5 Enable the Execute Macro check box.
6 Type a macro name in the box. For example, to jump to Chart 6 whenever
a viewer clicks in the slide background, in the Execute Macro text box,
type Slide.GoTo “Chart 6".
Playing slide shows
Play your slide show to review how everything works together — the order
of slides, the formats, the transitions, and the jumps. While playing a slide
show, you can hide or show the pointer, skip over a slide in the slide show, or
create jumps in your slide show.
Playing slide shows
You can play a slide show from a spreadsheet or from the Light Table.
To play your slide show from a spreadsheet
From a spreadsheet, click Tools, Slide Show, Play.
From a Light Table window, click Slides, Play Slide Show.
2 Select a slide show.
To...
Do this...
Go to next slide
Left-click or press SPACE BAR.
Go to previous slide
Right-click or press BACKSPACE.
Go to a selected slide
Left-click+right-click, or press F5.
Cancel slide show
Press ESC.
Jump to another slide
Click a chart button or type its first letter.
Sound files in the slide show will be ignored.
For information about editing slides, see “Editing and formatting slides”
on page 461.
Hiding/showing the pointer during a slide show
You can display a pointer on a slide when there are chart buttons in the slide
show. A chart button lets you jump to other parts of the slide show. It is
469
helpful to hide the pointer if your slide show contains no chart buttons for
branching to different slides.
To hide or show the pointer during a slide show
1 Right-click the slide show icon on the Objects sheet, then click Slide
Show Properties, Show Pointer.
To hide the pointer, click No.
To show the pointer, click Yes.
To redisplay the pointer, follow the above steps and choose Yes to show
the pointer.
For more information on chart buttons, see “Creating chart buttons” on
page 467.
Skipping a slide in a slide show
If you create a slide show for a general audience, you may want to skip some
slides when you present that same slide show to a specific audience.
To skip a slide in a slide show
2 Right-click the slide to skip, then click Slide Properties.
4 Enable the Skip Slide In Presentation check box.
470
16
PRINTING
Quattro Pro provides extensive printing options. You can specify a printer or
preview a print job to see how it will look when you print.
You have complete control over what your printed data will look like. For
example, you can customize margin settings, paper size and orientation, and
add headers and footers. You can print your work in different ways by
choosing to print selected cells, specific pages, or the entire notebook.
You can save the document as a print file if you want to print from a computer
that does not have Quattro Pro installed, or if you take your printing to a
service bureau with high-quality printers.
Setting up a printer
Many printer settings are printer-specific; therefore, not all printer settings
may be available for your printer. Consult your Windows documentation and
printer manual for more information. Before you can print in Quattro Pro,
you need to specify a printer in the Control Panel. The printer is available in
all Windows applications.
If multiple printers are connected to your computer, you can specify which
printer to use in Quattro Pro, or you can add a new one. You can also set a
printer’s resolution. Resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (DPI)
appearing on a printed page.
Printing
471
Specifying a printer
Quattro Pro lets you specify the printer you want to use to print data from
your notebook.
To specify a printer for Quattro Pro
2 Choose a printer from the Name list box.
Adding a printer
You can add a printer if the one you want to use is not listed in the Print
dialog box.
To add a printer
2 Click the Details tab.
3 Click the Add Printer button.
4 Follow the instructions in the Add Printer wizard.
Setting printer resolution
Quattro Pro lets you set the print resolution, or print quality, for your print
job. Higher resolutions return better print quality.
To set the resolution for a printer
3 Choose a setting from the Resolution list box.
Previewing a print job
You can preview your notebook before you print. The Print Preview Toolbar
lets you view your data in more or less detail using the Zoom feature. When
you preview a print job, you can also print the data from the Print Preview
screen.
For information about using shortcut keys for previewing your print job, see
“Using keyboard shortcuts” on page 36.
472
Working in print preview
Quattro Pro lets you preview your print selection and then return to your
data to make any changes, or you can print your selection directly from Print
Preview.
To preview a print selection
1 Click File, Print Preview.
2 Click any tools on the Toolbar while previewing.
To print from Print Preview
Click the Print button.
To exit Print Preview
Click the Cancel Preview button.
Zooming in print preview
Changing the zoom level lets you preview your document in more or less
detail. You can increase or decrease the zoom level by using the Zoom
buttons. The current zoom level displays to the right of the Zoom section in
the toolbar. Use the scroll bars to adjust the section of the spreadsheet
viewed.
To increase the zoom level
2 Click the Zoom In button.
To decrease the zoom level
2 Click the Zoom Out button.
You can also left-click the page to increase the level of detail or right-click
the page to decrease the level of detail.
Customizing print settings
Quattro Pro lets you change print settings, such as margins, paper size, page
orientation, headers, footers, and scaling. You can also specify whether to
Printing
473
include titles, headings, grid lines, soft page breaks, and cell formulas in your
printed document, as well as the space between print selections in the
printed document. You can also center your print selection between the left
and right margins.
Default print settings are set when you install Quattro Pro. You can change
these settings or restore them at any time. Print settings are saved with the
notebook. In addition, you can create different print settings with different
names and save them in the same notebook. For example, if a notebook
contains numerous reports, you can create and name different print settings
for each report.
Viewing and Setting page margins
You can view and set exact page margins. You can also change margins to
best present your data. For example, you can set the distance between the
top or bottom of the paper and the header or footer, and you can set the
distance from the left and right edge of the paper to the data.
To see all margins on one page
1 Click View, Page.
2 Click View, Zoom.
3 Enable the 50% button.
You can also click the Zoom button and select 50%.
To set exact margins
3 Click Print Margins, then specify the margins for Top, Bottom, Left, or
Right.
You can enter margin settings in another measurement than is displayed,
by typing the amount and the measurement abbreviation. For example,
type “in” for inches or “cm” for centimeters. For more information about
changing the default measurement type, see your Windows Control Panel
documentation.
474
To change page margins by dragging
1 Click View, Page.
2 Drag a dotted margin line to reset a margin.
You can also drag margins in Print Preview.
By default, the first column of each contiguous selection within the print
area prints at the left margin.
Some printers are not able to print to the edge of the paper, and many
print drivers do not allow 0" margins.
Changing paper size and orientation
The default page setting prints data on 8.5" by 11" paper in portrait
orientation. You can change the paper size and orientation to suit your data.
When you change the print orientation, the margins change to match the new
orientation setting. For example, the top margin stays with the top of the
notebook data printed, along with the header and top heading (if any).
To change paper size
2 Click the Paper Type tab.
3 Choose a paper size from the list.
To change paper orientation
1 Click File, Page Setup
2 Click the Paper Type tab.
Portrait
Landscape
Printing headers and footers
Quattro Pro lets you print or hide headers or footers. For information about
creating headers and footers, see “Creating headers, footers, and margins”
on page 213.
Printing
475
To print a header or footer
3 In the Header or Footer section, enable the Create check box.
Enter the text to appear in the header or footer if no text appears in the
box.
4 Click the Print button.
The Create check box automatically appears enabled if headers and
footers exist in your document.
To hide a header or footer
3 In the Header or Footer section, disable the Create check box.
Hiding a header or footer does not delete it from the document.
Scaling a print selection
Quattro Pro lets you shrink or enlarge your print selections by an exact
percentage. For example, specifying 110% enlarges output by 10%;
specifying 90% reduces it by 10%. You can also print your notebook on as
many pages as you want by setting the number of pages wide and high to
print your data.
To shrink or enlarge your print selection
2 Click the Print Scaling tab.
3 Click Print To % Of Normal Size, then specify a percentage.
To print data on a set number of pages
476
2 Click the Print Scaling tab.
3 Click Print To Desired Width, then specify the width and height in pages.
Printing row and column titles, headings, and grid lines
Quattro Pro lets you repeat a row or column title on each page of your
spreadsheet. You can set row and column titles, and you can choose to print
the row letters and column numbers that appear on your screen as headings.
You can also print the spreadsheet grid lines to make your report look more
like your on-screen notebook.
To print row titles as the top heading on each page
3 Click the Top Heading box.
4 Select the address of any cell in the row you want.
The entire row is used as the heading, regardless of the cell you select.
To print column titles as the left heading on each page
3 Click the Left Heading box.
4 Select the address of any cell in the column you want.
The entire column is used as the heading, regardless of the cell you
select.
Selecting cells makes all rows (for a top heading) and all columns (for a
left heading) in the cells print as headings.
Do not include top or left headings in the print selection, or they will print
twice. For example, if you specify A2..G2 as a top heading, and you want
to print all data through row 30, specify A3..G30 as the print selection.
To print top row letters and left column numbers as headings
Printing
477
3 Enable the Row/Column Borders check box.
To print grid lines
3 Enable the Gridlines check box.
Printing formulas, addresses, and comments
Quattro Pro prints the contents of each cell, one cell per line, just as they
appear on the input line when you select a cell. This includes each cell’s
address and contents, as well as any comments you have added. When you
print using Cell Formulas, the following print features are disabled: Center
Cells, Left and Top Heading, Gridlines, and Row/Column Borders. The
information is printed in the font specified in File, Page Setup, Header/Footer.
To print cell formulas
3 Enable the Cell Formulas check box.
Printing data without soft page breaks
Turning off page breaks is useful for producing long printouts on
continuous-form paper. When you turn page breaks off, soft page breaks are
ignored, but hard page breaks still exist. Headers and footers are not printed,
and only right and left margins are used. For more information about setting
page breaks, see “Working with page breaks” on page 211.
To print data without soft page breaks
3 Disable the Break Pages check box.
Spacing a print job
You can print noncontiguous cell selections as they appear in the
spreadsheet. This prints any blank lines that appear between selections. You
can also collapse the blank lines between each cell selection.
478
You can add space between print selections or between each printed
spreadsheet. One line of space equals a sixth of an inch. Quattro Pro also lets
you choose to print each selection or spreadsheet on a new page.
To keep blank lines between cell selections
3 In the Print Between Selections section, enable the In Place button.
To collapse blank lines between cell selections
3 In the Print Between Selections section, enable the Collapse Blanks
button.
To add space between each printed selection
3 In the Print Between Selections section, enable the Lines button, then
type the number of lines you want between each selection.
You can also add space between each printed selection by pressing CTRL
and selecting a blank group of cells between each selection.
To add space between each printed spreadsheet
3 In the Print Between 3D Sheets section, enable the Lines button, then
type the number of lines you want between each page.
To start each printed selection on a new page
3 In the Print Between Selections section, Click Page Advance.
Printing
479
To start each printed spreadsheet on a new page
3 In the Print Between 3D Sheets section, Click Page Advance.
Centering print selections
In Quattro Pro, you can center your print selections between the left and
right margins. Extra blank columns on the right or left side of a print
selection affect centering. Do not include these blank columns in the print
selection if you want the data to be centered.
To center print selections between left and right margins
3 Enable the Center Cells check box.
Saving or restoring default print settings
Initially, Quattro Pro installs default print settings. You can change default
print settings in either the Print dialog box or the Page Setup dialog box. You
can save the changes as new default settings for either dialog box. You can
restore the original settings by reloading the defaults in the Page Setup
dialog box. Current settings change back to the defaults.
You can save your customized print settings or restore default settings. Any
named settings you have created are not affected when you restore the
default settings. For more information about named settings see, “Naming
print settings” on page 481.
To save changes to the default print settings
2 Adjust the print settings.
3 Click the Save Settings button, click OK, then click Close.
4 Click the Page Setup button.
5 Adjust the page setup settings.
6 Click the Save Defaults button, then click OK.
480
To restore default print settings
2 Click the Load Defaults button, then click OK.
Naming print settings
You can save different print settings and use them to print reports, pages, or
spreadsheets within the same notebook. Named print settings are saved with
the notebook, and you can update or delete them as necessary.
To save the current print settings as a named setting
2 Click the Named Settings tab.
3 Enter a setting name in the New Set box, then click Add.
4 Click OK to save the settings.
To update an existing named setting
3 Click the named setting to update, then click Update.
To delete a named setting
3 Click the name to delete, then click Delete.
To print using a named setting
2 Click Page Setup, Named Settings.
3 Choose the named setting to use.
4 Click Use, OK.
5 Click Print.
Make sure you save your notebook after creating a named setting.
Printing
481
Printing selected print areas
You can print part of a notebook or an entire notebook. You can print a simple
list or a multiple-page report. You can also print graphics, charts, maps, and
slide shows from your notebook. If a graphic, chart, or map covers a page
break, the graphic splits, printing on multiple pages. Once you have started
printing your work, you can cancel or pause the print job.
Quattro Pro will not print unless at least one cell fits on the printed page. If a
cell’s contents spill over into adjacent cells on screen, include the spill-over
cells in the selection. Otherwise only part of the entry will print.
Quattro Pro will not split a column. If the full column will not fit on a page, it
prints on the next page. Click File, Print Preview to see where your pages
will break. If the data in the print selection is wider than one page, as many
columns as possible print on the first page and all rows for those columns are
printed. Then, the next columns are printed, starting at the first row of data
until all data in the selection has printed. The data prints on as many pages as
necessary.
You can adjust the settings if your printout is not readable because of colored
background or text. When printing graphics, you can speed up your printing
by displaying only graphic outlines on the screen.
Quattro Pro also lets you print multiple copies of your document. When
printing a notebook with multiple pages or spreadsheets, you can collate or
group the copies as required. Collating your print selection prints one full set
of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of
pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and
so on). Grouping your print selection prints the requested number of copies
of each selected page before the next page prints (e.g., five copies of page 1
will print before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).
Printing selected cells
You can choose to print a selection of cells. Quattro Pro lets you print both
contiguous and noncontiguous cells including 2-D or 3-D selections. When
you print noncontiguous selections, each selection will print just below the
selection preceding it. You can also change the print selection without closing
the Print dialog box.
To print contiguous blocks of cells
2 In the Print section, click Selection.
3 Select the cells to print from the spreadsheet.
4 Click Print.
482
You can also select cells by typing the cell range in the Selection box.
To print 2-D or 3-D selections of noncontiguous cells
3 Click the Pointer button, select the cell or group of cells, then click Ctrl as
you select other groups of cells.
For 3D selections, click the Sheet tab when selecting cells from different
spreadsheets.
4 Click Print.
To change the cell selection in the Print dialog box
3 Click Selection, then click the Pointer button.
4 Select the cells you want, then press Enter.
The new coordinates appear in the Selection box.
If you select two or more cells and then open the Print dialog box, the
coordinates of the selected cells appear in the Selection box.
In the Print dialog box, you can print all data on the active spreadsheet or
notebook even if Selection is enabled, by enabling the Current Sheet or
Notebook button instead. You do not need to delete the cell selection.
Printing the current spreadsheet, or notebook
When you select to print the Current Sheet in the Print dialog box, Quattro
Pro scans the active spreadsheet from left to right, top to bottom, and prints
the smallest area that covers all the data. You can print only certain pages of a
spreadsheet or you can print an entire notebook.
To print the current spreadsheet
Printing
483
2 In the Print section, click Current Sheet.
3 Click Print.
To print certain pages of the current sheet
2 In the Print section, enable the Current Sheet sheet.
3 In the Range section, specify the page numbers in the From and To boxes.
4 Click Print.
To print a notebook
2 In the Print section, click Notebook.
3 Click Print.
Printing charts, maps, and slide shows
In Quattro Pro you can print charts and maps the same way that you print
notebook data. Quattro Pro also lets you print multiple charts or maps from
the Objects sheet. You can print slide shows, or selected charts within a slide
show. For more information about creating a slide show see “Developing
slide shows in Quattro Pro” on page 449.
Before printing a chart or map, you can select an aspect ratio for the object.
For more information about setting aspect ratios see “Adjusting the aspect
ratio of charts” on page 380.
You can adjust print settings for charts, maps, or slide shows by customizing
your print settings. For information about customizing print settings see,
“Customizing Print Settings” on page 473.
To print a chart or map
1 Select a chart or map by doing one of the following:
click the border of the chart or map on the spreadsheet
click a chart icon on the Objects sheet
click a slide in the Light Table
3 Enable the Selected Chart button.
484
You can select more than one chart by pressing the Shift key and then
clicking the charts that you want to print.
To print all charts or maps
To print a slide show
2 Click the Slide Show icon.
You can also click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet.
Printing graphics
Any graphics (charts, buttons, drawn shapes) in a selected print area print
with the notebook data.
To print a graphic
2 In the Print section, enable the Selection button.
3 Select the cells containing the graphic from the spreadsheet.
4 Click Print.
Printing multiple copies
You can choose to print multiple copies of your document. Quattro Pro also
lets you collate or group your print selection.
To print multiple copies
2 In the Copies section, specify the number of copies in the Number of
Copies box.
Printing
485
To collate or group your document
2 In the Copies section, enable one of the following buttons:
Collate — Prints multiple copies sorted by sets of copies.
Group — Prints multiple copies sorted by page.
Canceling a print job
You can cancel a print job after you send it.
To cancel a print job
1 Click Cancel from the printing progress box.
If the printing progress box is not showing, click File, Print.
2 Click the Print tab.
3 Click the Status button.
Current print jobs appear in the order they were sent.
4 Choose the print job you want to cancel.
5 Click Document, then Cancel Printing.
If your printer has a large memory buffer, printing may continue for a few
moments after you cancel.
Adjusting print readability and printing speed
If your printed document is not readable because of colored background or
text, you can adjust the settings to print all backgrounds white, all text black,
and all lines black. You can save time when printing graphics if you display
only the outline of graphics on the screen.
To adjust settings to print black and white
3 Enable the Adjust Image To Print Black And White check box.
486
To save time when printing graphics
1 Click Format, Notebook
3 Enable Show Outline.
Printing to a file
If you want to print from a computer on which Quattro Pro is not installed, or
if you take your printing to a service bureau with high-quality printers, you
can store the document as a print file. This file, called a binary file, contains
instructions in the printer’s native language for creating the document. For
example, if your printer is a PostScript printer, Quattro Pro creates a
PostScript file. If your printer is an HP LaserJet, it creates a PCL (Printer
Control Language) file.
Printing to file
Quattro Pro lets you print any notebook as a binary file. You can print
documents stored to a binary file from DOS. You can revert to printing your
documents on a printer by changing the print location to Port. This reroutes a
print job to your selected printer.
To print to file
3 Choose a printer type from the Name list.
4 Click Print To File, then specify the filename.
If you do not specify a file extension, the extension .PRN is used.
5 Click Print.
Printing in Quattro Pro sends the output to the binary file (overwriting
the old file each time), not the printer.
If you want to store the file in a directory other than the default, or on a
floppy disk, include the complete path in the Print To File box.
To print a binary file from DOS
1 Use the DOS COPY command with the /B parameter.
Printing
487
2 Type COPY filename.PRN /B LPT1.
This sends a binary file (/B) to the LPT1 printer port. If your printer is
connected to a different port (such as COM1 or PRN), specify it instead of
LPT1.
To revert printing to a selected printer
3 In the Current Printer section, click the Port button.
Make sure the selected printer appears in the Name section.
488
USING MACROS
17
A macro is a sequence of scripted commands that automate complex or
repetitive command sequences. Macros can perform keystrokes, mouse
actions, and menu commands. You can also attach macros to buttons, and
then run them from another application using Dynamic Data Exchange
(DDE).
A macro is a script that contains instructions that you record and then play
back to perform simple or complex tasks. For example, you can record a
macro that prints a report. Or you can record a macro that opens a notebook,
moves the insertion point to a specified place, and prompts you to type
information.
You can customize the look and feel of a notebook instead of displaying the
standard notebook you see when you install Quattro Pro. For example, you
can have a corporate logo on the splash-screen display when Quattro Pro
launches instead of the default Quattro Pro splash screen.
Your macro can consist only of events, or you can create user interface (UI)
components other users can interact with such as dialog boxes which prompt
users for information and to make choices. For more information about dialog
boxes, see “Dialog boxes” on page 579.
You can use link commands to assign actions or connections to controls in a
dialog box. A link command can get or change property settings, or run
macros.
Using macros
489
The Quattro Pro macro command reference guide is available in the
Reference information section. For information about the list of product
commands, see the Quattro Pro Macro Command List of the Quattro Pro
online Help. For information about the list of programming commands,
see PerfectScript Programming Macros Help.
The PerfectScript & Macros User Guide in the WordPerfect Office 2000
Reference Center can provide more information about macros and
programming. For more information about the Reference Center, see
“Using the Corel Reference Center” on page 5.
The WordPerfect Office 2000 Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) is a set of
tools that lets software developers customize WordPerfect Office 2000
applications for commercial or business use. The SDK is located on the
WordPerfect Office 2000 installation CD in the D:\SDK folder (where “D”
is the letter that corresponds to the CD-ROM drive).
The SDK includes the online Help for the SDK, OLE automation samples,
PerfectScript tools, code generation wizards for third-party add-ons,
utilities to monitor events, and a file format parsing tool.
Choosing a macro creation tool
Quattro Pro provides several built-in scripting tools. You can create three
types of macros:
Quattro Pro macros are stored in notebook cells. Use this type of macro
when your task is performed within Quattro Pro. For information about
using Quattro Pro macros, see “Working with Quattro Pro macros” on
page 492.
PerfectScript macros are stored in a .WCM file. This type of macro is
useful when you want to automate tasks with several notebooks or
interact with other WordPerfect Office 2000 applications, such as
WordPerfect. For example, you can update Quattro Pro data in a
WordPerfect report. For information about using PerfectScript macros in
Quattro Pro, see “Working with PerfectScript” on page 501.
Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) lets you develop scripts that are saved
within specific projects using a robust version of the Visual Basic
programming language. You can access the VBA Editor from within
Quattro Pro. For information about using VBA with Quattro Pro, see
“Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro” on page .
The simplest way to create a macro is to record the keystrokes in Quattro
Pro. You can also write a macro to include non-recordable tasks. For example,
you can define a macro to play until a certain event happens or include a
comment to prompt users to enter specific data.
490
Comparing Quattro Pro macros with PerfectScript
Quattro Pro macros and PerfectScript use similar command syntax. There
are, however, some major differences in the two scripting tools to keep in
mind:
Quattro Pro macros
PerfectScript macros
Are stored in notebooks or cells
Are stored in .WCM macro files
Are created and edited in the notebook
Are created and edited in WordPerfect
Are played from a library notebook
Are played from the source folder
Can use shortcut names for playing
Cannot play from shortcut names
Play only in Quattro Pro
Play in any WordPerfect Office 2000 application
Use blank lines to separate macros
Use blank lines to separate commands and
subroutines
Use commands and arguments
Use commands and parameters (which contain
arguments)
The following table presents the major syntactical differences between both
macro tools:
Quattro Pro syntax
PerfectScript syntax
Command has curly braces
No braces around command
No parentheses around argument list
Parentheses required around parameter list
Object and property separated by period
Object and property separated by underscore
Arguments separated by commas
Arguments separated by semi-colons
Syntax Examples
Quattro Pro macro syntax uses the following syntax format:
{CONTENTS E15, F15, G15}
The command name CONTENTS is the exact name of the command.
Arguments are values providing instructions to the command. Not all macro
commands require arguments, but when they do, they require specific
information. For example, {BEEP} is a macro command without arguments.
Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name , for
example {Search.Find “3rd Quarter Profits}.
PerfectScript uses the following syntax format:
GraphGallery(GraphStyle:"3dbar";ColorScheme:"Tangerine")
The command name GraphGallery indicates the feature the command
activates. This particular example launches the Chart Gallery and selects a
Using macros
491
3-D bar chart with a tangerine color scheme. Some commands are made up of
only a command name, such as FileOpenDlg(). Parameters provide more
information about the command, such as which options of a feature are
active. Parameters are always enclosed in parentheses; for example,
Backup(State:On!). A semi-colon is the separator mark between parameters
in a command.
For more information about Quattro Pro syntax, see “Using macro syntax and
arguments” on page 562.
To get more information about recording and attaching macros to toolbars,
notebooks, and controls, see “Using macros” on page 489.
Working with Quattro Pro macros
Quattro Pro macros are native to Quattro Pro. Macros created in Quattro Pro
are stored in the notebook they apply to, or in a macro library file for use by
other notebooks. You can also attach macros to buttons, and you can run
macros from another application using Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE).
Macros can reproduce the behavior of keys on the keyboard and mouse
actions. Special macro commands can perform actions such as prompting the
user for input, looping a macro repeatedly, or controlling other Windows
applications. Use them to automate complex or repetitive command
sequences (like printing a standard report), to enter frequently used labels
with a keystroke, or to build complete applications for use by people with
little Quattro Pro experience.
When storing macros, place them in an area unaffected by macro commands.
For example, do not place macros to the right of cells where rows will be
inserted or deleted. The ideal place for a macro depends on what operations
it performs. If you want to use a macro with many notebooks, place it in a
macro library or create a PerfectScript macro (an actual file). If only one
notebook uses the macro, add a spreadsheet named Macros to that notebook
and place the macro there.
Understanding Quattro Pro macro syntax
Macro commands are like spreadsheet functions: they have specific
grammatical rules, or syntax. The basic syntax is
{COMMANDNAME Argument1,Argument2, Argument3,...}
COMMANDNAME is the name of the command.
Arguments are values. Not all macro commands require arguments; when
they do, they require a specific type of information.
The following are some examples of macro commands:
{Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29}
492
{BlockCopy A1,A2..A37}
{Search.Find “3rd Quarter Profits”}
{GETNUMBER “How old are you?”,AGE}
{CONTENTS E15,F15,5}
Quattro Pro syntax requires that you enter the entire macro command in a
single cell. The following syntax rules for macro commands also apply:
QP syntax must include
Examples
Opening and closing braces{ }
{BEEP 3}
COMMANDNAME(space)Argument1
{BlockCopy A1}
Commas or semi-colons between arguments
{CONTENTS E15,F15,5}
Correct argument types
{GETLABEL hello world, A4} where “hello world”
is not a valid string type
Quotation marks around punctuation or spaces {GETLABEL “Hello,world”,A4}
Type command in upper/lower case
GETLABEL = getlabel
One or more commands per cell
{BEEP}{GETLABEL “Hello, world”,A4}{QUIT}
If a setting contains spaces, punctuation, or quotation marks, enclose it
within double quotation marks (for example, “Prefix, ”"Windows
Default"",",No").
Macro commands are labels. Therefore, Quattro Pro does not recognize a
syntax error as you type it in; the error only occurs when you try to run the
macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro
commands as you enter them, and record macros whenever possible to avoid
syntax and typing errors.
Understanding arguments
Arguments in macro commands, like those used with spreadsheet functions,
require specific information to be supplied with the command. There are four
types of arguments: numbers, strings, locations, and conditions.
Number arguments
Examples
Any numeric value, entered as a number
2 or 0.45
A formula resulting in a number
A3*15
A cell address with a numeric value or formula
C10, where C10 contains a number or formula
A named block with a numeric value or formula C10, where C10 contains a valid number or
formula
493
Using macros
String arguments
Examples
A text string, such as an actual string
“Corel”
A reference to a cell or block containing a label
A1..A4
A property separated by a comma (,)
“Currency, 2" (This also applies to command
settings separated by a comma)
A formula resulting in a label
@UPPER(“hello ”)
Location arguments
Examples
A block name
INTEREST refers to a cell block C5-C15
Block coordinates with more than 1 cell
A1,A1..A4 or A..B:C4..D22
A block relative reference of more than 1 cell
[]C(0)R(0),[]P(-2):C(0)R(22) or
[]C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10)
Coordinates for noncontiguous blocks
(A1,B1..B7,C1..C7) or (A1,B:C27..C52)
A label or text formula in any of these options
+"A"&"2" which results in A2
Condition arguments
Examples
A formula that evaluates to true or false
+C4>500
Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types. For
example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the
argument type.
You can use argument suffixes in a command to specify a value or label entry.
Using :string (or :s) assures a label entry, and :value (:v) ensures a value
entry (if the entry is a valid number). In the following example, the first
example enters the value 7 into a new_block, while the second example
enters a label into a new_block:
{LET new_block,3+4:value}
{LET new_block,3+4:string}
For information about PerfectScript syntax, see “Choosing a macro creation
tool” on page 490.
For information about using relative cell references, see “Recording macros
using absolute and relative cell addresses” on page .
Recording and editing Quattro Pro macros
With Quattro Pro, you can record actions as you perform them. Recording
converts actions into macro commands and stores them as labels in a block.
Quattro Pro does not record actions keystroke by keystroke. Instead, it
translates keystrokes and mouse actions that invoke menu choices into one
494
or more macro commands called command equivalents. This recording
method is called logical recording. Macros recorded in this way are more
efficient and can run with a customized Quattro Pro menu system. For
example, a macro containing commands to print the active notebook runs
even when the File, Print menu command is not in the active Menu Bar.
When you write a Quattro Pro macro, keep in mind the following guidelines:
Add comments to your macros to make them easier to understand and
debug. Type the comments in a separate column, to the right of the macro
column. You can use curly braces with the first character being a
semi-colon to indicate a comment as well. For example, {:Text} is a
comment.
List cell names to the left of the macros or cells they reference; then you
can use Insert, Name, Cells to name the macro.
You can also list cell names using Insert, Name, Cells, Labels, then enable
the Right button to automatically label cells.
Recording Quattro Pro macros
One of the easiest ways to create a macro is to record it. Quattro Pro
translates keystrokes and mouse actions that invoke menu choices into one
or more macro commands called command equivalents. Record macros
whenever you can to avoid syntax errors. You can cut and paste recorded
commands into other Quattro Pro macros.
You can store macros in the notebook they apply to or in a macro library file
for use by other notebooks.
To record a Quattro Pro macro and to save it in a notebook
1 Click Tools, Macro, Record.
2 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button.
3 Select the cells to store the macro in (on the same spreadsheet or on a
spreadsheet specifically assigned to the macro).
4 Click OK to begin recording (noted by
on the Status Bar).
5 Create your macro.
6 Click Tools, Macro, Record to stop recording the macro.
7 Leave an empty cell below the last cell of the macro to indicate the end of
the macro.
Using macros
495
To record a Quattro Pro macro and store it in a macro library
2 Click the Pointer button, and click the notebook named on the status bar
to open the macro library. (If you do not choose a notebook, the macro is
saved in the active notebook).
3 Select the cell(s) on the sheet in which to store the macro, then press
ENTER.
4 Click OK to begin recording.
5 Follow steps 5 to 7 in the above procedure.
If you name a macro, it is easier to play it later. For information about
naming macros, see “Naming Quattro Pro macros” on page 497.
For information about macro syntax, see “Understanding Quattro Pro
macro syntax” on page 492.
You can also enter macro commands by typing them or double-clicking in
a cell, then clicking the Insert Macro button on the input line.
To pause recording, click Tools, Macro, Pause. Repeat this to resume
recording.
When you select cells to store the macro in, select a single cell if there is
no chance of overwriting data in the cells below (Quattro Pro fills the cells
below as necessary). When you select more than one cell, the macro is
confined only to those cells, and stops recording when they are full.
Typing Quattro Pro macros
You can type Quattro Pro macros if you prefer to enter the macro manually.
You can enter multiple macro commands in the same cell, or enter each
separately in multiple cells. When you enter commands in more than one
cell, be sure the entries proceed downward (A1, A2, A3) with no empty cells
between them. Each cell must contain a label or a text formula.
At the end of the macro, terminate it using one of the suggested methods.
Otherwise, the macro interprets labels below it as macro commands.
To type a Quattro Pro macro
1 Plan your macro.
496
Record sections of your macro that include menu choices. This speeds
entry time and reduces errors.
3 Move to the first cell where you want to store the macro.
4 Type in the commands you want.
Refer to the Quattro Pro Macro Command List in the Reference
information section of the online help for descriptions and examples of the
available commands.
5 If necessary, copy any recorded macro sections from other macros into
your macro.
6 Do one of the following to indicate the end of the macro:
Leave an empty cell
Type {QUIT} or {RETURN}
Macro commands are labels, therefore, Quattro Pro does not recognize a
syntax error as you type it in; the error occurs only when you try to run
the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of
macro commands as you enter them, and record macros whenever
possible. Even a typing error can prevent a macro from running.
For information about macro syntax, see “Understanding Quattro Pro
macro syntax” on page 492.
Creating macros using the Dialog Designer
The Quattro Pro Dialog Designer allows you to create custom dialog boxes
and forms. It includes point-and-click tools to facilitate dialog box creation.
You can link macros to dialog boxes and to dialog box controls.
For information about using the Dialog Designer, see “Creating custom
dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579.
For information about linking macros to controls, see “Attaching actions to
dialog controls” on page 617.
Naming Quattro Pro macros
Cell names make macros more readable and easier to remember. Give your
macros names that reflect the tasks they perform. For example, PERCENT
could be the name of a macro that changes the numeric format of the current
cell to a percentage. When you finish entering a macro, name its first cell
Using macros
497
using the Cell name command. Then you can play the macro by choosing its
name from the Tools, Macro, Play menu or using a keyboard shortcut. If you
name a cell “\<Letter>” (for example “\A”), then you can activate it using
CTRL+SHIFT+A.
When naming macros, avoid names that are the same as macro command
names because this makes the macro commands invalid. For example, say
you name a macro READLN, this is also the name of a predefined macro
command for reading a line from a file. If you try to use this command to read
a line into cell A6 rather than {READLN A6}, Quattro Pro assumes you are
playing the READLN macro rather than the {READLN} command.
To name a Quattro Pro macro using the cell name
Click Insert, Name, Cells.
Be careful to avoid macro names that could be misinterpreted as cell
addresses.
For information about working with cell names, see “Naming cells” on
page 153.
Editing Quattro Pro macros
If you want to edit a Quattro Pro macro, you can retype or edit the macro on
the spreadsheet the same way you modify spreadsheet text.
To add a new command to a macro script
1 Click the spreadsheet with the macro script.
2 Click the cell above where you want to add the new command.
4 Enter the new command.
To delete a command from a macro script
1 Click the row label containing the command you want to remove.
Do not leave any blank cells within the macro, as Quattro Pro recognizes
blank cells as separators between individual macros.
498
Working with macro libraries
The best way to store macros is in a macro library, a special notebook
reserved for macros that you can access from any notebook. Macro libraries
can
simplify linked access
make tracking macros easier
activate a search through all open macro libraries until it finds the macro
you specify if Quattro Pro cannot find it within the active notebook
ensure that macros do not interfere with the notebook data and vice versa
save disk space by using one set of macros for a group of notebooks
store a set of macros that can be copied into individual notebooks as you
need them
create a separate set of macros for each application or type of notebook
you work with
Use Hide on the Window menu, (or the macro command that emulates it,
{WindowHide}), to hide a macro library. You can also use medium password
protection to ensure that a macro library is always hidden. This prevents
novices from altering the macro library. If a hidden macro library is also a
system notebook, it remains open even when all other notebooks have been
closed.
Keep only one macro library open at a time. When two open libraries
contain a macro with the same name, it is difficult to predict which macro
will play. Quattro Pro searches only open macro libraries for macros;
closed libraries are ignored.
For information about setting password access to a macro library, see
“Using password protection” on page 703.
Creating macro libraries
A macro library is a notebook reserved for macros that you can use with any
notebook.
To create a macro library
Open a new notebook
Use the current notebook
Using macros
499
Create macros to store in it
Copy macros to it from another notebook
3 Click Format, Notebook, Macro Library.
4 Click Yes to define the active notebook as a macro library.
5 Click OK to save the change.
6 Save the notebook.
Keep only one macro library open at a time. When two open libraries
contain a macro with the same name, it is difficult to predict which macro
will run. Quattro Pro searches only open macro libraries for macros;
closed libraries are ignored.
When dealing with cell addresses, manipulating cells, and assigning cells
particular values, make sure that you use correct cell references in the
correct notebook.
For information about saving notebooks, see “Saving, and closing
notebooks” on page 77.
Creating a system notebook
Programmers can use system notebooks to hold application macros and
ensure their availability while Quattro Pro is running. Designate the system
notebook as a macro library. For more information about macro libraries, see
“Working with macro libraries” on page 499.
System notebooks are hidden from user view and access. A system
notebook, when hidden, stays open even when users close all notebooks.
There are several methods of hiding the notebook. Two of these methods are
described in the procedure below.
You can also use password protection to hide a system notebook. For
information about passwords, see “Using password protection” on page 703.
To create a system notebook
2 Click the System tab.
3 Click Yes.
500
Click OK to close the dialog.
Click the Macro Library tab, then enable the Yes button if you want to
designate the notebook as a macro library.
To hide a system notebook
When you open the notebook in your application, click Window, Hide.
Click Format, Notebook, then click the Password Level tab. If you
apply the Medium protection level, the notebook is hidden each time it
is opened without a password.
Working with PerfectScript
You can use PerfectScript macros not only with Quattro Pro, but also with
other Corel applications such as Corel Presentations and WordPerfect. Unlike
Quattro Pro macros, you store PerfectScript macros in a .WCM file.
PerfectScript is a command-based language that records the results of
keystrokes or mouse selections rather than the keystrokes themselves.
PerfectScript includes commands that direct the function of the macros.
These commands let you create macros that can prompt for user input, make
decisions based on conditions in a notebook, access system variables, etc.
You can record or type PerfectScript macros. A recorded macro includes only
product commands. When you play a recorded macro, each action is played in
recorded order.
A typed macro can include non-recordable statements that specify how a
macro performs a task. When writing this kind of macro, you specify the
conditions for playing assignments, loops, and programming commands. You
can type a macro only in WordPerfect. You do not need to use a macro editor
or edit WordPerfect Office 2000 macros, so you can insert macro commands
by typing them in a blank document in WordPerfect or insert them. With the
Macro Command Browser, you can insert macro product and programming
commands into your PerfectScript macros.
The WordPerfect macro command reference guide is available in the
The WordPerfect Office 2000 Software Developer’s Kit (SDK) is a set of
tools that lets software developers customize WordPerfect Office 2000
applications for commercial or business use. The SDK is located on the
WordPerfect Office 2000 installation CD in the D:\SDK folder (where “D”
is the letter that corresponds to the CD-ROM drive).
Using macros
501
The SDK includes the online Help for the SDK, OLE automation samples,
PerfectScript tools, code generation wizards for third-party add-ons,
utilities to monitor events, and a file format parsing tool.
The PerfectScript & Macros User Guide in the WordPerfect Office 2000
Reference Center can provide more information about macros and
programming. For more information about the Reference Center, see
“Using the Corel Reference Center” on page 5.
Recording PerfectScript macros
You can record a PerfectScript macro from within Quattro Pro.
To record a PerfectScript macro
2 Enable the PerfectScript Macro button.
3 Type the filename for the macro.
4 Click OK to begin recording (noted by
on the Status Bar).
5 Perform your task. Each action is recorded and written as one or more
macro commands in the macro file.
6 Click Tools, Macro, Record to stop recording.
You cannot record a macro that pauses for user input. If you want the
macro to pause, edit it after recording it.
Typing PerfectScript macros
You can type a macro in WordPerfect and play it in Quattro Pro. In
WordPerfect, you can simplify typing macros using the Macro Command
Browser, which lets you insert macro product and programming commands
into your macros.
Product commands perform functions that let you use WordPerfect Office
2000 features in your macros. Many product commands require you to
specify parameters and enumerations; these give the applications
information about which options to select in dialog boxes and whether certain
features (such as the Ruler) should be displayed or hidden.
You can use the Command Browser to specify the commands quickly. Online
help for each command in the Command Browser is available by
502
right-clicking a command; this displays the Help topic for the highlighted
command.
To type a PerfectScript macro
1 Open WordPerfect.
2 Click Tools, Macro, Macro Toolbar to display the macro tools.
3 Click the Commands button on the Macro toolbar.
4 Choose the command type from the Command Type list. (If the Command
Type list is the only list displayed, skip to step 7).
5 Choose the parameter you want from the Parameters list box.
6 Choose the enumeration related to the selected parameter from the
Enumerations list box (if this list displays).
7 Type any additional parameters or values in the Command Edit box to
complete the command.
8 Click Insert to insert the completed product or programming command
into your macro.
9 When you are finished writing the macro, click the Save & Compile button
on the macro toolbar.
To pause a PerfectScript macro
1 Click Tools, Macro, Pause.
2 Click Tools again to resume recording.
Enumerations are used to set parameter values when they are limited to a
specific set of values. For example, the FileClose command lets you close
a file. It has a parameter named DoSave? with two enumerations, Yes! and
No!.
You can also access the WordPerfect Command Browser from the Start
menu. Click Start, Programs, WordPerfect Office 2000, Utilities,
PerfectScript. Then click Help, Macro Command Browser to display the
list of PerfectScript commands.
Using macros
503
Editing PerfectScript macros
There are two ways to edit a PerfectScript macro; in WordPerfect or in the
PerfectScript Macro Facility. From Quattro Pro, you can select a .WCM file to
edit, which when selected launches WordPerfect.
To edit a PerfectScript macro from Quattro Pro
1 Click Tools, Macro, Edit.
2 Specify the .WCM filename that you want to edit.
To edit a PerfectScript macro in WordPerfect
1 Click Start, Programs, WordPerfect Office 2000, Utilities, PerfectScript.
2 Click File, Edit, and choose a macro file to edit. This launches
WordPerfect 9 and displays the macro commands.
3 Do one of the following in WordPerfect:
Click Tools, Dialog Editor to edit macro dialogs
Click any of the following buttons — Play, Stop, Record, Compile, Edit,
or Debug
Type changes to the macro
Click Help, then select one of the options to get more information about
PerfectScript macros.
Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro Pro
You can use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) with WordPerfect
Office 2000. VBA is an object oriented programming language that lets you
create VBA macros to automate tasks. You can, for example, create a macro
in WordPerfect that changes the color of the headings.
Event driven programming
Visual Basic for Applications is an event-driven programming language. Most
of the code you create is written to respond to an event. An event is an action
that is recognized by VBA; for example, clicking a button or choosing an
option from a list box. Unlike traditional procedural programming, in which
the program starts at line 1 and executes line by line, event-driven
programming executes code in response to events.
504
The difference between PerfectScript and VBA
Previously, you could only use the PerfectScript language to automate
specific tasks. Both product commands and programming commands are used
in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The PerfectScript language is
useful for developing simple macros. VBA offers more flexibility and power.
When you use VBA to create macros, you are assisted by the Visual Basic
compiler. The compiler helps you by providing context-sensitive help when
you are coding a VBA macro. You can combine the power of VBA with the
PerfectScript product commands to create powerful macros. You have to use
the Visual Basic Editor to create VBA macros; however, PerfectScript macros
are developed from the WordPerfect Editor. You can access the Visual Basic
Editor only when you are working in an active document.
The PerfectScript class
All product commands used in WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel
Presentations can be used in VBA macros. You must call the PerfectScript
object to access a product command. An object is an instance of a class. All
objects have properties; for example, the name of a document is a property
that belongs to the document object. You can set or change an object’s
properties by calling certain methods. A method performs a specific action,
such as inserting a table into a document. You can, for example, close a
document by calling the close method, or you can save a document by calling
the save method. The term class is a VBA programming term and means a
collection of related methods, which are referred to as class members. The
product commands are the class members that belong to the PerfectScript
class. WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations have their own
PerfectScript class because the class members, which are the product
commands, are different depending on the application.
All members of the PerfectScript class perform a specific action. For more
information about product commands, see the macros manual.
Assigning security
When you open WordPerfect Office 2000 documents created by other users,
be aware that a document could contain a macro virus. As a screening
measure, VBA includes a security mechanism to help manage document
security. You determine the security level used when opening or loading
documents and add-ins containing embedded VBA macros. The Security
dialog box lets you review the assigned security level and your collection of
trusted certificates. You can trust a certificate you know as coming from a
reputable source. A VBA developer can attach his digital signature to a macro
which creates a certificate when the document is opened. The fact that a
document has a digital signature does not automatically ensure the document
Using macros
505
to be free of viruses, so that the onus is on you to find out if the developer
scans for viruses before adding his certificate to your trusted sources.
There are three security level settings available: High, Medium, and Low.
With the High setting, you can open a signed VBA project from a trusted
source with the macros enabled. Otherwise, the document is opened with the
macros disabled. The default security setting is Medium. A Medium setting
indicates that a warning displays if you try to load a VBA document that is
not on your trusted source list. You can then choose to open the document
with the macros enabled or disabled. The Low setting allows you to open all
VBA projects without applying any security (which disables all virus
protection).
If you want to create your own certificate (in situations where you do not
have formal certification), you can run the SELFCERT.EXE that installs with
Visual Basic for Applications. For more information about Visual Basic for
Applications security, open the Security dialog box (click Tools, Visual Basic,
Security) and click the What's This Help button.
Although there may be some differences, the syntax for the product
commands and the PerfectScript members is usually the same.
Working in the VBA Editor
In most cases, the name of the class is the same as the name of the object.
WordPerfect Office 2000 has one object, which is the document object. In
WordPerfect, the name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is
the same as the class. In Corel Presentations, the name of the document
object is ThisSlideShow, which is the same as the class. In Quattro Pro, the
name of the document object is ThisDocument, which is the same as the
class. The document object is the host application that is open. In future
versions, there will be many more objects, such as a table object or a cell
object.
You can create a new object, such as a dialog box, which is known as a form.
You can add controls, such as a check box or a text box. You can set the
object’s properties in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic
Editor. You can also set the object’s properties at run time by programming a
method. For example, you can color a form red when you click on it. For
more information about setting an object’s properties, see the Microsoft
Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.
An experienced programmer can work directly with the Windows API
(Application Programming Interface) and, for example, be able to determine
how much disk space is free or gain access to the system’s time and date
values. Most VBA users will want to automate specific and repetitive tasks.
506
Accessing an Application from another Application’s macro
You can access and change an application from another application’s macro.
For example, you can create and use a Quattro Pro object from a WordPerfect
VBA macro. This allows you to change and save a Quattro Pro document
from a WordPerfect VBA macro.
Creating VBA macros
You can create two kinds of VBA macros: a global or a project macro. You can
play a global macro from more than one document; however, a project macro
can be played only in the document which was used to create it.
You can create a project VBA macro by creating a public method for the
ThisDocument object. The term public refers to the access level. If a
method is public, it can be accessed from outside the class. This means that
you can call it from the host application. If a method is Private, then only
methods in the same class can access it. Every public method that belongs to
the ThisDocument class is a project macro. You can create a VBA macro
called ShowMessage and code one line as follows: MsgBox “Hello”. This
VBA macro calls a Message Box that displays the string “Hello.”
Using VBA macros
You can store a VBA macro in the document by saving the document. Once
you have saved the document, you can close and reopen the document and
access the macro. After you have developed the macro, you should debug it.
You can step through each macro line by line. This is a useful exercise to
ensure that the macro will have the desired outcome. A project macro is not
available if the document is closed. After you have debugged the macro, you
can play the macro.
Starting VBA from Quattro Pro
You can start Visual Basic for Applications from Quattro Pro. The members
of the PerfectScript class are applicable only to Quattro Pro.
To start VBA from Quattro Pro
Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor.
For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in
the Visual Basic Editor.
Using macros
507
Creating a VBA macro in Quattro Pro
You can program a project or a global VBA macro in Quattro Pro. A new
macro, called ShowForm, is developed. In the following example, the macro
will produce a dialog box that asks you for your name. After you type your
name in the dialog box, a Message Box appears with your name displayed in
it. This example illustrates how to use VBA forms.
To create a VBA project macro in Quattro Pro
1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor.
2 Double-click on Project (NoteBook) in the Project view.
3 Click Insert, User Form.
4 Change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:
5 Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the
following list:
Command Button - CommandButton1
TextBox - NameBox
You can change all of the control’s attributes, including the name of the
control, in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor.
6 Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the
UserForm1 class, then type the following lines of code in the
CommandButton1_Click method:
Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()
Dim myname, Msg As String
myname = NameBox
Msg = “Hello ” & myname
MsgBox Msg
End
End Sub
508
This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is
clicked.
7 Double-click the Quattro Pro Objects folder in the Project view.
8 Double-click ThisDocument, then type the following lines of code in the
Editor window:
Public Sub ShowForm()
End Sub
This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. If you
declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it
from Quattro Pro.
9 Type the following line of code in the ShowForm method:
UserForm1.Show
End Sub
To create a VBA global macro in Quattro Pro
2 Double-click on Global Macros in the Project view.
3 Click Insert, User Form.
4 Change the form so that it resembles the following diagram:
5 Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the
following list:
Command Button - CommandButton1
TextBox - NameBox
Using macros
509
You can change all of the control’s attributes, including the name of the
control, in the Property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor.
6 Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the
UserForm1 class, then type the following lines of code in the
CommandButton1_Click method:
Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()
Dim myname, Msg As String
myname = NameBox
Msg = “Hello ” & myname
MsgBox Msg
End
End Sub
This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is
clicked.
Editor window:
End Sub
This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. If you
declare ShowForm as a Private method, you will not be able to run it
from Quattro Pro.
9 Type the following line of code in the ShowForm method:
UserForm1.Show
End Sub
The name of this macro will be called ShowForm. For more information
about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.
Playing a VBA macro in Quattro Pro
You can play a VBA macro in Quattro Pro. You can play either a global macro
or a project macro. You can play a Project macro only from the document that
510
was used to create it. If your macro does not perform the desired action, then
you can debug the macro.
To play a project VBA macro
1 Click Tools, Visual Basic, Play.
2 Choose Project(NoteBook) from the Macros In list box.
3 Choose a macro from the Macro Name list box.
4 Click the Run button.
To play a global VBA macro
2 Choose Global from the Macros In combo box.
4 Click the Run button.
To start a VBA macro, you can also click the Play button on the Visual
Basic toolbar.
Debugging macros created in VBA
Debugging is an extremely important part of the programming process.
Debugging lets you step through your code line by line to ensure that the
macro executes properly. This feature of programming is known as
Single-Stepping. For example, if you are at a point in the code where a
variable is about to be assigned a value, you can step into this line of code to
determine the value of the variable at run-time.
To debug a macro created in VBA
3 Click the Step Into button.
4 Click Debug, Step Into.
5 Repeat step 4 for each line of code you want to step into.
6 Change the code as necessary.
Using macros
511
After you have stepped into a line of code, you can position the pointer
over a specific variable to determine the value of the variable. For more
information about debugging in VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help
in the Visual Basic Editor.
Editing macros created in VBA
You can edit a VBA macro. To edit a macro involves going directly to start of
the code, whereas debugging steps you through each line of the code.
To edit a VBA macro
4 Edit the code as necessary.
Displaying the VBA toolbar
You can activate the VBA toolbar. The VBA toolbar provides quick access to
commands such as playing a macro or starting the VBA Editor.
To display the VBA toolbar
1 Click View, Toolbars to display the Options dialog box.
2 Enable the Visual Basic check box to display the VBA toolbar.
Using the PerfectScript Class to change a Quattro Pro document
The PerfectScript class lets you automate specific and repetitive tasks. The
members of the PerfectScript class are the product commands that are used
in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The following example
creates a project macro.
512
In the following procedure, a new method, called AddInventory, is added to
the ThisDocument class. This macro creates an inventory table, populates
the table with specific values, and calculates the values. All PerfectScript
class members can be accessed only by calling the PerfectScript object,
which must be followed by a “.”. You can call the FileSave method, which is
a PerfectScript class member, by typing: “PerfectScript.FileSave”.
To change a Quattro Pro document using the PerfectScript class
2 Double-click Project(NoteBook), then double-click the Quattro Pro
Objects folder in the Project view.
Editor window:
Public Sub AddInventory()
End Sub
This code adds a new method, called AddInventory, to the
ThisDocument class. If you declare AddInventory as a private method,
you will not be able to run it from Quattro Pro.
4 Type the following lines of code to create a private method called
CreateTable:
Private Sub CreateTable()
PerfectScript.SetCellString “B1", ”Jan"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “C1", ”Feb"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “D1", ”Mar"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “A2", ”TVs"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “A3", ”VCRs"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “A4", ”Radios"
End Sub
This code creates an inventory table.
AddValues:
Private Sub AddValues()
‘Populate the January Column
PerfectScript.SelectBlock “B2"
PerfectScript.PutCell2 “200"
Using macros
513
‘Populate the February Column
PerfectScript.SelectBlock “C2"
‘Populate the March Column
PerfectScript.SelectBlock “D2"
End Sub
This code adds numeric values to the inventory table.
CalculateValues:
Private Sub CalculateValues()
‘Calculate the January totals
PerfectScript.SelectBlock “B2 B4"
PerfectScript.QuickFunction “SUM”, “B5"
‘Calculate the February totals
PerfectScript.SelectBlock “C2 C4"
PerfectScript.QuickFunction “SUM”, “C5"
‘Calculate the March totals
PerfectScript.SelectBlock “D2 D4"
514
PerfectScript.QuickFunction “SUM”, “D5"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “A5", ”Totals:"
End Sub
This code adds the values in each column.
7 Type the following lines of code, in the AddInventory method, to call the
Private methods:
Public Sub AddInventory()
CreateTable
AddValues
CalculateValues
End Sub
This code calls all of the private methods that you created. You can access
the private methods because you are working in the same class. It is not
possible to access a private method from outside of the ThisDocument
class.
Working with the VBA methods
You can use VBA to get system information, such as the system’s date and
time values. Retrieving the system’s date and time values using VBA is very
easy because all of the Windows functions are hidden, and all you have to do
is call the appropriate VBA method.
In the following procedure, you have to create a new method called,
ShowTime. Next, you will declare two new variables: myTime and
myDate. You can use the return value of the Time method to populate the
myTime variable. The variable myDate can be populated by the return
value of the Date method. You will have to type-cast the two variables —
myTime and myDate — into string values. The easiest way to accomplish
this is to declare two new string variables: myStrDate and myStrTime.
Use the Str method to convert the contents of myDate and myTime into
strings. Display the contents of myStrDate and myStrTime in a Message
Box.
The following example creates a project macro.
Using macros
515
To access the system’s date and time values
2 Double-click Project(Document1) in the Project view.
Editor window:
Public Sub ShowTime()
End Sub
This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. Make sure
that ShowTime is declared public so that you can access this macro from
Quattro Pro.
5 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to declare two
new variables:
Dim myTime
Dim myDate As Date
End Sub
6 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate the
myTime and the myDate variables:
Dim myTime
Dim myDate As Date
myTime = Time
myDate = Date
End Sub
7 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to convert the two
variables to string data types:
Dim myTime
Dim myDate As Date
myTime = Time
myDate = Date
516
Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String
myStrDate = Str(myDate)
myStrTime = Str(myTime)
End Sub
8 Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate and
display the Msg variable:
Dim myTime
Dim myDate As Date
myTime = Time
myDate = Date
Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String
myStrDate = Str(myDate)
myStrTime = Str(myTime)
Msg = “The date is ” & myStrDateI & “ and the time is ” &
myStrTime
MsgBox Msg
End Sub
For the purpose of this procedure, a Message Box was selected to display
the date and time; however, you can create a new form and then display
the time and date in this form. For more information about VBA, see
Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.
Accessing and manipulating an application from another application
You can create a VBA macro that will call another application. It is possible to
program a VBA macro to open and change another application at run time.
For example, you can create a Quattro Pro object from the WordPerfect VBA
Editor. This lets you create a WordPerfect VBA macro that will change a
Quattro Pro document. The following example demonstrates how to create a
Quattro Pro object from the WordPerfect VBA Editor. However, the
Using macros
517
procedure remains the same regardless of the object you create or what
application you use.
In the following procedure, a Quattro Pro object, called myQp, will be
created. This object will be used to create an inventory table in a Quattro Pro
document.
To create a WordPerfect VBA macro that will manipulate a
Quattro Pro document
1 Open WordPerfect, then click Tools, Visual Basic, Visual Basic Editor.
2 Double-click on Project (Document1) in the Project view.
3 Click Tools, Reference, then enable QuattroPro 9, and click OK.
Every application has an object. Make sure you reference the right object.
4 Double-click the WordPerfect Objects folder in the Project view.
Editor window:
Public Sub CreateQPTable()
End Sub
This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class. Make sure
that CreateQPTable is declared public so that you can access this macro
from WordPerfect.
6 Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method:
Dim myQp
Set myQp = CreateObject(“QuattroPro.PerfectScript”)
If myQp Is Nothing Then
MsgBox “The Quattro Pro Object is invalid”, vbCritical
End If
This code creates a Quattro Pro PerfectScript object. After the object is
created, it is tested to determine if memory has been allocated to it. A
Message Box will inform you if the object is invalid.
7 Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method:
Dim myQp
Set myQp = CreateObject(“QuattroPro.PerfectScript”)
518
If myQp Is Nothing Then
MsgBox “The Quattro Pro Object does not exist”, vbCritical
End If
‘Populate the Quattro Pro document
myQp.FileNew “FileNew”
PerfectScript.SetCellString “B1", ”Jan"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “C1", ”Feb"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “D1", ”Mar"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “A2", ”TVs"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “A3", ”VCRs"
PerfectScript.SetCellString “A4", ”Radios
End Sub
This code will create a new Quattro Pro document and create an inventory
table.
For the purpose of this procedure, a simple inventory table was created in
a Quattro Pro document. You can run this macro from WordPerfect. For
testing purposes, make sure that Quattro Pro is open. For more
information about VBA, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual
Basic Editor.
Working in Developer mode
You can work in Developer mode, which adds special properties to property
menus and lets you use the shortcut key, CTRL+M, which varies in function
depending on the current program state. In most instances, CTRL+M
restores the standard Quattro Pro Application Bar and Input Line. In
Developer mode you can modify property settings or change the title
displayed in the Quattro Pro Title Bar.
Launching Developer mode
In Developer mode, you gain additional settings and properties.
Additional global settings let you
Using macros
519
display a different title in the title bar (Title setting)
turn off access to property settings (Enable Inspection setting)
Additional properties of drawn objects in a chart or map window let you read
or change property settings with macro commands, link commands, and
spreadsheet functions (Name property)
You do not have to be in Developer mode to change or read these property
settings. Macro commands can always access them.
Use CTRL+M
Result
When debugging a macro
Stops macro execution and exits Debug mode
In all other states
Restores the standard Quattro Pro Menu Bar, Application Bar, and Input
Line, and re-enables the ability to right-click and access property menus
To start Quattro Pro in Developer mode
1 On the Windows Taskbar, click Start, Run.
2 Type the Quattro Pro command with its path, followed by a space, and
then /d (for example, QPW.exe /d).
Click Tools, Settings, Title to display a different title in the Title Bar.
Click Tools, Settings, Enable Inspection, No to turn off right-clicking
and access to property settings.
Click the object, then click the Property button to change the
properties of a chart or map object.
Limiting access to property settings from Developer mode
You can control whether users can access object property settings using the
Enable Inspection setting. Enable Inspection controls mouse right-clicking.
To turn off access to property settings
1 Start Quattro Pro in Developer mode (for example, QPW.EXE /d).
3 Click the Enable Inspection tab.
4 Enable the No button to turn off access to property settings and
right-clicking.
520
To re-enable property settings after you disable them, click CTRL+M on
the notebook.
Creating macro applications
When you have selected Quattro Pro macros or PerfectScript as your macro
tool, you can then create your application. You can set up data with absolute
and relative cell addresses and attach a completed macro to other design
elements like toolbars and controls with either macro tool.
For information about PerfectScript syntax, see “Working with PerfectScript”
on page 501.
To view in-depth descriptions of Quattro Pro macro syntax, click Help,
Contents, Reference Information, Quattro Pro Macros Help.
You cannot record a macro that pauses for user input. If you want the
macro to pause, edit it after recording it.
Recording macros using absolute and relative cell addresses
By default, addresses in macro commands use absolute cell addressing like
A1, C6. However, you can record macro commands that use relative
references so you can play the macro in different parts of the notebook or in
different notebooks. The following is an example of absolute and relative
addressing:
Absolute: []A:A1..D10
Relative: []P(0):C(0)R(0)..C(4)R(10)
When you record with relative references, the macro records cells in relation
to each other, rather than recording exact cell addresses. For example, the
macro indicates two cells to the right of the selector, rather than a specific
cell. The following example shows how to use absolute and relative cell
referencing in macros:
Absolute: []$A:$A$1..$D$10
Relative: [][]A:A1..D10
Using relative references increases macro portability (letting you use a
macro with different notebooks), but hinders readability, since it is harder to
track which cells the macro affects. If your macros use the spreadsheet
function @CELLPOINTER frequently, you can try relative references. For
more information about the spreadsheet function @CELLPOINTER, see
Using macros
521
@CELLPOINTER in the Quattro Pro spreadsheet functions reference in the
online Help.
For more information about setting absolute and relative cell references, see
“Setting cell addresses” on page 150.
To create a macro, select the macro tool (for example, Quattro Pro macros or
PerfectScript), then follow the rules in the chart below for assigning relative
cell addresses.
Reading macros containing relative cell references
Relative references specify cells as offset from the cell selector. For example,
the cell selector’s relative reference is []P(0):C(0)R(0).
Reference...
Result...
([])
Specifies that you are referring to the active notebook.
P(0):
Indicates the number of sheets from the selector (in this case, zero); it is
optional (except when selecting an entire row or column, which is
discussed below).
C(0)
Indicates the number of columns from the selector.
R(0)
Indicates the number of rows from the selector.
The cell below the selector is []C(0)R(1), the cell to the right of it is
[]C(1)R(0), and the cell beneath the selector (on the next sheet) is
[]P(1):C(0)R(0).
If [] does not precede a relative reference, the relative reference is offset
from the cell containing the macro command, not the cell selector. For
example, if {BLANK C(1)R(0)} were stored in A:A16, playing the macro
would erase the cell to the right of it (A:B16).
You can precede a relative reference with a colon (:) to affect the same
cell, but on the active sheet. For example, if {BLANK :C(1)R(0)} were
stored in A:A16, playing it when sheet B is active would erase the cell
B:B16.
522
You can omit C( ) or R( ) to select entire rows or columns. For example,
{SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(0)} selects the column containing the active
cell; {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):R(0)} selects the row containing the active
cell. To select the three columns to the right of the active cell, use
{SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(1), C(3)}.
Relative references can use negative or positive offsets. For example, if
the selector is in cell A2, you could use []C(0)R(-1), C(2)R(1) to specify
the cells A1, C3.
Recording relative cell addresses
By default, macros are recorded as command equivalents with absolute cell
addresses (like A1, B26). For greater portability, you can record with relative
cell references. Relative references specify cells as offset from the cell
selector. For example, the macro indicates two cells to the right of the
selector, rather than a specific cell.
To record relative cell references
1 Click Tools, Macro, Options.
2 Enable the Relative button.
To revert to recording absolute cell references (for example, A1, C6) click
Tools, Macro, Options, then enable the Absolute button.
Attaching macros to other notebooks
You can use links in macros just as you do in formulas. Macros can play
macros from other notebooks, access data from them, or store user input in
them.
If you play a macro that is from a different notebook, such as a macro library,
the macro behaves as though it were stored in the active notebook.
Coordinates entered in dialog boxes refer to the active notebook. However,
coordinates stored in the macro as arguments to a macro command refer to
the macro library. For example, {BRANCH A:A1} branches to cell A1 of the
macro library, not the active notebook. To refer to cells in a different
notebook, use linking. For example, the following command branches to
sheet B, cell A1 of the MACROS notebook:
{BRANCH [MACROS]B:A1}
Using macros
523
To refer to cells in the active notebook, precede the coordinates with empty
brackets. For example, {BRANCH []A:A1} branches to cell A:A1 in the
active notebook.
Attaching macros to a notebook
When you finish recording a macro with Tools, Macro, Record, you can attach
the macro to a specific notebook so that it plays automatically when you open
or close the notebook.
To attach a macro to a notebook
1 Right-click the top-left cell of the macro.
2 Click Name, Cells.
3 Type one of the following in the Name box:
\0 (backslash zero) or _nbstartmacro — creates a startup macro that
plays when you open the notebook
_nbexitmacro — runs a macro when you close the notebook
any block name (for example, “Fred” could be the name of a macro
stored in a block)
4 Click Add.
5 Click Close.
\Character (for example, \A) creates a macro that can be activated by
CTRL+SHIFT+character.
Attaching macros to buttons
Quattro Pro lets you create a button, and then attach a macro or Uniform
Resource Locator (URL) to it. The button can then launch the macro or jump
to a Web site when clicked, or display a dialog box you have created.
Creating a macro button
You can create a button to play a macro or go to a URL site. Buttons also
work on spreadsheets, slides in a slide show, or graphics (for example, a
chart, a map, or an image). For information about creating buttons in slide
shows, see “Using chart buttons to create slide show jumps” on page 467.
524
To create a macro button
1 Click Insert, Form Control, Button.
Drag to create a custom size button.
Click instead of dragging to create a default size button.
Click the button, then drag the handles to the desired size to resize it.
Click the button, then drag it to a new position to move it.
To display a label on a macro button
1 Right-click a macro button, then click Button Properties.
2 Click the Label Text tab.
3 Type the text you want to appear on the button.
You can also add a macro button to a spreadsheet by clicking the Push
Button tool in the Form Controls flyout on the Chart and Drawing Tools
toolbar.
You can also use macro buttons to display dialog boxes. For information
about connecting macro buttons to dialog boxes you create, see “Attaching
macro buttons to custom dialog boxes” on page 526.
Attaching a macro to a button
You can attach a macro to buttons you create.
To link a button to a script
1 Right-click the button, then click Button Properties.
2 Click the Macro tab.
3 Type the macro command name in the Enter Macro box. (The maximum
length is 200 characters.) Enclose the command name with braces { }.
If you want a button to play a macro in a notebook, use the {BRANCH}
command.
Using macros
525
To edit the macro that activates when you click the button, right-click the
button, click Button Properties , Macro.
Attaching macro buttons to a Web site
You can specify a URL address to link to World Wide Web (HTTP), Gopher,
and FTP sites. Internet files are opened for read-only access and you cannot
save files to the Internet.
To attach a macro button to a URL address
3 Click Link To URL to go to a URL site when the button is clicked.
4 Type the URL address.
Attaching macros to keystrokes
If the Quattro Pro macro you create is used often, you can give it a special
block name that makes it easier to run. To do this, precede the name with a
backslash (\), followed by a letter of the alphabet. Because there can be only
26 block name macros (one for each letter of the alphabet), reserve them for
macros you use often.
To attach a block name macro to a keystroke
1 Select the starting cell of the macro.
3 In the Name field, type a backslash (\) followed by a letter of the alphabet.
4 Click Add.
Macros assigned to keys play using CTRL+SHIFT+letter. Avoid using
the same alphabet letters already assigned to shortcuts in the application
(for example, CTRL+SHIFT+N).
Attaching macro buttons to custom dialog boxes
You can use the macro buttons you create to display the dialog boxes you
create in Quattro Pro. If you did not create a dialog box using Tools, Macro,
Dialog Designer, no dialog boxes are available to display using your macro
526
buttons. For information about creating dialog boxes, see “Creating custom
dialog boxes and form controls” on page 579.
To make a macro button display a dialog box when clicked
1 Select the macro button.
3 Click the Macro tab, then click Execute Dialog.
4 Choose a dialog box in the Active Dialog list.
5 Do one of the following in the Result Cell box:
Type a cell reference
Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference
After the dialog box is closed, this cell contains 1 or 0. The value 1 means
the dialog box was closed by clicking the OK button; the value 0 means it
was closed by clicking the Cancel button.
6 Do one of the following in the Values Range box:
Type a cell reference
Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference
Specify the cells that contain initial settings for the dialog box. When the
dialog box is closed, its final settings are written back into these cells.
Modifying macro buttons
Once you create a macro button, you can change the button properties by
modifying the box type, border color, protection, and button name.
To modify a macro button
1 Right-click the macro button, then click Button Properties.
2 Choose one of the following tabs to make changes:
Border Color — changes the color around the outside of the button
Box Type — changes the thickness of the line around the button or
applies a shadow effect
Protection — locks the button, preventing users from moving or
changing the button when protections are set at the spreadsheet level
Object Name — changes the button’s name (used when referring to
the button in a macro)
Using macros
527
Print — limits access to the button to prevent unauthorized changes in
the button properties dialog
Label text — changes the name displayed on the label
Macro — changes the button activation, URL link, or dialog box that
displays when clicking the button
For more information about setting object protection, see “Protecting
Attaching macros to toolbars
You can attach a Quattro Pro or PerfectScript macro to a customized toolbar
button. You can then display the button on the Quattro Pro workspace. When
you click the button, the macro executes.
Attaching macros to toolbar buttons
You can attach a macro to a graphic toolbar button. The buttons you create
are stored in the Macros folder in the Command list.
To attach a macro to a toolbar button
2 Click the Commands button.
3 Click New Macro.
4 Enable one of the following buttons in the Macro Command Category
dialog:
Quattro Pro Macro
PerfectScript Macro
5 Type the macro in the Enter Macro box.
6 Type a name to reference the command in the Command Name box.
7 Type text to use as the button’s Tool Tip in the QuickTip box.
8 Choose a button graphic from the Icon list.
Displaying macro toolbar buttons
Once you create a macro toolbar button, you can then display the button on
any of the toolbars.
528
To display a macro button
2 Choose the Macros folder from the Command list.
3 Select the macro button you want to add to the toolbar area.
4 Drag the macro button to the appropriate toolbar.
Playing macros
While a macro plays,
appears on the Application Bar. When Quattro
Pro plays a macro, it begins with the first cell in the macro cells. It continues
down through the column, interpreting everything it encounters as part of
the macro, until it finds one of the following:
an empty cell
a cell containing a value
the {QUIT} macro command
the {RETURN} macro command
an invalid macro entry
At that point, the macro stops and control returns to the user.
Windows applications that support Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) can make
Quattro Pro play macro commands. See documentation for those Windows
applications for more details.
Playing Quattro Pro macros
You can play any Quattro Pro macro that you have stored in a notebook or a
macro library.
Playing Quattro Pro macros
You can play a Quattro Pro macro from the menu or using the macro buttons
on a customized toolbar. For information about creating customized toolbars,
see “Customizing toolbars” on page 74.
If the macro contains an error, Quattro Pro beeps, displays an error message,
and then stops the macro. Use the debugger to pinpoint and correct macro
errors. For information about debugging macros, see “Debugging macros” on
page 534.
Using macros
529
To play a Quattro Pro macro
Click Tools, Macro, Play
Press ALT+F2
2 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button.
Specify the macro location
Specify a macro library and select a macro name
If the macro is in another notebook, use full linking syntax to specify the
macro location (for example, [LIBRARY]A:C26).
To stop a macro while it is playing, click ESC or CTRL+BREAK.
If CTRL+BREAK key has been disabled with {BREAKOFF}, you cannot
interrupt the macro. If you need to use {BREAKOFF} in the macro, add it
as a last step after debugging the macro.
Playing PerfectScript macros
Playing a PerfectScript macro is similar to playing a Quattro Pro macro.
However, PerfectScript macros cannot be used as they are for startup or exit
macros. There is a way to run a PerfectScript macro from Quattro Pro that
plays when Quattro Pro launches, but it involves entering a reference to the
PerfectScript macro within the context of a Quattro Pro macro.
For more information about playing a PerfectScript macro when Quattro Pro
launches, see “Playing startup macros when opening a notebook” on page
532.
Playing PerfectScript macros
PerfectScript macros get stored in the .WCM macro files by name,
simplifying the playing of this type of macro.
To play a PerfectScript macro
Click Tools, Macro, Play
Press ALT+F2
2 Enable the PerfectScript Macro button.
530
Type the macro name (if you know it)
Browse the macros folder to select the macro you want
To stop a macro while it is playing, click ESC or CTRL+BREAK.
Playing keystroke macros
You can play Quattro Pro macros attached to keystrokes. For information
about attaching a keystroke to your macro, see “Attaching macros to
keystrokes” on page 526.
For information about conversion options from other applications, see
Conversion notes for Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro and Conversion
notes for Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Pro in the Reference section of the
Quattro Pro online Help.
Playing keystroke macros
You can play the macro from the keyboard by pressing CTRL+SHIFT and
the letter you specified (in either uppercase or lowercase).
Example
If you type \A, you can play the macro using CTRL+SHIFT+A.
Macros assigned to keys play using CTRL+SHIFT+letter. Avoid using
the same alphabet letters already assigned to shortcuts in the application
(for example, CTRL+SHIFT+N).
Playing macros attached to buttons, notebooks, and startup
macros
You can attach macros to many items in Quattro Pro so that the macro plays
when the user performs some action (for example, clicks a button, activates a
control, or changes a value). Many controls in dialog windows can play
macros using link commands. For more information about using link
commands, see “Understanding Link Events” on page 620.
Using macros
531
You can play a macro each time a user opens or closes a notebook. For
example, Quattro Pro can enter the current date and time when you open a
notebook, or open a notebook after closing another. You can also play a macro
each time you start Quattro Pro.
Playing macros attached to buttons
Once you attach a macro to a Form Control button, you select it by
right-clicking the button. Selecting the button lets you modify or make
changes to the button.
To execute a Form Control button macro
Click the button.
Playing startup macros when opening a notebook
You may want to have Quattro Pro launch a macro whenever a user opens a
particular notebook. You can create a startup macro in two ways:
Create a macro and have it _NBSTARTMACRO
Enter the name of a macro in the Startup Macro box of the Settings dialog
box
Every time a user opens a notebook, Quattro Pro looks for a macro named
_NBSTARTMACRO and plays it, if found. If that macro is not found, Quattro
Pro plays the macro specified in the Startup Macro box.
You can also create macros that play when you close a notebook. For
information about playing macros when closing a notebook, see “Playing
macros when closing notebooks” on page 533.
Quattro Pro can have the same macro startup every time a user launches
Quattro Pro. For information about assigning this kind of macro, see “Playing
macros when launching Quattro Pro” on page 533.
To play a startup macro in a notebook
Use Tools, Macro, Record to record a macro
Type a macro in a cell or cells
2 Select the first cell of the macro, then click Insert, Name, Cells.
3 Type _NBSTARTMACRO.
4 Click Add, then click Close.
532
To assign an existing macro as the startup macro
3 Type a new name in the Startup Macro box (by default, \0 is the startup
macro).
If a notebook is linked to other notebooks, a Links dialog box appears
when you open it. To ensure that _NBSTARTMACRO plays correctly in a
notebook that contains links, begin the macro with {ESC}. This cancels
the Links dialog box. You can use Edit, Links to access linked values or to
load supporting notebooks after accessing the file.
If you rename the default startup macro name, existing macros named \0
will no longer play automatically. For example, if you set the startup name
to AUTOSTART, macros named \0 do not play automatically; they must be
renamed AUTOSTART.
Playing macros when closing notebooks
When you close a notebook containing a macro named _NBEXITMACRO,
Quattro Pro plays the macro before closing the notebook. Design the macro
to make sure any ongoing operations are completed so users can exit the
notebook without problems.
To play a macro when closing a notebook
Use Tools, Macro, Record to record a macro
Type a macro in a cell or cells
2 Select the first cell of the macro, then click Insert, Name, Cells.
3 Type _NBEXITMACRO.
4 Click Add, then click Close.
Playing macros when launching Quattro Pro
You can have a macro play every time you launch Quattro Pro by storing the
path to the macro in the Autoload File box of the Settings dialog box.
Using macros
533
To assign a macro to launch automatically whenever Quattro Pro
launches
3 Do one of the following in the Autoload File box:
Type the name of the macro
Browse to locate the macro
Debugging macros
Debugging is the process of isolating and fixing problems in a macro. With
the debugger, you can
play macros in slow motion (step by step), pausing as long as you want
between steps
set breakpoints to pause a macro when it reaches a given cell or satisfies a
given condition
play macros at full speed until reaching a breakpoint, then either continue
in slow motion or at full speed until the next breakpoint
monitor or trace changes to specific cells as a macro plays
Debugging is especially important when you type macros or insert extra
parameters into a macro, such as cell references. A bug (or error) can stop a
macro from executing, or can cause unexpected consequences when playing
the macro.
Debugging Quattro Pro macros
Once you create a Quattro Pro macro, you can turn on the Macro Debugger
to check for errors in your code. This allows you to
assign standard or conditional breakpoints
assign trace cells
assign cells for editing
You control when Debug Mode is active, and turn it on or off as needed.
Setting macro breakpoints
If you know that most of a macro is correct, you can use breakpoints to play
parts of a macro at full speed and step through other parts that may have
problems. There are two types of breakpoint:
534
Standard breakpoints — pause the macro at the breakpoint cell.
Conditional breakpoints — pause the macro when the result of a logical
formula in the conditional breakpoint cell is true.
You can set up to four standard breakpoints and four conditional breakpoints
in one macro.
Example
The following macro includes a loop that continuously increments a single
cell called COUNTER.
counter
Is_done
0
+COUNTER>=100
\m {LET counter,0}
again {; increment counter}
{LET counter,counter+1}~
{BRANCH again}
A pass count specifies the number of loops that occur before reaching a
breakpoint. If you specify the cell containing {BRANCH} again as the first
breakpoint and leave the pass count at 1, the macro stops at the {BRANCH}
command each time it goes through the loop. When you click Go, the macro
continues, incrementing the counter cell by one. In the top of the debugger
window, the selector highlights the {BRANCH} command, indicating that it
is the next command.
If you specified a pass count of 5 for the first breakpoint in the above
example, then every time you click Go, five loops occur, and the counter
increments from 0 to 5, to 10, and so on.
Conditional breakpoints
Conditional breakpoints stop a macro when the result of a logical formula
becomes true. In the previous macro example, the cell Is_done contains a
logical formula. Is_done is false (has a value of 0) until 100 or more loops
occur. If this cell is specified as a conditional cell, the macro pauses when the
counter reaches 100.
You can set up to four conditional breakpoints per notebook. Conditional
breakpoints can be extremely valuable. Suppose you have a macro loop that
contains date calculations and you want it to pause whenever December is
reached. If the date is in cell A5, assign the first conditional breakpoint to a
cell containing the following formula:
MONTH(A5)=12
As long as the formula in the condition cell is true (has a value of 1), the
macro plays in step-by-step mode. Once the formula is false (has a value of
Using macros
535
0), click Go to let the macro continue until the next conditional formula
evaluates as true. This process repeats until all conditional breakpoints are
passed.
Playing macros in debug mode
You can play a macro while in Debug mode.
To play a Quattro Pro macro in Debug mode
1 Click Tools, Macro, Debugger.
2 Click Tools, Macro, Play.
3 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button, then choose the macro you want.
4 Do one of the following if you want to play the first command of the
macro:
Click in the Debugger window
Press the SPACEBAR
Press the SPACEBAR to step through each macro command until you
find an error
Click Go or press ENTER to play the rest of the macro at full speed
You can also activate Debug mode by pressing SHIFT+F2 or the PAUSE
key.
Setting a standard breakpoint for debugging Quattro Pro macros
You can set up to four standard breakpoints. Sometimes a problem appears
after many repetitions of the same commands in a macro loop. If this is the
case, you can set a pass count to indicate how many times to pass through
the breakpoint before stopping. The default, 1, stops the macro every time it
passes through the breakpoint. Setting it to 2 stops the macro every other
pass.
To set a standard breakpoint in a macro
536
4 Click Breakpoints, then select a breakpoint to set (1st Breakpoint through
4th Breakpoint).
5 Type the cell reference of the cell where you want the macro to stop in the
Location box of the Breakpoint dialog.
6 Type a number in the Pass Count box.
7 Click OK to set the breakpoint.
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to set additional breakpoints.
9 Press the SPACEBAR to resume stepping through the macro, then click
Go to continue at full speed until the next breakpoint or the end of the
macro.
If there are several macro commands in the breakpoint cell, you may need
to click Go more than once to make the macro play at full speed.
Click Reset from the Macro Debugger to clear all trace cells and macro
breakpoints.
You can remove a standard breakpoint by setting its pass count to 0.
Setting conditional breakpoints for debugging Quattro Pro macros
Conditional breakpoints debug a macro using Boolean logic. The debugging
process pauses only when a positive result (1) is returned by playing the
script.
To set a conditional breakpoint in a macro
4 Click Conditional, then select a conditional breakpoint to set (1st Cell
through 4th Cell).
5 Do one of the following in the Location box of the Conditional Cell dialog
box:
Type the cell reference for the conditional cell
Use the Pointer button to assign a cell reference
6 Click OK to set the breakpoint.
7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to set additional conditional breakpoints.
Using macros
537
8 Press the SPACEBAR to resume stepping through the macro.
9 Click Go to continue at full speed until the next breakpoint or the end of
the macro.
When there are several macro commands in the breakpoint cell, you may
need to click Go more than once to make the macro play at full speed.
If you want to clear all trace cells and macro breakpoints, click Reset from
the Macro Debugger.
Setting trace cells for debugging Quattro Pro macros
Macros often affect the contents of one or more cells. By tracing these cells,
you can see what the macro is doing. You can specify up to four trace cells
whose addresses and current values display during debugging in the
Debugger window. The Debugger updates as the contents of the trace cells
change.
To set a trace cell for a macro
4 Click Trace, then select a trace cell to set (1st Cell through 4th Cell).
5 Do one of the following in the Location box of the Trace Cell dialog box:
Type the cell reference for the trace cell.
Use the Pointer button to assign a cell reference.
6 Click OK to set the trace cell.
7 To specify additional trace cells, repeat steps 4 to 6.
When you want to clear all trace cells and macro breakpoints, click Reset
from the Macro Debugger.
If you want to see all the trace cells, resize the Macro Debugger window.
Editing Quattro Pro macro cells from the debugger
This feature lets you edit a specific cell of a macro.
538
To edit macro cells from the Macro Debugger
3 Enable the Quattro Pro Macro button, then choose the macro to edit.
4 Click Edit.
5 Do one of the following in the Location box of the Edit Cell dialog box:
Type the cell reference for the edit cell.
Use the Pointer button to assign a cell reference.
6 Edit the contents that display in the Content box.
Exiting macro Debug mode for Quattro Pro macros
There are three methods of closing the Macro Debugger in Quattro Pro.
To exit macro Debug mode
Click Tools, Macro, Debugger
Press SHIFT+F2
Press the Pause button
If you want to stop a macro before debugging finishes, click Terminate
from the Debugger or press CTRL+BREAK. Then you can debug another
macro or exit Debug mode.
When the Debugger displays, part of the notebook is covered. You can
move the Debugger to see the data it covers.
Debugging PerfectScript macros
Macros are written with an editor and saved as a source file. The macro
compiler creates an object, which it saves in a hidden area of the source (the
macro compiler does not create a separate object file). When you save a
source file, the object is destroyed. It is recreated each time the source file is
compiled. A compiled source file (macro) contains instructions that are
executed when you play the macro.
A macro compiler is used to compile or “translate” macros so that
WordPerfect Office 2000 applications can play them. Macros in PerfectScript
are compiled when you record, play, or save them, or when you click Save &
Using macros
539
Compile or Options, Close Macro on the Macro Edit Feature Bar. The tool
used for compiling PerfectScript macros is the PerfectScript Debugger.
Compilation errors
Bugs are fixed by editing the macro. Errors are sometimes created when you
edit a macro. For example, if you mistype a word, when you compile the
macro, a compile-time syntax error displays a syntax error message box.
The compiler does not recognize typographical errors and guesses that it is a
label’s calling statement. When the compiler reaches the end of the file and
does not find a corresponding label, it displays a syntax error message. The
message contains information about the error and its location. The compiler
makes a best guess and may not always be accurate. The compiler identifies
syntax errors and suggests solutions.
Common syntax errors are caused by:
missing semicolons between parameters
missing parentheses
missing double quotation marks
missing command in a conditional or loop statement
undefined calling statements
using commas between parameters instead of semicolons
Runtime errors
Runtime is the same as execution time. Run-time errors occur while the
macro is playing. Referencing a variable that has not been assigned a value
causes a run-time error. Run-time error messages identify errors that occur
while the macro plays and show where the errors occur.
For users familiar with other programming languages such as Visual Basic or
C++, the PerfectScript Debugger has many of the same features and
buttons found in those language compilers.
Playing PerfectScript macros in Debug mode
If you want to debug a PerfectScript macro, you must run it in Debug mode.
For information about debug options, see “Using PerfectScript debug
options” on page 542 and “Setting PerfectScript debugging breakpoints” on
page 541.
To play a PerfectScript macro in Debug mode
540
3 Enable the PerfectScript Macro button, then choose the macro you want.
4 Click Debug, then choose one of the menu options.
5 Correct the errors using the macro editor you selected and the Contents
text box for variable values.
Setting PerfectScript debugging breakpoints
Use breakpoints to indicate locations in the macro where execution of the
macro should be interrupted and suspended, and where the debugger should
become active. While the macro executes statements, the Debugger is
mostly inactive, and the Debugger state message line displays the text
“Macro is running.” However, the Debugger is not completely disabled. You
can interrupt the macro by clicking Break. This causes the Debugger to
become active, as if there were a breakpoint at the point where the macro is
currently executing. Breakpoint commands are also available while the macro
is running, so that you can add and remove breakpoints.
You can stop a macro at any line, .DLL call, or other place in the macro. The
Debugger dialog displays the labels, functions, procedures, variables being
passed, etc., so that you can check them. All breakpoints allow a message to
be logged to the Debugger Event Log.
The PerfectScript Debugger automatically creates three breakpoints: Macro
Start, Macro End, and Error. It marks the breakpoints it adds with an
exclamation mark (!), which can be removed if desired.
To specify where you want the Debugger to stop while playing a
macro
1 Click File, Debug, Play.
2 Specify the macro you want to play with the Debugger.
3 When the Debugger dialog box opens, click Debug, Breakpoints, Edit.
4 Choose the type of breakpoint you want to use, then click the Add button.
5 Specify the options you want to use for the type of breakpoint you added,
then click the Update button.
Each type of breakpoint has different options; Press SHIFT+F1, then
click a control for specific information.
You can add a Line Number breakpoint by double-clicking the line in the
macro source list where you want the macro to pause.
Using macros
541
Using PerfectScript debug options
When the debugger stops at a macro statement, it stops before the indicated
statement executes. The PerfectScript Debugger provides the following
options to continue macro execution:
Continue — continues executing the macro until the next breakpoint.
Step Into — executes the next single statement.
Step Over — executes the label or routine call without stopping until it
has completed. This will stop the macro at the next statement in the
current label or routine.
Step Out — executes the macro until the next return is encountered, if
you have entered a routine or label.
Run to Cursor — executes down to the line under the mouse cursor in
the macro source list.
Skip to Cursor — skips a series of statements without executing them, or,
if some statements need to be repeated, sets the next statement to be
executed by the Debugger, without executing any statements between the
current point and the new line.
Animate — in this mode, the next Continue or Step command is repeated
until you stop it, or until the macro ends. Between each command, the
debugger is displayed for the amount of time you specify in the Settings
dialog box.
Use the Skip to Cursor option with extreme caution, since skipping to a
line that is not within the same label or routine could cause the internal
macro execution to become invalid, which will almost certainly result in
execution failure.
Customizing application settings using macros
As the application you create may affect standard settings on the desktop, it
is a good idea to save and reset the user’s environment settings. You can
include extra code in the macro to restore the original settings once the user
exits the application. You can also update links to other notebooks and
objects using linking parameters.
You can customize macros using self-modifying (or dynamic) macro codes.
Self-modifying macros either alter all or part of the macro when playing.
542
Saving and resetting application defaults
When you develop a Quattro Pro application, it is usually best to store the
user’s environment settings.
If you create a custom application in Quattro Pro that changes a user’s
environment settings, it is a good idea to include macro code that saves the
user’s current settings and restores them when the user exits the
application. Assuming that you have a spreadsheet called SETTINGS where
these settings can be saved, you can save the current settings with the
following macro commands:
{LET SETTINGS:A1,PROPERTY(“Application.Display”)}
{LET SETTINGS:A2,PROPERTY(“Application.International”)}
{LET SETTINGS:A3,PROPERTY(“Application.Macro”)}
{LET SETTINGS:A4,PROPERTY(“Application.File_Options”)}
{LET SETTINGS:A5,PROPERTY(“Application.General”)}
To change the settings, you can use macro commands like the following:
{Application.Display “None,Yes,Yes,Yes,A..B:A1..B2,Yes,Yes,Yes”}
{Application.International “$, Quattro Pro, Prefix, Signed,
”"1,234.56 (a1,a2)"", MM/DD/YY (MM/DD), HH:MM:SS (HH:MM), Windows
Default, English (American), No"}
{Application.File_Options “H:\, QUATTRO.WB3, WB3, No, 20, Yes,
Yes,Yes”}
{Application.Macro “Both, No, Quattro Pro - DOS, \0"}
{Application.General “Yes,No,Yes,No,500"}
Finally, to restore the settings, use these macro commands:
{Application.Display +SETTINGS:A1}
{Application.International +SETTINGS:A2}
{Application.Macro +SETTINGS:A3}
{Application.File_Options +SETTINGS:A4}
{Application.General +SETTINGS:A5}
Using the active selection within a macro
PROPERTY(“Active_Block.Selection”) returns the address of the currently
selected cells as an address, and can be used within macro commands. The
following macros set the print selection and create a named cell from the
active cells:
Print_Block {Print.Block PROPERTY(“Active_Block.Selection”)}
Name_Blk {BlockName.Create TestBlk",
PROPERTY(“Active_Block.Selection”)}
Using macros
543
Updating links with macros
To pass linking parameters such as “Open Supporting,” “Update
References,” or “None,” you must spell out the entire parameter in the
{FileOpen} macro command, as follows:
{FileOpen “TEST.WB3, ”Open Supporting"}
{FileOpen “TEST.WB3, ”Update References"}
{FileOpen “TEST.WB3, ”None"}
Creating self-modifying macros
You can use macro commands and text formulas to create self-modifying
macros (also called dynamic macros) that alter themselves while playing. For
example, to save the active notebook as ACCTx.QPW, where x is a value
stored in cell A5, enter the following text formula into a cell:
+"{FileSaveAs “”ACCT"&STRING(A5,0)&".QPW""}“
The result of this formula plays as a macro command. For example, if cell A5
contains the value 5 in the previous example, Quattro Pro plays {FileSaveAs
“ACCT5.QPW”}. If cell A5 changes to 10 and the notebook recalculates,
Quattro Pro plays {FileSaveAs “ACCT10.QPW”}.
You can also use macro commands to change a portion of the macro while it
is playing. The next example shows a macro that uses {GET} to convert
user keystrokes into macro actions:
cell_typeb
type_indic
{INDICATE UPPER(CELLPOINTER(“type”))}
{LET cell_type,cellpointer(“type”)}
{IF cell_type="l"}{INDICATE LABEL}
{IF cell_type="b"}{INDICATE BLANK}
{IF cell_type="v"}{INDICATE VALUE}{GET next_key}
{IF UPPER(next_key)="{ESC}“}{BRANCH clear_indic}
next_key {Esc}{BRANCH type_indic}
clear_indic {INDICATE}{QUIT}
You can use these concepts to create powerful macros that completely
change themselves based on their environment.
544
USING OLE AUTOMATION
WITH OLE OBJECTS
18
Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is the process of inserting an object
(for example, a file or graphic) created in one application into a file in another
application. OLE capabilities within Quattro Pro allow you to import and
export projects, objects, and graphics. You have the ability to integrate data
and objects from the source application, usually referred to as the object,
within another application that acts as a container for the object. For
example, you can use Quattro Pro from within Lotus Notes as well as
accessing some Lotus Notes data from within Quattro Pro.
This version of Quattro Pro supports OLE 2.0, OLE 1.0, and DDE (Dynamic
Data Exchange). OLE 2.0 allows the user to edit in-place objects as well as
drag and drop objects across applications to move or copy them.
Application developers can use Quattro Pro macro commands and other
features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support
OLE automation as containers.
Link commands
Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to actions that a user
performs (events). For example, a control can be assigned a link command
that initiates an object property when the control is clicked or displays
additional controls.
Events recognized by Quattro Pro include
clicking
Using OLE automation with OLE objects
545
right-clicking
pressing a key
entering a new value
Link commands also let you connect a control to another control or a
notebook cell. For a comprehensive list of link events, see “Understanding
link events” on page 620.
For information about attaching controls to other controls, see “Working with
child controls” on page 630.
Using Quattro Pro with Lotus Notes
Lotus Notes is a database application with messaging capabilities. Notes/FX
(Notes Field Exchange) lets you embed a Quattro Pro notebook in a Lotus
Notes field, using it to exchange data between the applications. Either
application can use the data.
To start communication between Quattro Pro and Lotus Notes, you must
first create a Notes/FX field block in Quattro Pro. Once you create the block
you can:
Name the field block with a name recognized by Lotus Notes.
Create a Lotus Notes database.
Create a form with some or all of the information in the embedded Quattro
Pro Notes/FX field.
Create a Lotus Notes database view for displaying data entered in the
embedded Quattro Pro Notes/FX field.
Activate Notes/FX so that data entered in Quattro Pro displays in Lotus
Notes view.
Setting up Notes/FX field blocks
The Notes/FX feature uses a field block to determine how Lotus Notes
exchanges data. The field block is defined in two columns of information or
database cells. The first column lists the field names, which exchanges data
with similarly named fields in Lotus Notes. The second column contains a
field value or block reference.
Here is an example of a field block:
546
The labels in A6..A9
are field names;
B6..B9 contains field
values.
There are three types of fields: data fields, predefined fields, and reference
fields.
Data fields
Data fields contain data from a Lotus Notes database. You can edit data fields
in Lotus Notes. The data is always stored in Lotus Notes. In the example
above, Author and Date are data fields. The following table illustrates the
bidirectional fields used to share data between Quattro Pro and Lotus Notes:
Quattro Pro property
Lotus Notes field and data type
Title
Title (text)
Subject
Subject (text)
Author
Author (text)
Keywords
Keywords help Notes categorize notebooks using
keywords input in the Quattro Pro file properties
(text)
Comments
Comments (text)
Predefined fields
Predefined fields contain a calculated value, such as the size of a notebook or
its creation date. In the example shown above, SizeInK is a predefined field.
Here are the predefined fields supported by Quattro Pro with the related
Notes fields and data types:
Predefined cells or properties
Lotus Notes field and data type
SizeInK
SizeInK for size of the notebook embedded in
Notes (number)
LastRevisionDate (or Last Saved)
LastRevisionDate (or LastSavedDate) (time)
Last Saved By
LastSavedBy (text)
Revision Number
NumberOfRevision (number)
547
Sheet Titles
SheetTitles are the custom names used in the notebook
(text)
SizeInSheets
SizeInSheets are the number of sheets used in the notebook
(number)
DocumentClass
DocumentClass is always set to “Notebook” and refers to
the OLE class name of the embedded notebook (text)
Reference fields
Reference fields are block coordinates that reference a block of data. In the
above example, DataBlock is a reference field. You also reference this block
of cells when naming the field block.
Creating a field block in Quattro Pro
The first step in linking a Quattro Pro notebook with a Lotus Notes database
is to set up a field block in Quattro Pro. This helps set the fields you want the
Lotus Notes database to recognize as common to both applications.
To create a field block in Quattro Pro
1 Set up your data into two columns in a new notebook.
2 Name the field block.
For information about naming the field block, see “Naming a Quattro Pro
Notes/FX field block” on page 549.
3 Click File, Properties, then click the Summary tab.
4 Type the title in the Title box.
For example, type Current Value.
5 Type a subject in the Subject box.
For example, type Present Value Calculation.
6 Type keywords in the Keywords box. Separate keywords with a comma if
they are used as field names in the field block.
For example, type: payment, rate, period, result, author, date, datablock,
and the name given to the field block.
7 Type a comment in the Comments box, then click OK.
For example, type: This returns the value of an investment where
Payment is invested for N periods of time at the rate of Rate per period
(interest).
8 Click the Statistics tab, then click OK.
548
The information on this tab shows you the filename, where it is stored,
the title, the creation date, date last saved, and revision number.
9 Click File, Save, then close Quattro Pro.
For example, name the file QPTEST.QPW.
Naming a Quattro Pro Notes/FX field block
The second step to connecting a Quattro Pro notebook with a Lotus Notes
database is to name a cell in the field block. The cell name is used by Lotus
Notes to find the field block. For information about creating Notes/FX field
block, see “Creating a field block in Quattro Pro” on page 548.
To name a Quattro Pro Notes/FX field block
1 Select the field block (for example, A1..C9).
3 Type Notes Fields as the cell name, then click Add to create it.
Creating Lotus Notes databases
Before you can create a form to embed a Quattro Pro notebook containing a
Notes/FX field block, you must create a new database in Lotus Notes. For
more information about working with Notes databases, refer to the online
Help of the Lotus Notes application.
To create a Lotus Notes database
1 Launch Lotus Notes, click File, Database, New to create a database.
2 Do all of the following in the appropriate boxes on the New Database
dialog:
Choose Local in the Server list box
Type a name for the database in the Title box
Type a filename in the File Name box, then click the browse button to
select a location other than the default
Choose Blank in the template list
3 Click the OK button.
549
Embedding Quattro Pro notebooks in Lotus Notes
Once you have created and named a field block, you can set up your Lotus
Notes database to interact with Quattro Pro. For information about creating a
database in Lotus Notes, see “Creating Lotus Notes databases” on page 549.
A field block set up
to calculate the
present value of an
item.
You must create a Notes form with an embedded rich text field which
contains the Quattro Pro notebook containing the Notes/FX field block. The
procedure below uses the following field block as an example:
A field block set up to calculate the present value of an item.
To create a Lotus Notes form with an embedded Quattro Pro
notebook
1 Double-click the database icon on the Lotus Notes workspace.
2 Click Create, Design, Form, then create the following edit fields with
descriptors and properties which correspond to fields in the Notes/FX
field block. Use the following data as an example:
Payment (number, editable)
Rate (number, editable)
Period (number, editable)
Result (number, editable)
Author (author, editable)
Comments (text, editable)
Payment form (rich text field, editable)
3 With your pointer in the rich text edit field, click Create, Object.
4 Enable the Create An Object From File button, then click the Browse
button to select the saved Quattro Pro file. This embeds the Quattro Pro
file containing the Notes/FX field block into the rich text field that was
created on the form.
5 Click Design, Form Properties, and do the following on the Launch tab:
550
Choose Quattro Pro 9 in the AutoLaunch list.
Enable Creating, Editing, and Reading in the Launch When list if not
already selected.
6 Do one of the following in the Hide When list on the Launch tab:
Enable Creating, Editing, and Reading if you want Quattro Pro to
launch automatically when activating the form.
Disable these three items if you want the form to launch only when the
Launch button on the activated form window is clicked.
7 Type a name for the form in the Form Name box on the Basics tab. For
example, Current Values.
8 Press ESC, then click the Yes button to save the form.
If you enable the Create A New Project button, a blank Quattro Pro
spreadsheet gets embedded to allow you to create the Notes/FX field
block at this time.
You can label an edit field with a descriptor by typing directly on the form
next to where you want the edit field to display on the Lotus Notes form.
You can create an edit field on a Lotus Notes form by clicking Create,
Field or by clicking the Create Field SmartIcon on the SmartIcon toolbar.
You can customize the appearance of the form (for example, changing the
background color or font colors of labels). For information about making
changes to the form, see the Lotus Notes online Help.
Creating a Lotus Notes view for embedded Quattro Pro fields
Once you set up the form in Lotus Notes with fields configured to match
those in the Notes/FX field block file, then you can create a view. In Lotus
Notes, a view displays data from the database in a specified order. The
columns you create display the data entered into a single field on a database
form.
To create a Lotus Notes view for embedded Quattro Pro fields
1 Open the Lotus Notes database you created.
2 Click Create, Design, View, then specify a name for the view.
For example, Current Values.
551
3 In the navigation pane, click View under the Design folder, then
double-click the view.
Click Create, Insert New Column — to insert a new column to the left
of the default # column.
Double-click on the column bar — to add a column to the right of the
default # column.
5 Give the column the name of the first field on the form (for example,
Payment).
6 At the bottom of the Design Pane, enable the Field button, and click
Payment in the list of field names.
7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 for the remaining form fields.
8 Press ESC, then click the Yes button to save the view.
If there is only one view in a database, that view displays by default when
you open the Lotus Notes database. To display a specific view when there
are multiple views, select the view name in the Folders and View section
of the navigation tree.
You can customize the view to display alternating colors for the database
entries or display special fonts in column headings. For information about
ways to customize a view, see the Lotus Notes online Help.
Activating Quattro Pro Notes/FX
Before you can activate a Quattro Pro Notes/FX field block, you must make
sure you have completed the following:
Created a Notes/FX field block
Named the Notes/FX field block
Created a database and form in Lotus Notes where the Quattro Pro
Notes/FX field gets embedded
Created a view for viewing data entered in the embedded Notes/FX field
Activating the Notes database form allows you to enter data in Quattro Pro
that displays in the Lotus Notes database view.
552
To enter data in Quattro Pro Notes/FX
1 Launch Lotus Notes, and open the database you created in the “To create
a Lotus Notes database” procedure.
2 Click Create, then click the name of the form you created. For example,
click Current Values.
3 Do one of the following based on the options selected in step 6 of the
procedure “Embedding Quattro Pro notebooks in Lotus Notes” on page
550
Click File, Open to open the file containing the Notes/FX field block if
Quattro Pro automatically launches.
Click the Launch button to launch Quattro Pro, then open the file
containing the Notes/FX field block.
4 Enter new data next to the fields you created (for example, enter a new
amount for Payment) in Quattro Pro.
5 Click File, Properties and type new information in the following fields:
Title
Subject
Keywords
Comments
6 Save the file, and click File, Exit to close Quattro Pro.
To close the Lotus Notes form after entering data in the Quattro
Pro embedded field
1 In Lotus Notes, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the
dialog to close the form window.
2 Press ESC, then click the Yes button to accept the changes when saving
the latest information.
If there is only one view in a database, that view displays by default when
you open the Lotus Notes database. To display a specific view when there
are multiple views, select the view name in the Folders and View section
of the navigation tree.
553
Using OLE automation
The OLE automation features let you create and manipulate objects in other
applications that support OLE 2.0 automation as a container.
Several Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and
conduct DDE exchanges, called conversations. Application developers can
use Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control
OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as a
container.
OLE automation lets you operate another application from within Quattro
Pro. For this to happen, an object model must be created for the automated
application.
In the case of a television, objects might represent the volume control, the
power control, the channel selector, and various tuning controls for color
quality and image centering. Properties are the settings used to control
object appearance and other attributes, while methods are the actions you
can perform with or on each object.
OLE automation works through automation expressions created with macro
statements. The process to follow for working with OLE automation and
macros involves:
Opening an application and creating a new object or getting an existing
object
Using macro commands and an application’s automation methods to set
properties and perform other actions
Closing the object and exiting the application
To understand the structure of automation expressions, you need to know
how certain terms are used for OLE automation in Quattro Pro. For
information about automation terminology, see “Automation terms” on page
554.
Automation terms
These terms are important for understanding OLE automation features. The
terms are listed in order, from the most basic to the most complex. For the
best understanding, read their definitions in order.
Automation objects
An automation object represents all or part of an application that has been
exposed for OLE automation. Most applications that support OLE
automation as clients expose the main application object — for example,
Visio.Application
554
or Excel.Application.
Automation objects have properties and methods that can be used to change
the attributes of objects and act on them. To learn which objects are exposed
for OLE automation, check the documentation accompanying the application.
Methods and collections
Methods are associated with automation objects. Methods act on objects and
usually return the result of the action. To learn which methods are available
for each object, check the documentation for the application.
A collection is a group of related automation objects, usually listed as a plural.
For example, if MenuItem is an object, MenuItems could be a collection of all
menu items. Like objects, collections can have their own sets of properties
and methods.
Properties
Properties are characteristics of an automation object that describe its
current state — usually appearance or behavior. You can use methods to
change some property settings. Other properties can be changed directly by
specifying a different argument.
Values
In OLE automation, a value can be
a number
a double-quoted string
an automation object
empty
Values can be stored as variables and included in expressions.
Variables
In OLE automation, a variable is a place to store a value. A variable can be
a cell (used to store a string, a number, or nothing/empty)
a member of an automation object
a named variable (used to store values of any type — often automation
objects — in contrast with cells, which can hold only strings and numbers)
555
Named variables
Named variables are automation expressions created with the {ASSIGN}
macro. They cannot be used in formulas directly, but can be used indirectly if
you first assign them to a cell name or reference. For more information about
using named variables with the {ASSIGN} macro, see “OLE automation and
macros” on page 559.
Named variables last as long as Quattro Pro is running. To delete one before
closing Quattro Pro, use the {DELVAR} macro.
When an expression is parsed names are first assumed to identify a cell,
cells, then named variables. This means that a named variable cannot have
the same name as a cell reference, a group of cells, or a cell name in the
notebook that contains the currently executed macro. Otherwise, it is not
accessible.
The name of a named variable cannot contain any formula operators or
leading or trailing spaces, although spaces within the name are acceptable.
Expressions
An expression symbolizes a value or variable, depending on its use. An
expression can be
a string
a number
a cell (cell reference, cell coordinates, or cell name)
the name of a named variable
a formula expression (for information about syntax rules for entering
functions, see “Working with spreadsheet functions” on page 139.
an automation expression
A value expression is an expression of a value. If an expression is used to
express a value and it represents a variable, the value of the variable is
returned. For example, if a value is expected from expression A1, the value
stored in A1 is used.
A variable expression is an expression of a variable. If an expression is used
to express a variable and it represents a value, the value is converted to a cell
or named variable if the value is a string. For example, +"A"&"1" results in a
cell variable representing the cell reference A1.
Arguments
An argument is information supplied to part of an automation expression —
to a property, method, or formula.
556
Automation expressions
An automation expression is an automation object (or object hierarchy) plus
any associated property or method and arguments, if any.
In its simplest form, the syntax is object.property or object.method. Because
automation objects are usually found in hierarchies, members of successive
hierarchical levels can be used to specify the exact target object. Elements of
automation expressions are separated by periods — for example,
Application.ActiveSheet(1)
Range(“RangeName”).ClearContents
For more information about automation syntax details, see “OLE automation
syntax” on page 557.
Non-syntax errors in automation expressions can be trapped with the
{ONERROR} macro command.
OLE automation syntax
Automation expressions introduce OLE automation expressions and their
basic syntax. The full syntax is
Starting_object
or
starting_object.member_cascade
where:
starting_object is an object function or named variable that represents an
object
object function is CreateObject(args) or GetObject(args)
member_cascade is member or object_member.member_cascade
member is name or name(args) or [unquoted string]
object_member is member representing an object
args is empty or arg or arg, arg
arg is a value expression (expression of a value)
All OLE automation methods and properties can be included as member,
usually at the end of an expression.
A property or method without arguments can be used without parentheses.
557
The object connector, shown above as a period (.), is determined by the
international setting for a decimal point. The list separator, shown above as a
comma (, ) — as in arg, arg — is determined by the international separator
character setting.
For sample expressions derived from these definitions, see “OLE automation
expression examples” on page 560.
For more information about using CreateObject and GetObject, see “OLE
automation object functions” on page 558.
Quattro Pro does not support the use of automation expressions in formulas,
although there is a way to accomplish the same thing. For information about
using automation expressions in formulas, see {ASSIGN} in “OLE
Automation and Macros” on page 559.
OLE automation object functions
Quattro Pro uses two OLE automation object functions, GetObject and
CreateObject, to create and retrieve objects from other applications and
insert them in notebooks. These functions perform different tasks depending
on the arguments used with them and the application that provides the
objects. Both functions accept the progID argument, which is a programmatic
identifier registered by an application during its installation — for example,
Excel.Application or Visio.Application. These object functions can be used in
OLE automation expressions within Quattro Pro macros.
CreateObject
CreateObject(progID) locates the target application, loads it, creates an
object, and returns the object. The application can be loaded only if its path is
registered or specified in PATH. For example,
CreateObject(“Visio.Application”)
returns a Visio graphics object.
This object function is not the same as the macro {CREATEOBJECT}.
GetObject
This object function retrieves an existing object from somewhere, depending
on the given arguments:
GetObject(filename) — returns an object from the specified file. The
filename should be fully qualified with path and extension. GetObject loads
the application that can open the file and returns an object from the file to the
active notebook. If filename identifies a specific object, such as
“c:\excel\a.xls!a1:b10" GetObject returns an object represented by A1:B10 in
that file.
558
GetObject(filename, progID) — loads the specified application and returns
the specified file. Although this expression seems to work like
GetObject(filename), it can return objects, such as charts, that the other
expression cannot access. For example, GetObject(“c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1",
”Excel.Application") returns a Microsoft Excel chart automation object, but
GetObject(“c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1") fails.
GetObject(, progID) or GetObject(“”, progID) — GetObject(“chart 1",
”Excel.Application") returns the active object of the specified application. For
example, the expression returns chart 1 from the active Microsoft Excel
notebook.
GetObject(object_name) — locates an embedded automation object inside
Quattro Pro. All of the following syntax expressions are acceptable:
GetObject(“object”)
GetObject(“page:object”)
GetObject(“[notebook]page:object”)
GetObject(“[]page:object”)
If GetObject(object_name) fails, try GetObject(filename).
CreateObject and GetObject expressions work with the {ASSIGN} macro to
create a named variable that refers to the returned object. For example, the
following macro expression creates the variable Chart1 that represents the
returned object:
{ASSIGN Chart1, GetObject(“chart 1", ”Excel.Application")}
OLE automation and macros
These macro commands directly support OLE automation in Quattro Pro:
Command
Definition
{ASSIGN}
Assigns a value to a variable. If you use {ASSIGN} to create a named
variable, the variable exists until you exit Quattro Pro. To delete a
variable before exiting, use {DELVAR VarName}.
{DELVAR}
Deletes the named variable VarName and frees any object assigned to
that variable.
{EXECAUTO}
Evaluates one or more automation expressions, but drops any returned
values from expressions.
{GETLABEL}
Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as
a label in VariableExpression.
559
{GETNUMBER}
Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as
a numeric value in VariableExpression.
{IFAUTOOBJ}
Checks to see whether the ObjectExpression is an OLE automation object
before continuing with the macro.
{SETLCID}
Sets the locale ID (local ID in PerfectScript) in to the default locale ID or
to one specified by LocaleID. The locale ID is a fixed number which
specifies language, separator character, and a variety of other
international settings; use {SETLCID} to ensure that the automation
controller is using the default ID or the ID of a specific target object.
Because macro command arguments are value expressions, you can pass
an automation expression as an argument to any macro command. For
example, if calc.accum represents the accum value of the calc named
variable, and excel.ActiveCell.Value represents the current value of the
Microsoft Excel ActiveCell object, then both these macros are valid:
{DOWN calc.accum}
{DOWN excel.ActiveCell.Value}
Quattro Pro does not support the use of automation expressions in
formula expressions. So, the following macros are invalid:
{IF named_variable>0} {do something}
{LET A2, named_variable+A1}
{IF named_variable.member>0}
To solve this problem, first assign the value of an automation
expression to a cell, then use that cell in a formula expression:
{ASSIGN A1, named_variable}
{IF A1>0} {do something}
OLE automation expression examples
OLE automation expressions are used within Quattro Pro macros to perform
OLE automation tasks. Automation expression syntax defines acceptable
syntax for OLE automation expressions. The following are acceptable
expression forms:
named_variable
CreateObject(progID) /where progID is the program identifier
registered for an application during its installation/
GetObject(filename and/or progID)
named_variable.member
560
named_variable.member1.member2(arg1, arg2)
named_variable.member1(arg1, arg2).member2
For more information about automation syntax expressions, see “OLE
automation syntax” on page 557.
OLE automation objects, properties, and methods can be included as
members of the expression; properties and methods usually occur at the end
of the expression. For more information on named variables, see Named
Variable in “Automation terms” on page 554.
For information about using CreateObject and GetObject in automation
expressions, see “OLE automation object functions” on page 558.
OLE automation macro examples
This topic includes examples that show how automation expressions are
used within macros to work with objects in other applications. The
automation expressions execute in the background of the application.
For example, the following macro opens the Microsoft Excel file, TEST.XLS,
and saves it as TEST2.XLS:
{ASSIGN Test, GetObject(“c:\excel\test.xls!C2:C6")}
{EXECAUTO Test.SaveAs(“c:\excel\test2.xls”)}
{ASSIGN File, GetObject(“c:\excel\test2.xls”)}
{ASSIGN Myrange, File.Range(“Myrange”)}
{IFAUTOOBJ Myrange}{LET G39, “New”}{RETURN}
{LET G39, “Empty”}
If you try to assign another variable to TEST2.XLS without using {DELVAR}
to delete the variable File, which represents TEST2.XLS, you are prompted
that TEST2.XLS already exists and is open.
The following macro opens the graphics application Visio, creates a new file,
draws a rectangle in the workspace, saves the file, then exits Visio:
{ASSIGN VisioApp, CreateObject(“Visio.Application”)}
{IFAUTOOBJ VisioApp}{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Documents.Add(“”)}
{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActivePage.DrawRectangle(1, 7, 5, 10)}
{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActiveDocument.SaveAs(TestFile)}
{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Quit()}
TestFile is the cell name of a cell containing this string:
C:\DATA\OLE2\VISIAUTO.VSD. The macro statement that saves the active
document as TestFile actually creates VISIAUTO.VSD in the specified
directory.
561
The next macro names a variable Test, assigns zero to it, prompts for an
entry other than zero, then stores it in Test:
{ASSIGN Test, 0}
{GETNUMBER “Enter a number other than 0:”, Test}
{ASSIGN VariableValue, Test}
{DELVAR Test}
{IF VariableValue<>0}{LET A1, “PASS”}{RETURN}
{LET A1, “FAIL”}
After assigning the value in Test to VariableValue (the name of a cell), and
deleting Test, it evaluates VariableValue and determines whether Test
received a new value that was assigned to VariableValue.
For information about named variables, see “Automation terms” on page 554.
For information about using CreateObject and GetObject in automation
expressions, see “OLE automation object functions” on page 558.
Using macro syntax and arguments
Macro commands, like functions, have specific grammatical rules, or syntax.
The syntax for macros is:
{COMMANDNAME Argument1, Argument2, Argument3...}
COMMANDNAME is the exact name of the command. Arguments are values
providing instructions to the command. Not all macro commands require
arguments, but when they do, they require a specific type of information. The
following examples are in Quattro Pro script form. To use them in
PerfectScript, modify these in your PerfectScript code accordingly. For
information about converting Quattro Pro script to PerfectScript, see
“Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490.
Some examples of macro commands are:
{Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29}
{BlockCopy A1, A2..A37}
{Search.Find “3rd Quarter Profits”}
{BEEP 3}
{GETNUMBER “How old are you?”, AGE}
{CONTENTS E15, F15, 15}
Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name.
The syntax rules for Quattro Pro macro commands are as follows:
You must enter the entire macro command in a single cell.
You can enter the command in uppercase or lowercase.
562
The command must begin and end with braces { }.
There must be a space between the command name and the first
argument. For example, {GETNUMBER"Number?", A1} results in a
syntax error; {GETNUMBER “Number?”, A1} works correctly.
Separate multiple arguments with commas. To use semicolons or periods
as separators instead, change the setting in Tools, Settings, International,
Punctuation.
Arguments must be the correct type (for example, number, string,
location, or condition). If a string is required, the argument must be a valid
character string; otherwise, a syntax error occurs.
If an argument contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in quotation
marks. For example,
{GETLABEL “Hello, world”, A4}
is allowed, but {GETLABEL Hello, world, A4} is not.
You can include more than one macro command in a cell. For example,
{BEEP}{GETLABEL “Hello, world”, A4}{QUIT}
Because macro commands are labels, a syntax error is not recognized when
you mistype a macro command; an error occurs instead when you try to play
(or run) the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the
format of macro commands as you enter them and record macros whenever
possible.
For information about formats for macro command arguments, see “Using
macro command arguments” on page 563.
For information about converting Quattro Pro macro syntax to PerfectScript
syntax, see “Choosing a macro creation tool” on page 490.
Using macro command arguments
Arguments in macro commands require specific information to be supplied
with the command. There are four types of arguments: numbers, strings,
locations, and conditions.
Number arguments
Number arguments require any numeric value, entered as
an actual number (such as 2 or 0.45)
a formula resulting in a number (such as A3*15)
a cell address or named cell containing a numeric value or formula (such
as C10, where C10 contains a valid number or formula)
563
String arguments
String arguments require a text string, entered as
an actual string in quotation marks (“Quattro Pro”).
a reference to a cell or named cell containing a label.
a comma-separated list of property or command equivalent settings,
enclosed in quotation marks (for example, “Currency, 2"). If a setting in
the list usually requires a single quotation mark, enter two quotation
marks (for example, ”Prefix, “”Windows Default"", No"). If a setting
contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in two sets of quotation marks.
a formula resulting in a label, such as UPPER(“hello”).
Location arguments
Location arguments require a reference to a cell or cells. The reference can
be
a cell name
selections referencing one or more cells; for example, A1, A1..A4 or
A..B:C4..D22
the relative reference of cells; for example, []C(0)R(0), []P(-2):C(0)R(22),
or []C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10)
coordinates for noncontiguous selections, enclosed in parentheses; for
example, (A1, B1..B7, C1..C7) or (A1, B:C27..C52)
a label or text formula resulting in any of the above options; for example,
+"A"&"2" which results in A2
Condition arguments
Condition arguments require a logical expression. A logical expression is a
formula that can be evaluated as either true or false, for example, +C4 >
500.
Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types. For
example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the
argument type.
564
Unlike functions, cell references in macros are not updated when the
macro is copied. So, if you move the contents of a cell, or insert or delete
a row or column, the macro reference might be wrong. For this reason,
use cell names whenever possible. Quattro Pro updates cell names to
reference the correct location.
Using macro subroutines
A subroutine is a macro stored separately from macros that use it. You name
the subroutine the same way macros are named. You can call the subroutine
from another macro, and Quattro Pro plays the subroutine’s macro
commands. After playing the subroutine, the command immediately following
the call (in the main macro) plays. Using subroutines makes the macro more
readable and easier to debug.
To call a subroutine from within a macro, type its name inside braces. For
example, {go_right} calls the subroutine named go_right.
You can pass arguments to a subroutine for use by its commands. These
arguments are stored in cells referenced by the subroutine. For example,
{set_cost C10, 36} calls the subroutine set_cost and passes two arguments
(C10 and 36) to it.
For a subroutine to know what to do with the arguments, you must define
them within the subroutine using {DEFINE}.This macro command tells
Quattro Pro where to store the arguments and whether they should be
interpreted as values or labels.
Whenever you call a subroutine, Quattro Pro stores the return point in an
internal list called a stack. One return point in this stack clears when the
subroutine encounters a {RETURN} command or empty cell. If you do not
clear all of these locations, the stack fills up, causing the error “Too Many
Nesting Calls”.
The {BRANCH} command can move to or return from any cell in a macro.
Use {BRANCH} instead of a subroutine when a macro
does not need to pick up where it left off after calling the subroutine
needs to return to a different point in the macro than the point directly
following the subroutine call
calls the main macro as a subroutine
Using command equivalents
Command equivalents perform operations usually done with menus or dialog
boxes. Options usually set in a dialog box are passed as arguments to a
565
command equivalent, in the same manner as passing them to a subroutine.
Command equivalents make macros easier to read and understand, and let
the macro play in any Quattro Pro menu system.
Menu choices with many settings (such as File, Print) have a set of command
equivalents that emulate their operation. The following example shows a
macro that emulates Edit, Find And Replace:
search_string
Fri
\s {GETLABEL “Search For? ”, +search_string}
{Search.Reset}
{Search.Block “”}
{Search.Find +search_string}
{Search.ReplaceBy +search_string}
\n {Search.Next}
Notice that each command equivalent sets one option in the Edit, Find And
Replace dialog box. You do not have to set each option every time. If one of
the command equivalents is omitted, the default setting is used. The final
command ({Search.Next}) performs the Find operation. You can use
command equivalent names with COMMAND to find current settings. For
example, COMMAND(“BlockFill.Series”) returns the current setting of
Series in Edit, Fill, Fill Series.
Menu choices with a few settings have one command equivalent that
emulates their operation. Command equivalents without a period are
typically of this type.
When you specify a command equivalent with a question mark (?) after the
command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the user can
manipulate. If the name of the command equivalent contains a period, use
only the part of the command name that precedes the period. For example,
{BlockFill?} displays the Edit, Fill, Fill Series dialog box for the user to
manipulate. When the user clicks OK, the fill occurs and the macro resumes.
When you specify a command equivalent with an exclamation mark (!) after
the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the macro
can manipulate. You can make the dialog box revert to user control at any
point in the macro using the command {PAUSEMACRO}.
The next example shows a macro that uses {PAUSEMACRO} and
{RestrictInput} to display a small form for the user to enter a name and
phone number:
new_name Nick Piercherd
new_phone(804) 555-2315
get_record
{BLANK A:E28..E29}
{RestrictInput.Enter A:D28..F29}
566
{PAUSEMACRO}
{IF #NOT@ISSTRING(E28)}{RETURN}
{IF #NOT@ISSTRING(E29)}{RETURN}
{LET new_name, E28}
{LET new_phone, E29}
Make sure that a dialog box is displaying or that Quattro Pro is in INPUT
or FIND mode when the macro command plays {PAUSEMACRO}.
Otherwise, the macro waits until it is stopped by CTRL+Break.
Using DDE macro commands
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) lets Window applications communicate with
one another. Use {INITIATE} to open a channel of communication with
another application. This is called initiating a conversation. Every DDE
conversation consists of a client and a server. The application initiating the
conversation is the client; the other application is the server. When you
initiate a conversation, you can use {POKE} to send data, {REQUEST} to
receive data, or {EXECUTE} to play macros in the server, {TERMINATE}
ends the conversation.
The data source that a DDE conversation connects with in the server
application is called a topic. Many DDE applications support the topic system
and items available from it.
Other DDE applications can call Quattro Pro as their server. To do so, use
the server name “QPW” and specify “System” or the filename of an open
notebook as the topic. When a notebook is the topic, you can enter cell
addresses or coordinates as the item to request, or play macro commands.
When system is the topic, you can play Quattro Pro macros or request the
items listed in the following table:
Item
Returns
SysItems
A list of the items you can request from system.
Topics
A list of topics currently available from the server application.
Status
The current status of the application. In Quattro Pro, this is the text of
the Application Bar indicator (READY, WAIT, LABEL, etc.).
Formats
A list of Clipboard formats supported by the application.
Selection
The coordinates of the active cells.
To play macro commands in Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link to
Quattro Pro using “QPW” as the DDE topic. To play PerfectScript macro
567
commands in Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link using “QPMacros” as
the DDE topic. Then use the EXECUTE command provided by your DDE
client application to play the command.
You can also request any property from Quattro Pro. The property must
be enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks, for example,
“(Application.Display).”
Play Quattro Pro macros from other applications using DDE.
Using object macro commands
Object macro commands can create Quattro Pro objects, change their
property settings, or move them to new positions. Object commands can
create three types of objects:
drawn objects
dialog controls
floating objects
Drawn objects
Drawn objects are objects in a chart window that you usually create using the
toolbar. When creating a drawn object with a macro command, specify the
position for the object by stating how far (how many pixels) it should appear
from the upper-left corner of the chart background. (A pixel is the smallest
dot that Windows can display on your screen.)
You can create drawn objects with {CREATEOBJECT}. The following
command activates a chart window and creates a line near the upper-left
corner of the chart:
{GraphEdit “PROFITS”}
{CREATEOBJECT “Line”, 0, 0, 25, 25}
Dialog controls
Dialog controls are objects in a dialog window. When creating a dialog control
using a macro command, specify the position by stating how far (how many
pixels) it should appear from the upper-left corner of the dialog window.
You can create dialog controls with {CREATEOBJECT}. For example, the
following command creates a push button in the active dialog window:
{CREATEOBJECT “Button”, 43, 41, 58, 77}
568
Floating objects
Floating objects are Form Control buttons and charts that appear on the
spreadsheet. Unlike chart objects and dialog controls, the position of a
floating object is specified as an offset from a cell in the notebook. The offset
is specified in twips; each twip is 1/1440th of an inch.
You can create floating objects with {FLOATCREATE}. For example, the
following macro command creates a button that is half an inch from the left
edge of A:A1:
{FLOATCREATE “Button”, A:A1, 720, 0, A:B2, 720, 360, “Bt1"}
In this example, A:A1, 720, 0 specifies that the upper-left corner of the
button is in A:A1, is 720 twips (half an inch) from the left side of the cell, and
is zero twips from the top of the cell. A:B2, 720, 360 specifies that the
lower-left corner of the button is in A:B2, 720 twips from the left side of
A:B2, and a quarter inch (360 twips) from the top of A:B2.
After you create an object with a macro command, use {SETPROPERTY} to
set its name or {GETPROPERTY} to store its name in a cell. Then you can
change its properties with macro commands at any time.
Selecting, positioning, and sizing objects
Dialog controls and floating objects are selected after you create them, so
you can reposition them or change their property settings. There are three
commands that select Quattro Pro objects:
{SELECTBLOCK}— selects cells.
{SELECTOBJECT}— selects chart objects or dialog controls. When a chart
object or dialog control is selected, you can use {MOVETO} and {RESIZE}
to move and resize it.
{SELECTFLOAT}— selects a floating object. When a floating object is
selected, you can use {FLOATMOVE} and {FLOATSIZE} to move and
resize it.
Changing or reading property settings
You can use {SETPROPERTY} and {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to change
the property settings of Quattro Pro objects. For example, the following
macro selects cells and changes their text color:
{SELECTBLOCK A:A1..C22}
{SETPROPERTY “Text_Color”, 5}
You can also change a property setting without selecting the cells using the
following command:
{SETOBJECTPROPERTY “A:A1..C22.Text_Color”, 5}
569
You can use {GETPROPERTY} and {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} to read
property settings. {GETPROPERTY} reads settings of the selected object;
{GETOBJECTPROPERTY} lets you read property settings without
selecting an object.
570
CREATING CONTROLS ON THE
SPREADSHEET
19
You can attach form controls to your spreadsheet. These controls make your
spreadsheet an interactive part of the UI (user interface). Form controls let
users choose from list boxes or enable check boxes and buttons. These
selections automatically display on the spreadsheet. When you create a form
control, you can activate it to behave in a specific way. You customize the
appearance and behavior of the controls by setting control properties.
Because form controls are located on the spreadsheet they are also known as
spreadsheet controls.
In addition to creating controls using the Insert, Form Control menu option,
Quattro Pro provides three other tools for creating controls:
Quattro Pro macros lets you record macros and add form controls to the
spreadsheet. For more information about recording macros, see “Working
with Quattro Pro macros” on page 492.
Dialog Designer lets you create custom dialog boxes with dialog controls.
These dialog controls look similar to form controls, but their configuration
properties are different. Dialog controls only exist in dialog boxes and
cannot be placed directly on the spreadsheet. For information about
working with dialog controls, see “Creating custom dialog boxes and form
Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) lets you create customized controls,
and applications. For information about working in Visual Basic for
Creating controls on the spreadsheet
571
Applications, see “Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with Quattro
Pro” on page .
Working with controls on the spreadsheet
You can add form controls to a spreadsheet. For example, you can add a
button that displays a chart or jumps to a Web site, or create a list box to
display selected data on the spreadsheet.
You can add the following form controls to a spreadsheet:
Control
Description
Button — performs a specific action when clicked
Check Box — provides two choices: Yes when enabled and No when
disabled
Radio Button — typically used in a mutually exclusive list where only
one radio button can be selected at a time
Group Box — usually contains other controls, such as radio buttons or
check boxes
List Box — lets a user type values or browse values using a scroll bar
Combo Box — creates a list box that a user can make choices from
Label — allows you to add static text near a control
Scroll bar — lets a user choose values by clicking arrows
Spin Control — lets the user choose a value by typing or by clicking
arrows and selecting a value
Edit Box — lets a user type text
If you add a control from the Dialog Controls flyout on the Chart and
Drawing Tools toolbar, you may find that the following controls cannot be
added to the spreadsheet: color control, bitmap button, rectangle control,
timer control, and tab control.
For more information about these controls, see Dialog box controls in the
Reference section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
572
Adding buttons and other form controls to spreadsheets
You can add a form control to your spreadsheet using the Form Control
commands in the insert menu. The way controls are activated varies
depending on the action they incur. When you specify a source block to
appear in a control (for example, a list box), each row in the block you specify
becomes one item in a list. If you want to make a control functional, you must
specify the appropriate information in a different area depending on the
controls:
Control
Tab in the properties dialog:
Button
Macro
Radio button
Macro
Check box
Macro
Group box
Label text
List box
Destination Block or Source Block
Combo box
Destination Block or Source Block
Scroll bar
Destination Block, Settings
Spin control
Destination Block, Settings
Label control
Label text
To add buttons and other controls
1 Click Insert, Form Control.
2 Choose a control from the submenu that appears.
3 Drag the control to the spreadsheet.
4 Right-click the control, then click Properties.
Specifying spreadsheet data for form controls
Each row of the source block becomes one item in a list box or combo box. If
a destination block is assigned, it displays the user’s selection from the list.
For example, if you have a source block naming the days of the week
(Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, etc.) and select Tuesday in the list, the
destination block displays Tuesday.
To specify data to appear in a list box or combo box
1 Create a control on the spreadsheet.
573
3 Click Destination Block.
4 Specify the cells that contain the data you want to appear in the control.
Attaching a macro to a form control
You can attach a macro to a form control that runs a macro when the user
activates the control. For example, a user can click a button that runs a macro
to perform a calculation. You can attach a macro to all form controls except
group boxes and labels.
For information about creating macros, see “Using macros” on page 489.
To attach a macro to a spreadsheet control
1 Right-click a control on the spreadsheet.
2 Click Properties.
3 Click the Macros tab.
4 Type the macro command name in the Enter Macro box.
Enclose the command name with braces {} .
Attaching form controls to a Web site
You can link form controls to the Internet by specifying the URL site to link
World Wide Web (http), gopher, and ftp sites. For example, a button can
launch a browser linked to a Web site. Internet files are opened for read-only
access. You cannot save files to the Internet. For information about using
Quattro Pro notebooks with the Internet, see “Working with the Internet” on
page 709.
To attach a form control to a Web site
1 Right-click a form control on the spreadsheet.
2 Click Properties, and then click the Macro tab.
3 Click the Link To URL button.
4 Type the URL address in the URL box.
Displaying dialog boxes from form controls
You can link a custom dialog box to a form control, so that when a user
executes a macro, the specified dialog box displays.
574
To display a dialog box from a form control
2 Click the Macro tab, then click the Execute Dialog button.
3 Choose a dialog box from the Active Dialog list.
4 Do one of the following in the Result Cell box:
Type a cell reference.
Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference.
5 Do one of the following in the Values Range box:
Type a cell reference.
Use the Pointer button to select a cell reference.
Customizing and managing controls on the
spreadsheet
You can change and manage form controls through the form control
properties. You can change the visual appearance of the control by
customizing the border around the control or modifying the label that
displays with the control. You can also change the object name, enable or
disable control protection, and set the print options.
Changing form control borders
You can change the border of form controls. This lets you change the color,
width, and shadow properties associated with a control.
To change the border color of a form control
1 Right-click a control on the spreadsheet, then click Properties.
2 Click the Border Color tab.
3 Click a color on the on-screen Color Palette.
To change the width of a border around a form control
1 Right-click a control on the spreadsheet, then click Properties.
2 Click the Box Type tab.
3 Enable one of the following buttons in the Box Type section:
None — displays no border around the control (default box type for
radio button, check box, and label)
575
Thin — creates a thin border around the control (default box type for
all other controls)
Medium — creates a medium border around the control
Thick — creates a thick border around the control
4 Enable the Drop Shadow check box if you want to create a shadow behind
the control.
Labeling form controls
When you add a form control to a spreadsheet, Quattro Pro assigns it a
default object name in the format ControlName1, ControlName2, etc. The
default object name is the control label. You can customize the label name to
better describe its role in the spreadsheet.
The following form controls have labels:
buttons
check boxes
radio buttons
group boxes
labels
edit boxes
For the controls that do not have labels (list boxes, combo boxes, scroll bars,
and spin controls), you can add a label control next to the original control. If
you want a label to appear on the spreadsheet near the control, you must add
it to the spreadsheet as a separate control.
To change a form control’s label
1 Double-click the control on the spreadsheet.
3 Type a new label in the Enter Text box.
To add a label next to a form control
1 Click Insert, Form Control, then choose a control.
Click the spreadsheet to create a control in the default size at that
location.
Drag the control to the desired size.
576
3 Click Insert, Form Control, Label.
4 Drag the label to the spot near the control you want to describe.
5 Right-click the label, then click Properties.
7 Type the label you want to add in the Enter Text box.
Changing the object name of form controls
The object name is the name used to reference the form control in macros,
link commands, and in spreadsheet functions. You can change the object
name of a form control the same way you change the object name of other
OLE objects.
To give a form control a new object name
1 Right-click a form control, then click Properties.
2 Click the Object Name tab.
3 Type a new name in the Object Name box.
Unprotecting form controls
You can enable or disable control protection. Enabling control protection
prevents a control from being changed or deleted by other users when
protections have been set at the sheet level. For information about protecting
spreadsheets and cells, see “Protecting data” on page 162.
To unprotect a form control on a spreadsheet
3 Do one of the following in the Object Protection section:
Enable the Locked check box to prevent users from altering the control
Disable the Locked check box to allow users to alter the control
Printing a spreadsheet without printing form controls
You can print a spreadsheet, without printing the form control. For
information about printing objects on spreadsheets, see “Printing” on page
471.
577
To print a spreadsheet without printing a form control
1 Right-click the form control, then click Properties.
2 Click the Print tab.
3 Disable the Print Object check box.
578
CREATING CUSTOM DIALOG
BOXES AND FORM CONTROLS
20
Quattro Pro lets you attach dialog controls to your dialog boxes create
custom dialog boxes in your application. A dialog box is a box that contains
controls, such as check boxes and edit fields. These controls let users add
data to the notebook. You can attach dialog boxes to menu items and toolbars
using macros or to spreadsheet form controls. When users click the menu
item, a macro toolbar button, or spreadsheet form control, the dialog box
appears.
Quattro Pro provides a complete set of tools for creating dialog box controls.
When you create a dialog box or form, you can add controls and then activate
them to behave in a specific way. You customize the appearance and behavior
of the dialog box and its controls by setting control properties and linking the
controls to macro link commands.
Quattro Pro also contains two other tools for creating controls and dialog
boxes:
Form controls — lets you add form controls to a spreadsheet. Form
controls look similar to dialog controls, but their configuration properties
are different. For information about working with form controls, see
“Creating controls on the spreadsheet” on page 571.
Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) — lets you create customized
controls, and applications. For information about working in Visual Basic
for Applications, see “Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with
Quattro Pro” on page .
Creating custom dialog boxes and form controls
579
Developing a dialog box
Quattro Pro lets you create custom dialog boxes for your notebooks. Dialog
boxes are saved with the notebook they are created in. You can copy them to
other notebooks.
You can add controls to your dialog boxes. When you add a control to a dialog
box, it is inactive. For example, list boxes do not contain information and
check boxes are not linked to anything.
Activating a control involves:
setting control properties
linking the control to a macro or to another control
When a macro activates a control, it becomes a button, check box, or other UI
feature.
For information about activating controls, see “Attaching actions to dialog
Creating a dialog box
You can create customized dialog boxes using the Dialog Designer. Dialog
boxes are stored on the Objects sheet. You can double-click a dialog box on
the Objects sheet to edit it. For more information about editing dialog boxes,
see “Editing dialog boxes” on page 637.
To create a dialog box
1 Click Tools, Macro, Dialog Designer.
2 Right-click the dialog box background, click Dialog Properties, then click
Name.
3 Type a name in the Enter Text box to appear in the title bar.
Use this name with macros, links, and formulas.
4 Right-click the dialog box background, click Dialog Properties, then click
Title.
5 Type the title the user will see and click OK.
Click the button icon to display the Dialog Controls flyout on the
Property Bar to add controls, choose a control, then drag on the dialog
box.
Click Insert, Form Control.
580
7 Click the control you want to add, drag the control onto the dialog box,
then do one of the following:
Right-click the control, then click Connect to connect the control to
another control or a notebook cell (for example, enter control value
into a cell).
Right-click the control, then click Links to specify more complex
actions for the control to perform.
8 Click the Test button to test the operation of each control.
9 Click the spreadsheet in the notebook, then click File, Save to save the
notebook.
The dialog box is saved with the notebook.
You cannot perform a File, Save when creating a dialog box in the dialog
designer. To deactivate the dialog box and activate the File, Save menu
command, click the spreadsheet.
Password protection rights can be assigned to controls and dialog boxes.
For information about working with passwords, see “Using password
protection” on page 703.
You can also create a dialog box on the Objects Sheet by clicking the
QuickTab button, then clicking the New Dialog button.
For information about the behavior of specific form controls, see
“Understanding dialog controls” on page 581 and Dialog box controls in
the online Help.
Understanding dialog controls
Once you have named a dialog box and given it a title, you can add controls to
it.
Each control is best suited for presenting or receiving a certain type of
information. Most controls display a setting and allow users to change the
setting.
The following Table describes the most common form controls:
Control
Button
Description
Performs a specific action when clicked
581
Check Box
Provides two choices: Yes when enabled and No when disabled
Radio Button
Typically used in a mutually exclusive list where only one radio button
can be enabled at a time
Group Box
Contains other controls, such as radio buttons or check boxes
List Box
Lets a user select data from a list
Combo Box
Lets a user add items to a list box
Label
Lets a user display text next to a control
Spin Control
Lets a user choose a value by typing or by clicking arrows and selecting a
value
Edit Field
Lets a user type text
Vertical Scroll Bar
Lets a user select a value from a range of values
Horizontal Scroll Bar
Lets a user select a value from a range of values
Bitmap button
Lets a user display a bitmap on the button instead of a label and then
imitates the behavior of a check box, radio button, or push button
Rectangle
Embellishes a dialog box or groups two or more controls
File Select Control
Lets a user choose a file name and a browse button with access to all
available files.
Color Control
Lets a user change a color setting.
TAB Control
Lets a user create tabs on a dialog box
Timer Control
Lets a user add a timer, clock, or alarm to a dialog box.
For more information about the functions of form controls, see Dialog box
controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
582
Adding controls to an existing dialog box
You can add form controls after you create a dialog box. The Dialog Designer
provides two default buttons: OK and Cancel. These buttons are not active
until you activate them. For information about activating controls and
buttons, see “Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.
To add a control to an existing dialog box
1 Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet.
Click Insert, Form Control, then click a control.
Select a control from the Dialog Controls flyout, then drag the control
onto the dialog box.
Right-click the control, then click Connect to connect the control to
another control or a notebook cell (for example, enter a control value
into a cell on the notebook)
Right-click the control, then click Links to specify more complex
actions that you want the control to perform
4 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click any
option in the submenu that appears if you want to customize a control.
The first several options on the Properties menu are specific to that
control. All the properties from the Dimension property to the end of the
menu are properties you can set for all controls. For information about
specific form control properties, see Properties of form controls in the
Add group boxes and rectangles first, then add the radio buttons or other
controls inside them.
You can change the size of a control you add to a dialog box by selecting it,
and dragging a handle.
Labeling a dialog box control
You can add labels to dialog box controls to identify the purpose of each
control. Some controls have a label text property that is used to display a
label with the control (for example, buttons). For more information about
583
control labels, see Dialog box controls in the online Help. For more
information about control label property settings, see Properties of form
To label a dialog box control
2 Click Insert, Label.
3 Click where you want the label. (Move the control if you need more
room.)
4 Double-click the label, type the label text, and press ENTER.
You can also add a label to a dialog box by clicking the tool on the Form
Controls flyout, then drag the control onto the dialog box.
If you want to change the properties of a label, see “Editing label text” on
page 643.
Testing a dialog box
You can test the dialog box and the form controls whenever a change is made
to the dialog box. For example, test a new control after assigning properties
or creating links for the control to see if the control activates in the manner
intended.
When in Test mode, the dialog box appears as the user sees it. In Test mode,
you cannot activate any other windows to display as the active object unless
you have configured a control in the dialog box to do so. For example, you can
have a second custom dialog box displays only when you click a button on the
first dialog box.
To test a dialog box
Double-click a dialog box on the Objects sheet.
Select the active dialog box (if it is displayed but is not the active
window.)
2 Click Dialog, Test
3 Do any or all of the following:
Click any buttons
584
Choose data in list boxes, combo boxes, spin controls, or File Select
controls
Type data in edit fields
Enable or disable check boxes and radio buttons
4 With each action done in step 3, notice if the control behaves in the way
you have configured it (for example, if text typed in an edit field displays
in a notebook cell.)
You can also click the Test button on the Properties bar.
Adding dialog controls
After you create a default dialog box, you can add dialog controls. You can add
any of the following dialog controls to a dialog box. The procedure for
assigning these controls differs from control to control.
“bitmap buttons” on page 586
“buttons” on page 587
“check boxes” on page 588
“color controls” on page 588
“combo boxes” on page 589
“label controls” on page 590
“edit fields” on page 591
“file controls” on page 592
“group boxes” on page 592
“scroll bars” on page 594
“list boxes” on page 594
“radio buttons” on page 595
“rectangle controls” on page 596
“spin controls” on page 597
“TAB controls” on page 598
“timer controls” on page 599
585
Adding bitmap buttons
A bitmap button displays a bitmap on the face of the button instead of a label.
Bitmap buttons can imitate the behavior of all button types (for example,
radio buttons or Cancel buttons.) Before you link actions to the bitmap
button, you must assign a bitmap and a button-type to it. For information
about assigning a button type, see “Assigning bitmap button properties” on
page 600.
There are two ways to display a bitmap on a bitmap button: Pasting a bitmap
from the clipboard or by selecting a bitmap through the Bitmap property
dialog box. For information about selecting a bitmap in the Bitmap property
dialog box, see “Assigning bitmap button properties” on page 600.
To add a bitmap button
2 Click Insert, Bitmap button, then drag the control onto the dialog box.
3 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Bitmap
in the submenu that appears.
Choose a system bitmap.
Click the Browse button and specify a .BMP file.
5 Click OK to return to the dialog box.
6 To specify the action performed when a user clicks the button, right-click
the button, then do one of the following:
Click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its
value in a cell.
Click Links to specify the action to perform.
For more information about control properties, see Properties of form
controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online
Help.
586
You can also create a control by clicking the Bitmap Button tool in the
Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto
the dialog box to create the control.
You can add a bitmap not in the list by copying a graphic to the clipboard.
To paste a bitmap from the clipboard, right-click the bitmap button, then
click Paste.
Adding buttons
You can add buttons to forms that can execute a macro, link to a Web site, or
activate another custom dialog box when the button is clicked. Buttons do
not have a value (meaning buttons execute an event like Click instead of
displaying a value that can be transferred to a cell on a spreadsheet or to
another control.)
A button can also imitate the behavior of an OK button or a Cancel button,
allowing the button to close the dialog box. For information about setting this
property for a button, see “Assigning button properties” on page 601.
To add a push button
2 Click Insert, Button, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create
the control.
value in a cell.
Help.
You can also create a button by clicking the Button tool in the Dialog
Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the
dialog box to create the control.
587
Adding check boxes
You can add check boxes to a dialog box. Each check box displays next to a
default label. The text that appears next to the button on the right and is
stored in its Label Text property. You can also display a label to the left of the
check box. For information about changing the display of a check box label,
see “Assigning check box properties” on page 601.
Check boxes present a Yes or No option to the user. The value of a check box
is Yes when it is enabled and No when it is disabled.
To add a check box
2 Click Insert, Check Box, then drag the control onto the dialog box to
create the control.
3 Right-click the button, move the cursor to CheckBox Properties, then
click Label Text in the submenu that appears.
4 Type the label you want to display in the Enter Text box on the Label Text
dialog box.
value in a cell.
You can also add a check box by clicking the Check Box tool in the Dialog
Another way to add the label text is to double-click the default label, then
type text.
Adding color controls
A color control lets a user choose a color or create a custom color.
To add a color control
2 Click Insert, Color Control, then drag the control onto the dialog box to
create the control.
588
value in a cell.
For information about color control properties, see Properties of form
Help.
You can also add a color control by clicking the Color Control tool in the
Adding combo boxes
Combo boxes (also called list boxes) are a type of list box that lets a user add
items to a list. They consist of an edit field, a down arrow button, and a list
box. The value of the combo box is the value of its edit field.
To add a combo box
2 Click Insert, Combo Box, then drag to create the control.
value in a cell.
To specify a system list for a combo box
2 Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties,
click List in the submenu that appears, then choose a list type from the
list box.
589
To include cell contents in a combo box
1 Follow steps 1 and 2 from “To add a combo box”.
2 Right click the combo-box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties,
then click List in the submenu that appears.
3 Double-click the edit field, then select a cell block on the spreadsheet.
4 Press ENTER, then click OK to close the List dialog box.
To paste a block of data into a combo box
2 Select a block of data on the spreadsheet.
3 Click Edit, Copy.
4 Click the combo box, then click Edit, Paste.
When a user presses ENTER on a drop-down list item, it clicks the dialog
box’s default button, which typically closes the dialog box. For information
about disabling this feature, see “Setting a default button control” on page
615.
Help.
You can add a combo box by clicking the Combo Box tool in the Dialog
Click the Test button to test the combo box. Click the down arrow to see
the items.
Adding label controls
You can add a label control to a dialog box. The label control lets you place
text on the dialog box as a stand-alone feature or near a control that does not
have a label (i.e. a rectangle control).
To add a label control
590
2 Click Insert, Label, then drag to create the control.
value in a cell.
To change the default label text
1 Select a label control on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the label, move the cursor to Label Properties, then click
Label Text in the submenu that appears.
3 Type the text in the Enter Text box.
Adding edit fields
Edit fields in dialog boxes let users add data. The input data can be
characters, numbers, cell addresses, or can make the typed data hidden.
When you specify Integer as the field type, the control is renamed to Edit
Integer. For information about specifying the data type for an edit field, see
“Assigning edit field properties” on page 603.
To add an edit field
1 Double-click a dialog box you have created on the Objects sheet.
2 Click the Edit Field tool from the Form Control flyout on the Property Bar,
then drag to create the control.
the button, then:
value in a cell
Click Links to specify the action to perform
If you want to remove the box around an edit field, right-click the edit
field, move the cursor to EditField Properties, click Show Frame in the
submenu that appears, then click No.
Help.
591
Adding file controls
A file control consists of an edit field for entering filenames and a Browse
button that displays a list of files on disk. From this list, the user can choose a
filename, folder, and drive. For example, the value C:\FILES\QTRREP.WB3
means
Drives is set to C:
Directories is set to C:\FILES\
File Name is set to QTRREP.WB3
File Types is set to *.WB3 (if a wildcard is specified; otherwise, File Types
is not affected by the value)
The value of a file control determines the drive letter, folder, and filename
that appear. Whenever a user views a different folder or uses a different
filename, the change is reflected in the value of the file control. For
information about displaying the Open or Save dialog box when a user clicks
the Browse button, see “Assigning file control properties” on page 605.
To add a file control
2 Click Insert, File Select Control, then drag to create the control.
value in a cell.
You can also Click the File Control tool in the Dialog Control flyout on the
Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the
control.
Help.
Adding group boxes
A group box control acts as a container for other controls. Group boxes can
contain radio buttons, check boxes, or buttons. These controls are considered
592
child controls of the group box. For information about child controls, see
“Working with child controls” on page 630.
Add a group box first, then add the radio buttons or other controls to the
group box. You can use a group box to manage the controls it contains as a
single unit. For example, when you move the group box on the dialog box,
you also move the contents of the group box.
When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio
button chosen. By default, an empty group box does not have a value. A
group box has a Value property and a Selected property. The Selected
property indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is enabled, starting
from the top-left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom-right
button.
When you create a group box, the Process Value of a group box is set to Yes.
The Process Values of radio buttons in the group box are set to No.
To add a group box
2 Click Insert, Group Box, then drag the group box onto the dialog box to
create the control.
3 Click Insert, and choose the controls you want to add to the group box,
then drag them onto the dialog box to create each control.
value in a cell.
Another way to create a group box is to click the Group Box tool in the
When you create a group box, you can automatically fill it with radio
buttons. Click Insert, Group Box, then hold down CTRL while dragging
the control onto the dialog box to an appropriate size.
You can also paste a block from the Clipboard inside the group box. Each
row of the block becomes a radio button.
For information about control properties, see Properties of form controls
in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
593
Adding scroll bars
The Dialog Designer features two scroll bar controls that you can add to a
dialog box: a Horizontal Scroll Bar and a Vertical Scroll Bar. Scroll bars let
you scroll through a list of data to make a data selection. The value of a scroll
bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers. For a complete description
about scroll bars, see Dialog box controls.
To add a horizontal or vertical scroll bar
2 Click Insert, then do one of the following:
Click Vertical Scroll Bar, then drag the control onto the dialog box to
create the control
Click Horizontal Scroll Bar, then drag the control onto the dialog box to
create the control
value in a cell.
Another way to create a scroll bar is to click the Horizontal Scroll Bar
control or the Vertical Scroll Bar control in the Dialog Control flyout on
the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create
the control.
Adding list boxes
A list box lists items which users can choose. The item that the user chooses
becomes the value of the list box. By default, list box entries are sorted
alphanumerically in ascending order.
To add a list box
1 Double-click a dialog box the Objects sheet.
2 Click Insert, List Box, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create
the control.
594
value in a cell.
To specify a system list for a list box
2 Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, click
List in the submenu that appears, then choose a list type from the list box.
To include cell contents in a combo box
2 Right click the combo-box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then
click List in the submenu that appears.
3 Double-click the edit field, then select a cell block on the spreadsheet.
4 Press ENTER, then click OK to close the List dialog box.
To paste a block of data into a combo box
2 Right click the combo-box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then
click List in the submenu that appears.
3 Select a block of data on the spreadsheet.
4 Click Edit, Copy.
5 Click the list box, then click Edit, Paste.
Another way to create a list box is to click the List Box control in the
For information about other list box control properties, see Properties of
form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro
online Help.
Adding radio buttons
Grouped radio buttons present a list of mutually exclusive choices to the
user. Only one radio button can be selected. When radio buttons are on a
dialog box, the radio buttons are still mutually exclusive. The dialog box acts
595
as a container for the radio button controls. When you want to use more than
one set of radio buttons and have each set provide mutually exclusive choices
on the same dialog box, place each set within a group box or rectangle. Add
group boxes or rectangles first, then add the radio buttons or other controls
inside them.
By default, a radio button’s Process Value property is set to No, and the
group box containing it has its Process Value property set to Yes. When the
Process Value property of a radio button is set to Yes, a radio button has a
value of Yes when enabled and No when disabled.
To add a radio button
2 Click Insert, radio button, then drag the control onto the dialog box to
create the control.
value in a cell.
Another way to add a radio button is to click the Radio Button control in
the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control
onto the dialog box to create the control.
You can fill a group box with radio buttons by holding down CTRL and
drag the group box onto the dialog box to the appropriate size.
You can paste a block of data from the Clipboard, so that each row of the
block becomes a radio button.
For information about radio button control properties, see Properties of
online Help.
Adding rectangle controls
A rectangle control performs the same function as a group box control. A
rectangle can be used to organize controls in a dialog box. Add rectangles
first, then add the radio buttons or other controls inside them. Like group
boxes, controls added to a rectangle become child controls. For information
about child controls, see “Working with child controls” on page 630.
Rectangles do not have a value.
596
To add a rectangle control
2 Click Insert, Rectangle, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create
the control.
3 Click Insert and choose the controls you want to add to the rectangle,
then drag each control onto the rectangle.
value in a cell.
Another way to add a rectangle control is to click the Rectangle control in
the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then dragging the control
onto the dialog box to create the control.
For information about rectangle control properties, see Properties of form
Help.
Adding spin controls
A spin control is an edit field that lets users enter numeric data. A spin
control has two arrows on its edge. The user can click an arrow to increase
or decrease the value of the spin control, or type the value. The value of a
spin control is always an integer.
To add a spin control
2 Click Insert, Spin Control, then drag to create the control.
value in a cell.
597
You can also click the Spin control button in the Dialog Control flyout on
the Property Bar, then dragging the control onto the dialog box to create
the control.
For more information about spin control properties, see Properties of
online Help.
Adding TAB controls
A TAB control lets you organize settings in a notebook of controls. Clicking a
TAB displays controls associated with that TAB. For information about
creating additional TAB pages, see “Assigning TAB control properties” on
page 610. For information about other TAB control properties, see Properties
of form controls in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro
online Help.
To add a TAB control
2 Click Insert, TAB Control, then drag the control onto the dialog box to
create the control.
Double-click the TAB name to rename the TAB
Click Insert, click a control, then drag it onto the TAB to add a control
to the TAB
value in a cell.
Another way to add a TAB control to a dialog box is to click the TAB
Control button in the Dialog Control flyout on the Property Bar, then
dragging the control onto the dialog box to create the control.
598
Adding timer controls
You can use a timer control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a
specified time of day. This is useful for creating toolbar controls that
periodically retrieve current values from the active window.
For information about setting timer control properties to convert a timer
control into a clock, a timer, or an alarm, see “Assigning timer control
properties” on page 611.
For more information about timer control properties discussed in the
following procedures, see Properties of form controls in the Reference
information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
To add a timer control
2 Click Insert, Timer, then drag the control onto the dialog box to create the
control.
value in a cell.
Assigning control properties
You can use the properties connected to a dialog box control to dictate the
appearance and behavior of the control. You can assign properties for a
control by right-clicking it, then clicking Properties. The options on the
Properties menu listed before the Dimension property are specific to that
control. All the properties from the Dimension property to the end of the
menu are properties you can set for all controls.
For more information about specific properties, see Properties of form
Assigning properties to individual controls
After you create a default dialog box, and add the dialog controls you can
assign properties to each control. Some properties are common to all
controls while others are control-specific. The procedure for assigning these
properties differs from control to control. The following lists identifies the
controls which contain control-specific properties.
“bitmap buttons” on page 600
599
“buttons” on page 601
“check boxes” on page 601
“combo boxes” on page 601
“label controls” on page 603
“edit fields” on page 603
“file controls” on page 605
“group boxes” on page 606
“scroll bars” on page 606
“list boxes” on page 607
“radio buttons” on page 608
“rectangle controls” on page 608
“spin controls” on page 609
“TAB controls” on page 610
“timer controls” on page 611
Assigning bitmap button properties
You can select a bitmap from the systems list or display a bitmap you have
available from another source using the Bitmap properties dialog box. You
can also assign a bitmap button a behavioral identity from the Button Type
properties.
To change the bitmap
1 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Bitmap
Choose a system bitmap.
Click the Browse button and specify a .BMP file.
You can add a bitmap not in the list by copying a graphic to the clipboard.
To paste a bitmap from the clipboard, right-click the bitmap button, then
click Paste.
600
To select a button type for the bitmap button to imitate
1 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Button
Type in the submenu that appears.
2 Click one of the following options:
push button — the bitmap button imitates a push button
radio button — the bitmap button imitates a radio button
check box — the bitmap button imitates a check box
OK exit button — the bitmap button imitates the OK button on the
dialog box
Cancel exit button — the bitmap button imitates the Cancel button on
the dialog box
Assigning button properties
A button can also imitate the behavior of an OK button or a Cancel button,
allowing the button to close the dialog box.
To have a push button close the dialog box
1 Right-click the button, move the cursor to Properties, then click Button
Type in the submenu that appears.
Click OK Exit Button — to close the dialog with success saving
changes to the dialog (returns a 1 value).
Click Cancel Exit Button — to close the dialog as a failure without
saving changes to the dialog (returns a 0 value).
Assigning check box properties
You have the option of displaying a check box label to the left of a check box
in addition to the default display (which displays the label on the right side.)
To display a check box label on the left
Right-click the control, move the cursor to the CheckBox Properties,
click Draw to Right in the submenu that appears, then click No.
Assigning combo box properties
One of the variations possible is to configure the combo box to prevent a user
from entering a value into the list. By default, combo box entries are sorted
601
alphanumerically in ascending order. You can set the combo box to display a
history as the list of the combo box.
To remove the down arrow button
Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ComboBox Properties,
click Add Down Button in the submenu that appears, then click No.
To prevent users from entering a value
click Edit Disabled in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
[VentGraphic 0, ]
To store a history list of the entries that have been typed into its
edit field in the combo box
click History List in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
To let users select cells by double-clicking in the edit field
click Allow Point Mode in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
The Field Type property must be set to a Field Type other than Integer.
To order items in the order in which they are added to the list
Right-click the combo box, click the ComboBox Properties, click Ordered
Property in the submenu that appears, then click No.
Setting Ordered Property to No does not reset the order of a list that has
been sorted.
In some cases, a limit on the number of characters users can enter into an
edit field, combo box, or spin control is necessary.
To specify the maximum number of characters in an combo box
602
2 Right-click the combo box control, move the cursor to ComboBox
Properties, click Edit Length in the submenu that appears.
3 Type a number to indicate the maximum characters allowed in the Edit
Length box.
Assigning label control properties
You can use the default font in a label control, or you can change the label
font through the Label Font properties. You can also change the word wrap
features of the label and position of the text on the label.
To change the label font
2 Right-click the label, move the cursor to Label Properties, then click
Label Font in the submenu that appears.
3 Choose a new font style from the Face list box.
4 Choose a size for the font from the Size list.
5 Enable one or more of the following Appearance attributes:
Bold — makes the label stand out
Italics — emphasizes the label in a subtle way
Underline — places a line under the label
Strikeout — places a line through the middle of the label
To change the position of the text on a label
2 Right-click the label, move the cursor to Label Properties, then click Text
Draw Flags in the submenu that appears.
3 Enable one of the following options in the Text Draw Flags dialog box:
Vertical Position — places the text vertically in relation to the label
background
Horizontal Position — places the text horizontally in relation to the
label background
Assigning edit field properties
The input data can be characters, numbers, cell addresses, or can make the
typed data hidden. When you specify Integer as the field type, the control is
renamed to Edit Integer. Default values for Edit Integer are 0 as the
603
minimum value, 32,676 as the maximum value, and 0 as the initial (default)
value in the edit field. You can configure the edit field to accept special
characters, using the following chart for characters available:
Special character
Result
\n
Displays following text on a new line
\t
Inserts a TAB
\\
Inserts a backslash (\) into the text
You can set an edit field so that users can double-click the edit field, then
point to a cell or cell block on a spreadsheet to add the cell references to the
edit field.
To specify the type of information the edit field can accept
1 Select the edit field on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the edit field, move the cursor to EditField Properties, click
Field Type in the submenu that appears, then click an option to specify the
type of information the edit field accepts:
Integer — restricts user entry to integers
String — accepts any text a user enters (including numbers) (Default)
Real — accepts any number or formula
Block — accepts only cell addresses or cell coordinates
Hidden — accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each
character instead of the actual character. For example, this is useful
for users to enter a password
To change default Integer values in an edit field
Right-click the edit field, click the EditField Properties in the submenu
that appears, then click Minimum, Maximum, or Default.
To allow special characters (\n, \t, or \\)in the edit field
1 Right-click the edit field, then move the cursor to EditField Properties.
2 Click Convert Text in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
604
The Convert Text property is valid only if you set a field’s value using a
macro command or link, and not by typing it in the edit field.
To specify the maximum number of characters in an edit field
2 Right-click the edit field, move the cursor to EditField Properties, click
Edit Length in the submenu that appears.
Length box.
To let users select cells on a spreadsheet by double-clicking in
the edit field
2 Click Allow Point Mode in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
4 Click Field Type in the submenu that appears, then select any field type
except Integer.
Assigning file control properties
You can use a predefined list to display in the File List control. When the user
clicks the Browse button, the Quattro Pro Open File dialog box displays. If
the Dialog Type property is set to Save, the Quattro Pro Save File dialog
displays. You can also prevent users from typing in the file box.
To specify the list to appear in a file list
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to FileSelCtrl Properties, then
click FileTypeList in the submenu that appears.
3 Choose a list type from the dialog box to use a predefined list, such as
Fonts, DriveList, BitmapList, or BarExt
605
If you specify cells and the cell contents are changed after the List
property has been set, the List settings will not be updated until the dialog
box is opened again or an EXECUTE link command is used to refresh the
list box.
To set the browse button to display the Open or Save dialog box
1 Select the file control on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the edit field, then move the cursor to FileSelCtrl Properties.
3 Click Dialog Type in the submenu that appears, then click one of the
following:
Open — to launch the Open File dialog box
Save — to launch the Save File dialog box
To disable typing in the file box
Right-click the control, click FileSelCtrl Properties, click Edit Disabled in
the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
Assigning group box properties
When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio
button chosen. By default, an empty group box does not have a value. A
group box has a Value property and a Selected property. The Selected
property indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is enabled, starting
from the top-left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom-right
button.
When you create a group box, the Process Value of a group box is set to Yes.
The Process Values of radio buttons in the group box are set to No.
Assigning scroll bar properties
You can configure a scroll bar by setting parameters and changing the
settings.
To set parameters for a horizontal or vertical scroll bar
1 Select the horizontal or vertical scroll bar.
2 Right-click the scroll bar, move the cursor to ScrollBar Properties, then
click Parameters in the submenu that appears.
3 Specify the minimum and maximum integer values for the scroll bar.
606
To change the settings for working in scroll bars
Change Line, Page, and Time settings.
Assigning list box properties
You can use a predefined list or assign data in a cell block to be the list in a
list box. By default, the list displays with one column, but you can add more
columns to a list box. By default, lists display in alphanumeric order. You can
also order items added to the list box in the same order they are added.
To specify the list to appear in a list box
2 Right-click the list box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then click
List in the submenu that appears.
Double-click in the entry box in the List dialog box, then select the
cells to use cell contents in the notebook as the list.
Choose a list type from the dialog box to use a predefined list, such as
Fonts, DriveList, BitmapList, or BarExt
If you specify cells and the cell contents are changed after the List
property has been set, the List settings will not be updated until the dialog
box is opened again or an EXECUTE link command is used to refresh the
list box.
You can specify the list to appear in a combo box or file control using the
same method. For information about assigning properties in combo boxes
or file controls, see “Assigning combo box properties” on page 601 and
“Assigning file control properties” on page 605.
To add multiple columns to a list box
1 Select the list box on the dialog box.
2 Right-clicking the list box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, then
clicking the Number of Columns property in the submenu that appears.
3 Type the number of columns in the Enter Number box.
607
To order entries in a list box
1 Select the list box on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the combo box, move the cursor to ListBox Properties, click
Ordered Property in the submenu that appears, then click No.
Setting it to No does not reset the order of a list that has been sorted,
however.
Assigning radio button properties
You can change the label of a control, as well as display the label on either the
right (default) or left sides of the radio button.
To add a label to a radio button
1 Select the radio button on the dialog box.
2 Do one of the following to add a label to the radio button:
Right-click the button, move the cursor to RadioButton Properties,
click Label Text in the submenu that appears, then type in the label
Double-click the text “Radio Button” to type new text next to the
radio button
To display label text to the left of the radio button
1 Select the radio button on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the radio button, move the cursor to RadioButtons Properties
option, click Draw to Right in the submenu that appears, then click No.
Assigning rectangle control properties
You can customize the appearance of the rectangle through the rectangle
control properties. Select a raised rectangle (or etched, recessed, etc.) The
Transparent rectangle style is useful for grouping controls together without
displaying the rectangle to which they are attached. The background color
and the border color around the rectangle can also be customized.
608
To display a different rectangle style
Right-click the rectangle, move the cursor to Rectangle Properties, click
Rectangle Style in the submenu that appears, then click one of the
following options:
Plain — the rectangle border becomes invisible, but the rectangle
remains opaque
Framed — the default rectangle style displays a black line around the
rectangle
Beveled Out — creates a raised button look around the rectangle
Beveled In — creates a depressed area around the rectangle
Transparent — makes the rectangle and border transparent, allowing
you to group controls and place the rectangle on top of another dialog
box control without blocking the control with an opaque rectangle
Engraved — makes the rectangle look engraved onto the dialog box
To change the background or frame color of the rectangle
Right-click the rectangle, move the cursor to Rectangle Properties, then
click Fill Color or Frame Color in the submenu that appears.
Assigning spin control properties
You can assign a range of values to a spin control through the spin control
properties. You can also change the number of digits allowed to display by
adjusting the Integer length (the default length is 6.)
To change the Integer length
1 Select the spin control on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the spin control, move the cursor to SpinCtrl Properties, then
click Edit Length in the submenu that appears.
To assign a range of values to a spin control
1 Select the spin control on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the spin control, move the cursor to SpinCtrl Properties, then
click one of the following values for the spin control in the submenu that
appears:
Maximum — sets the highest number that can appear in a spin control
609
Minimum — sets the lowest number that can appear in a spin control
Default — sets the number that displays by default in the spin control
To specify the maximum number of characters in a spin control
2 Right-click the spin control, move the cursor to SpinCtrl Properties, click
Edit Length in the submenu that appears.
Length box.
Assigning TAB control properties
Once you add a TAB control to a dialog box, you can then create multiple tabs
(or pages) to help organize the dialog box controls. The Active Page property
indicates which TAB is active. The Page list property displays commands for
creating, removing, and reordering tabs.
To add additional tabs to a TAB control
1 Right-click the TAB control, move the cursor to TABCtrl Properties, then
click Page List in the submenu that appears.
2 Type a sheet name, then click the Insert button.
3 Follow steps 1 and 2 to create additional pages.
4 Choose one of the following to organize the tabs:
Move Up — moves the TAB closer to the front of the list
Move Down — moves the TAB closer to the back of the list
Add — adds the TAB indicated in the Sheet Name box after the TAB
name you chose in Sheet List box
Delete — deletes the selected TAB name from the TAB control
5 Add controls to each page TAB by clicking Insert, then click a control.
the button, then:
value in a cell
Click Links to specify the action to perform
610
Assigning timer control properties
There are two ways to configure a timer control for generating regular
events: as a timer or as an alarm.
A timer generates the Timer event at regular intervals (for example, every
two seconds). A timer control shows the user the current time. You can also
use a timer control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain
time of day. You can use timer controls to display the current time in a dialog
box or toolbar. Timer controls do not have a value.
Two properties of the timer control are used to specify the number of
milliseconds to wait between Timer events, as shown in the following
formula:
Wait = Units in Milliseconds X Interval in Units
Units in Milliseconds is set to 1000 by default, so you can use the Interval in
Units property to specify how many seconds to wait between Timer events.
As an Alarm, the timer control generates the Alarm event at a certain time of
day (for example, at 5:00). The toolbar must be open; for example, an alarm
set for 3:00 will not generate an Alarm event if the toolbar is not onscreen at
3:00.
To turn the timer control into a clock
1 Select the timer control on the dialog box.
2 Right-click the timer control, move the cursor to TimeCtrl Properties,
click Show Time in the submenu that appears, then click Yes (the timer
becomes a digital clock.)
click Timer On in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
To make a timer
then click Units in Milliseconds in the submenu that appears.
3 Enter how many milliseconds it takes for one unit to elapse in the Enter
Number box, then click OK.
then click Interval in Units in the submenu that appears.
611
5 Enter how many units to wait before generating a Timer event in the
Enter Number box.
click Timer On in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
To set an alarm
1 Follow step 1 from the “To turn a timer control into a clock” procedure.
click Alarm On in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
then click Alarm Time in the submenu that appears.
4 Enter the time at which the Alarm event activates.
You can enable Alarm On and Alarm Time for a timer control to enable
functions simultaneously. For example, you can have a timer generate
Timer events every 2 seconds and send out an alarm event at 5:00 to
signal the end of the work day.
Assign the Units in Milliseconds property with the Interval in Units
property. The Interval in Units property determines how frequently the
timer refresh event is generated. The Units in Milliseconds property
determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit.
Assigning other properties
Dialog box controls are similar to OLE objects. When you reference these
objects in macros, link commands, or spreadsheet functions, you can use
either the Object ID or the object name Object IDs are assigned to dialog
controls in the order they were created. You can assign new object names to
controls by modifying the control properties. For information about using
object names, Object ID, or defining properties in macros, see “Using object
macro commands” on page 568.
You can also assign properties to controls that deal with their behavior to
other controls in a dialog box. You can assign the order in which items are
chosen in a group box, or which item in a list box or combo box is the default
selection. You can also specify the default text to display in a list, combo box,
or file list control.
Every dialog has a default button that closes the dialog box. By default, the
OK button on a dialog box performs this function. You can assign another
612
control the same function, so that it closes the dialog box when a user
presses ENTER.
As with macro buttons, you can assign a dialog box control a shortcut key
which runs a macro when that control is selected or activated. You can also
specify when a control or dialog box is available in Quattro Pro.
Properties you can assign in macros, link, or spreadsheet functions
You can use macros, link commands, and spreadsheet functions to select
objects, change their properties, or read their properties. For information
about using macros or spreadsheet functions, see “Using macros” on page
489 or “Working with formulas and spreadsheet functions” on page 123.
There are several properties that you can read and set only with macro, link,
and spreadsheet function commands:
The Value property — is the current setting of a control. This varies from
control to control. Most dialog controls have a Value property.
The Show property — is the opposite of the Hidden property. Set it to No
to hide the control from the user.
The Enabled property — lets you turn on the dialog controls that have
been turned off with the Disabled property or by setting Enabled to No.
The Enabled property is available for all dialog controls.
For descriptions about individual control properties, see Properties of
online Help.
Identifying the Object ID property of controls
The object ID property of a control is a number that indicates the order in
which controls were added to the dialog box. In most dialog boxes, the default
buttons OK and Cancel carry the Object ID of 1 and 2 respectively. This
means that the next control you add to the dialog box has an Object ID of 3.
You cannot change the Object ID of an object. It is a read-only property.
To identify the Object ID property of a control
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Object
ID in the submenu that appears.
Identifying the object name property of controls
The object name property of a dialog box or dialog box control is usually the
way you reference that object in a macro, link command, or spreadsheet
613
function. This property is accessed for graphic objects, clipart, maps, charts,
and OLE objects. For information about changing the object name for
graphics, charts, or maps, see “Renaming graphics” on page 400.
To identify the object name property of controls
1 Double-click the dialog box on the Objects sheet.
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Name in
the submenu that appears.
For information about changing the name of dialog boxes and controls, see
“Renaming dialog boxes” on page 638 and “Renaming dialog controls” on
page 641.
Setting the Selected property for dialog controls
The Selected property indicates numerically which radio button in a group
box is chosen, or which item in a list box or combo box is highlighted.
Numbers are sequential (beginning at zero). If the first item is chosen or
highlighted, the Selected property is set to 0. Choosing or highlighting the
second item sets the Selected property to 1, and so on.
To set the Selected property for a dialog control
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Selected in
3 Type a number to indicate which item is selected in the Selected box.
Setting the Selected text property for dialog controls
You can specify the selected text to display in a list, combo box, or file list
control. Users see this text highlighted when the control is activated or they
open the dialog box.
To set the Selection Text property for a dialog control
2 Right-click a list box, move the cursor to Properties, click Selection Text
3 Type text you want to be selected.
614
For more information about creating the list used in a list box, spin
control, or file control, see “Assigning list box properties” on page 607,
“Assigning spin control properties” on page 609, or “Assigning file control
properties” on page 605.
Setting a default button control
The default button has a thick black border. There can be only one default
button on a dialog box. If the Terminate Dialog property is set to Yes, when a
user presses ENTER, the default button is automatically clicked. OK is the
default button unless you have set the Default Button property to Yes for
another bitmap or push button. This property is available for combo boxes,
edit fields, and spin controls. For more information about the Terminate
Dialog property, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information
section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
To make a control the default button
2 Right-click one of the following:
combo box
edit field
spin control
bitmap button
button
3 Move the cursor to Properties, click Terminate Dialog in the submenu
that appears, then click Yes.
You can set Terminate Dialog to No to let users press ENTER in an edit
field without closing the dialog box if you do not want the edit field to be
the default button. For example, you may have a link between the edit
field and the notebook which displays the text entered in the edit field in a
notebook cell.
Assigning shortcut keys to controls
Assigning a shortcut key to a control allows the user to run a macro when the
control is selected or activated. You can add alternative shortcut keys to
615
controls using link commands. For more information about using the key:
link events, see “Understanding link events” on page 620.
When a control or label control has an attached shortcut, the first letter of the
label is underlined.
To assign a shortcut key to a labeled control
2 Double-click the label of a control.
3 Move the insertion point to just before the first letter of label text.
4 Type an ampersand (&).
For example, &Button sets the title to Button.
To assign a shortcut key to a control without a label
2 Right-click the control without a label (such as an edit field or a list box) ,
then move the cursor to Properties.
3 Click Name in the submenu that appears.
4 Move the insertion point to just before the letter to use. You can type a
new name for the control if needed.
5 Type an ampersand (&).
Use only one ampersand character in the label. If you add more than one,
the first is recognized as a shortcut key designation, and the remaining
ones appear in the label as text.
Limiting access to controls and dialog boxes in specific areas of
Quattro Pro
You can specify areas of Quattro Pro where a dialog box or control should not
be available. For example, some controls are appropriate only when a chart
window is active. The Depend On property is available for many dialog
controls. If all options in the Depend On property are checked, the dialog
control is always available.
To limit access to a control or dialog in Quattro Pro
616
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Depend
On in the submenu that appears.
3 Disable any check boxes where you do not want the control available to
users.
For example, to have a control available only when a chart window is
active, disable all the check boxes except Graph.
You can also limit access to dialog boxes and controls by using password
protection. For information about assigning password protection, see
“Using password protection” on page 703.
Attaching actions to dialog controls
After you add a control to a dialog box, you must specify what happens when
a control executes an action or result. A control can execute when triggered
by a user action or when triggered by another control’s actions. There are
two ways to activate a control: Connecting controls or Linking controls
Connect a control when you want to create a static or dynamic link to a
spreadsheet. For example, if you want the list in a list box to display a list of
current customers, then a dynamic link is appropriate as it reflects the most
recent data in the connected column on the spreadsheet.
Link a control when you want to create a more complicated link. For
example, you can create a compound link (a link containing several link
actions for a control) or a conditional link (a link using an IF condition.)
Connecting controls
When you connect a control, you can create a static or dynamic link to data
on the spreadsheet. The data or result the control returns can be displayed in
the target cell or cell block on the spreadsheet.
Connecting controls to cells or other controls
You can connect a control to another control or to a notebook cell. This
creates a link command for the selected object. The object name of the
control appears in Source. For information about changing the object name of
a control, see “Changing the object name of form controls” on page 577 in
the online Help.
To connect a control to cells or other controls
617
2 Select the control you want to connect.
3 Click Dialog, Connect.
Type the cell reference in the Target edit field, then click OK.
Use the Pointer next to the Target edit field to select a cell or group of
cells.
5 Click OK.
You can also display the Connect dialog box by right-clicking the control,
then click Connect in the submenu that appears.
You can access the Connect command through the Object Link dialog
when you are in Developer mode. For more information about Developer
mode, see “Working in Developer mode” on page 519.
Connecting controls dynamically
There are two ways to dynamically connect dialog box controls. The first
method immediately displays changes in the value of a control on the target
cell or control. For example, you can connect a check box so that the current
value displays in a specific cell. When you enable the check box, Yes displays
in the cell. When you disable the check box, No displays.
The second method displays the changes in the value only when the dialog
box closes. Using the check box example, this means that Yes or No does not
display in the selected cell until you close the dialog box.
To immediately send control value changes to a cell or another
control
1 Select a control on a custom dialog.
2 Click Dialog, Connect.
3 In the target box, do one of the following:
Type the cell reference in the Target edit field, then click OK.
Use the Pointer next to the Target edit field to select a cell or group of
cells.
4 Enable the Dynamic Connection check box, then click OK.
618
To display control value changes to a cell or another control only
when you close the dialog box
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in the previous procedure.
2 Disable the Dynamic Connection check box, then click OK.
The Dynamic Connection check box by default is enabled.
Linking controls
The Object Link dialog box is where you can link events and link commands
to controls. This tool creates the macro that activates the control. For more
information about creating macros, see “Using macros” on page 489.
The Object Link dialog is made up of a five lists, however the lists that
display vary depending on the selections made in the Link Events and Link
Commands lists and the type of control being linked. For example, you can
select from three, four, or five lists. For information about the kinds of link
events and link commands available, see “Understanding link events” on
page 620 and “Understanding link commands” on page 622.
This example shows how to assign link events and link commands for an edit
field.
1 Select a control, then click Dialog, Links.
2 Click the Add button, then click the first TAB on the left side of the dialog
box (the Link Event list), then choose Valuechanged in the list.
This selection sends a value to the notebook when the value changes.
3 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Link Event list (the Link
Command list), then choose SEND in the list.
This selection sends the changed value to the notebook.
4 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Link Command list (the
Link Control Properties list), then click Value in the list.
This selection sends the new value to the notebook.
5 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Link Control Properties list
(the Object Selector list).
This selection specifies the object to be acted upon.
6 Hold down the mouse button, and click <POINT>, move the Object Link
dialog box out of the way if you need to, then click cell B2 in the notebook.
619
7 Click the TAB immediately to the right of the Object Selector list (the
Selected Object Properties list), then click Value in the list.
The Value property for cell B2 receives and displays the value of the edit
field control.
8 Click OK.
For more examples about how to link dialog controls, see Examples of linking
Understanding link events
A link command runs in response to an link event that occurs in a dialog box.
For information about available link commands, see “Understanding link
commands” on page 622.
The first list in the Object Link dialog (the Link Event list) shows the event
that you want to trigger the link command. For information about link
commands, see “Understanding link commands” on page 622. More than one
link command in a control can respond to the same event. The order in which
the link commands appear in the Object Link dialog box is the order in which
they run.
There are generic link events and link events associated with specific
controls. The following list describes the link events common to all dialog
box controls:
620
Link Event
Triggers the link command when...
Init
The dialog box is about to appear. Use Init to set initial settings.
Init_Complete
Available only when you add a link command to the dialog box itself.
This event occurs immediately after all controls have run all link
commands that respond to Init.
OKExit
The user closes the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog
box closes.
CancelExit
The user cancels the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog
box closes.
Clicked
The user clicks the control.
Right_bdown
The user right-clicks the control.
Left_bdown
The user points to the control and holds down the left mouse button.
Releasing the button generates a Clicked event.
Doubleclick
The user double-clicks the control.
Valuechanged
The user changes the value of the control. This event occurs any time the
value is changed (by the user, a link command, or a macro command).
key:keystroke
The user presses the key keystroke. When you choose key from the Link
Event list, it flashes to indicate that you must press a key. Press the key
you want to generate the event. The key displays after key: in the pick
list button when it is set. For example, key:Ctrl + F5 indicates that the
link command is triggered by Ctrl + F5.
Activate
The user has chosen the control for manipulation. For example, clicking
an edit field generates this event so that Valuechanged traps the final
result entered in the edit field.
Deactivate
The user has chosen another control, leaving this control inactive.
Trigger
This event cannot be generated by any user action. Use it to connect link
commands that are triggered (or executed) by link commands. Use the
link command TRIGGER to generate this event.
Link events for specific controls
Some link events that trigger link commands are available only for specific
controls. The following list describes link events for edit fields, scroll bars,
combo boxes, and timer controls:
Control
Link event and purpose
Edit field
Enter — executes when the user presses ENTER.
Scroll bars
Lineup — permits the user increases the value of the scroll bar by
clicking a scroll arrow
Linedown — permits the user decreases the value of the scroll bar scroll
bar by clicking a scroll arrow
Pageup — permits the user increases the scroll bar’s value by clicking
between a scroll arrow and the scroll box
Pagedown — permits the user decreases the scroll bar’s value by
clicking it between a scroll arrow and the scroll box
Thumb — lets the user click or drag the scroll bar’s scroll box
Combo box
Editdynamic — lets the user insert or delete characters in the combo
box’s edit field
Timer control
Alarm — executes when the time of day specified in the timer’s Alarm
Time property has been reached
Timer — executes the amount of time indicated in the timer’s Timer
Interval property has elapsed (timer controls only).
621
Understanding link commands
Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to actions that a user
performs (which are events). For information about available link events, see
“Understanding link events” on page 620.
A link command can make a control do different things. For example, it can
send a value to a cell in the notebook, send a value to another control, run a
macro, close the dialog box, or change the zoom factor in the notebook. One
control can have several link commands listed in the Object Link dialog box.
For information about selecting link commands, see “Specifying control
actions” on page 623.
The following chart shows you the link commands available in the Link
Command list:
Choose
Result
SEND
To send a control property or value to: a cell in the notebook; another
control; a property in a selection; a sheet; a notebook; or the Quattro Pro
application.
RECEIVE
To receive a value or property from a cell in the notebook, another
control, or a property in a selection, sheet, notebook, or the Quattro Pro
application.
DOMACRO
To plays the macro that you specify.
EXECUTE
To execute another control or another dialog.
SET
To set properties in the dialog, another dialog, a cell, a sheet, a notebook,
or the Quattro Pro application.
TRIGGER
To “fire” or execute an action or piece of code when certain events or
conditions are met. For example, you might use a trigger event for a
button that updates values.
IF
To create conditional statements. For more information about creating
conditional links, see “Creating conditional links” on page 624.
The {DODIALOG} macro command brings changed values to the
notebook when the user closes the dialog box. However, if you set up a
dynamic link, users do not have to close the dialog box to see the changed
values. For more information about using {DODIALOG}, see “Using
macros to display the dialog box on a spreadsheet” on page . or
{DODIALOG} in the Macro Command reference in the online Help.
622
Specifying control actions
You can specify actions for a control to perform in the Object Link dialog box.
You can assign a single link or consecutive links to a control. The links
execute in the order they display.
The list types in the Object Link dialog from which to select are:
List (from left to right)
Description
Link Events
The first list shows the specific event that you want to trigger the link
command
Link Commands
The second list shows the command (action) that can send a value to
another control or notebook cell, run a macro, or run another event in
response to a triggering event
Link Control Properties
This list displays available properties for the control
Object Selector List
This list allows you to specify a control or cell on which to act
Selected Object Properties
This list displays properties for the item selected in the Object Selector
list
For information about controls you can assign to properties only with link
commands, see “Assigning other properties” on page 612.
To specify the action that a control performs
Select the control, click Dialog, then click Links.
Right-click the control, then click Links.
3 Click either of the following:
Add — creates a link command to place the link below the active link.
Insert — creates a link above the active link.
4 Choose the event that initiates the action from the Link Event list.
5 Choose the action to perform from the Link Command list.
The remaining pick list buttons change, depending on which action you
chose in step 5.
6 Choose an option in any of the available lists:
Object Selector
623
7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to assign consecutive link commands for the
control.
When you choose <ENTER> in the Object Selector List, type the text
you want, then press ENTER to make a selection on another list.
When you choose <POINT> in the Object Selector List, move the Object
Link dialog box so you can see the custom dialog box, then click a control.
The object name of that control displays in the Object Selector list.
You can also create a dynamic link for a control. For information about
creating a dynamic link, see “Connecting controls” on page 617.
Creating conditional links
You can create conditional links using the IF-THEN-ELSE link command. An
IF-THEN-ELSE link command compares a minimum of two conditions and
tests if the results are true. If the conditions are true, the THEN part of the
link command occurs. The ELSE portion of the link command occurs if the
result is false, so that the second IF link command occurs. For example, you
can create a group box with three radio buttons, and link the radio buttons to
two edit fields that display different results, depending on which radio button
is selected.
[VentGraphic 1, The object dialog with an example of a conditional link shows
the results that display in the edit fields when the condition is true or false.]
To create a conditional object link
2 Right-click the control, then click Links.
3 Click Add to create a link command to create the first link.
4 Choose the event that initiates the action from the Link Events list.
5 Choose IF from the Link Commands list.
6 Choose an option in any of the available lists:
Object Selector
624
The following example features a button that when clicked, displays a dialog
box called “Andrew”.
To display a dialog box using a conditional link
1 Click Insert, Macros, Dialog Designer to create a blank dialog box.
2 Right-click the dialog box, click Title, then type “Andrew” in the Enter
Text box.
3 Repeat step 1 to create a second dialog box.
4 Click Insert, click Button to add a button, then repeat this procedure and
add a check box to the dialog.
5 Right-click the button, then click Links.
6 In the Object Link dialog, click the Add button, choose the following
options in the appropriate lists , then click OK:
List
Choose
On
On
Link Events
Clicked
Link Commands
TRIGGER
Object Selector
Check Box1
Trigger
7 Right-click the check box, then click Links.
8 In the Object Link dialog, click the Add button, choose the following
options in the appropriate lists to create two links, then click OK:
List
Choose
On
On
Link Events
Trigger
Link Commands
IF
Value
Operator
=
Object Selector
Check Box1
Enabled (THEN)
On
On
625
Link Events
Trigger
Link Commands
EXECUTE
Object Selector List
<ENTER>Andrew
Execute
9 Click the Test button to test the two dialogs.
When you choose <ENTER> in the Object Selector List, type the text
you want, then press ENTER to make a selection on another list.
When you choose <POINT> in the Object Selector List, move the Object
Link dialog box so you can see the custom dialog box, then click a control.
The object name of that control displays in the Object Selector list.
Deleting connected link commands
You can change or delete link commands you create with the Connect
command. For information about the Connect command, see “Connecting
controls” on page 617. You can view all connect commands in the Object Link
dialog box. It is possible to have only links related to the Connect command
or a combination of a Connect link command and regular Link Commands.
For more information about creating links in the Object Link dialog, see
“Linking controls” on page 619.
To delete a connected link command
1 Select a control on a custom dialog.
2 Click Dialog, Links.
Delete — deletes the selected link in the Object Link dialog box
Delete All — deletes all links displayed in the Object Link dialog box
Using macros to display the dialog box on a
spreadsheet
You can create a macro to display a custom dialog box and store the user’s
choices in cells in the notebook. You can display it using the {DODIALOG}
macro command. The most important argument in {DODIALOG} is the third
argument, which are cells that contain the initial settings of the dialog box
controls.
626
You can then play the macro from graphics, toolbars, buttons, and keystrokes.
The macro sends initial values to each control in the dialog box. If the user
changes a setting in the dialog box, that change is sent back to a cell in the
notebook when the user closes the dialog box. The user can save the
changes when saving the notebook.
First, set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the
dialog box. For example, in the following table for a loan payment dialog box,
B1..B5 is a block that defines the initial dialog box settings:
A
B
1. Pay_Every
Month
2. Loan_Amount
100000
3. Int_Rate
12.5
4. Term
30
5. End_Of_Period
No
This sets the default payment period to monthly, the default loan amount at
100,000, the default interest rate at 12.5%, the default term at 30 years, and
specifies payment at the start of the month.
After the initial dialog box settings have been entered in the notebook, you
can enter a macro command that will display the dialog box and send the
user’s choices back to the notebook. Use the {DODIALOG} command to do
this.
Each cell in the block (starting at the upper left cell and proceeding row by
row to the lower right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the user
cancels the dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged.
Here is an example of a {DODIALOG} macro command used to display a
loan payment dialog box using the initial settings in B1..B5:
{DODIALOG LoanData,B6,B1..B5,1}
This command displays the dialog box and sends (or passes) the initial values
in cells B1 through B5 to the dialog box controls. If the user cancels the
dialog box, it also sends a value of 0 to cell B6 ; otherwise, the value is 1. The
final argument of the command specifies that the user can manipulate the
dialog box.
For example, if your dialog box has six controls, but you have set the Process
Value Property of the third control to No, your setting block should be only
five cells long. The values in the first two cells will be passed to the first two
controls. However, the value in the third cell will go to the fourth control, and
the values in the fourth and fifth cells will go to the fifth and sixth controls,
respectively.
627
Setting the Process Value property to Yes lets the {DODIALOG} macro
command access the control’s value. For more information about
{DODIALOG}, see {DODIALOG} in the macro reference section of the
online Help. The Process Value property is available for many Dialog box
controls.
By default, the order in which you created controls is the order that the
{DODIALOG} command sets initial values in a dialog box. The first control
you created is sent the first value from the {DODIALOG} command,
regardless of its position in the dialog box.
You can make this dialog box dynamic by adding link commands to each
control so that the user’s changes are immediately reflected in the notebook.
For more information about using link commands, see “Attaching actions to
Displaying a dialog box and setting initial values
The most important argument in {DODIALOG} is the third argument, which
are cells that contain the initial settings of the dialog box controls. Each cell
in the block (starting at the upper left cell and proceeding row by row to the
lower right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the user cancels the
dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged.
Each control stores one setting. The user manipulates the control (by
clicking a scroll arrow, typing text, and so on) to change that setting. There
are several ways to set a control’s value:
through initial settings you send (or pass) using a {DODIALOG}
command
by a user changing a setting in the dialog box
using the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command
with link commands from any dialog control
For example, the following macro command uses the Value property to enter
Spanish in an edit field:
{SETOBJECTPROPERTY “Dialog1:EditField3.Value”,"Spanish"}
To display a dialog box and set initial values
1 Set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the dialog
box.
2 Enter a {DODIALOG} macro command that displays the dialog box and
send the user’s choices back to the notebook. The {DODIALOG} macro
has several arguments:
628
Argument 1 — is the name of the notebook that contains the dialog box
you want to display, and the name of the dialog box. The name of the
notebook is optional if the dialog box is stored in the active notebook.
Argument 2 — specifies a cell that will store a value indicating how the
user closed the dialog box. If the dialog box was canceled, 0 is stored in
the cell. If the dialog box was closed by Enter or OK, 1 is stored.
Argument 3 — specifies a block that contains initial values for the
dialog box controls and receives final values from the dialog box
controls when the user closes the dialog box.
Argument 4 — (1 or 0) specifies whether the user should manipulate
the dialog box (1) or if the macro should manipulate it (0). The default
is 1.
If a control’s Process Value property is set to No, the control will not
receive an initial value. Controls that do not have a Process Value
property have no initial value.
If you want to make a dialog box dynamic so that the user’s changes are
immediately reflected in the notebook, add link commands to each control.
For information about using link commands, see “Attaching actions to
Changing the order for setting initial values
The first control you click receives its initial value from the first cell of the
block, the second control you click receives its initial value from the second
cell of the block, and so on, regardless of their arrangement in the dialog box.
You can also change the order of some of the controls. For example, if the
order was:
123456
Select items 2, 4 and 6, then choose Reorder From First to change the order
to:
124635
To change the order for setting initial values
2 Click the dialog window background to deselect the controls.
629
3 Hold down SHIFT and click each control in the order in which you want to
send initial value settings.
4 Click Format, Value Order, Set New.
To reorder only some controls
2 Click Format, Value Order, Reorder.
3 Hold down SHIFT and click each control in the order in which you want to
send values.
You can also change the TAB order for controls. For information about
changing the TAB order, see “Changing the tab order for controls” on
page 647 and “Disabling the tab option for specific controls” on page 648.
Working with child controls
When you place controls inside a group box or rectangle control, the controls
are automatically attached to the control acting as a container. Each control
becomes a child control of the parent control (group box or rectangle). This
provides several advantages for creating dialog boxes:
Child controls are moved, copied, or resized with the parent control.
When you hide a parent control, child controls are hidden.
When you disable the parent control, any child controls are also disabled.
Dialog boxes act as parent controls for the individual controls added to them.
While controls are automatically attached to group boxes and rectangles, you
can disable the automatic setting. You can also attach controls to controls
which are not by default containers; like list boxes, spin controls, and timer
controls.
For more information about creating group boxes and rectangles, see “Adding
group boxes” on page 592 and “Adding rectangle controls” on page 596.
For more information about linking group boxes and rectangles, see
Examples of linking controls.
Attaching child controls to group boxes and rectangles
When you drag a control on top of another control, they become attached.
The top control is the child; the bottom control is its parent. When you add
controls to group boxes and rectangles, they are automatically attached.
When you move a parent control on top of another control, the controls
630
attached to the original parent stay associated with the original parent. For
example, you can place a group box of radio buttons on top of a rectangle
control and the radio buttons remain children of the group box, not of the
rectangle.
You can enable the Attach Child property for other controls, for example, list
boxes and timer controls.
To attach controls to group boxes and rectangles
2 Drag the control you want to add (for example, drag a list box) onto the
rectangle or group box.
3 Right-click the parent control (for example, a rectangle or a group box),
move the cursor to one of the following properties:
Group Box Properties
Rectangle Properties
4 Click Attach Child in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
For information about adding buttons, radio buttons, or check boxes to
group boxes and rectangles, see “Adding group boxes” on page 592 and
“Adding rectangle controls” on page 596.
Child controls must cover only the parent control. Controls partially
covering one another will not attach.
Creating unattached controls on a parent
You can move a control onto a parent control, like a group box or rectangle
control, that you want to maintain its own independent status. This means
that the new control is not controlled by the parent control. For example,
resizing the parent does not affect the new control.
To create an unattached control on a parent control
2 Select a parent control (for example, a group box.)
3 Right-click the parent control, move the cursor to Properties, click Attach
Child in the submenu that appears, then click No.
631
4 Click Insert, choose a control, then drag the control you want to add (for
example, a list box) onto the parent.
5 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Attach Child
in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
Unattaching child controls
You can eliminate the connection between a child control and its parent. This
allows the control to work independently from the other child controls in the
parent control (like a rectangle control or group box.)
To unattach a control from a parent control
2 Drag the control onto the dialog box outside of the parent control.
3 Select the parent control (for example, the group box.)
4 Right-click the parent control, move the cursor to Properties, click Attach
Child in the submenu that appears, then click No.
5 Drag the control back onto the parent.
To disable controls in a dialog box
2 Right-click the dialog box, move the cursor to Dialog Properties, click
Disabled in the submenu that appears, then click Yes.
Moving and resizing child controls
When you move a group box, any controls (for example, radio buttons) move
with it. One setting in the Position Adjust property specifies how a child
control moves when you resize the parent control. The other setting in the
Position Adjust property specifies whether the child control resizes in
proportion to its parent.
By selecting a relative position for a control, the unlocked edges of a child
control move relative to its position in the parent control rather than resize
the child control.
If you change settings, however, you can move a child control with the parent
as shown by the arrows below.
[VentGraphic 0, ]
632
To move a child control when the dialog box resizes
2 Right-click a control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Position
Adjust in the submenu that appears.
3 Enable one or more of the following options in the Position Adjust section:
Depend on Parent — locks each edge of the child control in place so
that the child resizes in proportion to the proportions of the resized
parent control
Center Horizontally — centers the control between the left and right
sides of the resized parent control
Center Vertically — centers the control between the top and bottom
sides of the resized parent control
4 Enable one or more check boxes in the Position Relative To section:
Top — unlocks the top edge of the control
Bottom — unlocks the bottom edge of the control
Left — unlocks the left edge of the control
Right — unlocks the right edge of the control
5 Drag the lower right corner of the dialog window to shrink the parent
control. Notice the location and size of the child control.
Creating Help and tips for controls
You can create your own help (HLP) files and use them for custom
applications you build with Quattro Pro. This allows you to enter tips and
help files for the controls and the dialog boxes you create.
Creating Application bar hints for controls
The Help Line property is available for many dialog controls. For dialog
controls, this property displays the text of the at the bottom right of the
Application Bar when the cursor hovers over the control.
To create an Application bar hint for a control
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Help
Line.
633
3 Type the hint in the Enter Text box.
4 Click Dialog, Test, move your cursor arrow over the control, then look for
the hint in the Application bar.
Creating Help for controls
The Object Help property creates context-sensitive help for objects in
custom dialog boxes. The help displays as a message box with an OK button
to close the message box. For more information about using the Object Help
property, see Properties of form controls in the Reference information
section of the Quattro Pro online Help. The combined total of all characters
in the three Object Help fields cannot exceed 194 characters.
To create help for controls
Help in the submenu that appears.
3 Type the title to appear in the Object Help Title box.
4 Type the text to appear in the Object Help Text box when you right-click
the object in a dialog, then click OK.
5 Click Dialog, Test to run the dialog box in Test mode.
6 Right-click the control to see the help.
Linking Help files to controls
The Object Help property allows you to connect existing help files to dialog
boxes and controls.
To specify a WinHelp context string for a help topic instead of using the
Object Help title and text fields, type a context string that must be followed
immediately by the @ symbol and Help file name (for example,
[email protected]). You can then right-click the control to display
help for it. For more information about creating help files, see the Windows95
SDK documentation.
To link help files to controls
Help in the submenu that appears.
3 Type the context string, an @ symbol, then the Help file name.
634
4 Click OK.
6 Right-click the control to see the help file.
In order for the Help file to launch successfully, make sure the Object
Help Title and Object Help Text boxes are both empty of text.
Linking dialog boxes to Help files
You can link an individual dialog box to a topic page within a Help file.
To link a dialog box to Help
2 Select the dialog box, then click Dialog, Links.
3 Click the Add button and make the following list selections to create a link
command:
List
Choose
On
On
Link Event
Init
Link Command
Set
Help topic and file name
HelpContext@HelpFile To
Selected Object
Help
Context
5 Right-click the dialog box to display the Help.
In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string
followed by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the
Help file cannot include a path.
635
When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick
list next to where you type in the help file, click <Enter> and type Help
in the edit field.
For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft
Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).
Linking Help buttons to Help files
You can create a Help button on a dialog box attached to a Help file.
To link a Help button to a Help file
2 Select the Help button, then click Dialog, Links.
3 Click the Add button and make the following list selections to create two
link commands:
List
Choose
On
On
Link Event
Init
Link Command
SET
Blank
HelpContext@HelpFile
To
Object Selector
Help
Context
On
On
Link Event
Clicked
Link Command
EXECUTE
Object Selector
Help
Context
5 Click the Help button to launch the Help.
In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string
followed by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the
636
Help file cannot include a path. For details on how to create Windows
Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit
(SDK).
When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick
list next to where you entered the name of the help file, click <ENTER>
and type Help in the edit field.
Editing dialog boxes
You can make many changes to a dialog box and to individual controls. You
also can move, copy, or delete a dialog box or a control.
Password protection rights can be assigned to controls and dialog boxes.
For information about working with passwords, see “Using password
protection” on page 703.
Editing and managing dialog boxes
Quattro Pro lets you make changes to custom dialog boxes. You can change
the object name or add a title to a dialog box, move the dialog box on the
desktop, and edit a dialog box through its properties. You can also copy a
dialog box within a notebook or to another notebook, and delete notebooks.
Modifying dialog boxes
You can modify various properties of a dialog box. For information about
specific dialog box properties, see Properties of form controls in the
To edit the dialog window
2 Right-click the title bar on the dialog box, then click Dialog Properties.
3 Click any of the following in the submenu that appears:
Dimension — specifies the exact size and position of the dialog
window.
Title — lets you change the title that displays on the title bar
Position Adjust — specifies how the dialog box moves when the
window is resized
Grid Options — lets you display a grid to aid with placing controls
637
Name — lets you type an object name to which macros, link
commands, and formulas can refer
Disabled — disables all controls in the dialog box
Value — changes the settings of a dialog that has the process value
set to Yes
Renaming dialog boxes
Dialog boxes are created with a default object name (for example, Dialog 1).
Macros, link commands, and formulas use this name when referring to a
specific dialog box. You can rename an active dialog box or a dialog box can be
renamed when it is represented by an icon on the Objects sheet.
To rename an active dialog box
1 Right-click the dialog box, move the cursor to Dialog Properties, then
click the Name property in the submenu that appears.
2 Type a new name into the Enter Text box.
To rename a dialog box on the Objects sheet
1 Click the QuickTab button to move to the Objects sheet.
2 Right-click the dialog box icon, click DialogBox Properties, then click
Name.
3 Type a new name in the Enter Text box.
For more information about the Name property, see Properties of form
Changing titles of dialog boxes
You can change a title that displays on the title bar of a custom dialog box.
The default title is usually something like “Notebk1.QPW:Dialog1".
To change the title of a dialog box
2 Right-click the dialog box background, move the cursor to DialogBox
Properties, then click Title in the submenu that appears.
3 Type a title in the Enter Text box.
638
Moving dialog boxes
You can move dialog boxes the same way you move other floating objects in
Quattro Pro.
To move a dialog box
2 Select the dialog box
3 Drag the dialog box to the new location.
Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it as well. For
more information about parent controls, see “Working with child controls”
on page 630.
Copying dialog boxes in the same notebook
You can copy a dialog box to other places in the same notebook.
To copy a dialog box to another spot in a notebook
2 Select a dialog box icon.
3 Click Edit, Copy.
4 Move your cursor to the cell or spreadsheet page in the notebook where
you want to position the dialog box.
A duplicate cannot have the same object name as the original, so a unique
name is automatically generated. For information about changing the
name of a dialog box, see “Renaming dialog boxes” on page 638.
You can also use the Cut and Paste buttons on the Quattro Pro toolbar.
639
Copying dialog boxes to another notebook
You can copy a dialog box to another notebook using copy and paste. You can
also use the Drag and Drop the dialog box from one notebook into another
notebook.
To copy a dialog box to another notebook
2 Select a dialog box icon you want to copy.
3 Click the dialog box icon, then click Edit, Copy.
4 Click the QuickTab button to display the Objects sheet of the other
notebook, then click Edit, Paste.
To drag and drop a dialog box to another notebook
3 Open the second notebook.
notebook.
5 Click Window, Tile Side to Side.
6 Press CTRL, then drag the selected dialog box icon to the Objects sheet
of the second notebook.
Make sure to press CTRL when dragging the dialog box. If you just drag
the dialog box to its new location you are removing the dialog box from
the source notebook, not copying it.
Deselect any controls in the active dialog window before clicking Edit,
Paste, so a selected control is not changed.
You can also copy individual controls. For information about copying
controls, see “Copying controls” on page 650.
Deleting dialog boxes
You can permanently remove a dialog box by using DELETE, by cutting the
dialog box out of the notebook, or by dragging and dropping the dialog box
640
icon. If you use the Drag and Drop feature, you remove the dialog box from
the source notebook and add it to another notebook.
To delete a dialog box with DELETE
3 Press DELETE.
To delete a dialog box using Cut
3 Click the dialog box icon, then click Edit, Cut.
To drag and drop a dialog box to another notebook
3 Open the second notebook.
notebook.
5 Click Window, Tile Side to Side.
6 Drag the selected dialog box icon to the Objects sheet of the second
notebook.
Editing and moving dialog controls
Quattro Pro lets you edit, move, and copy dialog controls. You can edit single
or multiple controls, move the position of controls and labels, change the size
of controls, and edit label text. You can control how groups of controls
interact by changing and disabling the TAB feature. You can also choose
whether to show or hide a control so that it displays only at certain time or in
certain situations.
Renaming dialog controls
Dialog controls are created with a default object name (for example, Dialog
1). Macros, link commands, and formulas use this name when referring to a
specific control.
641
To rename a dialog control
2 Double-click a dialog box icon.
3 Right-click a control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Name in
4 Type a new name in the Enter Text box.
Positioning label text
You can position text (for labels, check boxes, and radio buttons) in relation to
its background or in relation to the button itself (for push buttons and bitmap
buttons). Labels do not have a value. If control has the Single Line check box
disabled in the Text Draw Flags property, text shows on multiple lines with
wrapped text.
Special Characters:
\n — makes characters to the right of it display on a second line. This
option works only when Single Line is disabled in the Text Draw Flags
property.
\t — inserts a TAB into the text.
\\ — inserts a backslash (\) into the text. Use this to enter \n or \t into a
label as normal text so that users see only the result of \n or \t, not the
actual special character.
& — makes the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text
(the ampersand does not appear). This is useful for naming controls.
To position label text
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Text
Draw Flags.
3 Disable the Single Line.
4 Enable a button in the vertical and horizontal position sections
5 Click Apply, then click OK.
Use only one & character. If you use two, the & character appears
underlined in the text.
By default, the label appears in the upper left corner of the background.
642
Editing label text
You can edit the text that displays for a label control or the label of a control.
To edit label text
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Label Text in
3 Type the new text in the Label box.
To follow Windows conventions, type an ellipsis (...) at the end, if a button
leads to another dialog box.
You can also double-click the label to edit the text.
Editing several controls simultaneously
You can edit all the controls on a dialog box simultaneously or you can select
several controls for editing at the same time.
To edit all dialog box controls simultaneously
2 Click a control.
4 Perform a task on all controls (for example, drag them to another spot).
To edit several controls simultaneously
2 Click a control.
3 Click the dialog box with the cursor pointer, then drag a frame around the
controls you want to edit
4 Perform a task on the selected controls (for example, align them all on the
left or drag them to another spot).
643
You can also select multiple controls by holding down SHIFT and clicking
the controls you want to edit
Click the dialog window background to deselect controls.
Specifying the position of controls on a dialog box
You can specify the position of controls on a dialog box. You can also display
grid lines to help position controls. For information about moving controls,
see “Moving dialog controls” on page 645.
To specify a position for a control on a dialog box
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click
Dimension in the submenu that appears.
3 Type a value in the following boxes in the Dimension dialog:
X Pos — the distance in pixels between the left edge of the control and
the left side of the dialog box
Y Pos — the distance in pixels between the top edge of the control
and the bottom edge of the dialog box’s title bar
To use grid lines to position a control
2 Right-click the dialog title bar, click Dialog Properties, then click Grid
Options.
3 Type a number in the Grid Size box to change the pixel distance between
grid points.
4 Click Show Grid to display the grid while you are creating a dialog box.
(Users will not see this grid.)
5 Click Snap To Grid to have controls align only on grid points.
Aligning and spacing controls
You can align, center, and space multiple controls. For example, when you
space controls horizontally, the first control you select appears at the left
after repositioning, the next control appears to the right of the first, and so
on. When you vertically space controls, the first control you select appears at
the top, and so on.
644
To align multiple controls
2 Click a control, then hold down SHIFT to select other controls.
3 Click Format, Align.
4 Click one of the following options:
Left — lines up the left sides of the selected controls
Right — lines up the right sides of the selected controls
Top — lines up the top edges of the selected controls
Bottom — lines up the bottom edges of the selected controls
To center controls
3 Click Format, Position, then click one of the following options:
Horizontal Center — centers controls between the left and right sides
of the dialog box
Vertical Center — centers controls between the top and bottom sides
of the dialog box
To space controls
3 Click Format, Space, then click one of the following options:
Horizontal Space
Vertical Space
4
Type a number in the Space Between Objects box (this indicates the pixel
distance to space the selected controls).
Moving dialog controls
You can move dialog controls the same way you move other floating objects.
To move a control on a dialog box
645
2 Select a control on the dialog box
3 Drag the control to a new location.
Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it as well. For
more information about parent controls, see “Working with child controls”
on page 630.
You can also use grid lines to position controls. For more information on
using grid lines, see “Specifying the position of controls on a dialog box”
on page 644.
Moving overlapping controls
If two or more controls are covering all or part of another control, you can
adjust the overlap options so that the controls position separately. Controls
float on layers over the dialog box, similar to graphics or other floating
objects which float above a spreadsheet. For more information about working
with layers, see “Arranging graphic object layers and overlapping graphics”
on page 397.
To move overlapping controls
2 Select a control that overlaps another control.
3 Click Format, Object Order, click one of the following options:
Bring Forward — moves the object one layer closer to the top
Send Backward — moves the object one layer closer to the bottom
Bring To Front — brings the object to the front or top of the layers
Send To Back — sends the object to the bottom layer
Resizing controls
You can change the size of a control the same way you resize other objects.
You can resize several controls to the same uniform size. You can also enter a
specific size width or height values for controls.
To resize a control with sizing handles
646
2 Select a control.
3 Drag one of its handles.
To resize several controls to a uniform size
1 Click the control you want to pattern the remaining controls after, then
hold down SHIFT and click the remaining controls.
2 Click Format, Resize To Same.
To specify a precise size for a control
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click
Dimension.
3 Type a value in the following boxes in the Dimension dialog:
Width — is the width of the control in pixels
Height — is the height of the control in pixels
Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it. For
information about working with parent controls, see “Working with child
If multiple controls are selected, dragging one control moves all selected
controls, dragging one handle resizes selected controls.
Changing the tab order for controls
A user can press TAB on the keyboard to cycle through each control in a
dialog box. By default, when you press TAB, you cycle through the controls
in the order they were added to the dialog box. However, you can set any
TAB order.
To change the TAB order for controls
2 Hold down SHIFT and select each control in the order you want to TAB
through the controls.
3 Click Format, TAB Order, Set New to save the new order.
647
You can also change the order for settings initial values of a control and
the order in which they activate. For more information about changing the
initial values and order of controls, see “Changing the order for setting
initial values” on page 629.
Disabling the tab option for specific controls
Users can move from control to control, in the order in which they were
added to the dialog box by pressing the TAB key. You can prevent users from
using the TAB to move to a control. The TAB Stop property is available for
many dialog controls.
To disable TAB for a control
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click TAB Stop in
the submenu that appears, then click No.
If you want to re-enable the TAB properties to the control, just set the
TAB Stop property to Yes.
Changing control selection order in group boxes
When check boxes or radio buttons are placed in a group box, the user can
activate one of the check boxes and then use arrow keys to move to the next
check box or radio button. Additionally, the user can press the SPACEBAR to
enable the check box.
To change selection order in a group box
2 Click the dialog window’s background to deselect any selected controls.
3 Click Format, click TAB Order, then click Set New.
4 Hold down SHIFT and select each check box (or radio button) in the order
you want the user to scroll through them.
5 Drag the check boxes (or radio buttons) until the pointer changes to a
four-way arrow. This saves the new order.
648
For information about creating group boxes, see “Adding group boxes” on
page 592.
Disabling controls
A disabled control is a control that appears gray and cannot be activated by
users. Use this setting to specify areas in Quattro Pro where the control
should not be available. For example, some controls are appropriate only
when a chart window is active. If all the options in the Depend On property
are enabled, the dialog control is always available.
To disable controls in a dialog box
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Disabled
in the submenu that appears, then click Yes to disable the feature (but the
control is not dimmed)
To gray out controls in a dialog box
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, click Grayed in the
submenu that appears, then click Yes to disable the feature and dim the
control
To disable controls in areas of Quattro Pro
2 Right-click the control, move the cursor to Properties, then click Depend
On in the submenu that appears.
3 Disable any check boxes that represent areas in which you want to
deactivate the control.
For example, to have a control available only when a chart window is
active, disable all check boxes except Graph.
The Depend On property is available for many dialog controls. For more
information on the Depend On property, see Properties of form controls in
the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.
649
Hiding controls
You can hide controls so that they display to users only at certain times or
only during runtime. When the Hidden property is applied, the control still
appears in the dialog window while you are editing, but will disappear when
you test the dialog box with the Test button.
To hide controls on a dialog box
2 Right-click a control, move the cursor to Properties, click Hidden in the
submenu that appears, then click Yes.
The Show property, (opposite of Hidden), hides the control when set to
No. It is used by link commands and does not appear in the control
properties. For more information about using link commands, see
“Attaching actions to dialog controls” on page 617.
Copying controls
You can copy controls the same way you copy other objects. Copy controls
using the copy and paste commands. Each instance of a control has a different
object name (Button1, Button2, etc.), to avoid confusion when referring to
the control in macros, link commands, and spreadsheet functions.
To copy a control
2 Select a control.
3 Click Edit, Copy, click the location, then click Edit, Paste.
Another way to copy a control is to click the Copy button, click the
location, then click the Paste button on the toolbar.
If multiple controls are selected, dragging one control moves all selected
controls, copying copies selected controls.
Copying a parent control copies any controls attached to it as well.
650
MANAGING FILES AND DATA
21
File management is an important part of any project. For example you can
open many different file formats in Quattro Pro. You can import, insert, or
combine data. You can also link data between notebooks or between Quattro
Pro and another application.
Changing notebook size
Quattro Pro lets you customize the number of rows and columns on each
spreadsheet, and the number of spreadsheets in a notebook.
Opening files from other applications
You can open and save files in many spreadsheet and database file formats
from within Quattro Pro.
When you’ve made changes, you can save the file as a Quattro Pro file.
Importing text files
When you import text files, Quattro Pro lets you format how information
appears on a spreadsheet.
Inserting files
Quattro Pro lets you insert files into a notebook. Existing data shifts to make
room for the new data.
Managing files and data
651
Linking and embedding objects
You can also import, link, or embed data from other applications into Quattro
Pro. When you import data, you import only the data without any
accompanying formatting or control codes. Object Linking and Embedding
(OLE) can be used to insert formatted files from an OLE-compliant
application into Quattro Pro. When you place data in Quattro Pro using OLE,
you can access the OLE source application directly from Quattro Pro to make
any changes.
Linking data between notebooks
Another method of file management is linking. You can link data between
spreadsheets and notebooks. Linking gives you quick access to related data.
Version Control
You can archive notebooks using Version Control. This allows you to compare
versions of the same file to see the changes you have made.
Sending Quattro Pro files to other applications
You can send Quattro Pro files electronically to other applications or the
Internet. You can also email Quattro Pro files.
File-handling options
Whether you are saving or opening a file, options that operate on files require
the name of a file to work on. When you choose one of these options, you will
see a dialog box with the options described below.
If the filename you want is already displayed, double-click it. To display
filenames in other drives or folders, use these controls:
652
Control
What it does
Look In or Save In
highlights the current folder. To change to a different folder, click the
down-arrow button and choose a drive or folder from the list. From the
list below, choose a folder by double-clicking it.
File Type
controls the filenames that are listed in the Filename list box above it.
For File, Save As, File Type controls the file format. Regardless of the
filename and extension you enter, the file is saved in the selected format.
Filename
lets you choose the file to be saved or opened, either by typing it in the
text box or clicking it from the list. You can also control the types of files
displayed using wildcards. For this version of Quattro Pro, the default file
extension for notebooks is .QPW.
Password Protect
Lets you enter a password to protect your notebook from unauthorized
use.
Folders
When you first open the dialog box, it displays files in the startup folder. The
startup folder is initially the folder from which you start Quattro Pro, but you
can change it. For more information, see “Saving a notebook” on page 77.
If you save or load a file in a folder other than the startup folder, this
last-used folder becomes the default folder. Then the next time you choose
an option to save or load a file, the default folder initially appears in the dialog
box. The last-used folder is always the default folder displayed until you
restart Quattro Pro, when the startup folder again appears.
Wildcards
You can use the wildcard characters asterisk (*) and question mark (?) in any
part of the Filename edit field to limit the files displayed. An asterisk stands
for any number of characters in its position; a question mark stands for any
single character in its position. For instance, *.PRN lists all files with the
extension .PRN, and BUDGET9?.QPW lists all notebooks that begin with
BUDGET9 followed by one character before the .QPW extension.
Read-only files
If you are working on a network and the file you are trying to open or
retrieve has already been opened by another user, you will view a Read-only
prompt. You can choose to open the file with read-only rights (able to save it
under a different name) or cancel the operation.
Alternate file handling dialog boxes
You will see an alternate dialog box if you are using a document managing
system that is compliant with the Open Document Management API
(ODMA) standard.
Opening, saving, and customizing file formats
Quattro Pro can open and save files in many spreadsheet and database
program formats. For example, if you use Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1-2-3,
you can open your files in Quattro Pro. For information about opening
Microsoft Excel files, see Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro
Managing files and data
653
Proin the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help. For
information about opening Lotus 1-2-3 files, see Opening and saving a Lotus
1-2-3 file. in the Reference information section of the Quattro Pro online
Help.
Quattro Pro can also open Multiplan files, Quicken Interchange Format
(.QIF) files, Quattro Pro for DOS files, and various database files.
For a list of file formats Quattro Pro supports, see “File formats supported by
Quattro Pro” on page 654.
Changing the notebook size
A Quattro Pro spreadsheet consists of approximately 1,000,000 rows and
18,000 columns. There are approximately 18,000 spreadsheets in each
notebook. If your project does not require such a large notebook, you can
specify a spreadsheet and notebook size.
File formats supported by Quattro Pro
You can use spreadsheet files from a variety of applications with Quattro Pro.
This table identifies the Quattro Pro filters available to convert files created
in other applications. You can also save a Quattro Pro file in most of the
formats listed below.
654
Extension
Application file type
.QPW
Quattro Pro 9 for Windows 95, 98, and NT
.WB3
Quattro Pro 7 and 8 for Windows 95 and Windows N

Quattro Pro 9 - City of Kinston

Transcription

Similar documents

Invasion to Green Territory War Room Strategy

PDS QUATTRO K2000

Ampeg SVT-CL Schematics

Introduction - Iglesia El Candelero de Oro

AnimatorDV Simple+ Quick Start

omnipresence 3d pro design

Pro-SuITe™ TeST LIKe A Pro! DoCuMeNT LIKe A Pro! LoAD DATA

Experience the Freedom! - Custom Quick Release Pins

WHY THE YAKTRAX PRO WORKS